NT631/C Operation Manual - Support

NT631/C Operation Manual - Support
NT631/631C
Programmable Terminal
Operation Manual
Produced March 1999
iii
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to an
OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything
else.
The abbreviation “Host” means a controller such as an FA computer which controls a PT (programmable
terminal).
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information.
Note
1, 2, 3...
Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation
of the product.
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
© OMRON, 1999
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any
form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON
is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change
without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no
responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
2
3
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiii
xiv
xiv
xiv
SECTION 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
2
4
15
24
26
28
Role and Operation of the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions of the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication with the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication by Using Memory Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 2
Preparing for Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-2
Method for Connection to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparations at the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 3
Hardware Settings and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C with V1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C without V1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 4
Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port . . . . . . . .
4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port . . . . .
5-1
5-2
31
32
35
37
38
41
42
43
46
56
63
64
93
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
SECTION 6
System Menu Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
System Menu Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Modes and the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operations in the System Installer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmitting the Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Conditions for Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches . .
Starting Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Various System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Console Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
148
149
150
155
163
168
171
183
185
204
207
236
vii
SECTION 7
NT631/NT631C Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-16
NT631/NT631C Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Areas for Control/Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixed Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image and Library Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numeral Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character String Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm List, Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inputting Numeric Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inputting Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Window Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PT Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
246
259
277
294
312
319
327
347
355
361
394
405
421
426
434
450
SECTION 8
How to Use the PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-9
8-10
8-11
8-12
Screen Creation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buzzer, Backlight, and Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen Display and Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display and Control of Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Numeral and Character String Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Alarm List/History Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Display History Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display and Setting of Calendar Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Data and Checking the Printer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling/Disabling PT Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
454
456
467
476
486
502
503
523
528
531
539
543
SECTION 9
Using Memory Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
9-1
9-2
9-3
Operation of the Memory Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Outline of Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Commands/Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
SECTION 10
Function Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
10-1 Examples of Actual Applications of Direct Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
10-2 Examples of Actual Applications of Memory Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
SECTION 11
Troubleshooting and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
viii
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responding to Displayed Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
606
609
616
624
APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
A. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
628
B. Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
640
C. Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
643
D. Transporting and Storing the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
649
E. Making the Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
650
F. Making the Cable for Connecting a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
653
G. Making the Cable for Connection to a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
654
H. Making the Cable for Connection to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
655
I.
Compatibility with Screen Data of Other PT Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
656
J.
Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
664
K. Option List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
670
L. PC Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
673
M. Keycode Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
675
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
ix
About this Manual:
This manual describes the basic functions and operation procedures of the NT-series programmable terminal NT631/631C, its operations when connected to a PC or a Host, and includes the sections described
below.
Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting
to install and operate the NT-series programmable terminal NT631/631C.
Section 1 describes the functions and configuration of the NT631/NT631C.
Section 2 gives basic information on the method for connecting to the host and communication methods,
and describes the names and functions of the parts of the NT631/NT631C.
Section 3 describes how to make the settings at the NT631/NT631C, and how to connect it to peripheral
devices.
Section 4 describes the method for connection to the host, communication method, compatible PC models, etc., when using the RS-232C port at the NT631/NT631C for the connection.
Section 5 describes the method for connection to the host, communication method, compatible PC models, etc., when using the RS-422A/485 port at the NT631/NT631C for the connection.
Section 6 describes how to use the system menu, which allows various settings and checks to be performed using the touch panel of the NT631/NT631C.
Section 7 describes the functions of the NT631/NT631C, focusing on the functions of the display elements that can be registered for the screens.
Section 8 describes the operations and procedures actually employed when using the NT631/NT631C,
including those for functions that can be executed by combining screen elements, and control from the
host.
Section 9 describes how to use the the NT631/NT631C, when using memory link
Section 10 gives suggestions to enable you to use the NT631/NT631C to its full potential.
Section 11 describes the corrective action to take when the system does not function normally, and the
procedures for daily maintenance of the NT631/NT631C.
APPENDIX describes the specifications and method for making connector cables, and includes a list of
related parts and a PC area map.
xi
Related Manuals and Their Contents:
The related manuals are listed below.
The j symbol at the end of the manual number is the revision history number.
[Operating the programmable terminal and communicating with the host]
S NT631/631C Programmable Terminal Operation Manual (V044-E1-j)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This manual
This operation manual is the manual for the NT631/631C itself.
This operation manual describes the functions and handling of both the programmable terminal body and the host interface function.
[Creating and transferring screen data]
S NT-series Support Tool Operation Manual (V053-E1-j)
The screens displayed on the NT631/631C are created with the support tool and
transferred to the NT631/631C. This manual describes how to create and transfer screen data.
Note that in this manual, the NT-series Support Tool for Windows 95/98 is referred to as the “Support Tool”.
xii
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Terminal.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Programmable Terminal. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a
Programmable Terminal.
1
2
3
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv
xiv
xiv
xiii
Precautions
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
S Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems into production facilities.
S Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
S Personnel in charge of installing and connecting FA systems.
S Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications
described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual
or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation
systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines and equipment that may
have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult your
OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the
systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for using the Programmable Terminal. Be sure
to read this manual before attempting to use the software and keep this manual
close at hand for reference during operation.
WARNING It is extremely important that Programmable Terminals and related devices be
used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in
applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with
your OMRON representative before applying Programmable Terminals to the
above-mentioned applications.
WARNING Do not use input functions such as PT touch switches for applications where danger to human life or serious damage is possible, or for emergency switch applications.
3
Safety Precautions
Read these safety precautions carefully and make sure you understand them before using the Programmable Terminal so that you can use it safely and correctly.
Safety Conventions and
their Meanings
This operation manual uses the following conventions and symbols to indicate
cautions, warnings, and dangers in order to esure safe use of the NT631/631C.
The caustions, warnings, and dangers shown here contain important information
related to safety. This instructions in these cautions, warnings, and dangers must
be observed.
The conventions used and their meanings are presented below.
WARNING Indicates information that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or serious injury.
CAUTION Indicates information that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or minor
injury, damage to the product, or faulty operation.
xiv
Precautions
WARNING
Do not attempt to take the unit apart and do not touch any internal parts while the power is being supplied. Doing either of
these may result in electrical shock.
WARNING
Switch OFF the NT631C power before replacing the backlight.
Otherwise you could sustain an electric shock.
xv
!
&
)
"# $ % ! " ! " !! ! %
' !& !(%!(!) !) $
" ! ,
- , " ! - . /. & " # 0 1 ) 2 $ 32 4 /. & 4 /. &! , 4 /. % 2 ) $
, 0 )! 2 - 0 2 !
!
&
&
*
+
(
)
)
+
!
!&
!&
!)
!
!
!*
!+
! "
# $ %
# &
"
!
'
& ( ' & & ! " ) **++ # # #"$#%% !
! ' ,' -- &
'( )
( !
"*+,$"*+, ( .
/0 1
! "
23 '- 24# ' 3) &
'5 24# + 3) '/ 24
&
6 "
2785 $!/+1
# $
9 '5 24 % $ # : '# -0'# 0# 0#
# 00'# 0;# 0# -0'# -0# -/ 8
' # < )
# + # 8!!2)$= $ >
' ) * ! 7? /@ ' -/
# & ! ' % #( ")
' % ' ,
* % ' '+
$
7+- & %
' & # ' , ) -% "
# &
%
+ # >)
,
? 5
% ( $ & # ' 8 " - . '
A ' BC7=BC7= 24# , D3'8 2 E # 23 # # # E :
!"#$$%&##$$'(#
!"#)$$%#*#$$'(#
!"#)$$%#+#$$'(#
!"#$$%&##$$'(#,
!"#$$%&##,$$'(#,
!"#)$$%#*#$$'(#,
!"#)$$%#*#,$$'(#,
!"#)$$%#+#$$'(# ,
!"#)$$%#+#,$$'(# ,
-
. '/ %! /)- /)- A
& !
4 A ,' --5--8 # 4 ? &? "
+8 4 7
8 " & += " '" % 4 7+- " 4 8# %
8 F. ! ?8 ?# # G# # "/ 00 8 " ' < - "/ ## 1-#234 00#45400.4 6
" 5%)'6 2 2 2 "
##$ 0
!"&1%2!"&1)2!"&*)
!"#2!"#)
% !34.5#234).5#'( !366$'(&
!34.5#234).5'(
-07 8 ! 9 ! 7
:%&&) ) ;$ $ % 6 < ;$
$ % , < ;$
:%*&&62*+ !"&1%2!"&1)= !
,> $
:%&&) :%$*&&62*+
!"&+)= -07$
:%&&) :%$*&&62*+
: !"&1)) /1# !"&1)
!"#1)) /1& !"&+)
!"#)) /1# %#+#
!"#)) /1& %#*#
!"#2!"#) !"&13%6'(#2'.(#
$
%
/)- ?
, , , ?
! , ! . &111
. ;;;
% #
+#& @,
# .,
% !"&1%= +#& @,
!"&1)2!"&+)= # .,
# .,
! . #111
. &111
) . #111
. &111
, &+"
. #111
0 . &&*
. *1;+
/ . ;"
. #&&
9 .
7 ,)- % ,)- 7 A
* + 7 A
& A
!
; )B&
: 7
! 9 # = & : (# !"#2!"#)
+ # 8!!2)$= $ >
'
) * ! 7? 0
$
" " " # " " " " " " " " $ " " """ " " # " % "% % % " " % " " " " & "
" " " % "% " & " " " " " " " " &
" " " ' " " " "% "% " "" " " " " "
" " " " ( " " )
" *+ " *+ "
," " " """ " " " " & " " "" " " "
## " " " " " '&-.'&-
" ! #
"" " " & "" " " "
## " " " " " " " ( " 0 " " " " "% " " " " " " " "0 " " " / : % " $ ' " " " " " " " " " " " "
" & "" "." " " " " ( " " " ! "" " " " " " " " " # & '&-.'&- " " 9 % '& 698% " '& 69'8 " "" " " % " ""
" " "." " " ( " / " "" " " / "" " / & " " " " " " ""
& " " " '&-.'&- " " " " % % " " "" " " & 0 " " 1 " " " " " & " " " " " ""
, '&-.'&- " % 2% 33$4.$5.$1)6781 "" " '&
698 % " " / /5./$ " '& 69'8 # " :" " " 633$;3<)18 " & " '&-.'&- " " " / & 6'&
7=&.7=&1>8 ( " " " " 6'&))?-8
& " " " " " " " & "" " " " @' " " @'
! " " " " " " 6 8 % " "" " " 6" 8
% &
&
#
# # # # ' !
"
+
% # # # # # &
# # # )
6
%
7
7
:
6 &+" 6 &++ >7&? >$ ? "
"
6
A7! # & # '
# "
< %
>3
? % "
'
# <
. 0 / 3
'"# # $ # 3 * *++ >
?
#!
#!
$
$
#!
$
!
:
$ & & '
& *
*
7
H :
'# # # # # # #
6 # # # # > ? % &&&
'
(
"
"
)
.%
6 # '
! *+,-.
-./
01*
,2+
3 /
%
'
! # # ) '
!,*
/
"*+, "*+, "+,
I# J ;
A :
A J00K I00K 0
8 :
8 # "# # # 00K I00K D D 0
A& :
A& # # " J00K I00K #11C
1C
J#11C
**
1 "
2 2 3'
(
4
# J00K I00K ! # # # # 8 # # + # # * + # # * * > ?
> ? * 8 5 1 !& ,+
1
1 !& *
$
,,+
4
! ! ! #(
% 6 7
1
**, 1
1 !& * &
8 5 1 !& *,
1
1 !& +
! #
! "
8 # $% &$&
! # $% &&
! #
% 6 7
1
*+ 1
1 !& *, &
. & :
& : & : 7 & $ #
?
? 7 & # # "
$ # & & >
? 7 & %
> 5 &?
% 6
# "
#
# ! ! # ! # # ! >
? > ?
> ?
! 8# ! ! # L !L !"#2!"#)
7)
'5 /7# 9
7
& ! '
! !# ! ! # # # << # ! ! 9 ! # ! ! '
(
! : # & 9
! )(
& ! ! & 6 & !D ',7
!7# G7# -00.'# -00.=.;.2 B2# ';'.# 474 ! 24 # ',7
6 -00.=.;.2 B2
A
: & # ! !# : & # %
! ! ! : & -00.=.;.2 B# ';'.
$ # > &? & # > & :? & : # > & :? & : -# & .
! %
6
! .# )7 # & ! ,D 6 & # ! ,D $ ! & : -0'# #
# 00'# -0'# -0# -/# # H !
! 6 -00.=.;.2 B2# !D# & : # -5 ! + # 'M'78
A DL 7 605 2 6 ';.# $2, !D # & : + # ' '
A
D
DL 6 2 $ ! # & & ! & & "
* +
2 ! A # ! $ ! !
!
':
)
# # 7 :
6
# # 3 :
)
# # ' :
A<< **++# # # !
) ! # %# 5 !
# # "
3 -0
8
: A
!"#2!"#)
7)
5 6, '4 333,33)
/
'( & # 9
'( & "" # 5 62 '4 333,3,)
!L >? !L * # *++ 0
6
# * *++ 0 ! -H
8
: A
7)
!"#2!"#)
4 33/3,27 #"
6,2
4 33/3,2
33/3,2
,
!L * *++ *++ 0 6 # !L * *++ 0
5H
8
: 6
!"#2!"#)
"
, '833+)
7)
**+
9+,
*+
)
,
"
,13 '3331)
8 "
! $ # ,
% /
8
: 6
!"#2!"#)
1
7)
+
)
)
-./ -.
+
)
)
-./ -!.
+
)
)
) ../ -0.
,
" 7 +
% 7 983,33
8 ! $ # 8
,
% 8 F/
8
: A
!"#2!"#)
7)
+ (
$
+ (
# # $
6 ! * # 6
*++ 0 # 8 F/
8
: A
!"#2!"#)
7)
# # ! !
! : * # # # # ! 1
-#234(-#234 6
>! ? 6
!# N2% ! O
6 ! # -0
!"#2!"#)
7)
( + & 000
00/0
[email protected]
8000
::
"
13
( 8 & ( "
-
# - ! 1-#234(-#234
6
>! ? 6 # ! A # &
N2% ! O
6 # ! -F
7)
!"#2!"#)
1 #&*+"D
,2+01*-.
2* 1 0 00
HH00
13! 2* 1
! (! 1 ,2+01*-.
! 1
1
,
*
2
+
.
0
'
' 4 #6
?
? 2 # = M 6 !# % & @ @0
6 # ! A # &
@ @0
$ # N2% O
6 # !"#2!"#)
7)
7!( (!( # 0
! / $
005
00-0
0F
' 1
5 !
6 !
6 # 6
L *
! !"#2!"#)
7)
7!(
2*
1
0 (!( +8
005
0H0
0-F
' 5 !
6 !
# 0
! 9/ $
$
, $
! ' BC7= 24
BC7= 24
% !
7
8 & 7
+= + !# !
7
!
"#
! "# $! %&
$ # # &# "
-
& )(
7 & +8 ,' --5--8 $ &# >! 7?# # # ! ! & "
A &# &
% ! +" & & #
# !"#2!"#)
7
7)
2* 1
3
:';;
1
$ & # $ & # # %
"
6 & & # & # $ ! @ [email protected]
' & !
"#
"
% -
& )(
9 & :
$ & # # "
# & "
# # & 9 +8 "
,' --,' 5--8
# ! 8 ! &
# ! &
6 &
# &
+ ! &# >'
F D
7 3
&?# #
>'
H . D !?
$ '
(! #
+ # 8!!2)$= C >7 3
? /
$
%. * B
'&-.'&- " : " " $ 9
/ % % >.> % /;
" A % % " /; $ %
, A " /;
" " "
" " " 6" -! " 8
'& 9
/5./$% % 2% 33$/% 33$4.$5.$16718%
>.> % /;
;/ "
6"0 ! 8
;/D.DB! "
6"0 !33 8
7
" A " /; $ % 6" B3% B% - " C8
9 " " " % ? % 7 ? "
'&-.'&- ; ,C!
% . " ""
" " " """ " " A " '&-.'&- " "
" " '&-.'&-% " "
'&-.'&- % A " " '&-.'&-
!"#2!"#)
" "
" % "
@'[email protected]?? " "
" A 5
, 5-
2'! -5 2!'*
.!# !3 / .!
8 # !
!,-0.# 2!'* : 2'! -5 CH # 2'! -5 CH- $ .!
# & !3 / 7 5
7+- *7,*
' 5
' 4 0 6
F/FH 7 *7,*
BC7= 24 +) BC7= 24 ) ,*7 $ ' 5
' *7,*
' BC7=BC7= 24
$
8 , &
+30 '/
+30- '5
,
0 PA805
/ -/ PA80
, ;-8F A80H
, '
A "
,' -- ,' 5--85H/
& '
8:
) 'DA F + ,' -- ' '
A:
) 'DA F ,' -- ' & ,' 5--85H/ ! 7& ! 6 ,' --5--8 8300 & & : # ,' 5H/ ,' -- ,' 5--8
%
) #
+ B
!"#2!"#)
% ( &
/ : &
/ ( &
? % " -! " % " "" " " ? '& 698% " B3 " -
? '& 69'8% " B " C
? % " B " 6" B8
&
6 "" / &8
6" C8
/ & 6 " -! " / & ""8
52 & 6" -D8
&
6 / <
C " / & ""8
& 6" -C8
( &
6" <8
&
!,*7!,*&
, ;/ " &9 / D
, ;/D.DB! " &9 / !
&
2 &
( &
# % < < 7) E< < & - < < + # ' BC7=BC7= 24
+ ' # ' 6
F/FH 4 0
%
, "
'E %
. . !
% ! % ;+2;
(1+$'#$
% ! % ;+2;
(1+$'#$
7)
%F%.6) )7.# 9G .
&"&$'#$
%F%.6) )7.#6 9G .
#D$'#$
%F%.6) )&11B 9G . )791#212## 7
#1$'#$
%F%.6) )&11B 9G . )79&#2&2# 7
&#D$'#$
%F%.6) )&11B% % .
&"$'#$
%F%.6) )&11B% 7 .
&+$'#$
%F%.6) )&11B52BH2B' % .
1&$'#$
%F%.6) )&11B52BH2B' 7 .
1$'#$
%F%.6) )#111B2)&111B 9G . 7
#*1$'#$
%F%.6) )I.# : .
&&$'#$
%F%.6) )(.#2)(+112)(#1112)(&111 9G . /
&1&$'#$
0 )(.# 7)< %F%.6)
)(+112)(#1112)(&111 9G .
)%# )%#H2B$$)79 $' 7 ) 8 ;$'#$
.
)%# % ) ,
29 8 .
"$'#$
), %:.# 9G .
#$'#$
7
%F%.6) % % 8 .= ) 7)
&*$'#$
%F%.6) % % 8 .= )(.# 7)
&*;$'#$
%F%.6) )7 8 .
&$'#$
$'#$
)5$$7 8 .
B 22
)
)
,
$$
%F%.6) ) B / 9 9G .
#*$'#$
%F%.6) )(.#2)( % B / 9G .
&1+$'#$
%F%.6)
)&11B$)8.1# )&11B$)8.1&$(# )&11B$)8.1"$'(#
) ,
8 .
1*$'#$
SECTION 2
Preparing for Connection
This section describes the connection methods that are possible with the NT631/NT631C, and the functions of the parts
of NT631/NT631C, as the required knowledge before connecting to the host and to the peripheral devices.
2-1
2-2
Method for Connection to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1 Connection Method and Communication Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparations at the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1 Names and Functions of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
32
35
35
31
Section 2-1
Method for Connection to the Host
2-1
Method for Connection to the Host
This section describes the methods for connection to the host used with the
NT631/NT631C, and the relationship between the connection method and the
communication method.
2-1-1
Connection Method and Communication Method
S NT631/NT631C communication ports and communication methods
The NT631/NT631C has two communication ports. Their uses are indicated in
the table below.
Communication Port
Usable Communication Methods
Communication Type
Host link
NT link (1:1)
NT link (1:N)
Memory link
(Support Tool connection)
(bar code reader input function)
RS-232C
Connector
Host link
NT link (1:1)
NT link (1:N)
Memory link
RS-232C
(select between connector and terminal
block)
Terminal
block
Host link
NT link (1:1)
NT link (1:N)
RS-422A/485
(select between connector and terminal
block)
Serial port A
Serial port B
S Communication methods that can be used with the host
The following communication methods can be used with the hosts that can be
connected to the NT631/NT631C.
- RS-232C
- RS-422A
- RS-485
The communication types that are actually supported differ depending on the
host unit. For details, refer to Section 4 “Connecting to the Host from the
RS-232C Port” and Section 5 “Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485
Port”.
S Converting the communication type with an RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit
The following communication type conversions are possible by using an
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001, made by OMRON).
- RS-232C ⇔ RS-422A
- RS-232C ⇔ RS-485
32
Section 2-1
Method for Connection to the Host
S Combinations of communication method and connection method
The connection methods that can be used depending on the communication
method used and the communication type for communication between the
NT631/NT631C and the host are indicated in the table below.
Usable Communication
Method
Communication Communication
Type at PT
Type at Host
Usable Connection Method
Host
link
NT
Link
(1:1)
NT
Link
(1:N)
Mem
ory
link
Details
f
f
f
f
88
f
f
f
f
98
Direct 1:1 connection
PT
RS-232C
Host
RS-232C
RS-232C (max. 15 m)
1:1 connection via a convertor unit
PT
Convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
Host
RS-232C
(max. 2 m)
RS-422A
(max. 500 m)
1:N connection via a convertor unit
RS-232C
PT
Convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
Host
f
RS-422A
RS-232C
(total length 500 m) (max. 2 m)
103
RS-422A
Direct 1:1 connection
PT
Host
f
f
f
f
132
RS-422A (max. 500 m)
1:N connection
RS-422A
PT
Host
f
RS-422A (total length 500 m)
f: Connection possible
138
: Connection not possible
33
Section 2-1
Method for Connection to the Host
Usable Communication
Method
Communication Communication
Type at PT
Type at Host
Usable Connection Method
Host
link
NT
Link
(1:1)
NT
Link
(1:N)
Mem
ory
link
Details
1:1 connection via a convertor unit
PT
Convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
RS-485
(max. 500 m)
Host
f
98
f
103
f
137
f
141
RS-232C
(max. 2 m)
1:N connection via a convertor unit
RS-232C
PT
Host
Convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
RS-485
RS232C
(total length 500 m) (max. 2 m)
RS-485
Direct 1:1 connection
PT
Host
RS-485 (max. 500 m)
1:N connection
RS-485
PT
Host
RS-485 (total length 500 m)
f: Connection possible
: Connection not possible
- The RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001) requires +5 V, 150 mA at
pin 6 of the RS-232C connector. Check the signals of the RS-232C connector
at the host.
- +5 V is not output from serial port B of the NT631/NT631C. When connecting
an NT-AL001 at serial port B, a separate power supply is required for the NTAL001.
- The cable of an NT-AL001 cannot be connected or disconnected while the
power is ON. Always connect or disconnect the cable while the power supply
from the RS-232C cable is OFF (while the host power supply is OFF).
- NT link (1:N) connection is possible even when RS-232C is used at the
NT631/NT631C side for communication with the host, but in this case one NTAL001 unit is required for each NT631/NT631C. In this case, it is convenient to
use serial port A of the NT631/NT631C. +5 V is not output from serial port B.
34
Section 2-2
Preparations at the NT631/NT631C
2-2
Preparations at the NT631/NT631C
Before starting operation, the names and functions of the parts of the
NT631/NT631C are described here as a confirmation. A method of hardware settings is also described.
2-2-1
Names and Functions of Parts
Front View
POWER LED
Lit in green when the power is supplied.
POWER
RUN
RUN LED
Display
@ Lit in green while the
Depending on the model, different display types are used.
unit is in the RUN mode. @ NT631–ST211j–EV1 : Monochrome EL display
@ Lit in orange or red
@ NT631C–ST141j–EV1 : STN color LCD display with
when the battery is low
blacklight
(orange in the RUN
@ NT631C–ST151j–EV1 : TFT color LCD high intensity
mode, red in other
display with blacklight
modes).
The whole area of the screen is a touch panel which works
as an input device.
Reference
The NT631/NT631C comes in two body colors.
NT631 (EL)
NT631C (STN)
NT631C (TFT)
Body Color
NT631-ST211-EV1
NT631C-ST141-EV1
NT631C-ST151-EV1
Beige
NT631-ST211B-EV1
NT631C-ST141B-EV1
NT631C-ST151B-EV1
Black
35
Section 2-2
Preparations at the NT631/NT631C
Rear ViewNotice
Serial port B terminal block
Connect the cable for
RS-422A/485 connection to the
host here. Depending on the
setting made at the NT631/NT631C
system menu, communications
through RS-422A/485 are
available.
It is not possible to use this
terminal block and the serial port B
connector (9-pin) at the same time.
Reset switch (inside the cover)
Used to initializes all the statuses of the NT631/NT631C.
However, registered data such as screen data, and memory
switch settings, retain their statuses before initialization.
Warning label
Expansion interface connector
(under the label)
When using an expansion
interface unit such as a memory
unit, peel off the label and
connect it here.
RESET
RDA
TRM
RDB
SDA
SDB
GR terminal
Grounding terminal to prevent
malfunction due to noise.
RSA
RSB
24V
+DC
PRINTER
PORT B
PORT A
Power input terminals
Connect the power to the
NT631/NT631C at these
terminals.
Battery cover
The battery is secured
underneath this cover.
Serial port A connector
Connect the cable for connection to the
host or Support Tool here. A bar code
reader can also be connected here. This
is a 9-pin connector for RS-232C use only.
Serial port B connector
Connect the cable for RS-232C connection to the host here. Depending
on the setting made at the NT631/NT631C system menu,
communications through RS-232C are available. This is a 9-pin
connector for RS-232C use only.
It is not possible to use this connector and the serial port B terminal block
at the same time.
Printer connector
Connect the printer cable here. Output
conforms to Centronics specifications.
Notice
36
Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF or resetting.
SECTION 3
Hardware Settings and Connections
This section describes the settings of the NT631/NT631C and methods for connection to peripheral devices.
For details on the method for connection to the host, refer Section 4 “Connecting to the Host from the RS–232C Port” or
Section 5 “Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port”.
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1 Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-2 Installation in the Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-3 Power Supply Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-4 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1 Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-1 Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-2 Setting a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-3 Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C with V1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-1 Installation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-2 Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C without V1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-1 Installation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-2 Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
38
38
39
40
41
42
42
43
43
44
45
46
47
48
56
57
57
37
Section 3-1
Installation
Notice
3-1
On unpacking the NT631/NT631C and peripheral devices, check their external
appearance and confirm that there is no damage. Also confirm that there is no
abnormal noise on shaking the unit lightly.
Installation
Install the NT631/NT631C in the operation panel and connect the power to the
NT631/NT631C as described below.
3-1-1
Installation Environment
Observe the following points when installing the PT in an operation panel.
Notice
S Do not install the unit at sites subject to the following conditions.
- Severe temperature variations
- Temperatures or humidities outside the ranges stated in the specifications
- High humidity, condensation
- Splashing chemical agents
- Severe oil splashing
- Corrosive or flammable gases
- Strong vibrations or shocks
- Direct exposure to wind and rain (outdoor sites)
- Strong ultra-violet irradiation
S Take adequate measures to ensure shielding if the unit is used at a location subject to any of the following conditions.
- Static electricity, or noise from other equipment
- Strong electromagnetic fields
- Nearby power cables
- Potential exposure to radioactivity
3-1-2
Installation in the Operation Panel
The NT631/NT631C is mounted in an operation panel by embedding it in the panel.
Use the panel fittings and tool (Philips screwdriver) included in the product package and follow the procedure below.
(1) Open a hole of the dimensions shown below in the panel and install the
NT631/NT631C from the front side of the panel.
238
303
38
+ 0.5 mm
0 mm
+ 0.5 mm
0 mm
Section 3-1
Installation
(2) Attach the panel fittings at the following positions shown below, from the rear
of the NT631/NT631C.
Fit the hook of the fitting in the square hole in the body and tighten the screw
with the Philips head screwdriver while lightly pulling the fitting.
Fittings at the two (:) positions are not necessary if you do not need it dust
proof and waterproof.
(:)
PRINTER
PORT B
PORT A
(:)
Notice
- During work at the panel, take care to ensure that no metal scraps enter the unit.
- The thickness of applicable operation panel is 1.6 mm to 4.8 mm. All fittings
must be tightened uniformly to a torque of 0.5 to 0.6 N⋅m in order to ensure water- and dust-resistance. Front sheet of NT631/NT631C may be warped if the
tightening is too strong or not uniformity. The panel must not be soiled or
warped, and must be able to support an installation that will remain secure and
strong.
3-1-3
Power Supply Connection
Connect a 24 VDC power supply to the power input terminals.
Notice
- Depending on how the power is switched ON/OFF, the entire system may stop.
Follow the correct procedure when switching the power ON/OFF.
-
Carefully check the wiring before switching ON the power.
Do not connect AC power to the DC terminals.
Use DC power supplies with low voltage fluctuation.
Do not perform a dielectric strength test.
If complying with EC directives (low voltage directives), the following points must
be noted (compliance with EC directives):
1.Use a power supply with reinforced insulation.
2.When installing NT631-ST211(B)-EV1 on the ultimate system, the rear of the
NT631 must be placed within an enclosure to restrict the operators’ use only to
the front panel.
- When using NT631-ST211(B)-EV1, warm-up time of the power supply must be
200 ms or less. If longer than this, NT631 may not boot up.
24 VDC
Breaker
24 VDC
power supply
39
Section 3-1
Installation
S Power supply
The applicable power supply specifications are as follows.
Item
Value
Power supply
24 VDC
Allowable power supply voltage
fluctuation range
20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC –15%, +10%)
Power supply voltage capacity
NT631–ST211 (B)–V1:
30 W or more (Power supply warm–up
time within 200 ms.)
NT631C–ST141 (B) /ST151 (B)–V1 :
18 W or more
S Parts used for connection
Notice
For the connection to the power supply terminal block, twisted wires of 2 mm2 or
greater cross sectional area and M3.5 size crimp terminals must be used.
Tighten the screws on the terminal block to a torque of 0.8 N⋅m.
Fork type
7 mm or less
Round type
7 mm or less
- Recommended terminals
Type
(fork type)
Type
(round type)
Japan Solderless Terminal MFG
2-YS3A
2-3.5
Fuji Terminal
2-YAS3.5
V2-S3.5
Nichifu Terminal
2Y-3.5
2-3.5
Maker
3-1-4
Applicable Wire
(stranded wire)
2.0 to 2.63 mm2
Grounding
The NT631/NT631C has a functional ground terminal (
).
Carry out wiring under the following conditions.
(1) In cases where the distance between the NT631/NT631C is small and it is
assumed that there is no potential difference between grounds, ground as
shown in Fig. (a) below.
(2) In cases where there is a potential difference between the grounds of the
NT631/NT631C and the host, ground as shown in Fig. (b). If there is some
distance between the NT631/NT631C and host and grounding at a single
point is difficult, do not connect the functional ground terminal ( ) of the
NT631/NT631C.
(3) If the NT631/NT631C is installed in the same panel as equipment that generates noise, such as a motor or inverter, do not ground the functional ground
terminal (
) of the NT631/NT631C.
NT631/
NT631C
Host
NT631/
NT631C
Host
Class 3
grounding
Fig. (a)
Notice
40
Grounding at a single point
Fig. (b)
Carry out grounding correctly in order to prevent misoperation due to noise.
Section 3-2
Connecting to the Support Tool
3-2
Connecting to the Support Tool
In order to install the system program in the NT631/NT631C, or to transmit screen
data created with the Support Tool to the NT631/NT631C, the NT631/NT631C
must be connected to a personal computer with an RS-232C cable.
The NT631/NT631C connects the RS-232C cable from a personal computer at
serial port A. When the host is connected at serial port B, the connection with the
host can be maintained as it is while the NT631/NT631C is connected to the
RS-232C cable from a personal computer.
However, when a bar code reader is being used, it must be disconnected, so that
the RS-232C cable can be connected, since they both use serial port A.
PRINTER
PORT B
PORT A
Serial port A
(RS-232C, 9-pin)
S Communication conditions
The communication conditions are automatically set when the system installer
and Support Tool are started.
S Recommended connector cable
Use the cable indicated below.
- CV500-CN228 (length: 2 m), made by OMRON
(D-SUB 9-pin, male ⇔ D-SUB 25-pin, male)
- XW2Z–S001 (conversion cable), made by OMRON
(D-SUB 25-pin, female ⇔ half pitch 14-pin, male)
- XW2Z–S002 (length: 2 m), made by OMRON
(D-SUB 9-pin, male ⇔ D-SUB 9-pin, female)
For details on making a connector cable, refer to APPENDIX F “Making the
Cable for Connecting a PC” (page 654).
41
Section 3-3
Connecting a Printer
3-3
Connecting a Printer
Connecting a printer to the NT631/NT631C enables printing of hard copies of the
currently displayed screen (printing of screen images), and, by system menu operations, printing of the screen display history and alarm history.
The following types of data can be printed, depending on the printer connected to
the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to the pages cited.
- Hard copies of the screen (8-11-1 “Printing the Screen” in 8-11 “Printing Data
and Checking the Printer Status”, page 541)
- Screen display history record data (page 215)
- Alarm history record data (page 217)
3-3-1
Connection Method
Connect the printer to the NT631/NT631C with a Centronics cable, as shown below. The length of the cable should not exceed 1.5 m.
Reference
If the connector cable is connected or disconnected while the power to the printer
is on, the NT631/NT631C may malfunction. Always turn off the power to the printer before connecting or disconnecting the cable.
PRINTER
PORT B
EPSON
ESC/P
HP
PCL 5
Color printer (24-pin)
Monochrome printer (24-pin)
Monochrome printer
PORT A
S Recommended connector cable
The following connection cables are recommended.
- NT-CNT121 (1.5 m, 20-pin to 36-pin), made by OMRON
S Recommended printers
- EPSON ESC/P Printer (24-pin), Color or Monochrome
- HP
PCL 5 Printer, Monochrome
Apart from above, it is also possible to use printers that can emulate PCPR201H (conform to PC-PR201PL control standards), and printers that comply
with one of the following Epson control standards.
- ESC/P 24-J83C (color), ESC/P 24-J82 (monochrome)
If using an HP printer, make sure that it conforms to the “PCL 5” control standard.
When using a monochrome printer with an NT631C, set “Tone” with the NT631C
memory switches (page 192).
42
Section 3-4
Connecting a Bar Code Reader
3-4
Connecting a Bar Code Reader
Connecting a bar code reader to the NT631/NT631C enables bar code data to
read as character strings into character string input fields, and set in character
string memory tables.
In order to use a bar code reader, the “Comm. A Method” memory switch must be
set to “Bar-Code Reader”.
For details on the method for inputting character strings with a bar code reader,
refer to 8-7-2 “Inputting Character Strings” in 8-7 “Input of Numeric Values and
Character Strings” in the programming manual (page 520).
Notice
3-4-1
Make sure that the power supply to the bar code reader and the power supply to
the PT are both OFF before connecting or disconnecting the cable.
Connection Method
Connect the bar code reader to serial port A of the NT631/NT631C, as shown in
the figure below.
NT631/NT631C
Bar code reader
PRINTER
9-pin connector
PORT B
PORT A
Serial port A
(RS-232C, 9-pin)
Connector cable
Bar code reader cable
Bar code reader must match the communication setting (3-4-2 “Setting a Bar Code
Reader”, page 44) and data format (3-4-3 “Data Format”, page 45) in order to connect to the NT631/NT631C. Please confirm the specification of the bar code reader before using.
For details on making a connector cable, refer to APPENDIX G “Making the Cable
for Connection to a Bar Code Reader” (page 655).
Reference
The bar code reader must be connected to serial port A. This means that it cannot
be connected at the same time as the Support Tool. Note also that when a bar
code reader is used, the host must be connected at serial port B.
43
Section 3-4
Connecting a Bar Code Reader
3-4-2
Setting a Bar Code Reader
After connecting a bar code reader, set the communication conditions and other
settings for it by selection from the system menu.
Settings at the NT631/NT631C
At the NT631/NT631C, set the communication conditions for communication with
the bar code reader by using the memory switches, selecting from the options indicated in the table below.
For more detailed information on the actual system menu operations, refer to 6-10
“Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function” (page 205).
Item
Possible Settings
Default Setting
Data bits
7 or 8 bits
7 bits
Stop bit(s)
1 or 2 bits
2 bits
Parity
None, odd, even
Even
Communications speed 4800, 9600, 19200 bps
9600 bps
Input Method
Manual
Manual, Auto
Settings at the Bar Code Reader
Make the settings shown in the table below at the bar code reader. Make sure that
the communications speed, parity, stop bit, and data bit settings match the communication settings made at the NT631/NT631C. For details on the setting method, refer to the instruction manual for the bar code reader used.
Item
44
Possible Settings
Communications speed
4800, 9600, 19200 bps
Parity
EVEN, ODD, NONE
Stop bits
1 or 2 bits
Data bits
7 or 8 bits
Preamble
STX
Postamble
ETX
RS/CS control
Available
Communication protocol
No-protocol mode
Transmission of number of bar code label digits
Transmission prohibited
Transmission of ID characters
Transmission prohibited
Bar code types
Multi-reading (all types can be read)
Trigger switch setting
Automatic reading mode
Section 3-4
Connecting a Bar Code Reader
S About RS/CS control
During bar code reading, the NT631/NT631C performs RS/CS control. When
the “Input Method” setting of the NT631/NT631C is set to “Auto”, the RS signal is
turned OFF, prohibiting the next input, until the read data has been notified to the
host.
Because of this, when the “Auto” setting is made, the next input is not possible
until the data has been notified to the host.
However, when the setting is “Auto” and the RS/CS signals of the cable are
shorted, RS/CS control is ineffective. Consequently, data input from the bar
code reader to the NT631/NT631C is updated regardless of whether or not the
data is notified to the host.
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the bar code reader used.
3-4-3
Data Format
The data format for communication when using the bar code input function of the
NT631/NT631C is shown below.
STX
(02H)
Data
Data
Data
ETX
(03H)
The characters which are effective as data are hexadecimal codes from 20 to 7FH,
and the maximum data length is 40 bytes.
Data which does not follow the data format described above is invalidated and discarded.
45
Section 3-5
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C with V1)
3-5
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C with V1)
This section discusses the using of a memory unit when the system program for
NT631/NT631C
with
V1
is
installed
to
the
NT631/NT631C
(NT631-ST211j-EV1/NT631C-ST141j-EV1/NT631C-ST151j-EV1) with V1.
Reference
Depending on the PT model and the system program which is installed, the function and using method of memory unit varies as follows.
PT Model
System Program
Function of Memory Unit
Without “V1”
Conventional memory unit function. (Refer to
56.)
(System programs can not be transmitted using
memory unit.)
Without “V1”
With “V1”
Without V1
With “V1”
With V1
New memory unit function.
(System programs can be transmitted using
memory unit.)
By installing a memory unit (NT-MF261) on the NT631/NT631C, the screen data in
the NT631/NT631C can be recorded (backed up) in the memory unit.
In addition, the screen data in the memory unit can be automatically read into the
NT631/NT631C when it starts up. This means that system program and screen
data can be changed easily at the operation site without connecting to the Support
Tool.
The data in the memory unit is retained without backup by a battery or other
means.
In systems where there are frequent setup changes, by preparing a number of
memory units in advance and recording screen data in them in accordance with
the control performed in each case, the NT631/NT631C screen data can be
changed simply by installing the memory unit, without connecting to the Support
Tool.
In addition, even if NT631/NT631C is replaced, the previous status can be maintained simply by installing the memory unit that retains the system program and
screen data of the previous NT631/NT631C.
By using the following combinations, data can be stored (backed up) to a memory
unit.
S Screen data for two PTs.
S System program for two PTs.
S System program and screen data for one PT.
One memory unit can store the screen data for two PTs.
Notice
- Make sure that the power supply to the PT is OFF before connecting or disconnecting a memory unit.
After mounting a memory unit, be sure to tighten its two screws.
- During data transmission, do not turn off the power supply to the NT631/NT631C
or reset it.
- Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) with bare hands.
46
Section 3-5
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631Cwith V1)
Reference
- When a memory unit is mounted, the NT631/NT631C cannot be set to the operating status. On completion of data transmission with a memory unit, always
disconnect the memory unit from the NT631/NT631C before starting
NT631/NT631C operation.
- Memory units (NT-MF261) can be used in common for the following PT models:
NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C (with and without V1). One memory unit
can store screen data for up to two PTs of different models. However, since the
data compatibility is not complete between NT31/NT31C and NT631/NT631C,
an error may occur if an attempt is made to read NT631C data with an NT31C.
(The data must be converted using the Support Tool.)
Note also that although there is data compatibility between the NT31 and
NT31C, and between the NT631 and NT631C, the display may not be correct
since these models have different numbers of colors.
- One memory unit can store a system program for up to two PTs of different models. In order to transmit a system program from the memory unit to the
NT631/NT631C, the system program must be compatible to the target PT model.
- The statuses of memory switch settings and system settings can be recorded to
the memory unit besides screen data. When the data in the memory unit is written into the NT631/NT631C, make sure that these settings can be adapted to
the NT631/NT631C used before transmission.
3-5-1
Installation Method
Install the memory unit (NT-MF261) at the expansion interface connector at the
rear of the NT631/NT631C as shown in the figure below (the expansion interface
connector is located underneath the “note” label.).
Mounting screws
47
Section 3-5
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C with V1)
3-5-2
Method of Use
As shown in the figure below, a memory unit has two sets of four DIP switches, and
the operation is determined by the DIP switches that are set at startup.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Factory setting is turned all to off.
OFF
OFF
SW1
Notice
SW2
- Always confirm that the power to the NT631/NT631C is off before setting the
DIP switches.
- Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) directly with bare hands.
DIP Switch Functions
The functions of the DIP switches on the memory unit are indicated in the table
below.
S SW1
Switch
Function
SW1-1
Automatic transmission (writing from the memory
unit to the PT)
OFF: Not executed
SW1-2
Automatic transmission (writing from the PT to the
memory unit)
OFF: Not executed
SW1-3
Manual transmission (Direction of transmission and
bank used selected at the PT touch panel)
OFF: Not executed
SW1-4
Data type to transfer
ON : Executed
ON : Executed
ON : Executed
OFF: Screen data
ON : System
program
S SW2
Switch
*
Reference
48
Function
SW2-1
Disable/enable writing to PT
SW2-2
Disable/enable writing to the memory unit
SW2-3
Area (bank) selection of automatic transmission. *
SW2-4
System/Screen simultaneous transmission
OFF: Disable
ON : Enable
OFF: Disable
ON : Enable
OFF: Bank 0
ON : Bank 1
OFF: Disable
ON : Enable
The memory unit stores system program or screen data for one PT in each of
areas (bank 0, bank 1). (The total data storage is for two PTs.) SW2-3 sets which
of these two banks is used for automatic transmission.
- The DIP switch function of the memory unit is supplemented to NT631/NT631C
With V1.
Section 3-5
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C with V1)
Reference
- In the following cases, a mode setting error occurs.
- More than one of the SW1 switches are set to “ON”.
- None of the SW1 switches are set to “ON”.
- In the following case, a protect setting error occurs.
- Transmitting to the write destination has been disabled by the setting for
SW2-1 or SW2-2.
- In the following cases, a data transmission error occurs.
- An attempt is made to transmit data other than the system program to PT system program area.
- An attempt is made to transmit the system program to PT screen data area.
- For details on mode setting errors and protect setting errors, refer to “Errors
When Using a Memory Unit” (page 54).
Writing Screen Data to a Memory Unit Using Automatic Transmission (PT to Memory Unit)
In this mode, system program or the screen data in the NT631/NT631C is forcibly
written to the memory unit irrespective of the setting status of the NT631/NT631C.
This mode is convenient if the touch panel is broken and touch switch operation is
not possible, or if someone unfamiliar with touch switch operation at the operation
site is using the system.
Reference
When screen data is written to the memory unit, the data that has been stored in
the specified area up until that point is lost (if the data is written into only one Bank,
the other Bank will not be affeceted).
S Method of execution
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the NT631/NT631C to
the memory unit by automatic transmission.
(1) Check that the power supply to the NT631/NT631C is OFF, then set the DIP
switches of the memory unit as follows after installing memory unit to
NT631/NT631C.
SW1
SW2
SW2-4 ON: System/Screen transmitted simultaneously
OFF: System/Screen not transmitted simultaneously
SW2-3 ON: Bank 1
OFF: Bank 0
SW1-4 ON: System program
OFF: Screen data
It is not strictly necessary to set SW2-1 to “OFF” (to disable writing to the
PT), but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the event of misoperation.
Reference
- Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables the
setting of SW1-4.
- Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables the
setting of SW2-3, writes the system program into bank 0, and the screen data
into bank 1 at all times.
49
Section 3-5
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C with V1)
(2) Switch the NT631/NT631C power ON.
The screen data is automatically written into the memory unit. The screen
data in the NT631/NT631C is preserved.
The messages “Preparing”, “Transmitting”, “Verifying”, and “Finished” are
displayed on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.
At the same time, the progress of the data writing status is displayed by the
means of the number of bytes and blocks (1 bank = 16 block = 1024k byte).
RUN LED operates as follows according to the processing status.
Preparing
Transmitting
Verifying
Finished
: flashes at intervals of 1 second
: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
: lights up
(3) Switch the NT631/NT631C power OFF, remove the memory unit.
To operate NT631/NT631C continuously, switch the NT631/NT631C power
back ON.
Writing Screen Data to the PT Using Automatic Transmission (Memory Unit to PT)
In this mode, the system program or screen data in the memory unit is forcibly written to NT631/NT631C irrespective of the setting status of the NT631/NT631C.
Since data transmission by this method is faster than when the Support Tool or
system installer is used, it can save a lot of time. When transmitting the same system program or screen data to multiple NT631/NT631C, this mode becomes convenient.
Reference
When data is written to the NT631/NT631C, the data that has been stored up until
that point is lost. When the system program is changed, the operation of
NT631/NT631C also changes.
S Method of execution
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the memory unit to the
NT631/NT631C by automatic transmission.
(1) Check that the NT631/NT631C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on
the memory unit as follows after installing memory unit to NT631/NT631C.
SW1
SW2
SW2-4 ON: System/Screen transmitted simultaneously
OFF: System/Screen not transmitted simultaneously
SW2-3 ON: Bank 1
OFF: Bank 0
SW1-4 ON: System program
OFF: Screen data
It is not strictly necessary to set SW2-2 to “OFF” (to disable writing to the
memory unit), but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the
event of misoperation.
50
Section 3-5
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C with V1)
Reference
- Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables the
setting of SW1-4.
- Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables the
setting of SW2-3. In this case, the data transmission becomes possible only if
the data inside memory unit is in either of following combinations.
Bank 0: system program, Bank 1: other than system program
Bank 0: other than system program, Bank 1: system program
If the combination is not as listed above, a data transmitting error occurs.
- When writing the system program into the NT631/NT631C, the type of system
program inside memory unit and the type of PT unit must be corresponding.
(2) Switch the NT631/NT631C power ON.
The screen data is automatically written into the PT.
The messages “Preparing”, “Transmitting”, “Verifying” and “Finished” are displayed on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.
At the same time, the progress of data writing status is displayed by the
means of the number of bytes and blocks (1 bank = 16 block = 1024k byte).
The RUN LED operates as follows according to the processing status.
Preparing
Transmitting
Verifying
Finished
: flashes at intervals of 1 second
: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
: lights up
(3) Switch the NT631/NT631C power OFF, remove the memory unit.
To operate NT631/NT631C continuously, switch the NT631/NT631C power
back ON.
51
Section 3-5
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C with V1)
Reading and Writing Data by Manual Transmission
In this method, the direction of transmission and area of the memory unit used are
set by touch switch operations at the NT631/NT631C. Transmission can be executed while checking the settings.
Reference
When data is written to the NT631/NT631C or memory unit, the data that has been
stored up until that point is lost.
S Method of execution
Use the following procedure to write screen data using manual transmission.
(1) Check that the NT631/NT631C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on
the memory unit as follows.
SW1
SW2
Setting of SW2-4 not relevant
Setting of SW2-3 not relevant
Setting of SW1-4 not relevant
In order to avoid loss of data in the event of misoperation, it is advisable to
set SW2-1 and SW2-2 so as to disable writing to the unit from which the data
is to be read.
(2) Switch the NT631/NT631C power ON.
Display language select screen appears.
(3) Press the “Japanese” or “English” touch switches to select the display language.
The following descriptions are for when “English” is selected.
The screen shown below is displayed.
52
Section 3-5
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C with V1)
“Current PT Screen Data”–system
The first line
: “Compatible PT type” for the system program inside
PT.
The second line : “System program name” and “Version” for the system
program inside PT.
(The second line may not be displayed in the kind of system program.)
“Current PT Screen Data”–screen
The comment for the screen data in the NT631/NT631C is displayed
here.
“Current Memory Unit Screen Data”
S In the case of system program:
The first line
: “Compatible PT type” for the system program inside
the memory unit.
The second line : “System program name” and “Version” for the system
program inside the memory unit.
(The second line may not be displayed in the system program for some
models.)
S In the case of screen data:
The comment for the screen data in the NT631/NT631C is displayed
here.
The available “transmitting” destinations are altered depending on the settings of
the origin of “transmitting” as described in the table below.
Source
[PT]screen
Destination
[Memory unit] Bank 0
[Memory unit] Bank 1
[PT]system
[PT]system/screen
[Memory unit] Bank 0/1 (fixed)
[Memory unit] Bank 0
S If system program is selected
[PT]system (fixed)
S If screen data is selected
[PT]screen (fixed)
[Memory unit] Bank 1
[Memory unit] Bank 0/1
Reference
[PT]system/screen (fixed)
- When transmitting the system program and screen data simultaneously from
the PT to the memory unit, the setting of banks is “Bank 0: system program,
Bank 1: screen data”, and when transmitting them from the memory unit to the
PT, either of the following combinations must be used.
Bank 0: system program, Bank 1: other than system program
Bank 0: other than system program, Bank 1: system program
- When writing the system program into the NT631/NT631C, the type of system
program inside memory unit and the type of PT unit must be corresponding.
53
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C with V1)
Section 3-5
(4) Press “Execute”.
The data is transmitted.
The messages “Preparing”, “Transmitting”, “Verifying”, and “Finished” are
displayed in accordance with the progress of data transmission. At the
same time, the progress of data transmitting status is displayed by the
means of the number of bytes and blocks (1 bank = 16 block = 1024k byte).
When the data transmission is operated manually, “RUN LED” remains
OFF.
(5) Switch the NT631/NT631C power OFF, remove the memory unit, then
switch the NT631/NT631C power back ON.
Errors When Using a Memory Unit
If an error occurs when using the memory unit, the NT631/NT631C operates as
follows.
S The details of the error and remedial action are displayed on the screen.
Each screen has touch switches to change the display language from one to the
other. When the manual data transmission is operating, the content of error and
remedial action are shown with selected language. When the automatic transmission is operating, it is displayed in Japanese.
S The continuous buzzer sounds.
S The RUN LED flashes.
If a protect setting error occurs when executing manual transmission, it is possible
to return to the memory unit manual transmission screen by pressing the OK touch
switch, but in the case of other errors, the status described above remains in effect
until the NT631/NT631C power is turned OFF or reset.
54
Section 3-5
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C with V1)
When an error occurs, take remedial action by referring to the table below.
Error
Probable Cause
Remedial Action
Mode setting error
DIP switches SW1-1 to
SW1-3 are all OFF, or
more than one is ON.
Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, set the memory unit DIP
switches correctly, then turn the
NT631/NT631C power back ON.
Protect setting error
(automatic
transmission)
Writing to the data write
destination has been
prohibited by the setting
of SW2-1 or SW2-2.
Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, set the memory unit DIP
switches correctly, then turn the
NT631/NT631C power back ON.
Protect setting error
(manual
transmission)
Writing to the data write
destination has been
prohibited by the setting
of SW2-1 or SW2-2.
Perform either of the following
procedures.
S Press the OK touch switch to return
to the memory unit manual transmission screen, make the correct
settings, then try again.
S Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, correct the DIP switches settings of the memory unit, then turn
the power back ON.
Flash memory error
An error occurred during
initialization of the
NT631/NT631C or
memory unit flash
memory, or during write
processing.
Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, then back ON. If the error
recurs, the flash memory at the write
destination may be faulty. In this
case, replace the unit.
Verify error
An error occurred during
verification processing at
the flash memory of the
NT631/NT631C or the
memory unit.
Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, then back ON. If the error
recurs, the flash memory at the write
destination may be faulty. In this
case, replace the unit.
Transmitting data
error
(The automatic
transmission only)
An attempt is made to
transmit data other than
a system program or the
system program of a
different PC model into
the NT631/NT631C as
the system program.
An attempt is made to
write a system program
into the NT631/NT631C
as screen data.
Perform either of the following
procedures.
S Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, correct the DIP switch settings of the memory unit, and then
turn the power back ON.
S Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, set the DIP switch settings to
the manual transmission, and then
check the data inside the memory
unit.
55
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C without V1)
3-6
Section 3-6
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C without V1)
This section discusses the using of a memory unit when the system program for
NT631/NT631C with V1 is installed to the NT631/NT631C (NT631-ST211j-E/
NT631-ST141j-E/NT631C-ST151j-E) without V1.
Reference
In this case, the function and use of the memory unit are the same as ones for the
NT631/NT631C without V1. (The system program transmission by using a
memory unit cannot be processed.)
By installing a memory unit (NT-MF261) on the NT631/NT631C, the screen data in
the NT631/NT631C can be recorded (backed up) in the memory unit.
In addition, the screen data in the memory unit can be automatically read into the
NT631/NT631C when it starts up. This means that screen data can be changed
easily at the operation site without connecting to the Support Tool.
The data in the memory unit is retained without backup by a battery or other
means.
In systems where there are frequent setup changes, by preparing a number of
memory units in advance and recording screen data in them in accordance with
the control performed in each case, the NT631/NT631C screen data can be
changed simply by changing the memory unit, without connecting to the Support
Tool.
One memory unit can store the screen data for two PTs.
Notice
- Make sure that the power supply to the PT is OFF before connecting or disconnecting a memory unit. After mounting a memory unit, be sure to tighten its two
screws.
- During data transmission, do not turn off the power supply to the NT631/NT631C
or reset it.
- Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) with bare hands.
Reference
- When a memory unit is mounted, the NT631/NT631C cannot be set to the operating status. On completion of data transmission with a memory unit, always
disconnect the memory unit from the NT631/NT631C before starting
NT631/NT631C operation.
- Memory units (NT-MF261) can be used in common for the following PT models:
NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C (with and without V1). One memory unit can
store screen data for up to two PTs of different models. However, since the data
compatibility is not complete between NT31/NT31C and NT631/NT631C, the
data of NT631 cannot be used in NT31C without putting it through a conversion
(the data must be converted using the Support Tool).
Note also that although there is data compatibility between the NT31 and
NT31C, and between the NT631 and NT631C, the display may not be correct
since these models have different numbers of colors.
The screen data for the NT631/NT631C with V1 cannot be used if a system program is for the NT631/NT631C without V1.
- The statuses of memory switch settings and system settings can be recorded to
the memory unit besides screen data. When the data in the memory unit is written into the NT631/NT631C, make sure that these settings can be adapted to
the NT631/NT631C used before transmission.
56
Section 3-6
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C without V1)
3-6-1
Installation Method
Install the memory unit (NT-MF261) at the expansion interface connector at the
rear of the NT631/NT631C as shown in the figure below. (The expansion interface
connector is located underneath the “note” label.)
Mounting screws
3-6-2
Method of Use
As shown in the figure below, a memory unit has two sets of four DIP switches, and
the operation is determined by the DIP switches that are set at startup.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Factory setting is turned all to off.
OFF
OFF
SW1
Notice
SW2
- Always confirm that the power to the NT631/NT631C is off before setting the
DIP switches.
- Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) directly with bare hands.
DIP Switch Functions
The functions of the DIP switches on the memory unit are indicated in the table
below.
S SW1
Switch
Function
SW1-1
Automatic transmission (writing from the memory
unit to the PT)
OFF: Not executed
SW1-2
Automatic transmission (writing from the PT to the
memory unit)
OFF: Not executed
SW1-3
Manual transmission (Direction of transmission and
bank used selected at the PT touch panel)
OFF: Not executed
SW1-4
Reserved for system use (must be set to “OFF”)
ON : Executed
ON : Executed
ON : Executed
57
Section 3-6
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C without V1)
S SW2
Switch
*
Reference
Function
SW2-1
Disable/enable writing to PT
SW2-2
Disable/enable writing to the memory unit
SW2-3
Area (bank) selection of automatic transmission.
SW2-4
Reserved for system use (must be set to “OFF”)
OFF: Disable
ON : Enable
OFF: Disable
ON : Enable
OFF: Bank 0
ON : Bank 1
The memory unit stores screen data for one PT in each area (bank 0,
bank 1). (The total data storage is for two PTs.) SW2-3 sets which of
these two banks is used for automatic transmission.
- In the following cases, a mode setting error occurs.
- More than one of the SW1 switches are set to “ON”.
- None of the SW1 switches are set to “ON”.
- In the following case, a protect setting error occurs.
- Writing to the write destination has been disabled by the setting for SW2-1 or
SW2-2.
- For details on mode setting errors and protect setting errors, refer to “Errors
When Using a Memory Unit” (page 3 to 25).
Writing Screen Data to a Memory Unit Using Automatic Transmission (PT to Memory Unit)
In this mode, the screen data in the NT631/NT631C is forcibly written to the
memory unit irrespective of the setting status of the NT631/NT631C.
This mode is convenient if the touch panel is broken and touch switch operation is
not possible, or if someone unfamiliar with touch switch operation at the operation
site is using the system.
Reference
When screen data is written to the memory unit, the data that has been stored in
the specified area up until that point is lost (there is no effect on the other area).
S Method of execution
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the NT631/NT631C to
the memory unit by automatic transmission.
(1) Check that the power supply to the NT631/NT631C is OFF, then set the DIP
switches of the memory unit as follows after installing the memory unit in
NT631/NT631C.
1
2
3 4
1 2
3
4
OFF
OFF
SW1
SW2
SW2-3
ON: Bank 1
OFF: Bank 0
It is not strictly necessary to set SW 2-1 to “OFF” (to disable writing to the
memory unit), but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the
event of misoperation.
58
Section 3-6
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C without V1)
(2) Switch the NT631/NT631C power ON.
The screen data is automatically written into the memory unit. The screen
data in the NT631/NT631C is preserved.
The messages “Preparing”, “Transmitting”, “Verifying”, and “Finished” are
displayed on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.
When messages “Preparing”, “Transmitting”, and “Verifying” are displayed,
the RUN LED flashes, and when the message “Finished” is displayed, the
RUN LED lights.
(3) Switch the NT631/NT631C power OFF, remove the memory unit. To operate
NT631/NT631C continuously, switch the NT631/NT631C power back ON.
Writing Screen Data to the PT Using Automatic Transmission (Memory Unit to PT)
In this mode, screen data is forcibly written from the memory unit to the
NT631/NT631C irrespective of the setting status of the NT631/NT631C.
Since data transmission by this method is faster than when the Support Tool is
used, it can save a lot of time. When transmitting the same system program or
screen data to multiple NT631/NT631C, this mode becomes convenient.
Reference
When data is written to the NT631/NT631C, the data that has been stored up until
that point is lost.
S Method of execution
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the memory unit to the
NT631/NT631C by automatic transmission.
(1) Check that the NT631/NT631C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on
the memory unit as follows after installing the memory unit in
NT631/NT631C.
1
2
3 4
OFF
1
2
3
4
OFF
SW1
SW2
SW2-3
ON: Bank 1
OFF: Bank 0
It is not strictly necessary to set SW2-2 to “OFF” (to disable writing to the
memory unit), but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the
event of misoperation.
(2) Switch the NT631/NT631C power ON.
The screen data is automatically written into the PT.
The messages “Preparing”, “Transmitting”, “Verifying” and “Finished” are
displayed on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.
When messages “Preparing”, “Transmitting”, and “Verifying” are displayed,
the RUN LED flashes, and when the message “Finished” is displayed, the
RUN LED lights.
(3) Switch the NT631/NT631C power OFF, and remove the memory unit.
To operate NT631/NT631C continuously, switch the NT631/NT631C power
back ON.
59
Section 3-6
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C without V1)
Reading and Writing Data by Manual Transmission
In this method, the direction of transmission and area of the memory unit used are
set by touch switch operations at the NT631/NT631C. Transmission can be executed while checking the settings.
Reference
When data is written to the NT631/NT631C or memory unit, the data that has been
stored up until that point is lost.
S Method of execution
Use the following procedure to read and write screen data using manual transmission.
(1) Check that the NT631/NT631C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on
the memory unit as follows.
1
2
3 4
1
2
3
4
OFF
OFF
SW1
SW2
Setting of SW2-3 not relevant
In order to avoid loss of data in the event of misoperation, it is advisable to
set SW2-1 and SW2-2 so as to disable writing to the unit from which the data
is to be read.
(2) Switch the NT631/NT631C power ON.
The screen shown below is displayed.
(Example)
“Current PT Screen Data”
The comment for the screen data in the NT631/NT631C is displayed
here.
“Current Memory Unit Screen Data”
The comments for the screen data in each area are displayed here.
Pressing the “Trans. Direction Change” and “Bank Change” touch switches
changes the selections for the direction of transmission and the area of the
memory unit used.
(3) Press “Execute”.
The data is transmitted.
The messages “Preparing”, “Transmitting”, “Verifying”, and “Finished” are
displayed in accordance with the progress of data transmission.
(4) Switch the NT631/NT631C power OFF, remove the memory unit, then
switch the NT631/NT631C power back ON.
60
Section 3-6
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C without V1)
Errors When Using a Memory Unit
If an error occurs when using the memory unit, the NT631/NT631C operates as
follows.
S The details of the error and remedial action are displayed on the screen.
S The continuous buzzer sounds.
S The RUN LED flashes.
If a protect setting error occurs when executing manual transmission, it is possible
to return to the memory unit manual transmission screen by pressing the OK touch
switch, but in the case of other errors, the status described above remains in effect
until the NT631/NT631C power is turned OFF or reset.
When an error occurs, take remedial action by referring to the table below.
Error
Probable Cause
Remedial Action
Mode setting error
DIP switches SW1-1 to
SW1-3 are all OFF, or
more than one is ON.
Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, set the memory unit DIP
switches correctly, then turn the
NT631/NT631C power back ON.
Protect setting error
(automatic
transmission)
Writing to the data write
destination has been
prohibited by the setting
of SW2-1 or SW2-2.
Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, set the memory unit DIP
switches correctly, then turn the
NT631/NT631C power back ON.
Protect setting error
(manual
transmission)
Writing to the data write
destination has been
prohibited by the setting
of SW2-1 or SW2-2.
Perform either of the following
procedures.
S Press the OK touch switch to return
to the memory unit manual transmission screen, make the correct
settings, then try again.
S Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, correct the DIP switches settings of the memory unit, then turn
the power back ON.
Flash memory error
An error occurred during
initialization of the
NT631/NT631C or
memory unit flash
memory, or during write
processing.
Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, then back ON. If the error
recurs, the flash memory at the write
destination may be faulty. In this
case, replace the unit.
Verify error
An error occurred during
verification processing at
the flash memory of the
NT631/NT631C or the
memory unit.
Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, then back ON. If the error
recurs, the flash memory at the write
destination may be faulty. In this
case, replace the unit.
61
SECTION 4
Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port
This section describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-232C port of the NT631/NT631C.
4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1 Host Types and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-2 Connecting Directly between RS-232C Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
65
87
63
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
The method for connecting between the RS-232C port of the PT and the RS-232C
port of the host is as follows.
The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON PCs
(By using the memory link method, a connection can be made to any arbitrary
RS–232 unit). When making a connection to a host other than OMRON PCs, refer
to the “PC Connection” (V042-E1S Direct connection between the RS-232C ports using an RS-232C cable (page
126)
This is the easiest connection method. Depending on the host to which the connection is to be made, it may be possible to use OMRON cables with connectors.
NT631/NT631C
Host
RS-232C cable (max. 15 m)
Reference
64
The CS1 series CPU cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT link method.
Use the 1:N connection NT link method instead to make the 1:1 connection. For
details, refer to “NT link (1:N) method” (page 80).
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1-1
Host Types and Settings
The types of host that can be connected to a PT by using the RS-232C ports of
both units, and the settings to be made at the host, are described here.
When Using the Host Link Method
S Compatible host units
Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the host link function built in.
S In the CS1 series, the host link method can be used by installing a serial communication board. In addition, some C200HX/HG/HE (–Z) have an integral CPU
that can be connected in the host link method by installing a communication
board.
Check the model and series of the PC, the type of installed serial communication
board, the serial communication unit, and the host link unit at the connection end
before making a connection.
The host units that can be connected to the NT631/NT631C by the host link
method using the RS-232C ports of both units are indicated in the table below.
PLC Series
CS1 Series
Units with Built-in Host Link
Function
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67–E
CPUs Connectable with Host
Link Units or Expansion Communication Board
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E
Host Link Unit/
Commu
nication Board
CS1W-SCB41-E
Connectable to
CS1G
CS1H
65
C200H-CPU01/02/03/11/
21/22/23/31-E
C120–LK201-EV1
C1000H–CPU01-EV1
C2000H–CPU01–EV1
C200H
C1000H
C2000H
C200H-CPU01/2/03/11/
21/22/23/31-E
C200HS-CPU01/03/21/23/
31/33-E
C200HE-CPU11/32/42–E
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-ZE
C200H-LK201-EV1
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63–ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E
C200HX–CPU34/44/54/64
65/85-ZE
C200H
C200HS
C200HE
C200HE-Z
C200HG
C200HG-Z
C200HX
C200HX–Z
C200HS-CPU21/23/31/33
C Series
C200HS
C200HE-CPU42
C20HE-CPU42-Z
C200HG-CPU43/63
C200HG-CPU43/63-Z
C200HE-CPU32/42-E
C200HE-CPU32/42-ZE
C200HG–CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG–CPU33/43/53/63–ZE
C200HX-CPU44/64
C200HX-CPU44/64/65/85-Z
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64–E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64/
65/85-ZE
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000HF-CPUA1-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C200HW-COM02/04/
C200HE
05/06-EV1 C200HE-Z
C200HG
C200HG-Z
C200HX
C200HX-Z
C500-LK201-EV1
C1000H
C2000H
C500-LK203
C1000H (F)
C2000H
CPM1–10/20/30CDRCPM1
+CPM1-CIF01
CPM1A-10/20/30/40CD
+CPM1-CIF01
CQM1-CPU21
CQM1-CPU41/42/43/44-V1
66
CQM1
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
PLC Series
CV Series
(*1)
Units with Built-in Host Link
Function
Host Link Unit/
Commu
nication Board
CV500-LK201
Connectable to
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1 Series
CVM1-CPU11–EV2
(*1)
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CompoBus/S
master
control unit
CPUs Connectable with Host
Link Units or Expansion Communication Board
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21–EV2
CV500–LK201
SRM1-C02-V1
CV500
CVM1
SRM1
*1 CPUs of CVM1/CV-series PCs without the suffix “-EVj” cannot be connected.
S Settings at the host
When using the host link method, the settings shown below must be made at the
host (depending on the unit, some of these settings may not be necessary, or
settings not shown here may be necessary).
Item
Switch Setting
I/O port
RS-232C
Communications speed
Set the same speed as for the NT631/NT631C. (*1)
Transfer code
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits
Parity
Even
1-to-1/1-to-N
1-to-N(*2)
Instruction level
Level 1, 2, 3
Unit #
00
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to “Setting the Host Link
Method” (page 174).
*2 The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually
possible to connect more than one NT631/NT631C in a single host link.
The setting methods for each type of unit are described in the following.
67
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
S Connecting to a C series host link unit
C200H/C200HS/C200HE/HG/HX (-ZE) backplate mounted type:
C200H-LK201-V1
[Setting the front switches]
Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the
setting value window agree with the following.
LK201
XMT
RUN
RCV
ERROR
@ Unit # (SW1, SW2)
Set these switches to “0”.
SW2
SW1
0
0
5
2
SW3
SW4
@ Instruction level, parity, and transfer code (SW4)
Set this switch to “2”.
@ Communications speed (SW3)
Set this switch to “5” to select 9600 bps.
Set this switch to “6” to select 19200 bps.
[Setting the rear switches]
ON
CTS selector switch
External
0V (ON)
68
1
2
3
4
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP switch)
Set #3 to “ON”.
@ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to “0V” (ON).
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
C1000H(F)/C2000H backplate mounted type: 3G2A5-LK201-EV1
[Setting the front switches]
Local
Host
@ Mode control (key switch)
Set this to “host link”.
[Setting the rear switches]
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to “RS-232C”.
I/O port
@ Unit # (DIP SW1)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to “OFF” (“0”).
8
RS-422A
RS-232C
7
6
5
4
Synchronization
SW1
3
Internal
External
2
1
ON
Terminator
@ Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to “Internal”.
8
OFF
ON
7
6
5
4
CTS
3
0V
External
2
1
ON
SW2
@ Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to “0010” to select
19200 bps.
Set these switches to “1010” to select
9600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to “OFF” (“0”) (1-to-N).
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to “ON” (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to “0V” (ON).
69
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
C1000H/C2000H backplate mounted type: C500-LK203
[Setting the rear switches]
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to “RS-232C”.
5V supply
ON
OFF
@ Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-7)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-7 to “OFF” (“0”).
8
7
I/O port
6
RS-422A
RS-232C
5
4
SW1
3
2
Synchronization
Internal
External
1
ON
Terminator
@ Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to “Internal”.
8
OFF
ON
7
6
5
4
CTS
3
0V
External
2
1
ON
SW2
@ Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to “0010” to select
19200 bps.
Set these switches to “1010” to select
9600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to “OFF” (“0”) (1-to-N).
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to “ON” (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to “0V” (ON).
70
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
C200H/C1000H/C2000H CPU mounting type: 3G2A6-LK201-EV1
[Setting the rear switches]
@ Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-5)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to “OFF” (0).
* Parity is fixed at Even Parity. Transfer code is
fixed at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits.
SW1
@ Communications speed (DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to “0010” to select 19200 bps.
Set these switches to “1010” to select 9600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
SW2
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to “OFF” (“0”) (1-to-N).
SW3
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to “ON” (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ CTS selection (DIP SW3-1 and SW3-2)
Set SW3-1 to “ON” (1), and SW3-2 to “OFF” (0).
(Set this always to “0V”.)
@ Synchronization (DIP SW3-3 to SW3-6)
Set SW3-3, SW3-5, and SW3-6 to “ON” (1), and
SW3-4 to “OFF” (0). (Set these to “Internal”.)
71
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
S Connecting to a CVM1/CV series host link unit
CVM1/CV series backplane mounted type: CV500-LK201
A CVM1/CV series host link unit (CV500-LK201) has two connectors (communication ports 1 and 2). Either of these ports can be used for connection to an
NT631/NT631C by the RS-232C method. However, since the connectors at
these ports are of different types, a cable that matches the connector must be
prepared.
- Communication port 1
Communication port 1 is a 25-pin connector for RS-232C use only.
- Communication port 2
Communication port 2 is a 9-pin connector which allows selection of the
RS-232C or RS-422A method. When this port is used with the RS-232C method, the I/O port selector switch on the front of the unit must be set to “RS-232C”
(the upper position).
[CPU bus unit settings]
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series host link unit, set the following communication conditions for the CPU bus unit settings.
Item
Setting at Host
Communications speed
Set the same speed as set at the NT631/NT631C(*1)
Transfer code
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits
Parity
Even
1-to-1, 1-to-N
1-to-N(*2)
Instruction level
Level 1, 2, 3
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to “Setting the Host Link
Method” (page174).
*2 The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually
possible to connect more than one NT631/NT631C in a single host link.
Set the CPU bus unit settings directly from a peripheral tool (e.g. SYSMAC support software).
For details on the CPU bus unit settings, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV series
Host Link Unit User’s Manual (W205-E1-j).
72
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
[Setting the front switches]
Communications port 1
(RS-232C)
Communications port 2
(RS-232C/RS-422A)
I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
@ Unit # (SW3, SW4)
When using communication port 2, set these
switches to “0”.
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to “RS-232C”.
@ CTS selection (DIP SW2 and SW3)
Set SW2 or SW3 to “ON”. (Set this always to “0V”.)
To use communication port 1, set SW2. To use
communication port 2, set SW3.
RS-422A
@ Communication condition setting (DIP SW1)
Set this switch to “OFF”.
Communication is executed in accordance with the
CPU bus unit system settings made at the PC. The
initial values for the system settings are as follows.
- Communications speed: 9600 bps
- Parity: Even
- Xon/Xoff control: Not executed
- Communication method: Full duplex
- Stop bits: 2 stop bits
- Data length: 7 bits
S Connecting to a CS1 series serial communication unit
CS1 series backplate mounted type: CS1W–SCU21–E
[Setting the front switches]
Set the unit number of the serial communication unit by using the rotary switch located on the front panel. Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the
values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following.
SCU21
RDY
ERH
SD2
RD2
RUN
ERC
SD1
RD1
UNIT
No. 32410
FE
D
C
567 9AB
8
Set the unit number to “0” through “F” so
that it will not overlap with the numbers
used in other units.
73
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
[Allocation DM area settings for CPU]
Settings are written from the peripheral tool (a programming console or CX–Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the CPU.
After the settings are written, they become effective by turning the power ON, restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the settings
are shown.
m=DM30000+100
Allocation DM
area
H)
74
Port 1
Port 2
m
m+10
m+1
m+11
m+2
m+3
Writing Value
Settings
8000
host link mode, 2 stop bits, even parity, data
length 7 bits
0000
Communication speed 9600 bps.
0007
Communication speed 19200 bps.
m+12
0000
Transmit delay time 0 ms.
m+13
0000
No CTS control Unit No.0 for host link
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
S Connecting to a CPU
C-series CVM1/CV-series (-EVj)
⋅ CV500-CPU01-EV1/CV1000-CPU01–EV1/CV2000-CPU01-EV1
⋅ CVM1-CPU01-EV2/CVM1-CPU11-EV2/CVM1-CPU21-EV2
- PC system settings
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series CPU, set the following communication
conditions for the “PC system settings”.
Item
Setting at Host
Communications speed
Set the same speed as set at the NT631/NT631C(*1)
Stop bit
2 stop bits
Parity
Even
Data length
ASCII 7 bits
Unit #
00
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to “Setting the Host Link
Method” (page 174).
Either set PC system settings directly from a peripheral tool (e.g. SYSMAC
support software), or transmit the PC system settings made at a peripheral
tool to the CPU.
For details on the PC system settings, refer to the SYSMAC
CVM1/CV500/1000/2000 User’s Manual (Ladder) (W202-E1-j).
[Setting the front switches]
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to “RS-232C”.
I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
RS-422A
@ System setting (DIP SW4)
To effect the existing DIP switch settings,
set SW4 to “ON”.
To effect the existing PC system
settings, set SW4 to “OFF”.
Note
For CPUs manufactured before or during
June 1995 (lot No. jj65), the existing
DIP switch settings differ from the
existing PC system settings as follows.
- DIP switch settings:
2,400 bps, 1 stop bit, even parity, 7 bit
data length
- PC system settings:
9600 bps, 2 stop bits, even parity, 7 bit
data length
For CPUs manufactured from July 1995
onward (lot No. jj75), the stipulated
values in the DIP switch settings also
are 9600 bps and 2 stop bits.
75
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
C-series C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE), CPM1, CQM1 CPUs, SRM1
Connect to the built-in RS-232C port of the CPU, or the RS-232C port (port A, B)
of the communication board. Note that the connection to a CPM1 must be made
via an RS-232C adapter (CPM1-CIF01).
Reference
Connection to the peripheral port of the CPU is not possible.
- PC system setting area settings
When connecting to a C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE), CPM1, or CQM1
CPU, or SRM1, set the following communication conditions for the PC system
setting area.
Item
Setting at Host
Communication mode
Host link mode
Communications speed
Set the same speed as set at the NT631/NT631C(*1)
Stop bit
2 stop bits
Parity
Even
Data length
ASCII 7 bits
Unit #
00
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to “Settings the Host
Link Method” (page174).
Set the PC system setting area settings directly from a peripheral tool (e.g.
SYSMAC support software).
For details on operations relating to the PC system setting area, refer to the
manual for the PC which is used.
The PC system setting area word numbers and settings to be made depending
on the unit and port to which the connection is made are shown below.
When using the built-in RS-232C port of C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE), CQM1, SRM1
Word #
Writing Value
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6646 0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
DM6648 0000
76
Settings
DM6645 0001
Unit # 00
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
When using port A of the communication board of C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE)
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
DM6555 0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6556 0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
DM6558 0000
Unit # 00
When using port B of the communication board of C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE)
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
DM6550 0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6551 0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
DM6553 0000
Unit # 00
When using a CPM1
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
DM6650 0001
Host link mode
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6651 0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
DM6653 0000
Unit # 00
[Setting the DIP switches on the front of a C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE)]
When using a C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE) or CQM1, the DIP switches on the front
panel must be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the PC system setting area (data memory) effective.
C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E
1
2
3
4
5
6
ON
OFF
ON
CQM1
RS-232C port communication condition setting
Set DIP SW5 to “OFF” to make the settings
made in PC system setting effective.
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
ON
OFF
[Setting the switches on a CPM1 RS-232C adapter]
CPM1CIF01
CPM1
Set the mode setting switch to “HOST” (upper position).
77
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
CS1 series CPU type : CS1G/H–CPU
Connect to the built–in RS–232C port of the CPU, or the RS–232C port of the communication board. Note that the connection to a peripheral port must be made via
an RS–232C adapter (CS1W–CN118) specially designed for connecting to a peripheral port.
S PC system settings
When connecting to a CS1 series CPU, set the following communication conditions for the PC system setting area. Since the settings shown below are the PC
default settings for the CPU, no change to the PC system setting is necessary as
long as the communication speed is maintained at 9600 bps.
Item
Setting at Host
Communication speed
Set the same speed as set at the NT631/NT631C(*1)
Stop bits
2 stop bits
Parity
Even
Data length
ASCII 7 bits
Unit No. for the host link
00
*1: Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to ”Settings the Host
Link Method” (page 174).
When the communication speed is set to 19200 bps., the PC system settings
of the CPU need to be changed.
Either set the PC system settings directly from a peripheral tool (programming
console), or transmit the PC system settings made at a peripheral tool (CX–Programmer) to the CPU.
For details on PC system settings, refer to the “SYSMAC CS1 Series Operation
Manual” (W339-E1-
When using the built–in RS–232C port of CS1G/H
Word #
160
161
163
Writing Value
Settings
8000
Host link mode, data length 7 bits,
2 stop bits, even parity
0000
Communication speed: 9600 bps.
0007
Communication speed: 19200 bps.
0000
Unit #00
When using the peripheral port of CS1G/H
Word #
144
145
147
78
Writing Value
Settings
8000
Host link mode, data length 7 bits,
2 stop bits, even parity
0000
Communication speed: 9600 bps.
0007
Communication speed: 19200 bps.
0000
Unit #00
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
[Setting the front switches]
Set the CPU DIP switches to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT631/NT631C is
connected to.
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMM
SYSMAC CS1G
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
CPU4 2
Peripheral port
DIP switches (inside the battery storage)
OPEN
This is used mainly for
MCPWR
connection to the peripheral
BUSY
Set SW4 to ON (establishing communication in
OPEN
tool.
accordance with PC system settings) when connecting
(This also supports the RS–232C
the NT631/NT631C to a peripheral port.
unit connection.)
PERIPHERAL
Set SW5 to OFF (establishing communication in
RS–232 port
accordance with PC system settings) when connecting
This is used mainly for
the NT631/NT631C to a peripheral port.
connection to the RS–232C
unit.
PORT
(This also supports the
CX–Programmer.)
S Connecting to CS1 series serial communication board
INNER board with RS–232C port equipped for CS1 series CPU type :
CS1W-SCB41/21
[Allocation DM area settings for CPU]
Settings are written from the peripheral tool (a programming console or CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the CPU.
After the settings are written, they become effective by turning the power ON, restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the settings
are shown.
Allocation DM
area
H)
Port 1
Port 2
DM32000
DM32010
DM32001
DM32011
DM32002
DM32003
Writing Value
Settings
8000
Host link mode, 2 stop bits, even parity, data
length 7 bits
0000
Communication speed 9600 bps.
0007
Communication speed 19200 bps.
DM32012
0000
Transmit delay time 0 ms.
DM32013
0000
No CTS control Unit No.0 for host link
79
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
When Using the NT Link (1:1) Method
S Compatible host units
Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the NT link (1:1) function built in.
There are also some C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) CPUs that can be connected by the
NT link (1:1) method by installing a communication board.
Check the model and series of the PC against the type of CPU before making the
connections.
The host units that can be connected to the NT631/NT631C by the NT link (1:1)
method using the RS-232C ports of both units are indicated in the table below.
PC Series
CPUs with Built-in
NT Link Function
CPUs Connectable with
Expansion Communication
Board(*1)
C200HS-CPU21-E, -EC
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
C series
Connectable to
C200HS
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HE (-ZE)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HG (-ZE)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
X200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
C200HX (-ZE)
CPM1-10CDR-j (*2)
CPM1-20CDR-j (*2)
CPM1-30CDR-j (*2)
CPM1A-10CDj-j (*2)
CPM1A-20CDj-j (*2)
CPM1A-30CDj-j (*2)
CPM1A-40CDj-j (*2)
CPM1
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1-CPU45-EV1
CQM1
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV500
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000
CVM1 series (*3)
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1
CompoBus/S
master control unit
SRM1-C02-V1
SRM1
CV
series (*3)
*1 One of the following communication boards is required:
C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1.
*2 A CPM1-CIF01 adapter is required.
*3 CPUs of CVM1/CV series PCs without the suffix “–EVj” cannot be connected.
Reference
80
CS1 series CPU cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT link method.
Use the 1:N connection NT link method instead to make the 1:1 connection. For
details, refer to “NT link (1:N) method” (page 83).
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
S Settings at the host
The setting methods for each unit are as follows.
S Connecting to a C-series C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE), CPM1, CQM1,
SRM1
[PC system setting area settings]
Write the “PC system setting area” (data memory) settings directly from a peripheral tool (e.g. SYSMAC support software) in accordance with the host
model and port.
Host Model
Word #
RS-232C port of C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE), CQM1, SRM1
DM6645
Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) (*1)
DM6555
C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) (*1)
DM6550
Port B of
CPM1
Writing Value
4000
Setting
Use NT link
(1:1)
DM6650
*1 RS-232C port of the communication board
For details on operations relating to the “PC system setting area”, refer to the
manual for the PC which is used.
[Setting the DIP switches on the front of a C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE)]
When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) or CQM1, the DIP switches on the front
panel must be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the “PC
system setting area” (data memory) effective.
C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E
1
2
3
4
5
6
ON
OFF
ON
CQM1
RS-232C port communication condition setting
Set DIP SW5 to “OFF” to make the settings
made in PC system setting effective.
ON
6
5
4
3
2
1
ON
OFF
[Setting the switches on a CPM1 RS-232C adapter]
CPM1CIF01
Set the mode setting switch to “NT” (lower position).
81
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
S Connecting to CVM1/CV series (-EVj)
Set the DIP switches on the front panel as follows.
I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to “RS-232C”.
DIP switch setting (SW3)
6
5
4
3
2
1
OFF
Set SW3 to “use NT link”
(“ON”, right side).
ON
ON
When using the CVM1/CV series, “CPU execution processing (execution control 2)” in the PC system settings must be set to “Simultaneous processing”.
82
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
When Using the NT Link (1:N) Method
S Compatible host units
The OMRON PCs that can be connected using the NT link (1:N) method are
CS1 series CS1G/H and C series C200HX/HG/HE (–Z) only.
Check the model and series of the PC against the type of CPU or communications board before making the connections.
The host units that can be connected to the NT631/NT631C by the NT link (1:N)
method using the RS-232C ports of both units are indicated in the table below.
PC
Series
CS1
series
CPUs Connectable with
Expansion
Communication Board(*1)
CPUs with Built-in
NT Link Function
Connectable to
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E
CS1G
45-E
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/
CS1H
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/
66/67-E
66/67-E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*2)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E(*2)
C200HE (-ZE)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG (-ZE)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE(*2)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE(*2)
C200HX (-ZE)
C series
*1 One of these serial communication boards, CS1W-SCB21-E or CS1W-SCB41-E, is
required.
*2 One of the following communication boards is required:
C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06 (-EV1)
S Settings at the host
<C-series C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE)>
[PC system setting area settings]
Write the communication conditions directly to the “PC system setting area”
(data memory) using a peripheral tool (e.g. SYSMAC support software).
For details on setting the “PC system setting area settings”, refer to the “SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE) Programming Manual” (W303-E1-j).
Make the settings in the words shown below according to the port used.
Connection to
C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE)
Built-in RS-232C port
Communication board
Port A
Communication board
Port B
Word #
Writing Value
Setting
DM6645
DM6555 5j00
Use NT link (1:N)
j = highest unit number of the
connected PTs (1 to 7) (*1)
DM6550
*1 When using C200HE (-ZE), the range for PT unit numbers is 1 to 3.
83
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
CS1 series CPU type : CS1G/H–CPU
S PC system settings
When connecting to a CS1 series CPU, set the following communication conditions for the PC system setting area, in accordance with the communication port
to be used.
When using the built-in RS-232C port of CS1G/H
Word #
160
Writing Value
8200
NT link (1:N) mode
= The largest model
number of the connected PT
(0 – 7)
000
166
Settings
When using the peripheral port of CS1G/H
Word #
144
146
Writing Value
8200
Settings
NT link (1:N) mode
= The largest model
number of the connected PT
(0 – 7)
000
When connecting PT with its model number 0, 2–5 to the built-in RS-232C port, for
example, set the value 8200 Hex to 160 CH, and 0005 Hex to 166CH.
Either set PC system settings directly from a peripheral tool (programming console), or transmit the PC system settings made at a peripheral tool (CX-Programmer) to the CPU.
For details on PC system settings, refer to the “SYSMAC CS1 Series Operation
Manual” (W339-E1[Setting the front switches]
Set the CPU DIP switch to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT631/NT631C is
connected to.
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMM
SYSMAC CS1G
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
CPU4 2
Peripheral port
DIP switches (inside the battery storage)
This is used mainly for
connection to the
peripheral tool.
OPEN
MCPWR
the NT631/NT631C to a peripheral port.
RS-232C unit connection.)
PERIPHERAL
Set SW5 to OFF (establishing communication in
This is used mainly for
accordance with PC system settings) when connecting
connection to the
the NT631/NT631C to a peripheral port.
RS-232C unit.
(This also supports the
PORT
CX-Programmer.)
84
Set SW4 to ON (establishing communication in
accordance with PC system settings) when connecting
(This also supports the
RS–232 port
BUSY
OPEN
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
S Connecting to the CS1 series serial communication board
INNER board with RS-232C port equipped for CS1 series CPU type :
CS1W-SCB41/21-E
[CPU allocation DM area settings]
Setting is written from the peripheral tool (a programming console or CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the CPU. After
the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON, restarting the
unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are
shown.
Allocation DM
area
H)
Port 1
Port 2
DM32000
DM32010
DM32006
DM32016
Writing Value
8200
Settings
NT link (1:N) mode
000
model number of the connected PT (0 – 7)
When connecting the PT with its model number 3–6 to port 1, for example, set the
value 8200 Hex to DM32000CH, and 0006 Hex to DM32006CH.
85
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
S Connecting to CS1 series serial communication unit
A CS1 series backplane mounted type : CS1W-SCU21-E
[Setting the front switches]
Set the unit number of the serial communication unit by using the rotary switch located on the front panel. Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the
values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following.
SCU21
RUN
ERC
SD1
RD1
RDY
ERH
SD2
RD2
UNIT
No. 32410
FE
D
C
567 9AB
8
Set the unit number to “0” through “F” so
that it will not overlap with the numbers
used in other units.
[Allocation DM area settings for CPU]
Setting is written from the peripheral tool (a programming console or CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the CPU. After
the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON, restarting the
unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are
shown.
m=DM30000+100*unit number (CH)
Allocation DM
area
H)
Port 1
Port 2
m
m+10
m+6
86
m+16
Writing Value
8200
Settings
NT link (1:N) mode
000
model number of the connected PT (0 – 7)
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
When Using the Memory Link Method
In the memory link method, the connection can be made to a personal computer
with RS-232 and an FA computer, etc.
When connecting to the host in the memory link method, it is necessary to create a
program for the memory link at the host side.
The following are the communication conditions that can be used in the memory
link method. For the host (a personal computer, an FA computer, etc.), its setting
should be compatible to one of the communication conditions listed in the following
table. Set the same communication conditions at the NT631/NT631C by the
memory switch. (page 179).
Item
Settings at the host
Input/Output port
RS-232C
Communication speed
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps.
Data bits length
7 bits, 8 bits
Stop bits length
1 bits, 2 bits
Parity
None, even, odd
Flow control
None, RS/CS, XON/XOFF
87
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1-2
Connecting Directly between RS-232C Ports
The method for connection between the RS-232C ports of the NT631/NT631C
and the host is described here.
Host link unit/CPU
NT631/NT631C
SYSMAC
C-series PC,
CVM1/CV-series PC,
SRM1
Serial port A or B
(RS-232C, 9-pin type)
9-pin connector
9-pin connector
or
25-pin connector
Cable with RS-232C connectors
S Recommended connector cable
When making the connector cable, as far as possible use the recommended
connectors, connector hoods, and cables indicated in the table below. Some
units come supplied with one connector and one connector hood.
Check the required components and prepare them in advance.
Name
Model
Remarks
Delivered with
CS1-series CS1G/CS1H
XM2A-0901
9-pin
Made by OMRON
C-series CQM1, C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE),
CVM1/CV-series CPUs
CV500-LK201
Connector
XM24-2501
25-pin
Made by OMRON
C500-LK203
CV500-LK201
C200H-LK201-EV1
DB-25P
25-pin
Made by JAE
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
C-series CQM1, C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE- (ZE),
XM2S-0911
9-pin
Made by OMRON
XM2S-0913
9–pin
Made by OMRON
XM2S-0911-E
9–pin
Made by OMRON
XM2S-2511
25-pin
Made by OMRON
C500-LK203
CV500-LK201
C200H-LK201-EV1
DB-C2-J9
25-pin
Made by JAE
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
AWG28 5P
IFVV-SB
Multi-core shielded cable
Made by Fujikura, Ltd.
CVM1/CV-series CPUs
CV500-LK201
Connector
hood
Cable
Notice
88
CS1-series CS1G/CS1H
Multi-core shielded cable
CO-MA-VV-SB
Made by Hitachi Cable,
5P 28AWG
Ltd.
After connecting a communication cable, always secure it with the screws.
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
S OMRON cables with connectors
When a connection is made at serial port A in other than the memory link method, OMRON cables with connectors shown below are available.
Model
Cable Length
XW2Z-200S
2m
XW2Z-500S
5m
XW2Z-200T
2m
XW2Z-500T
5m
Connector Specification
9-pin ⇔ 25 pin
9-pin ⇔ 9-pin
When a connection is made to a personal computer at serial port A in the
memory link method, OMRON cable with connectors shown below are available.
Notice
Model
Cable Length
Connector Specification
CV500–CN228
2m
9-pin ⇔ 25 pin
XW2Z–S002
2m
9-pin ⇔ 9 pin
The cable’s tensile load is 30 N. Do not subject it to loads greater than this.
Wiring for a Host Link Unit (25-pin) Connection
Applicable units : C200H-LK201-EV1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C500-LK203
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
CV500-LK201 (communication port 1)
Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port A:
XW2Z-200S (9-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-500S (9-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 5 m)
CVM1/CV-series host link units (CV500-LK201) have two types of connector; a
25-pin connector (communication port 1), and a 9-pin connector (communication port 2). When using communication port 2, refer to “Wiring for Other Connections (other than the memory link method)” (page91).
89
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
[Serial port A, B]
1
6
NT631/NT631C
Abbreviation
FG
RS-232C
interface
Pin
number
Connector
hood
9
Shielding wire
Pin
number
Abbreviation
1
FG
1
2
SD
SD
2
3
RD
RD
3
4
RS
RS
4
5
CS
CS
5
+5V
6
SG
5
PC (host link unit)
(9-pin type)
*
6
–
7
SG
7
8
–
8
–
–
9
–
–
–
–
–
ER
1
14
13
25
RS-232C
interface
(25-pin type)
*
90
For units that have a CTS setting selector switch, RS and CS do not have to be
shorted if this switch is set to “0V”.
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Wiring for Other Connections
Applicable units :
CV500-LK201 (communication port 2)
CPM1-10CDR-j
CPM1-20CDR-j
CPM1-30CDR-j
CPM1A-10CDj-j
CPM1A-20CDj-j
CPM1A-30CDj-j
CPM1A-40CDj-j
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1-CPU45-EV1
CS1G–CPU42–E
CS1G–CPU43–E
CS1G–CPU44–E
CS1G–CPU45–E
CS1H–CPU63–E
CS1H–CPU64–E
CS1H–CPU65–E
CS1H–CPU66–E
CS1H–CUP67–E
C200HS-CPU21-E, -EC
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
SRM1-C02-V1
Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port A:
XW2Z-200T (9-pin ⇔ 9-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-500T (9-pin ⇔ 9-pin, 5 m)
CPUs of CVM1/CV-series PCs without the suffix “-EVj” cannot be connected by
any connection method.
91
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
[Serial port A, B]
1
6
NT631/NT631C
PC (Host link unit)
1
6
5
9
1
Pin
Abbreviation number
Connector
FG
hood
RS-232C
interface
5
92
9
Shielding wire
Pin
Abbreviation
number
Connector
FG
hood
–
1
2
SD
SD
2
3
RD
RD
3
4
RS
RS
CS
4
5
CS
5
6
–
+5V
6
7
–
–
7
8
–
–
8
9
SG
SG
9
(9-pin type)
RS-232C
interface
(9-pin type)
Section 4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Wiring for a Memory Link connection
Cables with connectors that can be used:
CV500–CN228 (9–pin⇔25–pin, 2 m)
XW2Z–S002 (9–pin⇔9–pin, 2 m)
[Serial port A, B]
Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the following diagram.
Host side
NT631/NT631C
1
6
Abbreviation Pin number
RS-232C
connector
5
9
Shielding wire
Abbreviation
Connector
hood
FG
Connector
hood
−
1
SD
SD
2
RD
RD
3
RS
RS
4
CS
CS
5
SG
+5V
6
−
7
−
8
SG
9
RS-232C
connector
(9-pin type)
93
SECTION 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port
This section describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-422A/485 port of the NT631/NT631C.
5-1
5-2
94
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1 The type of host and settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-2 1:1 Connection between RS-422A/485 at the NT631/NT631C and RS-232C at the Host
5-1-3 1:N Connection between RS-422A/485 at the NT631/NT631C and RS-232C at the Host
5-1-4 Recommended Connectors, Cables, and Crimp Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-5 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS–422A/485 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1 Host Types and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2 Direct Connection between RS-422A Ports at Both Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-3 Direct Connection between RS-485 Ports at Both Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-4 1:N Connection among RS-422A Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-5 1:N Connection among RS-485 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-6 Recommended Connectors, Cables and Crimp Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-7 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
95
97
102
108
110
111
112
131
136
137
140
143
144
Section 5-1
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
5-1
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
The methods for connecting the RS-422A/485 port of the NT631/NT631C and the
RS-232C port of the host are described here. There are the following methods.
The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON PCs
(By using the memory link method, a connection can be made to any arbitrary
RS-232 unit). When making a connection to a host other than OMRON PCs, refer
to the “PC Connection” (V042-E1-).
Method in which the RS-422A port of the NT631/NT631C and the RS-232C port
of the host are connected in a 1:1 connection via an RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (page 98).
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to 500 m.
PT
RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit
RS-422A cable
(max. 500 m)
Host
RS-232C
cable
(max. 2 m)
Method in which the RS-485 port of the NT631/NT631C and the RS-232C port of
the host are connected in a 1:1 connection via an RS-232C/RS-422A convertor
unit (page 98).
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to 500 m. This
connection method can be used only with the NT link (1:N) method of type
RS-485.
PT
RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit
RS-485 cable
(max. 500 m)
Host
RS-232C
cable
(max. 2 m)
Method in which the RS-422A ports of multiple NT631/NT631Cs and the
RS-232C port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection via an
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (page 103).
This connection method is used with the RS-422A type NT link (1:N) method.
PT
RS-232C/RS422A
convertor unit
RS-422A cable
(max. total length
500 m)
Host
RS-232C
cable
(max. 2 m)
95
Section 5-1
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Method in which the RS-485 ports of multiple NT631/NT631Cs and the
RS-232C port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection via an
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (page 103).
This connection method is used with the RS-485 type NT link (1:N) method.
PT
RS-232C/RS422A
convertor unit
RS-485 cable
(max. total length
500 m)
Notice
Host
RS-232C
cable
(max. 2 m)
One end of the wire must always be connected to the host (PC), and there must be
no branching. Branching will cause problems such as transmission delays and
communication failures.
PC
PC
(At termination)
PC
Relay terminal block
Relay terminal block
Max. 2 m
NT631C
NT631
(Not at
(Not at
termination) termination)
NT631
(Not at
termination)
NT631
Example of Good Connection
Reference
5-1-1
NT631
NT631C
NT631
NT631
NT631C
NT631
(At
termination)
Examples of Bad Connections
CS1 series CPUs cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT link method.
Use the 1:N connection NT link method instead to make the 1:1 connection. For
details, refer to “NT link (1:N) method” (page 83).
The type of host and settings
The using condition is the same as the connecting PT side RS-232C and the host
side RS-232C.
For the available type and settings of the host, refer to the pages listed below.
For the host link method, refer to “Host Link Method” (page 65).
For the NT link (1:1) method, refer to “NT Link (1:1) method” (page 80).
For the NT link (1:N) method, refer to “NT Link (1:N) method” (page 83).
For the memory link method, refer to “Memory Link Method” (page 87).
96
Section 5-1
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Settings at the RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit (NT-AL001)
When making a connection between RS-232C and RS-422A/485 ports using an
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit, set the DIP switches on the NT-AL001 as follows.
Example: the terminal resistor is active,
RS-422A, NT link (1:N).
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
omR on
NT-AL001
Built-in terminal resistor setting (DIP SW1-2)
If at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable, set this switch to ON (to
activate the built-in terminal resistor).
If not at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable, set this switch to OFF
(to inactivate the built-in terminal resistor).
2-wire type/4-wire type selection (DIP SW1-3, SW1-4)
For RS-422A, set both of these switches to OFF (4-wire type).
For RS-485, set both of these switches to ON (2-wire type).
Selection of RS-422A/485 send mode (DIP SW1-5, SW1-6)
For host link or NT link (1:1), set both of these switches to OFF.
(Always send)
For NT link (1:N), set SW1-5 to OFF and SW1-6 to ON.
(Sends when CS is “H”)
Notice
Read the manual supplied with the NT-AL001 carefully before using the unit.
97
Section 5-1
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
5-1-2
1:1 Connection between RS-422A/485 at the NT631/NT631C and
RS-232C at the Host
The connection method in which the RS-422A/485 port of an NT631/NT631C and
the RS-232C port of a host are connected via a convertor unit is described here.
An RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001) is used to convert between the
RS-232C and RS-422A communication methods.
Host link unit/CPU
NT631/NT631C
SYSMAC
CS1 series PC
C-series PC,
CVM1/CV-series PC, SRM1
Serial port B
(RS-422A/485,
terminal block)
RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
RS-422A/485 cable
(max. length: 500 m)
RS-232C cable
with connectors
RS-422A terminal block
Reference
9-pin connector or
25-pin connector
9-pin connector
When using RS-485 as a port for the NT631/NT631C, only NT link (1:N) method
can be used.
Connecting an NT631/NT631C and NT-AL001 (RS-422A)
NT631/NT631C
Host
NT-AL001
RS-422A
RDA
Abbreviation
TRM
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
NT-AL001 side
NT631/NT631C side
RS-422A
/485
terminal
block
Short-circuit
tool
Pin number Abbreviation
RDA (−)
6
RDA (−)
TRM
5
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
4
SDA (−)
SDA (−)
3
SDB (+)
SDB (+)
1
Functional
ground
RSA (−)
RS-422A
terminal
block
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
RSB (+)
RSB
Functional
ground
1
Shielding wire
24V
+DC
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not make the connection between the functional ground of the NT-AL001 and the shielding.
98
Section 5-1
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Connecting an NT631/NT631C and NT-AL001 (RS-485)
NT631/NT631C
NT-AL001
Host
RS-485
RDA
NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation
TRM
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RS-422A
/485
terminal
block
NT-AL001 side
Short-circuit
tool
Pin number Abbreviation
RDA (−)
6
RDA (−)
TRM
5
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
4
SDA (−)
SDA (−)
3
SDB (+)
SDB (+)
1
Functional
ground
RSA (−)
RS-422A
terminal
block
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
RSB (+)
RSB
1
Functional
ground
Shielding wire
24V
+DC
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not make the connection between the functional ground of the NT-AL001 and the shielding.
Reference
When using RS-485 as a port for the NT631/NT631C, only NT link (1:N) method
can be used.
99
Section 5-1
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Connecting an NT-AL001 and Host
Host
NT631/NT631C
NT-AL001
RS-232C
Wiring when connecting a host link unit (25-pin)
Applicable units:
C200H-LK201-V1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C500-LK203
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
CV500-LK201 (communication port 1)
Cables with connectors that can be used:
XW2Z-200S (9-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-500S (9-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 5 m)
CVM1/CV-series host link unit (CV500-LK201) has two types of connector: a
25-pin connector (communication port 1), and a 9-pin connector (communication port 2). When using the communication port, refer to “Wiring for Connections other than Memory Link” (page 101).
PC (host link unit) side
NT-AL001 side
1
RS-232C
connector
FG
Connector
hood
9
Shielding wire
Connector
hood
FG
1
FG
−
1
2
SD
SD
2
3
RD
RD
3
4
RS
RS
4
5
CS
CS
5
6
−
+5V
6
7
SG
−
7
8
−
−
8
−
−
SG
9
−
−
(9-pin type)
5
Abbreviation Pin number
Abbreviation Pin number
6
1
14
13
25
RS-232C
connector
−
−
−
20
ER
(25-pin type)
100
Section 5-1
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Wiring for Connections other than Memory Link
Applicable units:
CV500-LK201 (communication port 2)
CPM1-10CDR-
CPM1-20CDR-
CPM1-30CDR-
CPM1A-10CD-
CPM1A-20CD-
CPM1A-30CD-
CPM1A-40CD-
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1-CPU45-EV1
CS1G-CPU42-E
CS1G-CPU43-E
CS1G-CPU44-E
CS1G-CPU45-E
CS1H-CPU63-E
CS1H-CPU64-E
CS1H-CPU65-E
CS1H-CPU66-E
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HE-CPU32-E
C200HG-CPU33-E
C200HG-CPU53-E
C200HX-CPU34-E
C200HX-CPU54-E
C200HE-CPU32-ZE
C200HG-CPU33-ZE
C200HG-CPU53-ZE
C200HX-CPU34-ZE
C200HX-CPU54-ZE
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
SRM1-C02-V1
CS1H-CPU67-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
C200HE-CPU42-E
C200HG-CPU43-E
C200HG-CPU63-E
C200HX-CPU44-E
C200HX-CPU64-E
C200HE-CPU42-ZE
C200HG-CPU43-ZE
C200HG-CPU63-ZE
C200HX-CPU44-ZE
C200HX-CPU64-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1/CV-series CPUs whose model names do not have the suffix “-EV” cannot be connected by any connection method.
101
Section 5-1
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
NT-AL001 side
6
1
PC side
RS-232C
connector
9
5
FG
Connector
hood
−
1
1
−
SD
2
2
SD
RD
3
3
RD
RS
4
4
RS
CS
5
5
CS
+5V
6
6
(+5V)
−
7
7
−
−
8
8
−
SG
9
9
SG
Shielding wire
(9-pin type)
1
6
Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
FG
hood
Abbreviation Pin number
(9-pin type)
RS-232C
connector
When there is no +5 V output at the PC side
9
5
When using host link or NT link (1:1)
When there is +5 V output at the PC side
When using NT link (1:N)
- When using the host link or NT link (1:1) method, short the RS and CS terminals at the PC side with each other (leave the RS and CS terminals at the NTAL001 side open).
- When using the NT link (1:N), cross-connect the RS and CS terminals at the
NT-AL001 and PC sides.
If there is +5 V output at the PC side, no external power supply is required for
the NT-AL001.
Wiring for a Memory Link connection
Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the diagram shown below.
1
6
Abbreviation
Abbreviation Pin number
RS-232C
connector
FG
Connector
hood
Connector
hood
−
1
SD
SD
2
RD
RD
3
RS
RS
4
CS
CS
5
(+5V)
+5V
6
SG
−
7
−
8
SG
9
(9–pin type)
5
Host side
NT-AL001 side
RS-232C
connector
Shielding wire
9
No +5 V output is at the host side
A +5 V output is present at the host side
Since it is necessary to input a voltage of +5 V to the number 6 pin of NT–AL001,
supplying a voltage of 5 V from the host or an external voltage supply for NT–
AL001 is required.
102
Section 5-1
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
5-1-3
1:N Connection between RS-422A/485 at the NT631/NT631C and
RS-232C at the Host
The connection method in which the RS-422A/485 ports of multiple NT631/
NT631Cs are connected to the RS-232C port of one host in a 1:N connection is
described here.
An RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001) is used to convert between the
RS-232C and RS-422A/485 communication methods.
Host link unit/CPU
CS1G/H
C200HX/HG/HE-(ZE)
RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
9-pin connector
RS-422A/485 cable
(max. total length: 500 m)
RS-232C cable with
connectors
NT631/NT631C
RS-422A terminal
block
9-pin connector
Serial port B
(RS-422A/485, terminal block)
NT631/NT631C
NT631/NT631C
103
Section 5-1
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Connecting an NT631/NT631C and NT-AL001 (RS-422A)
The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay terminal
board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.
NT631/NT631C
NT-AL001
Host
RS-422A
RDA
NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation
TRM
RDA (−)
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RS-422A
/485
terminal
block
6
5
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
4
SDA (−)
SDA (−)
3
SDB (+)
SDB (+)
1
Functional
ground
RSA (−)
24V
+DC
8
RDA (−)
TRM
7
RS-422A
terminal
block
6
5
4
3
2
1
RSB (+)
RSB
NT-AL001 side
Pin number Abbreviation
Shielding wire
Functional
ground
Next PT
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not make the connections between the
functional ground of the NT-AL001 and the shielding.
104
Section 5-1
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Connecting an NT631/NT631C and NT-AL001 (RS-485)
The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay terminal
board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.
NT631/NT631C
NT-AL001
Host
RS-485
RDA
NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation
TRM
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RS-422A
/485
terminal
block
RDA (−)
6
RDA (−)
TRM
5
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
4
SDA (−)
SDA (−)
3
SDB (+)
SDB (+)
1
Functional
ground
RSA (−)
24V
+DC
8
7
RS-422A
terminal
block
6
5
4
3
2
1
RSB (+)
RSB
NT-AL001 side
Pin number Abbreviation
Shielding wire
Functional
ground
Next PT
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not make the connections between the
functional ground of the NT-AL001 and the shielding.
105
Section 5-1
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Connection between NT631/NT631C Units (RS-422A)
The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay terminal
board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.
NT631/NT631C
Host
NT-AL001
RS-422A
RDA
NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation
TRM
RDA (−)
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
24V
+DC
*
RS-422A
/485
terminal
block
NT631/NT631C side
Short-circuit tool
Abbreviation
RDA
TRM
RDA (−)
TRM
TRM
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
SDA (−)
SDA (−)
SDB (+)
SDB (+)
RSA (−)
RSA (−)
RSB (+)
RSB (+)
Functional
ground
Functional
ground
Shielding
wire
RDB
RS-422A
/485
terminal
block
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
24V
+DC
Short TRM and RDA terminals of the NT631/NT631C at the end of the RS-422A
cable ( marked in the above figure) using the short-circuit tool supplied with the
NT631/NT631C.
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, make the connection between the connector
hood and the shielding at one side only.
106
Section 5-1
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Connection between NT631/NT631C Units (RS-485)
The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay terminal
board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.
NT631/NT631C
Host
RS-485
NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation
RDA
RDA (−)
TRM
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
24V
+DC
*
RS-422A
/485
terminal
block
NT631/NT631C side
Short-circuit tool
Abbreviation
RDA
RDA (−)
TRM
TRM
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
SDA (−)
SDA (−)
SDB (+)
SDB (+)
RSA (−)
RSA (−)
RSB (+)
RSB (+)
Functional
ground
Functional
ground
Shielding wire
TRM
RS-422A
/485
terminal
block
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
24V
+DC
Short TRM and RDA terminals of the NT631/NT631C at the end of the RS-485 cable
( marked in the above figure) using the short-circuit tool supplied with the
NT631/NT631C.
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, make the connection between the connector
hood and the shielding at the one side only.
107
Section 5-1
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Connecting an NT-AL001 and Host
NT631/NT631C
Host
NT-AL001
RS-232C
Wiring when connecting a CS1 series CS1G/H serial communication board, C
series C200HX/HG/HE (–Z) communication board.
Applicable units:
CS1G-CPU42-E
CS1G-CPU44-E
CS1H-CPU63-E
CS1H-CPU65-E
CS1G-CPU43-E
CS1G-CPU45-E
CS1H-CPU64-E
CS1H-CPU66-E
CS1H-CPU67-E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
6
1
NT-AL001 side
PC side
Abbreviation Pin number
RS-232C
connector
5
9
Shielding wire
FG
Connector
hood
Connector
hood
−
1
1
−
SD
2
2
SD
RD
3
3
RD
RS
4
4
RS
CS
5
5
CS
+5V
6
6
+5V
−
7
7
−
−
8
8
−
SG
9
9
SG
(9-pin type)
1
6
Pin number Abbreviation
FG
RS-232C
connector
(9-pin type)
5
9
Since the C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) has a +5 V output, no external power supply is
required CS1G/H and for the NT-AL001.
108
Section 5-1
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
5-1-4
Recommended Connectors, Cables, and Crimp Terminals
Connectors and cables recommended for RS-232C
When making an RS-232C connecting cable, as far as possible use the recommended parts indicated in the table below. Some units come supplied with one
connector and connector hood.
Check the required parts and prepare them in advance.
Name
Model
Remarks
XM2A-0901
9-pin type
Made by OMRON
CS1-series CS1G/H
C-series CQM1, C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE)
CVM1/CV-series CPUs
CV500-LK201
XM2A-2501
25-pin type
Made by OMRON
C500-LK203
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C200H-LK201-V1
DB-25P
25-pin type
Made by JAE
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
XM2S-0911
9-pin type
Made by OMRON
C-series CQM1, C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE)
CVM1/CV-series CPUs
CV500-LK201
XM2S-0913
Made by OMRON 9-pin
XM2S-0911-E
Made by OMRON 9-pin
CS1 series CS1G/CS1H
XM2S-2511
25-pin type
Made by OMRON
C500-LK203
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C200H-LK201-V1
Connector
Connector
hood
DB-C2-J9
Cable
Delivered with
AWG28 5P
IFVV-SB
25-pin type
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
Made by JAE
Multi-core shielded cable
Made by Fujikura, Ltd.
CO-MA-VV-SB Multi-core shielded cable
5P 28AWG
Made by Hitachi, Ltd.
Cables with connectors made by OMRON
When connecting an NT-AL001 and a PC, use the OMRON cables with connectors indicated in the table below.
Model
Cable Length
XW2Z-200S
2m
XW2Z-500S
5m
XW2Z-200T
2m
XW2Z-500T
5m
Connector Specification
9-pin ⇔ 25-pin
Host link, NT link (1:1)
9-pin ⇔ 9-pin
Host link, NT link (1:1)
109
Section 5-1
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Notice
The maximum tensile load of the recommended cable is 30 N. Do not exceed
this load.
After connecting a connecting cable, always tighten the connector screws.
Recommended connectors, cables and crimp terminals for RS-422A/485
When making an RS-422A/485 connecting cable, as far as possible use the recommended parts indicated in the table below. Some units come supplied with
one connector and connector hood.
Check the required parts and prepare them in advance.
Name
Model
Maker
Remarks
XM2A-2501
25-pin type
Made by OMRON
Delivered with the following units:
C500-LK203
DB-25P F-N
25-pin type
Made by JAE
Delivered with the following units:
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
XM2S-2511
25-pin type
Made by OMRON
Delivered with the following units:
C500-LK203
Connector
Connector
hood
Cable
Crimp
terminals
DB-C2-J9
25-pin type
Made by JAE
TKVVBS4P-03
Tachii Electric
Wire Co., Ltd.
1.25-N3A
(fork type)
Japan Solderless
Terminal MFG
Y1.25-3.5L
(fork type)
Morex Inc.
Delivered with the following units:
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
Recommended cable size:
AWG22 to 18
(0.3 to 0.75 mm2)
The terminal screws of the NT631/NT631C are M3.5 specification. When wiring, use crimp terminals for M3.5 use. Tighten terminal screws with a tightening
torque of 0.8 [email protected]
Notice
Always use crimp terminals for wiring.
- Examples of applicable terminals
Round type
Fork type
7 mm or less
110
7 mm or less
Section 5-1
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
5-1-5
Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS–422A/485 Communications
The serial port B connector of the NT631/NT631C has a terminal resistance setting terminal (TRM).
In RS-422A/485 communications, a terminal resistor must be set at the device at
the end of the communication cable, but not at any other device.
The NT631/NT631C has a built-in terminal resistor, and whether or not the terminal resistance is applied is set by shorting or opening the terminal resistance setting terminals (TRM). The terminal resistance is 120 Ω.
When carrying out RS-422A/485 communications using serial port B, short between TRM and RDA terminals at the NT631/NT631C at the end of the
RS-422A/485 cable. Leave these terminals open at NT631/NT631C units other
than the one at the end of the cable.
When not using RS-422A/485 communications, the terminal resistance setting is
ineffective.
Short-circuit tool
RDA
TRM
RDB
SDA
TRM-RDA terminals
Function
Terminal resistance is applied.
Shorted
Short only at the NT631/NT631C connected to the end of an
RS-422A/485 cable.
Terminal resistance is not applied.
Open
Leave the terminals open when connecting an NT631/NT631C
anywhere other than at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable.
Notice
Before connecting or disconnecting cables between devices, make sure that the
power supply to all of the connected devices (NT631/NT631C, PC, etc.) is OFF.
Reference
- The internal circuit of the NT631/NT631C is shown below.
RDA
Terminal resistor (120 Ω)
TRM
Making a connection here inserts a terminator between
+ (RDB) and − (RDA).
RDB
- For details on setting the terminal resistance of NT–AL001, refer to “Settings at
the RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit (NT-AL001)” (page 97).
111
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
The methods for connecting the RS-422A/485 port of the NT631/NT631C and the
RS-422A/485 port of the host are described here. There are the following methods.
The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON PCs
(By using the memory link method, a connection can be made to any arbitrary
RS-422 unit). When making a connection to a host other than OMRON PCs, refer
to the “ PC Connection” (V042-E1-).
Method in which the RS-422A ports of the NT631/NT631C and host are connected directly by an RS-422A cable (page 132).
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to 500 m.
PT
Host
RS-422A cable
(max. 500 m)
Method in which the RS-485 ports of the NT631/NT631C and host are connected by an RS-485 cable (page 137).
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to 500 m.
This connection method canbe used only with the NT link (1:N) method of type
RS-485.
PT
Host
RS-485 cable
(max. 500 m)
Method in which the RS-422A ports of multiple NT631/NT631Cs and the
RS-422A port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection (page 138).
This connection method is used with the RS-422A type NT link (1:N) method.
PT
Host
RS-422A cable
(max. total length 500 m)
Method in which the RS-485 ports of multiple NT631/NT631Cs and the RS-485
port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection (page 141).
This connection method is used with the with the RS-485 type NT link (1:N)
method.
PT
Host
RS-485 cable
(max. total length 500 m)
112
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Notice
One end of the wire must always be connected to the host (PC), and there must be
no branching. Branching will cause problems such as transmission delays and
communication failures.
PC
PC
(At termination)
PC
Relay terminal block
Relay terminal block
Max. 2 m
NT631C
NT631
(Not at
(Not at
termination) termination)
NT631
(Not at
termination)
NT631
Example of Good Connection
Reference
5-2-1
NT631
NT631C
NT631
NT631
NT631C
NT631
(At
termination)
Examples of Bad Connections
CS1 series CPUs cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT link method.
Use the 1:N connection NT link method instead to make the 1:1 connection. For
details, refer to “Using the NT link (1:N) Method” (page 126)
Host Types and Settings
The types of host that have an RS-422A port and can be connected to the
RS-422A/485 port of the NT631/NT631C, and the settings to be made at the host,
are described here.
When Using the Host Link Method
Compatible host units
Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the RS-422A/485 type host link
function built in. In a CS1 series, the host link method can be used by installing a
serial communication board. In addition, some C200HX/HG/HE (–Z) devices
have an integral CPU that can be connected in the host link method by installing
a communication board.
Check the model and series of the PC, the type of the installed serial communication board, the serial communication unit, and host link unit at the connection
end before making a connection.
The host units featuring the RS-422A/485 type host link function and can be connected to the RS-422A/485 port of the NT631/NT631C are indicated in the table
below.
113
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Units with Built-in Host Link Function
PC Series
CS1 series
Host Link Unit /
Communication Board
CPU
CPUs Connectable with
Host Link Units or Expansion
Communication Board
Connectable to
CS1W-SCB41-E
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E
CS1G
CS1H
3G2A6-LK202-EV1
C200H-CPU01/03/11/21/23/31-E
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C200H
C1000H
C2000H
C200H-LK202-V1
C200H-CPU01/03/11/21/23/31
C200HS-CPU01/03/21/23/31/33E
C200HS-CPU01/21-EC
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-E
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-ZE
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64/65/85ZE
C200H
C200HS
C200HE
C200HE-ZE
C200HG
C200HG-ZE
C200HX
C200HX-ZE
C200HE-CPU32/42-E
C200HE-CPU32/42-ZE
C200HE
C200HE-ZE
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE
C200HG
C200HG-ZE
C series
C200HW-COM03/06-EV1
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E
C200HX
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64/65/85C200HX-ZE
ZE
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000H
C2000H
C500-LK203
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000H
C2000H
CPM1-10/20/30CDR-
+CPM1-CIF11
CPM1
CPM1A-10/20/30/40CD-
+CPM1-CIF11
CV series (*1)
CVM1 series
(*1)
SRM1
CV500-LK201
CV500-LK201
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV500
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1
SRM1-C02-V1+CPM1-CIF11
*1 CPUs of CVM1/CV-series PCs without the suffix “-EV” cannot be connected.
114
SRM1
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
The host link method cannot be used when an NT631/NT631C is connected using
RS-485. To use the host link method, connect by RS-422A.
Settings at the host
When using the RS-422A type host link method, the settings shown below must
be made at the host (depending on the unit, some of these settings may not be
necessary, or settings not shown here may be necessary).
Item
Setting at Host
I/O port
RS-422A
Communications speed
Set the same speed as for the NT631/NT631C. (*1)
Transfer code
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits
Parity
Even
1-to-1/1-to-N
1-to-N(*2)
Instruction level
Level 1, 2, 3
Unit #
00
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
“Comm. Speed” memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to
“Setting the Host Link Method” (page 173).
*2 The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually
possible to connect more than one NT631/NT631C in a single host link.
The setting methods for each type of unit are described in the following.
115
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Connecting to a C series host link unit
C200H/C200HS/C200HE(-ZE)/C200HG(-ZE)/C200HX(-ZE) backplate mounting type: C200H-LK201-V1
[Setting the front switches]
Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the
setting value window agree with the following:
LK201
XMT
RUN
RCV
ERROR
@ Unit # (SW1, SW2)
Set these switches to “0”.
SW2
SW1
0
0
5
2
SW3
SW4
@ Instruction level, parity, and transfer code (SW4)
Set this switch to “2”.
@ Communications speed (SW3)
Set this switch to “5” to select 9600 bps.
Set this switch to “6” to select 19200 bps.
[Setting the rear switches]
@ Terminator setting (selector switch)
Set this switch to “ON”.
Terminator
ON
OFF
1-to-1 (ON)
1-to-N (OFF)
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N protocol selection (selector switch)
Set this switch to “1-to-N (OFF)”.
116
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
C1000H/C2000H rack-mounting type: 3G2A5-LK201-EV1
[Setting the front switches]
Mode
selector
Host Local
@ Mode selector (key switch)
Set this to “Host link”.
[Setting the rear switches]
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to “RS-422A”.
I/O port
8
RS-422A
RS-232C
7
6
5
SW1
4
Synchronization
3
Internal
External
2
@ Unit # (DIP SW1)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to “OFF” (“0”).
1
ON
Terminator
@ Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to “Internal”.
8
7
OFF
ON
6
5
4
CTS
3
0V
External
2
1
ON
SW2
@ Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to “0010” to select
19200 bps.
Set these switches to “1010” to select
9600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to “OFF” (“0”) (1-to-N).
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to “ON” (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to “0V” (ON).
@ Terminator setting (selector switch)
Set this switch to “ON”.
117
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
C1000H/C2000H rack-mounting type: C500-LK203
[Setting the rear switches]
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to “RS-422A”.
5V supply
ON
OFF
8
SW1
7
I/O port
6
RS-422A
RS-232C
5
4
3
2
Synchronization
Internal
External
@ Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-7)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-7 to “OFF” (“0”).
1
ON
Terminator
@ Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to “Internal”.
8
7
OFF
ON
6
5
4
CTS
3
0V
External
2
1
ON
SW2
@ Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to “0010” to select
19200 bps.
Set these switches to “1010” to select
9600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to “OFF” (“0”) (1-to-N).
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to “ON” (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to “0V” (ON).
@ Terminator setting (selector switch)
Set this switch to “ON”.
118
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
C200H/C1000H/C2000H CPU mounting type: 3G2A6-LK202-EV1
[Setting the rear switches]
@ Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-5)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to “OFF” (0).
* Parity is fixed at Even Parity. Transfer code is
fixed at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits.
SW1
@ Communications speed (DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to “0010” to select 19200 bps.
Set these switches to “1010” to select 9600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
SW2
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to “OFF” (“0”) (1-to-N).
SW3
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to “ON” (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ Terminator setting (DIP SW3-1 to SW3-6)
Set SW3-1, SW3-3, and SW3-5 to “ON” (1).
Set SW3-2, SW3-4, and SW3-6 to “OFF” (0).
(Set terminator “ON”.)
119
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Connecting to a CVM1/CV series host link unit
CVM1/CV series rack-mounting type: CV500-LK201
A CVM1/CV series host link unit (CV500-LK201) has two connectors (communication ports 1 and 2). To use the RS-422A type host link method, set communication port 2 to “RS-422A”.
Communication port 2 is a 9-pin connector which allows selection of the
RS-232C or RS-422A method. When this port is used with the RS-422A method, the I/O port selector switch on the front of the unit must be set to “RS-422A”
(the lower position).
[CPU bus unit settings]
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series host link unit, set the following communication conditions for the CPU bus unit settings.
Item
Setting at Host
Communications speed
Set the same speed as for the NT631/NT631C. (*1)
Transfer code
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits
Parity
Even
1-to-1/1-to-N
1-to-N(*2)
Instruction level
Level 1, 2, 3
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
“Comm. Speed” memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to
“Setting the Host Link Method” (page 173).
*2 The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually
possible to connect more than one NT631/NT631C in a single host link.
Set the CPU bus unit settings directly from a peripheral tool (e.g. SYSMAC support software).
For details on the CPU bus unit settings, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV series
Host Link Unit User’s Manual (W205).
120
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
[Setting the front switches]
@ Unit # (SW3, SW4)
Set these switches to “0”.
Communications port 1
(RS-232C)
Communications port 2
(RS-232C/RS-422A)
I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to “RS-422A”.
RS-422A
@ Communication condition setting (DIP SW1)
Set this switch to “OFF”.
Communication is executed in accordance with the
CPU bus unit system settings made at the PC. The
initial values for the system settings are as follows.
- Communications speed: 9600 bps
- Parity: Even
- Xon/Xoff control: Not executed
- Communication method: Full duplex
- Stop bits: 2 stop bits
- Data length: 7 bits
@ Terminator setting (selector switch)
Set this to “ON”.
121
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Connecting to a CPU
CVM1/CV-series (-EV) CPUs
@ CV500-CPU01-EV1/CV1000-CPU01-EV1/CV2000-CPU01-EV1
@ CVM1-CPU01-EV2/CVM1-CPU11-EV2/CVM1-CPU21-EV2
[PC system settings]
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series CPU, set the following communication
conditions for the “PC system settings”.
Item
Setting at Host
Communications speed
Set the same speed as for the NT631/NT631C. (*1)
Stop bit
2 stop bits
Parity
Even
Data length
ASCII 7 bits
Unit #
00
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
“Comm. Speed” memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to
“Setting the Host Link Method” (page 173).
Either set PC system settings directly from a peripheral tool (e.g. SYSMAC support software), or transmit the PC system settings made at a peripheral tool to
the CPU.
For details on the PC system settings, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV500/
1000/2000 User’s Manual (Ladder) (W202).
122
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
[Setting the front switches]
@ Host link communication method
selection (selector switch)
Set this to “RS-422A”.
@ Communication type setting (DIP SW3)
Set SW3 to “OFF”.
(for “host link” communication)
I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
RS-422A
@ Host link default value settings
(DIP SW4)
To effect the existing DIP switch settings,
set SW4 to “ON”.
To effect the values set in the PC system
settings, set SW4 to “OFF”.
Note
For CPUs manufactured before or during
June 1995 (lot No. 65), the existing
DIP switch settings differ from the PC
system setting default values as follows.
- Existing DIP switch settings:
2400 bps, 1 stop bit, even parity, 7 bit
data length
- PC system setting default values:
9600 bps, 2 stop bits, even parity, 7 bit
data length
For CPUs manufactured from July 1995
onward (lot No. 75), the stipulated
values in the DIP switch settings also
are 9600 bps and 2 stop bits.
@ Terminator setting (DIP SW6)
Set this switch to “ON”.
(Set terminator “ON”.)
123
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE), CPM1 CPUs, SRM1
Connect to the RS-422A/485 port (port A) of the communication board. Note
that the connection to a CPM1 or/and SRM1 must be made via an RS-422A
adapter (CPM1-CIF11).
Reference
There are no communication boards for which port B is the RS-422A port.
[PC system setting area settings]
When connecting to a C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) or CPM1 CPUs or SRM1, set the
following communication conditions for the PC system setting area.
Item
Setting at Host
I/O port
RS-422A
Communication mode
Host link mode
Communications speed
Set the same speed as for the NT631/NT631C. (*1)
Stop bit
2 stop bits
Parity
Even
Data length
ASCII 7 bits
Unit #
00
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
“Comm. Speed” at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to “Setting the Host Link
Method” (page 173).
Set the PC system setting area settings directly from a peripheral tool (e.g. SYSMAC support software).
For details on operations relating to the PC system setting area, refer to the
manual for the PC which is used.
The PC system setting area word numbers and settings to be made depending
on the unit to which the connection is made are shown below.
When using port A of the communication board of C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE)
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
DM6555 0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6556 0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
DM6558 0000
Unit # 00
When using a CPM1, SRM1
Word #
Writing Value
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6651 0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
DM6653 0000
124
Settings
DM6650 0001
Unit # 00
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
[Setting the DIP switches on the front of a C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE)]
When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) , the DIP switches on the front panel must
be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the PC system setting
area (data memory) effective.
1
2
3
4
5
6
RS-232C port communication condition setting
Set DIP SW5 to “OFF” to make the settings made in PC system setting
effective.
ON
OFF
ON
[Setting switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) communication board]
Set the switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) communication board as follows.
Switch 1: Set to [4] (4-wire type, for RS-422A)
Switch 2 : Set to “ON” for terminator ON (termination resistance applied)
[Setting the switches on a CPM1 RS-422A adapter]
CPM1CIF11
CPM1
Set the terminator selector switch to “ON” (upper position).
Connecting to a CS1 series serial communication board
INNER board with RS-422A/485 port equipped for CS1 series CPU Type :
CS1W-SCB41-E (The port 2 is RS-422A/485 port.)
[Allocation DM area settings for CPU]
Settings are written from the peripheral tool (a programming console or CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the CPU.
After the settings are written, they become effective by turning the power ON,
restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or executing the STUP
command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the settings
are shown.
Allocation
DM area
(CH)
Writing Value
Settings
Port 2
DM32010
8000
Host link mode, 2 stop bits,
data length 7 bits, even parity,
DM32011
0000
Communication speed 9600 bps.
0007
Communication speed 19200 bps.
DM32012
0000
Transmit delay time
DM32013
0000
No CTS control
Unit No.0 for host link
0 ms.
125
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
When Using the NT Link (1:1) Method
Compatible host units
Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the RS-422A type NT link (1:1)
function built in. There are also some C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) CPUs that can be
connected by the RS-422A type NT link (1:1) method by installing a communication board.
Check the model and series of the PC against the type of CPU before making the
connections.
The host units that can be connected to the RS-422A port of the NT631/NT631C
by the RS-422A type NT link (1:1) method are indicated in the table below.
PC Series
C series
CV series
(*2)
CVM1
series (*2)
CPUs with Built-in RS-422A type NT Link (1:1) Function Model Name
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*1)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E(*1)
C200HE
(-ZE)
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG
(-ZE)
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE(*1)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE(*1)
C200HX
(-ZE)
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV500
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1
*1 One of the following communication boards is required:
C200HW-COM03-EV1 or C200HW-COM06-EV1.
*2 CPUs of CVM1/CV series PCs without the suffix “-EV” cannot be connected.
The NT link (1:1) method cannot be used using RS-485. To use the NT link (1:1)
method, connect by RS-422A.
NT link connection using RS-422A is not possible with CPM1.
126
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Settings at the host
The setting methods for each type of unit are described in the following.
- Connecting to a CVM1/CV-series (-EV) CPUs
@ CV500-CPU01-EV1/CV1000-CPU01-EV1/CV2000-CPU01-EV1
@ CVM1-CPU01-EV2/CVM1-CPU11-EV2/CVM1-CPU21-EV2
[PC system settings]
When connecting to the CVM1/CV series CPU by the NT link (1:1) method, no
particular settings are required at the PC system settings.
[Setting the front switches]
@ Host link communication method selection
(selector switch)
Set this to “RS-422A”.
I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
@ Communication type setting (DIP SW3)
Set this switch to “ON”.
(for communication by “NT link”)
RS-422A
@ Terminator setting (DIP SW6)
Set this switch to “ON”.
(Set terminator “ON”.)
127
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
- Connecting to a C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE)
[PC system setting area settings]
Write the PC system setting area (data memory) settings directly from a peripheral tool (e.g. SYSMAC support software) in accordance with the host
model.
Host Model
Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE)*1
Word #
Writing Value
Setting
DM6555
4000
Use NT link (1:1)
*1 RS-422A port of the communication board
For details on operations relating to the PC system setting area, refer to the
manual for the PC you are using.
[Setting the DIP switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) communication board]
Set the switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) communication board as follows.
Switch 1: Set to [4] (4-wire type, for RS-422A)
Switch 2 : Set to “ON” for terminator ON (termination resistance applied)
128
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
When Using the NT Link (1:N) Method
Compatible host units
The OMRON PCs that can be connected using the RS-422A/485 type NT link
(1:N) method are C-series C200HX/HG/HE-ZE models only. A communication
board must be installed to make the connection.
Check the model and series of the PC against the type of CPU or communications board before making the connections.
The host units that can be connected to the RS-232C port of the NT631/NT631C
by the RS-422A type NT link (1:N) function via a convertor are indicated in the
table below.
PC
Series
CPUs with Built-in
RS-422A type
NT Link (1:1) Function
Model Name
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(*1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(*1)
CS1G
CS1H
C200HE-CPU32 (–Z) (*2)
C200HE-CPU42 (–Z) (*2)
C200HE (-Z)
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*1)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E(*1)
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*1)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E(*1)
C200HE (-ZE)
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG (-ZE)
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE(*1)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE(*1)
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE(*1)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE(*1)
C200HX (-ZE)
CS1
series
C series
CPU that becomes
connectable by installing a
communication board
*1 The serial CS1W-SCB41–E communication board is required.
*2 A C200HW-COM03-V1 or C200-COM06-V1 communication board is required.
Settings at the host
- C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE)
[PC system setting area settings]
Write the communication conditions directly into the PC system setting area
(data memory) using a peripheral tool (e.g. SYSMAC support software).
For details on setting the PC system setting area settings, refer to the SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) Operation Manual (W303/W322).
Make the setting indicated in the word shown below.
129
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
*
Reference
Connection to
Word #
Writing Value
Setting
Communication board
Port A
DM6555
500
Use NT link (1:N)
= highest unit number of the
connected PTs (1 to 7)*
When using C200HE(-ZE), the range for PT unit numbers is 1 to 3.
There are no communication boards for which port B is the RS-422A/485 port.
[Setting the DIP switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) communication board]
Set the switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) communication board as follows.
Switch 1: Set to [4] (4-wire type, for RS-422A), or
Set to [2] (2-wire type, for RS-485)
Switch 2 : Set to “ON” for terminator ON (termination resistance applied)
Connecting to CS1 series serial communication board
INNER board with RS-422A/485 port equipped for CS1 series CPU type :
CS1W-SCB41-E (The port 2 is RS-422A/485 port.)
[Setting the front switches]
RDY
COMM1
COMM2
Terminal resistance setting switch (TER)
When this port is at the end of the
communication cable:
“ON” (Terminal resistance is present.)
Port 1
RS-232C
PORT1
When this port is not at the end of the
communication cable:
“OFF” (Terminal resistance is not
present.)
OFF
2
ON TERM
4
WIRE
Two wire type/four wire type changeover switch (WIRE)
Port 2
PORT2
(RS422/
RS485)
RS-422A/485
For RS-422A : “4” (4 wire type)
For RS-485 : “2” (2 wire type)
SCB41
[Allocation DM area settings for CPU]
Settings are written from the peripheral tool (a programming console or CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the CPU.
After settings are written, they become effective by turning the power ON, restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or executing the STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are
shown.
130
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Allocation
DM area
(CH)
Writing Value
Settings
Port 2
DM32010
8200
NT link (1:N) mode
DM32016
000
= The largest model number of the connected PT (0 – 7)
When connecting the PT with its model number from 3 to 6 to port 2 in the NT link
(1:N), for example, set a value of 8200 Hex for D32010CH, and 0006 Hex for
D32016CH.
When using the Memory Link Method
With the memory link method, the connection can be made to a personal computer
and an FA computer with RS-422A.
When connecting to the host with the memory link method, it is necessary to create
a program for the memory link at the host side.
The following are the communication conditions that can be used with the memory
link method. For the host (a personal computer, an FA computer, etc.), its setting
should be compatible to one of the communication conditions listed in the following
table. Set the same communication conditions at the NT631/NT631C by the
memory switch. (page 179).
Item
Setting at Host
Input/Output board
RS-422A
Communication speed
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps.
Data bits length
7 bits, 8 bits
Stop bits length
1 bit, 2 bits
Parity
None, even, odd
Flow control
None, XON/XOFF
131
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2-2
Direct Connection between RS-422A Ports at Both Units
The connection method in which the RS-422A ports of an NT631/NT631C and a
host are connected is described here.
Host link/CPU/
Communication unit
NT631/NT631C
SYSMAC
CS1 series PLC,
C series PLC,
CVM1/CV series
PLC, SRM1
Serial port B
(RS-422A/485, terminal block)
9-pin connector
or 25-pin connector
RS-422A cable with connectors (max. length: 500 m)
Connecting an NT631/NT631C and Host (RS-422A)
Host
NT631/NT631C
RS-422A
Wiring when connecting a C-series host link unit or CPM1 (host link)
Applicable units:
C200H-LK202-V1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C500-LK203
3G2A6-LK202-EV1
RDA
NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation
TRM
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
24V
+DC
RS-422A
/485
terminal
block
6
1
PLC side
Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
hood
FG
TRM
1
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
2
−
SDA (−)
3
SG
SDB (+)
4
−
RDA (−)
RDB
Short-circuit tool
Shielding wire
RSA (−)
5
SDB (+)
RSB (+)
6
RDA (−)
Functional
ground
7
FG
8
−
9
Functional
ground
(9-pin type)
RS-422A
terminal
block
5
9
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT631/NT631C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
132
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Wiring when connecting CPM1, SRM1
Applicable units:
CPM1-10CDR-
CPM1-30CDR-
CPM1A-10CD-
CPM1A-30CD-
CPM1-20CDR-
CPM1A-20CD-
CPM1A-40CD-
SRM1-C02-V1
RDA
NT631/NT631C side
TRM
Abbreviation
RDA (−)
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
RS-422A/
485
connector
PLC side
Short-circuit tool
Shielding wire
Abbreviation
SG
RDB (+)
SDB (+)
SDA (−)
SDA (−)
SDB (+)
RDB (+)
RSA (−)
RDA (−)
RSB (+)
FG
FG
TRM
SG
RS-422A
terminal
block
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA
(9-pin type)
Functional
ground
24V
+DC
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT631/NT631C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
133
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Wiring when connecting a CS1-series CS1G/H serial communication board, C
series C200HX/HG/HE (–ZE) communication board, or CVM1/CV-series host
link unit
Applicable units:
CS1G-CPU42-E
CS1G-CPU44-E
CS1H-CPU63-E
CS1H-CPU65-E
CS1G-CPU43-E
CS1G-CPU45-E
CS1H-CPU64-E
CS1H-CPU66-E
CS1H-CPU67-E
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CV500-LK201 (communication port 2)
RDA
Abbreviation
TRM
RDA (−)
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
RS-422A/
485
interface
Short-circuit tool
Shielding wire
Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
FG
hood
TRM
1
SDA (−)
RDB (+)
2
SDB (+)
SDA (−)
3
−
SDB (+)
4
−
RSA (−)
5
−
RSB (+)
6
RDA (−)
Functional
ground
7
−
8
RDB (+)
9
24V
+DC
6
1
PLC side
NT631/NT631C side
RS-422A
interface
−
(9-pin type)
5
9
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT631/NT631C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
134
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Wiring when connecting a CVM1/CV-series CPU
Applicable units:
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV
CVM1-CPU21-EV
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU11-EV
CVM1/CV-series CPUs whose model names do not have the suffix “-EV” cannot be connected by any connection method.
RDA
Abbreviation
TRM
RDA (−)
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
RS-422A/
485
interface
Short-circuit tool
Shielding wire
Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
FG
hood
TRM
1
SDA (−)
RDB (+)
2
SDB (+)
SDA (−)
3
−
SDB (+)
4
PS
RSA (−)
5
CS
RSB (+)
6
RDA (−)
Functional
ground
7
−
8
RDB (+)
9
24V
+DC
6
1
PLC side
NT631/NT631C side
RS-422A
interface
−
(9-pin type)
5
9
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT631/NT631C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
135
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Wiring for a Memory Link connection
Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the following diagram.
RDA
NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation
TRM
RDA (−)
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
RS-422A/
485
interface
Short-circuit tool
Shielding wire
Host side
Abbreviation
Connector
hood
TRM
SDA (−)
RDB (+)
SDB (+)
SDA (−)
RS
SDB (+)
CS
RSA (−)
RDA (−)
RSB (+)
RDB (+)
RS-422A
connector
Functional
ground
24V
+DC
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT631/NT631C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
136
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2-3
Direct Connection between RS-485 Ports at Both Units
The connection method in which the RS-485 ports of an NT631/NT631C and a
host are connected is described here.
NT631/NT631C
CPU
CS1G/H
C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE)
Serial port B
(RS-422A/485, terminal block)
9-pin connector
RS-485 cable with connectors (max. length: 500 m)
Reference
When RS-485 is used at the PT side, only the NT link (1:N) method can be used.
Connecting an NT631/NT631C and Host
Host
NT631/NT631C
RS-485
Wiring when connecting a CS1-series CS1G/H serial communication board and
C series C200HX/HG/HE (–ZE) communication board
Applicable units:
CS1G-CPU42-E
CS1G-CPU44-E
CS1H-CPU63-E
CS1H-CPU65-E
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
CS1G-CPU43-E
CS1G-CPU45-E
CS1H-CPU64-E
CS1H-CPU66-E
CS1H-CPU67-E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
137
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
RDA
Abbreviation
TRM
RDA (−)
RDB
SDA
SDB
RS-422A/
485
interface
RSA
RSB
Short-circuit tool
Shielding wire
6
1
PLC side
NT631/NT631C side
Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
FG
hood
TRM
1
SDA (−)
RDB (+)
2
SDB (+)
SDA (−)
3
−
SDB (+)
4
−
RSA (−)
5
−
RSB (+)
6
RDA (−)
Functional
ground
7
−
8
RDB (+)
RS-422A
interface
−
9
5
9
(9-pin type)
24V
+DC
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT631/NT631C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
5-2-4
1:N Connection among RS-422A Ports
The connection method in which the RS-422A ports of multiple NT631/NT631Cs
and one host are connected in a 1:N connection is described here.
CPU
CS1G/H
C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE)
9-pin connector
RS-422A cables
(max. total length 500 m)
NT631/NT631C
Serial port B
(RS-422A/485, terminal block)
NT631/NT631C
NT631/NT631C
Reference
138
Communication using the RS-422A type NT link (1:N) method is possible when a
serial communication board is installed at CS1 series CS1G/H, and when a communication board is installed at the C200HX/HG/HE (–ZE).
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Connecting between NT631/NT631C Units
NT631/NT631C
Host
RS-422A
RDA
NT631/NT631C side
TRM
RDA (−)
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
NT631/NT631C side
Short-circuit tool
Abbreviation
RS-422A/
485
interface
Abbreviation
TRM
RDA (−)
TRM
TRM
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
SDA (−)
SDA (−)
SDB (+)
SDB (+)
RSA (−)
RSA (−)
RSB (+)
RSB (+)
Functional
ground
Functional
ground
Shielding wire
RDA
RDB
RS-422A/
485
interface
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
24V
+DC
*
24V
+DC
Short TRM and RDA terminals of the NT631/NT631C at the end of the RS-422A
cable ( marked in the above figure) using the short-circuit tool supplied with the
NT631/NT631C.
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, connect the functional ground of only one of
the NT631/NT631C units to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
139
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Connecting an NT631/NT631C and a Host
NT631/NT631C
Host
RS-422A
Wiring when connecting a CS1-series CS1G/H serial communication board and
C series C200HX/HG/HE (–ZE) communication board
Applicable units:
CS1G-CPU42-E
CS1G-CPU44-E
CS1H-CPU63-E
CS1H-CPU65-E
CS1G-CPU43-E
CS1G-CPU45-E
CS1H-CPU64-E
CS1H-CPU66-E
CS1H-CPU67-E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
RDA
Abbreviation
TRM
SDB
RSA
RSB
Shielding wire
RDA (−)
RDB
SDA
PLC side
NT631/NT631C side
RS-422A/
485
interface
TRM
1
SDA (−)
RDB (+)
2
SDB (+)
SDA (−)
3
−
SDB (+)
4
−
RSA (−)
5
−
RSB (+)
6
RDA (−)
Functional
ground
7
−
8
RDB (+)
Next PT
24V
+DC
6
1
Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
FG
hood
9
RS-422A
interface
−
(9-pin type)
5
9
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT631/NT631C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
140
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2-5
1:N Connection among RS-485 Ports
The connection method in which the RS-485 ports of multiple NT631/NT631Cs
and one host are connected in a 1:N connection is described here.
CPU
CS1G/H
C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE)
9-pin connector
RS-485 cables
(max. total length 500 m)
NT631/NT631C
Serial port B
(RS-422A/485, terminal block)
NT631/NT631C
NT631/NT631C
Reference
Communication using the RS-422A type NT link (1:N) method is possible when a
serial communication board is installed at CS1 series CS1G/H, and when a communication board is installed at the C200HX/HG/HE (–ZE).
141
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Connecting between NT631/NT631C Units
NT631/NT631C
Host
RS-485
NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation
RDA
RDA (−)
TRM
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
24V
+DC
*
RS-422A
/485
terminal
block
NT631/NT631C side
Short-circuit tool
Abbreviation
RDA
RDA (−)
TRM
TRM
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
SDA (−)
SDA (−)
SDB (+)
SDB (+)
RSA (−)
RSA (−)
RSB (+)
RSB (+)
Functional
ground
Functional
ground
Shielding wire
TRM
RS-422A
/485
terminal
block
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
24V
+DC
Short TRM and RDA terminals of the NT631/NT631C at the end of the RS-485 cable
( marked in the above figure) using the short-circuit tool supplied with the
NT631/NT631C.
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT631/NT631C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
142
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Connecting an NT631/NT631C and a Host
The relay terminal block is not included in this figure. Insert the relay terminal block
so as to achieve the wiring configuration shown below.
NT631/NT631C
Host
RS-485
Wiring when connecting a CS1-series CS1G/H serial communication board and
C series C200HX/HG/HE (–ZE) communication board
Applicable units:
CS1G-CPU42-E
CS1G-CPU44-E
CS1H-CPU63-E
CS1H-CPU65-E
CS1G-CPU43-E
CS1G-CPU45-E
CS1H-CPU64-E
CS1H-CPU66-E
CS1H-CPU67-E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
RDA
Abbreviation
TRM
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
Shielding wire
RDA (−)
RS-422A/
485
terminal
block
Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
FG
hood
TRM
1
SDA (−)
RDB (+)
2
SDB (+)
SDA (−)
3
−
SDB (+)
4
−
RSA (−)
5
−
RSB (+)
6
RDA (−)
Functional
ground
7
−
8
RDB (+)
Next PT
24V
+DC
6
1
PLC side
NT631/NT631C side
9
RS-422A
connector
−
(9-pin type)
5
9
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT631/NT631C to the shielding of the RS-485A cable.
143
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2-6
Recommended Connectors, Cables and Crimp Terminals
Connectors and cables recommended for RS-422A/485
When making an RS-422A/485 connecting cable, as far as possible use the recommended parts indicated in the table below. When using the memory link
method, however, use a connector that matches with the RS-422A port at the
CPU (CP) side. Some units come supplied with one connector and connector
hood.
Check the required parts and prepare them in advance.
Name
Connector
Model
XM2A-0901
Maker
Remarks
9-pin type
Made by OMRON
Delivered with the following units:
CS1 series CS1G/H
C series C200HS
C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE)
Delivered with the following units:
CVM1/CV series CPU unit
CV500-LK201
Delivered with the following units:
C series C200HS
C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE)
Delivered with the following units:
CVM1/CV series CPU unit
CV500-LK201
9-pin type
XM2S-0911
Connector
hood
Made by
OMRON
9-pin type
XM2S-0911-E
Cable
Crimp
terminals
Delivered with the following units:
CS1 series CS1G/H
Made by
OMRON
TKVVBS4P-03
Tachii Electric
Wire Co., Ltd.
1.25-N3A
(fork type) *1
Japan Solderless
Terminal MFG
Y1.25-3.5L
Morex Inc.
(fork type) *1
*1 Crimp terminals of common use for M3 and M3.5
Recommended cable size:
AWG22 to 18
(0.3 to 0.75 mm2)
The terminal screws of the NT631/NT631C are M3.5 specification. When wiring, use crimp terminals for M3.5 use. Tighten terminal screws with a tightening
torque of 0.8 N
The terminal screws of the RS-422A adaptor (CPM1-CIF11) are M3 specification. When wiring, use crimp terminals for M3 use. Tighten terminal screws with
a tightening torque of 0.5 [email protected]
Notice
- Make sure to tighten screws at the connectors after cable connection.
- Always use crimp terminals for wiring at terminal blocks.
- Examples of applicable terminals
For M3.5
Round type
Fork type
7 mm or less
7 mm or less
For M3
Round type
Fork type
6.2 mm or less
144
6.2 mm or less
Section 5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2-7
Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS–422A/485 Communications
The serial port B connector of the NT631/NT631C has a terminal resistance setting terminal (TRM).
In RS-422A/485 communications, a terminal resistor must be set at the device at
the end of the communication cable, but not at any other device.
The NT631/NT631C has a built-in terminal resistor, and whether or not the terminal resistance is applied is set by shorting or opening the terminal resistance setting terminals (TRM). The terminal resistance is 120 Ω.
When carrying out RS-422A/485 communications using serial port B, short between terminals at the NT631/NT631C at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable.
Leave these terminals open at NT631/NT631C units other than the one at the end
of the cable.
When not using RS-422A/485 communications, the terminal resistance setting is
ineffective.
Short-circuit tool
RDA
TRM
RDB
SDA
TRM-RDA
terminals
Function
Terminal resistance is applied.
Shorted
Short only at the NT631/NT631C connected to the end of an
RS-422A/485 cable.
Terminal resistance is not applied.
Open
Leave the terminals open when connecting an NT631/NT631C
anywhere other than at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable.
Notice
Before connecting or disconnecting cables between devices, make sure that the
power supply to all of the connected devices (NT631/NT631C, PC, etc.) is OFF.
Reference
- The internal circuit of the NT631/NT631C is shown below.
RDA
Terminal resistor (120 Ω)
TRM
Making a connection here inserts a terminator between
+ (RDB) and − (RDA).
RDB
- For details on setting the terminal resistance of the host unit, refer to “Setting
methods” for each type of the communication.
145
SECTION 6
System Menu Operation
This section describes the operation of the System Menu, focusing on the procedure to start up the NT631/NT631C.
Functions which are convenient when using the NT631/NT631C and those that are useful for system maintenance are also
explained here.
6-1
6-2
System Menu Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-1 Operation at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Operation Modes and the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-1 Relationships among Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-2 Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-3 Operations with the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 Memory Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-1 Clearing Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-2 Initializing Display History Record Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-3 Initializing Alarm History Record Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-4 Initializing the Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-5 Initializing the Memory Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5 Operations in the System Installer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-1 Setting the Display Language in the System Installer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-2 Clearing/Installing the System Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-3 Changing the System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-4 Clearing Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6 Transmitting the Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7 Setting the Conditions for Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches . .
6-7-1 About Communication Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-2 Setting the Host Link Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-3 Setting the NT Link (1:1) Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-4 Setting the NT Link (1:N) Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-5 Setting the Memory Link Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-6 Setting the Communication Type for Serial Port B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8 Starting Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9 Various System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-1 Memory Switch Setting Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-2 Setting the “Start-up Wait Time” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-3 Setting the “Key Press Sound” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-4 Setting the “Buzzer Sound” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-5 Setting the “Printer Controller” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-6 Setting the “Print Method” (NT631C Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-7 Setting “Screen Saver Movement” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-8 Setting the Screen Saver Start-up Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-9 Setting the History Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-10 Setting the Resume Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-11 Setting the Automatic Reset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-12 Setting the Time-out Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-13 Setting the Retry Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
146
148
149
149
150
150
152
153
155
155
157
158
160
161
163
163
164
165
167
168
171
172
173
175
176
178
181
183
185
185
186
187
188
190
191
193
195
196
198
199
201
202
204
6-11
System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-1 I/O Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-2 Displaying/Setting the Calendar and Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-3 Checking the PT Setting Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-4 Displaying and Printing the Display History Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-5 Displaying and Printing the Alarm History Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-6 Checking Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-7 Device Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-8 Checking Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12 Programming Console Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12-1 Usable Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12-2 Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12-3 Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
207
207
210
212
214
216
218
221
230
236
237
238
238
147
148
Section 6-1
System Menu Operation Flow
6-1
System Menu Operation Flow
Follow the procedure below when using the NT631/NT631C for the first time or
changing the system program.
[Create the Screen Data]
Create the data to be displayed on the NT631/NT631C by using the Support Tool.
For details on creating screen data, refer to the NT-series Support Tool Ver. 3.0 for
Windows95 Operation Manual (V053-E1-j).
[Start Up the NT631/NT631C (Display the System Menu)] (page 150)
Turn ON the power to the NT631/NT631C.
If no screen data has been registered, an error message is displayed. In this case,
press the “OK” touch switch on the error message screen to display the System
Menu.
If screen data has been registered and the RUN mode is established, perform the
appropriate operations on the touch panel to display the System Menu.
[Initialize the Memory] (page 156)
If necessary, initialize the memory of the NT631/NT631C by operation from the
System Menu.
[Transmit the Screen Data] (page 169)
Connect the Support Tool to the NT631/NT631C and transmit the screen data
from the Support Tool to the NT631/NT631C.
For details on connecting the Support Tool, refer to 3-2 “Connecting to the Support
Tool” (page 41).
[Set the Memory Switches] (pages 172, 186)
Select the System Menu and set the operations of the NT631/NT631C — for example the conditions for communication with the host — using the memory
switches.
[Start Operation] (page 184)
Connect the NT631/NT631C to the host and start operation.
[System Maintenance] (page 208)
If an error occurs during operation, check the I/Os, settings, etc., by referring to
this guide.
149
Section 6-2
Starting the NT631/NT631C
6-2
Starting the NT631/NT631C
After checking that the hardware has been connected correctly, switch on the power to the NT631/NT631C to start it up.
This section describes the operation of the NT631/NT631C when it is started up.
6-2-1
Operation at Startup
The NT631/NT631C operates as follows when the power is switched ON, or when
it is reset.
[Initial Processing]
Self diagnosis — including a check on the internal memory of the NT631/NT631C
and a system program check — and the internal processing required for startup,
are performed.
If an error occurs during initial processing, an error screen is displayed.
If there is an error in the system program, the system program must be reinstalled. For details on the installation procedure, refer to 6-5 “Operations in the
System Installer Mode” (page 164).
[Memory Unit Check and Processing]
Check if a memory unit is installed. If a memory unit is installed, processing
(screen data and system program reading/writing) is executed in accordance with
its DIP switch settings (page 46).
If there is an error in the screen data, an error screen is displayed. Pressing the
“OK” touch switch on the error screen will return the display to that immediately
before the error occurred. It is also possible to display the System Menu from the
error screen by pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously.
If there is an error in the system program, the main menu of the system installer
mode is displayed. If this is the case, reinstall the proper system program.
Initialize the memory or change the settings as required.
[Start of Communication with the Host]
Communication with the host starts in accordance with the communication method set in the system memory of the NT631/NT631C. During the interval until communication is established, the “system initialization screen” (screen No. 9000) is
displayed.
For details, refer to “6-8 Starting Operation” (page 184).
If the “system initialization screen” remains on, display the System Menu by pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously, and check the settings for the communication conditions for communication with the host.
[Operation Start]
The RUN mode is established, and operation starts in accordance with the screen
data in the NT631/NT631C.
When changing the settings or checking the statuses, perform the appropriate operation by displaying the System Menu. For details on displaying the System
Menu, refer to 6-3-3 “Operations with the System Menu” (page 154).
150
Section 6-3
Operation Modes and the System Menu
6-3
Operation Modes and the System Menu
The NT631/NT631C operates in four modes: the “RUN”, “Transmit”, “Maintenance”, and “Expansion” modes. These modes are selected from the System
Menu.
In addition, the NT631/NT631C also features the “System Installer” mode which is
used specifically for installing the system program.
The System Installer mode is selected by operation at the panel when the
NT631/NT631C power is switched ON.
6-3-1
Relationships among Modes
The relationships among the System Menu, each of the operation modes, and the
System Installer mode, are indicated in the figure below.
For details on system menu operation, refer to 6-3-3 “Operations with the System
Menu” (page 154).
[RUN Mode]
[Transmit Mode]
This is the mode in which
the NT631/NT631C
operates.
In this mode the
NT631/NT631C can be
controlled from the host,
and various display and
I/O operations are
possible.
In this mode, screen data
and other data are
transmitted between the
Support Tool and the
NT631/NT631C.
To change system
settings or screen
data contents
When system settings
and screen data
registration have
been completed
To change system
settings or screen
data contents.
SYSTEM MENU
[Maintenance Mode]
In this mode,
NT631/NT631C
maintenance operations,
such as initialization of
the memory, checking
settings, and the I/O
check, are executed.
Quit
Power ON
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Expansion Mode
If there is no system
program, or if the
settings for data
control are changed...
[System Installer Mode]
[Expansion Mode]
In this mode, the
programming console
function is used, or check
the version of system
program.
In this mode, the system program of the
NT631/NT631C is installed, display of the
System Menu is enabled or disabled, and
screen data changes are enabled and
disabled, among other operations.
151
Section 6-3
Operation Modes and the System Menu
Items in the System Menu
The items displayed in the system menu and their functions are as follows.
Menu Item
Function
Quit
Clear the System Menu screen and return to the RUN mode
screen.
Transmit Mode
Display the Transmit Mode screen to allow transmission for
screen data between the Support Tool and the NT631/NT631C.
For details on transmission of screen data, refer to 6-6 “Transmitting the Screen Data” (page 169).
Maintenance Mode Display the Maintenance Mode menu to allow system maintenance of the NT631/NT631C, and various NT631/NT631C settings.
Expansion Mode
Display the Expansion Mode menu to allow selection of the expansion functions embedded in the NT631/NT631C.
Among the expansion functions of the NT631/NT631C is the
Programming console function, which allows the NT631/NT631C
to be used as the programming console for a CS1 series CS1G/
CS1H C-series CPM1, CQM1, C200HX/HG/HE, or SRM1, and
the version display function which displays the version of system
program. For details on the programming console function, refer
to 6-12 “Programming Console Function” (page 237).
Functions of the System Installer Mode
The following functions can be executed in the System Installer mode.
S Setting the display language
S Clearing and installing system programs
S Disabling/enabling display of the System Menu.
S Disabling/enabling writing to the screen data memory
S Clearing screen data
For details on these functions, refer to 6-5 “Operations in the System Installer
Mode” (page 164).
152
Section 6-3
Operation Modes and the System Menu
6-3-2
Menu Tree
The System Menu allows the various functions of the NT631/NT631C to be executed by using touch switches displayed on the touch panel. The menu tree, starting from the System Menu, is shown below.
For details on System Menu operations, refer to 6-3-3 “Operations with the System Menu” (page 154).
The menu tree may differ according to the system program installed in the
NT631/NT631C. The menu tree for the system program that is installed in the
NT631/NT631C on shipment is shown below.
SYSTEM INSTALLER MODE
Exit System Installer
Download System Program (page 165)
Change System Settings (page 166)
Erase Screen Data (page 168)
SYSTEM MENU
MEMORY INIT. MENU
Quit
Transmit Mode (page 169)
Maintenance Mode
Expansion Mode (page 237)
Quit
Screen Data (page 156)
Display History (page 158)
Alarm History (page 159)
Memory Table (page 161)
Memory Switch (page 162)
MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU
Quit
Memory Init.
Memory Switch
I/O Settings
Calendar Check (page 211)
PT Settings (page 213)
Display History
Alarm History
Screen Data Disp. (page 219)
I/O Check
MEMORY SWITCH
MENU
Start-up Wait Time (page 187)
Key Press Sound (page 188)
Buzzer Sound (page 189)
Printer Controller (page 191)
Print Method (page 192)
Screen Saver Movement (page 194)
Screen Saver Start up Time (page 196)
Hist. Disp. Method (page 197)
Resume Function (page 199)
Comm. Auto-return (page 200)
Time-out Interval (page 202)
Retry Counts (page 203)
Comm. A Method (page 172)
Comm. B Select (page 182)
Comm. B Method (page 172)
I/O SETTINGS MENU
I/O CHECK MENU
Quit
Contrast Adjust (page 208)
Brightness Adjust (page 209)
Quit
I/F Check
Device Check
DISPLAY HISTORY MENU
EXPANSION
MODE MENU
Quit
Programming Console Function
Version Display
I/F CHECK MENU
Quit
Tool Comm. (page 231)
Comm. Port A (page 232)
Comm. Port B (page 232)
Printer (page 235)
DEVICE CHECK MENU
Quit
Sort by Occurrence (page 215)
Sort by Frequency (page 215)
ALARM HISTORY MENU
Quit
Sort by Occurrence (page 217)
Sort by Frequency (page 217)
Quit
Buzzer Check (page 222)
LED Check (page 223)
LCD Check (page 224)
Backlight Check (page 225)
Screen Memory (page 226)
Touch Switch (page 228)
Battery (page 229)
153
Section 6-3
Operation Modes and the System Menu
6-3-3
Operations with the System Menu
This section describes how to use the menus, including how to call the System
Menu, how to call the System Installer mode, and how to select menu items.
Calling the System Menu
The System Menu can be displayed by either of the following two methods.
S Touching the corners of the touch panel
S Pressing a touch switch that displays the System Menu
Reference
- If display of the System Menu is disabled by the setting made in the System
Installer mode, the System Menu cannot be displayed (this does not apply if an
error has occurred).
- At the same as the System Menu is displayed, the operation of the
NT631/NT631C stops and the RUN LED goes OFF.
S Touching the corners of the touch panel
When two of the four corners of the touch panel (see the figure below) are
touched simultaneously, the System Menu is displayed.
RUN mode
POWER
[SYSTEM MENU]
RUN
Quit
Press any two of the four
corners at the same time.
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Expansion Mode
Note that the touch switches used to call the System Menu are not displayed at
corners on the screen. If a touch switch displayed in a corner is pressed first, the
touch switch will function and the System Menu will not be displayed. Especially,
when the touch switch has switch screen function, as a result of screen switch
over, it means the corner is not pressed even if it is kept pressing. To successfully call the System Menu, first press a corner where no touch switch is displayed,
and then press any other corner regardless of the presence of a touch switch.
Reference
With the NT631/NT631C, the System Menu can be displayed even if the screen
has touch switches registered at all four corners.
S Pressing a touch switch that displays the System Menu
There is a “control key” that has the function of displaying the System Menu.
By registering the touch switch for System Menu display ([MENU]) on a screen
when creating it, the System Menu can be displayed just by pressing this switch.
154
Section 6-3
Operation Modes and the System Menu
Calling the System Installer Mode
If the NT631/NT631C has no system program installed, or if the system program is
destroyed, the System Installer mode is automatically established when the power
is switched ON.
To establish the System Installer mode in order to install a system program or
make settings for data management, either turn the power ON, or reset the
NT631/NT631C, while pressing the touch switch at the top left corner of the touch
panel (size: 7.2 mm
7.2 mm).
Switch the power to the NT631/NT631C ON while pressing this touch switch.
POWER
RUN
Selecting Menu Items
The menu items in the System Menu are displayed on the NT631/NT631C screen
as touch switches. Menu items can be selected simply by pressing them.
Example:
Displaying the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen by pressing
“Maintenance Mode” in the System Menu.
Press “Maintenance Mode”.
Switching from the System Menu to the RUN Mode
Return to the RUN mode by selecting “Quit” in the System Menu and other menus.
Reference
Unlike previous PT models, the NT631/NT631C does not return to the RUN mode
automatically if no operations are performed.
155
Section 6-4
Memory Initialization
6-4
Memory Initialization
The NT631/NT631C has the following initialization functions. Use them as necessary.
Reference
6-4-1
S Clearing screen data
Page 156
S Initializing memory tables
Page 161
S Initializing memory switches
Page 162
S Initializing display history record data
Page 158
S Initializing alarm history record data
Page 159
If writing to the screen data memory has been disabled by the “System Setting”
setting in the System Installer mode, memory initialization is not possible.
Clearing Screen Data
Use this function if the screen data has been corrupted and the NT631/NT631C
cannot be started up correctly.
It clears (initializes) only the screen data: the memory switch settings and display
history/alarm history record data are retained.
Reference
- When this function is used, all of the screen data contents registered in the
NT631/NT631C up to that point are cleared. Check that the created screens
are backed up at the Support Tool before using it.
- The screen data can be cleared in the System Installer mode too (page 165).
- The following types of data can be initialized individually.
Contents of numeral/character string memory tables (page 159)
Memory switch settings (page 161)
Display history record data (page 158)
Alarm history record data (page 159)
Clear the screen data by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
156
Section 6-4
Memory Initialization
Select “Memory Init.”.
Select “Screen Data”.
Select “Yes”.
The screen data is cleared. During clearance, the message “Erasing Now...” is displayed.
S If “No” is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the “MEMORY INIT. MENU”
screen without clearing the screen data.
On completion of screen data clearance, the NT631/NT631C returns to the
“MEMORY INIT. MENU” screen.
After the screen data has been cleared, if an attempt is made to set the
NT631/NT631C to the RUN mode before screen data has been transmitted from
the Support Tool or memory unit, an error message will be displayed and the RUN
mode will not be established.
157
Section 6-4
Memory Initialization
6-4-2
Initializing Display History Record Data
The display history record function keeps a record of the order of display of the
screens displayed during operation, and the number of times each screen is displayed. These records are kept only for screens for which the “History” attribute
has been set.
The maximum number of records is 1024 for “sort by occurrence” (order of display
occurrence) and 255 for “sort by frequency” (order of the number of times each
screen has been displayed).
Use the display history record initialization function to clear the history record data
to 0, for example when the screen data has been changed, etc. Also, if “Alarm
(Use Ring Buffer)” under “History Setting” of “System” in “PT Configuration”
(Tools) has not been checked, no more records will be stored after the maximum
number of records has been kept, and therefore the records must be periodically
initialized. If “Alarm (Use Ring Buffer)” is checked, when the maximum number of
records is reached the oldest record is deleted and the newest data is recorded.
Reference
The NT631/NT631C also allows the display history record data to be initialized by
controlling the PT status control area from the host. For details, refer to “Display
history initialization (bit 11)” (page 267).
Initialize the display history record data by following the menu operation from the
System Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “Memory Init.”.
158
Section 6-4
Memory Initialization
Select “Display History”.
Select “Yes”.
The display history record data is initialized.
During initialization, the message “Initializing”
is displayed.
S If “No” is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the “MEMORY INIT. MENU”
screen without initializing the display history record data.
On completion of display history record data initialization, the message “Finished”
is displayed and the NT631/NT631C returns to the “MEMORY INIT. MENU”
screen.
6-4-3
Initializing Alarm History Record Data
The alarm history record function continually checks the status of host bits that
have been designated in advance with a bit memory table, and records the time
when any of the bits is set to 1 (comes “ON”), and the number of times that each bit
comes ON.
The maximum number of records is 256 for “sort by occurrence” (order of error
occurrence) and 255 for “sort by frequency” (order of the number of times each
error has occurred).
Use the alarm history record initialization function to reset the alarm history record
data to 0, for example when the screen data has been changed, etc. Also, if
“Screen (Use Ring Buffer)” under “History Setting” in the “PT Environment Settings” – “System Settings” has not been checked, no more records will be stored
after the maximum number of records has been kept, and therefore the records
must be periodically initialized. If “Screen (Use Ring Buffer)” is checked, when the
maximum number of records is reached the oldest record is deleted and the newest data is recorded.
Reference
The NT631/NT631C also allows the alarm history record data to be initialized by
controlling the PT status control area from the host. For details, refer to “Alarm
history initialization (bit 1)” (page 269).
159
Section 6-4
Memory Initialization
Initialize the alarm history record data by following the menu operation from the
System Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “Memory Init.”.
Select “Alarm History”.
Select “Yes”.
The alarm history record data is initialized.
During initialization, the message “Initializing”
is displayed.
S If “No” is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the “MEMORY INIT. MENU”
screen without initializing the alarm history record data.
On completion of alarm history record data initialization, the message “Finished” is
displayed and the NT631/NT631C returns to the “MEMORY INIT. MENU” screen.
160
Section 6-4
Memory Initialization
6-4-4
Initializing the Memory Tables
It is possible to initialize the numeral memory tables and character string memory
tables in the NT631/NT631C.
When these tables are initialized, the values are returned to those set by the Support Tool (they are not cleared).
When the memory tables are initialized, they are returned to their initial values regardless of the setting made for the resume function (page 199).
If “ON” is set for the “Resume Function” memory switch, the initial values set with
the Support Tool will not be recorded in the memory tables unless they are initialized.
Reference
- If “OFF” is set for the “Resume Function” memory switch, the memory tables
can be initialized just by switching the NT631/NT631C power off and back on
again, or by resetting the NT631/NT631C (page 199).
- The bit memory table merely reflects the statuses of bits at the host and therefore cannot be initialized.
Initialize the memory tables by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “Memory Init.”.
Select “Memory Table”.
161
Section 6-4
Memory Initialization
Select “Yes”.
The memory tables are initialized. During initialization, the message “Initializing” is displayed.
S If “No” is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the “MEMORY INIT. MENU”
screen without initializing the memory tables.
On completion of memory table initialization, the message “Finished” is displayed
and the NT631/NT631C returns to the “MEMORY INIT. MENU” screen.
6-4-5
Initializing the Memory Switches
Initialization returns all the memory switches of the NT631/NT631C to their status
on shipment.
Initialize the memory switches by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “Memory Init.”.
Select “Memory Switch”.
162
Section 6-4
Memory Initialization
Select “Yes”.
The memory tables are initialized. During initialization, the message “Initializing” is displayed.
S If “No” is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the “MEMORY INIT. MENU”
screen without initializing the memory switches.
On completion of memory switch initialization, the message “Finished” is displayed and the NT631/NT631C returns to the “MEMORY INIT. MENU” screen.
After initialization, the memory switch statuses are as follows.
Memory Switch
Status
Start-up Wait Time
00
Key Press Sound
ON
Buzzer Sound
OFF
Printer Controller
ESC/P
Print Method
Tone (NT631C only)
Screen Saver Movement
Display erased
Screen Saver Start up Time
010
Hist. Disp. Method
From New Data
Resume Function
OFF
Comm. Auto-return
OFF
Time-out Interval
01
Retry Counts
005
Comm. A Method
Host Link (communications speed = 9600 bps)*
Comm. B Select
RS-232C
Comm. B Method
None
*
The communication conditions for a bar code reader are initialized as follows:
Data bits: 7 bits; stop bit: 1 bit; parity: none; flow control: RS/CS.
163
Section 6-5
Operations in the System Installer Mode
6-5
Operations in the System Installer Mode
The following functions can be executed in the System Installer mode:
S Setting the display language (see below)
S Clearing/installing the system program (page 165)
S Disabling/enabling display of the System Menu (changing the system settings)
(page 166)
S Disabling/enabling writing to the screen data memory (changing the system settings) (page 166)
S Clearing screen data (page 168)
For details on calling the System Installer mode, refer to “Calling the System Installer Mode” (page 155).
6-5-1
Setting the Display Language in the System Installer Mode
The first setting made in the System Installer mode is to select whether the display
language is to be English or Japanese.
Select “English” or ”Japanese”.
From here on, this manual assumes that “English” has been selected here.
The System Installer mode menu is displayed.
If there is no system program or the system
program has been corrupted, the message
“System Program not exist or incorrect.” is
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
164
Section 6-5
Operations in the System Installer Mode
6-5-2
Clearing/Installing the System Program
Use this function when the system program of the NT631/NT631C has been corrupted, or when installing a new system program.
Reference
- In order to install a system program, the system installer must also be installed
at the Support Tool. The system installer is an accessory with the Support Tool
(ZJ3AT1/ZJCAT1-EV2). When installing the Support Tool in a personal computer, install the system installer also. For details on the method for installing
the system installer at the Support Tool side, and the operating procedure, refer
to the NT-series Support Tool Ver. 2.0 for Windows95 Operation Manual
(V045-E1).
- When the system program is cleared by mistake, it becomes impossible to use
the NT631/NT631C at all. Check that the system installer is installed at the Support Tool side before deleting the program. However, note that the registered
screen data and memory switch settings are retained.
- It becomes possible to install the system program inside the memory unit automatically by installing the memory unit at startup (Refer to 3-5 “Using Memory
Unit (NT631/NT631C with V1)” page 46).
Clear/install the system program by following the menu operation from the System
Installer mode menu shown below.
Clearing the System Program
Select “Download System Program”.
Select “Yes”.
The system program is cleared. During clearance, the message “Erasing ...” is displayed.
S If “Return to Menu” is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the System Installer mode menu without clearing the system program.
S If clearance fails, a screen asking whether you wish to try again is displayed.
On completion of system program clearance, the NT631/NT631C enters the
standby status for downloading of the system program.
165
Section 6-5
Operations in the System Installer Mode
Downloading the System Program
On normal completion of system program clearance, the standby status for system program downloading is automatically established.
When the NT631/NT631C enters this status,
transmit the system program from the system
installer at the personal computer.
During downloading, the progress of transmission is indicated on the screen.
Select “Run System”.
S If “Abort” is selected during standby for downloading or during downloading, a
screen asking whether you wish to download again is displayed.
When the system program is started, the NT631/NT631C starts up normally. If no
screen data has been registered, the System Menu is displayed.
Reference
6-5-3
If the new system program is not downloaded successfully after deleting a system
program, it is not possible to use the NT631/NT631C at all. After deleting the system program, be sure to download a new one.
Changing the System Settings
The NT631/NT631C allows the following settings to be made to prevent the
screen data and memory switch settings from being changed or deleted by misoperation.
S Disabling/enabling System Menu display
When System Menu display is disabled by this setting, the System Menu cannot
be displayed by touch panel operations or by using the touch switches. However, if a error occurs, the System Menu can be displayed from the error message
screen.
166
Section 6-5
Operations in the System Installer Mode
S Disabling/enabling writing to the screen data memory
When writing to the screen data memory is disabled by this setting, it is impossible to use the following System Menu functions.
- Switching to the Transmit mode
- Displaying the memory switch setting screens
- Checking the screen data memory
- Displaying the initialization menu
- Displaying the calendar/time setting screen (the calendar/time display screen
can be displayed)
Change the system settings by following the menu operation from the System Installer mode menu shown below.
Select “Change System Settings”.
Select “Display System Menu” or “Screen
Memory Protect ”.
Each time either of these items is selected,
the setting switches from “Disabled” to “Enabled” or vice versa.
Select “OK”.
The
settings
are
written
to
the
NT631/NT631C while the screen is displayed.
S If “Cancel” is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the System Installer mode
menu without changing the settings. The settings remain as they were before
the operation was started.
S If writing of the settings fails, a screen asking whether you wish to try again is
displayed.
After the settings have been written, the System Installer mode menu screen is
redisplayed.
167
Section 6-5
Operations in the System Installer Mode
6-5-4
Clearing Screen Data
If the screen data has been corrupted and the NT631/NT631C cannot be started
normally, use this function to clear the screen data.
Note that only the screen data is cleared (initialized), and the memory switch settings and the display history/alarm history record data are retained.
Reference
- When this function is used, all of the screen data contents registered in the
NT631/NT631C up to that point are cleared. Check that the created screens
are backed up at the Support Tool before using it.
- The screen data can also be cleared from the System Menu (page 156).
- If the screen data is cleared in the System Installer mode, the message “Screen
Data Corrupted” may be displayed on switching to the RUN mode. If this happens, initialize the screen data again from the “MEMORY INIT. MENU” screen.
Clear the screen data by following the menu operation from the System Installer
mode menu shown below.
Select “Erase Screen Data”.
Select “Yes”.
The screen data is cleared. During clearance, the message “Erasing ...” is displayed.
S If “Return to Menu” is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the “MEMORY
INIT. MENU” screen without clearing the screen data.
S If screen data clearance fails, a screen asking if you wish to try again is displayed.
On completion of screen data clearance, the NT631/NT631C returns to the System Installer mode menu screen.
After the screen data has been cleared, if an attempt is made to set the
NT631/NT631C to the RUN mode before screen data has been transmitted from
the Support Tool or memory unit, an error message will be displayed and the RUN
mode will not be established.
168
Section 6-6
Transmitting the Screen Data
6-6
Transmitting the Screen Data
The screen data is created with the Support Tool and then transmitted to the
NT631/NT631C. This section explains how to transmit the screen data.
For details on how to create the screen data and the operation at the operation at
the Support Tool, refer to Sections 7 to 9 of this manual and the NT-series Support
Tool Ver. 3.0 for Windows95/98 Operation Manual.
Reference
- The screen data can be transmitted also from the memory unit installed in the
NT631/NT631C. For details on this method, refer to 3-5 “Using a Memory Unit
(NT631/NT631C with V1)” (page 46) or 3-6 “Using Memory Unit
(NT631/NT631C with V1)” (Page 56).
- The screen data can be transmitted at a faster rate by setting “High” for “Baud
Rate” on the “Comms. Setting...” window of the Support Tool.
- If writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting made for “System
Setting” in the System Installer mode, screen data transmission is not possible.
Screen Data Composition and Transmission Units
The screen data comprises the following types of data.
S User screen data (screen units)
S System memory (memory switch) settings
S Direct connection information
S Numeral memory table data
S Character string memory table data
S Bit memory table data
S Mark information
S Image/library data
It is possible to transmit the screen data (data for all the screens) in “file units”, or to
transmit individual data or the data of individual screens in “data units”.
When data is transmitted in “file units”, all of the screen data in the NT631/NT631C
is cleared and then the new data is transmitted.
When data is transmitted in “data units”, first the previous data is invalidated, then
the new data is registered as valid data. Since the previous data is not cleared,
free memory area in the NT631/NT631C will be insufficient when transmissions in
“data units” are repeated. If this happens, write the screen data again by data
transmission in “file units”.
Transmitting Screen Data from the Support Tool
To transmit screen data from the Support Tool to the NT631/NT631C, follow the
procedure below.
Operation 1
Connect the NT631/NT631C to a personal computer in which the Support Tool
has been installed and turn the power to the NT631/NT631C ON.
2
Turn ON the power to the personal computer and start up the Support Tool.
169
Section 6-6
Transmitting the Screen Data
3
Establish the Transmit mode by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below at the NT631/NT631C.
Select “Transmit Mode”.
Select “Tool Transmit”.
4
Open the screen data to be transmitted at the Support Tool, then select “Download (NTST → PT)” in the Support Tool’s “Connect” menu and specify the data
to be transmitted.
5
During screen data transmission, the transmission status is displayed.
6
On completion of screen data transmission, press the “Quit” touch switch. The
NT631/NT631C returns to the Transmit mode.
If the screen data cannot be successfully transmitted from the Support Tool, use
the communication check functions of the NT631/NT631C to check if communication between the NT631/NT631C is normal or not (page 231).
170
Section 6-6
Transmitting the Screen Data
Precautions to Be Observed When Transmitting Screen Data
If any of the following, or a system error, occurs during transmission of screen
data, the transmitted screen data will not be registered correctly in the
NT631/NT631C. If this happens, the NT631/NT631C may not enter the RUN
mode when started up, or there may be unpredictable malfunctions such as failure
to display screens during operation. In this case, the screen data must be retransmitted in file units to register it correctly.
S The power to the NT631/NT631C is interrupted or the NT631/NT631C is reset.
S The power to the personal computer on which the Support Tool is running is interrupted or the computer is reset.
S The cable connecting the NT631/NT631C to the personal computer on which
the Support Tool is running is disconnected or has a broken wire.
S The “Quit” touch switch on the NT631/NT631C screen is pressed to end screen
data transmission.
S Screen data transmission is stopped by operation at the Support Tool.
Notice
When transferring the data in units of screens, if there are changes in memory
table and/or direct access, transfer such data along with the screen data.
171
Setting the Conditions for Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
6-7
Section 6-7
Setting the Conditions for Communications with the Host
by Using the Memory Switches
The NT631/NT631C can be connected to the host by the following 6 types of communication methods can be used to communicate with a host.
S Host link method
S Memory link method
S NT link (1:1) method
S Mitsubishi A-computer link method
S NT link (1:N) method
S Mitsubishi FX method
The NT631/NT631C has the following two ports, either of which can be used for
communications with the host, depending on the requirements.
S Serial port A (exclusively for RS-232C, 9-pin connector)
S Serial port B (RS-232C/RS-422A (selectable), 25-pin connector)
The method for setting the communication method for communications with the
host is described here.
For details on setting the communication conditions for a bar code reader, refer to
6-10 “Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function” (page 205).
Reference
- Apart from the host, it is also possible to connect the Support Tool or a bar code
reader to serial port A. When a bar code reader is connected at serial port A, the
host must be connected at serial port B. When serial port A is being used for
communications with the host, the host must be disconnected so that the Support Tool can be connected.
- There are four memory switch setting screens. The conditions for communications with the host are set on the fourth screen (the screen on which 4/4 is displayed). For details on setting memory switches other than those for setting the
conditions for communications with the host, refer to 6-9 “Various System Settings” (page 186).
- When using the Mitsubishi A-computer link method and Mitsubishi FX method, a
system program for multi-venders is required. Install the system program to the
NT631/631C by the system installer (refer to page 165). For details, refer to “PC
Connection Operation Manual” (V042-E1-j)
172
Section 6-7
Setting the Conditions for Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
6-7-1
About Communication Conditions
Items Set for Communication Conditions
The following settings are made for the communication conditions for communication between the NT631/NT631C and the host.
S Port communication method/communication type settings
Setting Item
Function
Setting Options
Page
Comm. A Method Set the communication method used at serial port A.
Depending on the communication method, further
communication condition settings may be necessary.
A system program for OMRON
model.
None/Host Link/NT Link (1:1)/
NT Link (1:N)/Bar-Code Reader
Memory link
Page 174
Page 176
Page 177
Page 179
Comm. B Select
RS-232C/RS-422A
Page 182
A system program for OMRON
model.
None/Host Link/NT Link (1:1)/
NT Link (1:N)
Memory link
Page 174
Page 176
Page 177
Page 179
Set whether serial port B is to be used for RS-232C or
RS-422A communication.
Comm. B Method Set the communication method used at serial port B.
Depending on the communication method, further
communication condition settings may be necessary.
S Communication condition settings for the host link method
Setting Item
Comm. Speed
(for host link only)
Function
Setting Options
Sets the communications speed
9600 bps/
for communications with the host. 19200 bps
Page
Page
174
S Communication condition settings for the NT link (1:1) method
No further communication conditions need to be set.
S Communication conditions settings for the NT link (1:N) method
Setting Item
Unit No.
(for NT link (1:N) only)
Function
Set the unit number of the
NT631/NT631C.
Setting Options
Page
0 to 7
Page
177
S Setting the conditions for communications with the memory link method
Setting Options
Page
Data bits
Setting Item
Set the data bits length.
Function
7, 8 bits
Page
179
Stop bits
Set the stop bits length.
1, 2 bits
Page
179
Parity
Set the parity.
None, even,
odd
Page
179
Comm. Speed
Set the communications speed
1200, 2400,
for communications with the host. 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400
bps
Page
179
Flow control
Set the flow control and its method.
None, RS/CS,
XON/XOFF
Page
179
Response
Set whether the response is carried out for normal process of
communication command or not.
Yes, No
Page
179
173
Section 6-7
Setting the Conditions for Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
Possible Combinations of Communication Method Settings
The combinations of communication methods that can be set with the
NT631/NT631C are indicated in the table below. Combinations other than these
listed below cannot be set (when using a system for multi-venders, refer to the “PC
Connection Operation Manual” (V042-E1-j)).
Serial port A
Serial port B
None
Host Link
NT Link
(1:1)
NT Link
(1:N)
Bar-code
reader
Memory
Link
None
3
3
3
3
3
3
Host Link
3
3
NT Link (1:1)
3
3
NT Link (1:N)
3
3
Memory Link
3
3
3: Possible combination
: Impossible combination
Combinations other than those indicated above cannot be set.
Reference
6-7-2
When using serial port B for communication with the host, and serial port A for the
transmission of screen data from the Support Tool, set the settings of serial port A
to “None”.
Setting the Host Link Method
Set the communication conditions for the host link method at serial port A or serial
port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “Memory Switch”.
174
Setting the Conditions for Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
Section 6-7
Display the fourth memory switch screen by
pressing the [ ] (next screen) or [ ] (previous
screen) touch switch.
Press the touch switch corresponding to the
port at which the host link method is to be set
(“Comm. A Method” or “Comm. B Method”) to
display the setting option “Host Link”.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
Press the “Set” touch switch to the right of the
port at which the setting has been made.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press the “Comm. Speed” touch switch to
display the communications speed to be set.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press “Quit”.
The communications speed is set.
175
Setting the Conditions for Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
Section 6-7
S To quit the communications speed setting screen without setting the communications speed, press the “Abort” touch switch. The NT631/NT631C returns to
the memory switch setting screen (4/4) and the previous communications speed
remains in effect.
On completion of communications speed setting, the NT631/NT631C returns to
the memory switch setting screen (4/4).
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
S To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
“Quit” touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen.
S To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the “Abort” touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-7-3
Setting the NT Link (1:1) Method
Set the communication conditions for the NT link (1:1) method at serial port A or
serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “Memory Switch”.
Display the fourth memory switch screen by
pressing the [ ] (next screen) or [ ] (previous
screen) touch switch.
176
Setting the Conditions for Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
Section 6-7
Press the touch switch corresponding to the
port at which the NT link (1:1) method is to be
set (“Comm. A Method” or “Comm. B Method”) to display the setting option “NT Link
(1:1)”.
The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
S To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
“Quit” touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen.
S To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the “Abort” touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-7-4
Setting the NT Link (1:N) Method
Set the communication conditions for the NT link (1:N) method at serial port A or
serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “Memory Switch”.
177
Setting the Conditions for Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
Section 6-7
Display the fourth memory switch screen by
pressing the [ ] (next screen) or [ ] (previous
screen) touch switch.
Press the touch switch corresponding to the
port at which the NT link (1:N) method is to be
set (“Comm. A Method” or “Comm. B Method”) to display the setting option “NT Link
(1:N)”.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press the “Set” touch switch to the right of the
port at which the setting has been made.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press the “Unit No.” touch switch to display
the unit number to be set.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press “Quit”.
The unit number is set.
178
Setting the Conditions for Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
Section 6-7
S To quit the unit number setting screen without confirming the unit number settings, press the “Abort” touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the
memory switch setting screen (4/4) with the previous settings still in effect.
Reference
“Unit numbers” are numbers assigned to each PT when multiple PTs are connected to one host, so that the host can identify the individual PTs. The units numbers that can be set differ according to the host model, as follows.
- C200HE(-ZE):
Unit numbers 0 to 3 (maximum of 4 PTs per host port)
- C200HG(-ZE), C200HX(-ZE):
Unit numbers 0 to 7 (maximum of 8 PTs per host port)
When making the settings, make sure there is no duplication of unit numbers
among PTs.
On completion of unit number setting, the NT631/NT631C returns to the memory
switch setting screen (4/4).
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
S To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
“Quit” touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen.
S To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the “Abort” touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-7-5
Setting the Memory Link Method
Set the communication conditions for the host link method at serial port A or serial
port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below. Check the
communication settings of the host to be used.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “Memory Switch”.
179
Setting the Conditions for Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
Section 6-7
Display the fourth memory switch screen by
pressing the [ ] (next screen) or [ ] (previous
screen) touch switch.
Press the touch switch corresponding to the
port at which the memory link method is to be
set (“Comm. A Method” or “Comm. B Method”) to display the setting option “Memory
Link”.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press the “Set” touch switch to the right of the
port at which the setting has been made.
In this example, serial port A is used.
180
Setting the Conditions for Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
Section 6-7
Display the data bits to be set (7 bits or 8 bits)
by pressing the “Data Bit Length” touch
switch.
Display the stop bits to be set (1 bit or 2 bits)
by pressing the “Stop Bit Length” touch
switch.
Display the parity to be set (None, even, odd)
by pressing the “Parity Bit” touch switch.
Display the communication speed to be set
(1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps.)
by pressing the “Comm. Speed” touch switch.
Display the condition of the flow control to be
set (None, RS/CS, XON/XOFF) by pressing
“Flow Control” touch switch.
If the RS-422A is selected for serial port B setting, RS/CS is not displayed.
Display presence or absence of the response
by pressing the “Response” touch switch.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press the “Quit” touch switch.
S To quit the communications speed setting screen without setting the communications speed, press the “Abort” touch switch. The NT631/NT631C returns to
the memory switch setting screen (4/4) and the previous communications speed
remains in effect.
On completion of communications speed setting, the NT631/NT631C returns to
the memory switch setting screen (4/4).
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
S To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
“Quit” touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen.
S To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the “Abort” touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the “MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU” screen with the previous settings still in effect.
181
Setting the Conditions for Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
6-7-6
Section 6-7
Setting the Communication Type for Serial Port B
Set the communication type (RS-232C or RS-422A) for serial port B by following
the operation from the System Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “Memory Switch”.
Display the fourth memory switch screen by
pressing the [ ] (next screen) or [ ] (previous
screen) touch switch.
Press the “Comm. B Select” touch switch to
display the communication type to be set.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
182
Setting the Conditions for Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
Reference
Section 6-7
If serial port B is used for RS-485 communications, “RS-422A” must be set as its
communication type.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
S To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
“Quit” touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen.
S To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the “Abort” touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen with the previous settings still in effect.
183
Section 6-8
Starting Operation
6-8
Starting Operation
After completing screen data transmission and setting the communication conditions, connect the NT631/NT631C to the host and start operation.
Notice
Check the operation of all screen data and host programs carefully before using
them. If incorrect, the system may operate unpredictably.
Switching to the RUN Mode and Starting Operation
Press the “Quit” touch switch on the System Menu screen or other screen. The
NT631/NT631C switches to the RUN mode and starts operation.
The operation at the start is as follows.
[Display of the “system initialization” screen]
When establishing the communication with a host, the “System initializing” character string is displayed on the screen. If the communication with the host cannot be established, the “System initializing”
screen remains up. If this is the case, check the settings at the host
and the PT side, the cables and wiring.
In addition, creating screen number 9000 enables the display of a
screen other than the “System initialization” screen.
[Transmission of the contents of memory tables]
If the “Resume Function” memory switch is set to “ON”, or if the initial
values of the memory tables are used, the contents of the numeral/
character-string memory tables are copied to the allocated words at
the host.
↓
[Display of the startup screen]
The startup screen is displayed on reading the contents (screen
number of the screen to be displayed) of the first word of the PT status control area.
If the contents are not correct for a screen number, or there is no data
registered for the set screen number, an error message is displayed.
184
Section 6-8
Starting Operation
Confirming the Communications between the NT631/NT631C and the Host
Execute the host program and confirm that the following operations are performed
normally.
S Confirm that the NT631/NT631C screens switch in accordance with the host
program.
If the screens do not switch correctly, check the connection between the host
and the NT631/NT631C, and also check if the hardware settings are correct.
For details, refer to Section 4 “Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port”, or
Section 5 “Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port”.
S Confirm that the operation results of touch switch and numeric value/character
string input at the NT631/NT631C are sent to the host correctly by displaying the
contents of the host words and bits using a peripheral tool (e.g. SYSMAC support software).
If the results of operations at the NT631/NT631C are not sent to the host correctly, check the setting of the display elements. For details on setting display elements, refer to Section 7 “NT631/NT631C Functions”.
185
Section 6-9
Various System Settings
6-9
Various System Settings
The NT631/NT631C allows a variety of functions which are convenient during operation to be set with memory switches. This section describes the memory switch
settings relating to the operation environment.
Since the memory switch settings are backed up to the flash memory by the battery in the NT631/NT631C, they are not cleared when the power is switched OFF.
6-9-1
Memory Switch Setting Screens
There are four memory switch setting screens. The required screen can be displayed by using the [ ] (next screen) and [ ] (previous screen) touch switches.
The four memory switch setting screens are shown below.
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
186
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
Section 6-9
Various System Settings
S Memory switch settings
A list of the memory switch settings is presented below.
- Start-up Wait Time
page 187
- Key Press Sound
page 188
- Buzzer Sound
page 189
- Printer Controller
page 191
- Print Method
page 192
- Screen Saver Movement
page 194
- Screen Saver Start up Time
page 196
- Hist. Disp. Method
page 197
- Resume Function
page 199
- Comm. Auto-return
page 200
- Time-out Interval
page 202
- Retry Counts
page 203
- Comm. A Method
page 172
(For the bar code reader, refer to page 205.)
- Comm. B Select
page 182
- Comm. B Method
page 172
For details on each setting, refer to the pages indicated.
6-9-2
Setting the “Start-up Wait Time”
The “Start-up Wait Time” is the time lapse until the NT631/NT631C switches to the
RUN mode after its power has been switched ON or after it has been reset. Set
this item if it takes some time for the host to start operation. Nothing is displayed
during the “Start-up Wait Time”.
The setting range is 0 to 10 seconds. The default (factory) setting is “00sec”.
Set the system start-up wait time by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
187
Section 6-9
Various System Settings
Select “Memory Switch”.
Press “Start-up Wait Time” to display the required time lapse.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed, according to the following sequence.
01 → 02 → 03 → .... 09 → 10 → 00 → 01 → ....
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
S To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
“Quit” touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen.
S To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the “Abort” touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-3
Setting the “Key Press Sound”
It is possible to set whether or not the key sound is sounded when a touch switch
on the NT631/NT631C screen is pressed.
S ON:
When a touch switch is pressed, the key sound sounds for 0.2 seconds.
S OFF: The key sound does not sound when touch switches are pressed.
The default (factory) setting is “ON”.
Set the key press sound by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
188
Section 6-9
Various System Settings
Select “Memory Switch”.
Press “Key Press Sound” to display “ON” or
“OFF”.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
S To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
“Quit” touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen.
S To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the “Abort” touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-4
Setting the “Buzzer Sound”
The NT631/NT631C has a function for sounding a buzzer in response to an instruction from the host, or when an error occurs. It is possible to set whether or not
the buzzer actually sounds with the memory switches.
S ON:
The buzzer sounds in response to instructions and when an error occurs.
S OFF:
The buzzer does not sound in response to instructions or when errors occur.
S ERROR ON:
The buzzer sounds only when an error occurs.
The default (factory) setting is “OFF”.
Reference
- There are other instructions and settings relating to the buzzer, but this memory
switch setting has the highest priority.
- For details on the buzzer, refer to 7-15-5 “Buzzer Function” (page 443).
189
Section 6-9
Various System Settings
Set the buzzer sound by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “Memory Switch”.
Press “Buzzer Sound” to display “ON”,
“OFF”, or “ERROR ON”.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
S To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
“Quit” touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen.
S To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the “Abort” touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen with the previous settings still in effect.
190
Section 6-9
Various System Settings
6-9-5
Setting the “Printer Controller”
The NT631/NT631C has a function for printing out data at a printer connected to it
in response to an instruction from the host or operation at the NT631/NT631C.
Three types of printer can be connected to the NT631/NT631C: select the type
used with this memory switch setting.
S ESC/P:
Printers that conform to the ESC/P 24-J83C (color) printer control specifications or printers that conform to the ESC/P 24-J82 (monochrome) control
specifications.
S PC-PR201H:
Printers that can emulate the PC-PR201H, made by NEC Corp.
S PCL 5:
Printers that conform to the PCL 5 printer control specifications.
Note that the NT631 can only be used with the monochrome “Tone” setting and
does not support color printing.
For the NT631, the “Print Method” is fixed as “Tone”.
The default (factory) setting is “ESC/P”.
Reference
- In addition to this setting, NT631C has the “Print Method” setting (page 192).
- For details on the print function, refer to 7-15-7 “Print Function” (page 446).
Set the printer controller setting by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “Memory Switch”.
191
Section 6-9
Various System Settings
Press “Printer Controller” to display the required printer type.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
S To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
“Quit” touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen.
S To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the “Abort” touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-6
Setting the “Print Method” (NT631C Only)
The NT631/NT631C has a function for printing out data at a printer connected to it
in response to an instruction from the host or operation at the NT631/NT631C.
When using the NT631C, the currently displayed screen image or other data can
be printed out in color. You can select whether screen data is actually printed out in
color, or in monochrome tones that represent colors, with this memory switch setting.
When PCL 5 is set for Printer Controller, the setting is fixed as “Tone”.
S Color: Color images are printed in color.
S Tone: Color images are printed in monochrome tones.
The default (factory) setting is “Tone”.
Reference
- In addition to this setting, NT631C has the “Printer Controller” setting (page
191).
- For details on the print function, refer to 7-15-7 “Print Setting” (page 446).
Set the print method setting by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
192
Section 6-9
Various System Settings
Select “Memory Switch”.
Press “Print Method” to display the required
printing method.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
S To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
“Quit” touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen.
S To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the “Abort” touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen with the previous settings still in effect.
193
Section 6-9
Various System Settings
6-9-7
Setting “Screen Saver Movement”
The NT631/NT631C has a function to prevent the formation of an afterimage by
turning off the screen display if no operation is performed for a certain period of
time, and then displaying character strings at random positions and in random colors (the colors only change for the NT631C).
The “Screen Saver Movement” setting determines whether or not these character
strings are displayed while the screen display is off.
If “Display” is selected, the character string stored in character string memory
table No. 0 is displayed.
If “Display erase” is selected, the character string is not displayed, and the backlight is also turned off while the screen display is off.
The default (factory) setting is “Display erased”.
The screen saver can be canceled, and former screen redisplayed, by any of the
following operations.
S Touching any part of the touch panel
S Screen switching due to PT status control area operations
S Screen switching due to bit memory table operations
S Execution of any of the following PT status control bit operations:
- Changing the backlight mode
- Screen printing (change from OFF to ON)
- Screen display (change from OFF to ON)
Reference
- The time before the screen is turned OFF is set by the “Screen Saver Start up
Time” setting. For details, refer to 6-9-8 “Setting the Screen Saver Start-up
Time” (page 196).
- Even if its operation has been set with the “Screen Saver Movement” setting, the
screen saver function will not be executed if “000” is set for “Screen Saver Start
up Time”.
- Screen saver function is enabled only through “RUN” mode of NT631/NT631C.
In “System Menu” or “System Installer” mode, this function is not started.
Set the screen saver operation by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
194
Section 6-9
Various System Settings
Select “Memory Switch”.
Press [ ] (next screen) or [ ] (previous
screen) to display the second memory switch
setting screen.
Press “Screen Saver Movement” to display
“Display” or “Display erased”.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
S To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
“Quit” touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen.
S To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the “Abort” touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen with the previous settings still in effect.
195
Section 6-9
Various System Settings
6-9-8
Setting the Screen Saver Start-up Time
The NT631/NT631C has a function to maximize the service life of the backlight
and prevent the formation of an afterimage by turning off the screen display and
the backlight if no operation is performed for a certain period of time.
The “Screen Saver Start up Time” setting determines the time interval before the
screen saver function operates.
The setting range is 0 to 255 minutes. The default (factory) setting is 10 minutes. If
“000” is set, the screen saver function does not operate.
The screen saver can be canceled, and previous screen redisplayed, by any of the
following operations.
S Touching any part of the touch panel
S Screen switching due to PT status control area operations
S Screen switching due to bit memory table operations
S Execution of any of the following PT status control bit operations:
- Changing the backlight mode
- Screen printing (change from OFF to ON)
- Screen display (change from OFF to ON)
Reference
- It is possible to display the character string stored in character string memory
table No. 0 at random positions and in random colors while the screen display is
off. For details, refer to 6-9-7 “Setting Screen Saver Movement” (page 194).
Note however that, when this feature is used, the backlight does not go off.
- For details on the screen saver function, refer to 7-15-4 “Screen Saver Function”
(page 442).
- Screen saver function is enabled only through “RUN” mode of NT631/NT631C.
In “System Menu” or “System Installer” mode, this function is not started.
Set the screen saver start-up time by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “Memory Switch”.
196
Section 6-9
Various System Settings
Press [ ] (next screen) or [ ] (previous
screen) to display the second memory switch
setting screen.
Set a time in the input field to the right of
“Screen Saver Start up Time”.
Each of the digits can be incremented or decremented by pressing the associated “+”
and “−” keys.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
S To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
“Quit” touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen.
S To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the “Abort” touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-9
Setting the History Display Method
The NT631/NT631C features the “display history record function”, which records
the time at which screens are displayed during operation and the number of times
they are displayed, and the “alarm history record function”, which continually monitors bit statuses at the host and records the time when bits come ON and the number of times they come ON.
The “Hist. Disp. Method” setting determines whether — when these record data
are displayed in “sort by occurrence” — the records are displayed in a progression
from newest to oldest or from oldest to newest.
S From Old Data:
The records are displayed in sequence from the oldest to newest.
S From New Data:
The records are displayed in sequence from the newest to oldest.
The default (factory) setting is “From New Data”.
Reference
When the voltage of the NT631/NT631C’s built-in battery becomes low, the history
record contents cannot be retained.
For details on the display history record function and the alarm history record function, refer to 7-15-1 “Display History Record Function” (page 435) and 7-15-2
“Alarm History Record Function” (page 438).
197
Section 6-9
Various System Settings
Set the history display method by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “Memory Switch”.
Press [ ] (next screen) or [ ] (previous
screen) to display the second memory switch
setting screen.
Press “Hist. Disp. Method” to display the required display order.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
S To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
“Quit” touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen.
S To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the “Abort” touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen with the previous settings still in effect.
198
Section 6-9
Various System Settings
6-9-10
Setting the Resume Function
The NT631/NT631C has a function to keep the contents of the memory tables
even when the power to the NT631/NT631C is OFF and write back them to the
host when the power is turned ON.
If the resume function is OFF, the memory tables are initialized to these initial values on switching to the RUN mode. If the resume function is ON, these are not
initialized and are kept the battery-backuped contents.
When the memory table is initialized, its contents are reset to the initial state that is
set by the Support Tool.
When the system is started up the next time, the screen is displayed using the previous contents of the memory table.
S ON:
The resume function is used.
S OFF: The resume function is not used.
The default (factory) setting is “OFF”.
Reference
- When the voltage of the NT631/NT631C’s built-in battery becomes low, the
memory table contents cannot be retained even if “ON” is set for the resume
function.
- For details on the resume record function, refer to 7-15-3 “Resume Function”
(page 441).
Set the resume function by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “Memory Switch”.
199
Section 6-9
Various System Settings
Press [ ] (next screen) or [ ] (previous
screen) to display the second memory switch
setting screen.
Press “Resume Function” to display the required setting.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
S To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
“Quit” touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen.
S To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the “Abort” touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-11
Setting the Automatic Reset Function
The NT631/NT631C has a function for ignoring communication errors and automatically returning to the RUN mode when they occur.
The “Comm. Auto-return” setting determines whether the automatic reset function
is effective or not.
S ON:
When a communication error occurs, the NT631/NT631C automatically returns
to the RUN mode without displaying an error screen (the “System Initializing”
screen may be displayed).
S OFF:
When a communication error occurs, an error screen is displayed and operation
stops. Pressing “OK” on the error screen returns the NT631/NT631C to the
RUN mode.
The default (factory) setting is “OFF”.
200
Section 6-9
Various System Settings
Reference
- If a communication error occurs when “OFF” is set for “Comm. Auto-return”, the
NT631/NT631C makes the number of attempts at communication with the host
specified by the setting for the “Retry Counts” touch switch (page 203). If communication cannot be re-established in any of these attempts, an error screen is
displayed.
- For details on communication errors, refer to 11-2-5 “Communication Errors and
Their Remedies” (page 615).
Set the automatic reset function by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “Memory Switch”.
Press [ ] (next screen) or [ ] (previous
screen) to display the third memory switch
setting screen.
Press “Comm. Auto-return” to display the required setting.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
201
Section 6-9
Various System Settings
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
S To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
“Quit” touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen.
S To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the “Abort” touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-12
Setting the Time-out Interval
The NT631/NT631C goes into the time-out error status if no response is received
from the host within a fixed time. The “Time-out Interval” setting specifies the time
lapse at which time-out is judged to have occurred.
The setting range is 0 to 10 seconds. The default (factory) setting is 1 second.
Reference
Whether or not an error screen is displayed when a time-out error occurs is determined by the setting for the “Comm. Auto-return” memory switch.
Set the time-out interval by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “Memory Switch”.
Press [ ] (next screen) or [ ] (previous
screen) to display the third memory switch
setting screen.
202
Section 6-9
Various System Settings
Press “Time-out Interval” to display the required time lapse.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed, according to the following sequence.
01 → 02 → 03 → .... 09 → 10 → 00 → 01 →
....
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
S To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
“Quit” touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen.
S To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the “Abort” touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-13
Setting the Retry Count
The NT631/NT631C does not immediately display an error screen when a communication error occurs, but tries to re-establish communication. The “Retry
Counts” setting specifies the number of attempts to be made to re-establish communication. If communication cannot be recovered within this number of attempts, the following happens depending on the setting made for the “Comm.
Auto-return” memory switch (page 200).
S Comm. Auto-return “ON”:
Operation in the RUN mode is continued without displaying an error screen. Regardless of the setting made for “Retry Counts”, attempts to re-establish communication are repeated until normal communication is achieved.
S Comm. Auto-return “OFF”:
The RUN mode is ended and an error screen is displayed. On pressing the “OK”
touch switch on the error screen, the screen displayed immediately before is redisplayed and attempts are made to re-establish communication.
The System Menu can be displayed from the error screen by pressing any two of
the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously.
The setting range is 0 to 255 times. The default (factory) setting is 5 times.
Reference
For details on communication errors, refer to 11-2-5 “Communication Errors and
Their Remedies” (page 615).
203
Section 6-9
Various System Settings
Set the retry count by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown
below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “Memory Switch”.
Press [ ] (next screen) or [ ] (previous
screen) to display the third memory switch
setting screen.
Set a number of times in the input field to the
right of “Retry Counts”.
Each of the digits can be incremented or decremented by pressing the associated “+”
and “−” keys.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
S To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
“Quit” touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen.
S To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the “Abort” touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen with the previous settings still in effect.
204
Section 6-10
Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function
6-10
Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function
The NT631/NT631C has a bar code reader input function which allows a bar code
reader to be connected and bar code data to read as character strings into character string input fields.
This section describes the communication conditions for the bar code reader and
the setting method for confirming the input data.
Reference
- For details on bar code reader types and connection methods, refer to 3-4 “Connecting a Bar Code Reader” (page 43) and for details on how to use a bar code
reader refer to “Inputting a Character String Using a Bar Code Reader” (page
522).
- The bar code reader is connected to serial port A. This means that serial port B
must be used for communications with the host.
Communication Condition Settings for Bar Code Readers
Setting Item
*
Function
Setting Options
Page
Data bit length
Sets the bit length for the data bits.
7* or 8 bits
Page 206
Stop bit length
Sets the stop bit length for the data.
1 or 2* bits
Page 206
Parity bit
Sets the parity bit for the data.
None, odd, even*
Page 206
Communications
speed
Sets the communications speed for the bar code reader
4800, 9600*, or 19200 bps Page 206
Input method
Sets the method for confirming data when it is input to a character string input field.
Manual: The data is confirmed with a touch switch. The data
can be corrected and character strings can be added.
Auto:
The data is automatically confirmed when it is input.
Manual*, Auto
Page 206
Default (factory) setting
Setting the Communication Conditions and Setting Method
Set the bar code reader communication conditions and method of confirmation at
input by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
205
Section 6-10
Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function
Select “Memory Switch”.
Press [ ] (next screen) or [ ] (previous
screen) to display the fourth memory switch
setting screen.
Press “Comm. A Method” to select “Bar-Code
Reader”.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
Press the “Set” touch switch to the right of
“Comm. A Method”.
Display the required setting for each item by
pressing the touch switches.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
206
Section 6-10
Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function
Press “Quit”.
Pressing “Abort” on the communication condition/confirmation method setting
screen causes the NT631/NT631C to return to the memory switch setting screen
(4/4) without executing setting (with the previous settings still effective).
On completion of communication condition/confirmation method setting, the
NT631/NT631C returns to the memory switch setting screen (4/4).
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
S To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
“Quit” touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen.
S To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the “Abort” touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen with the previous settings still in effect.
207
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
6-11
System Maintenance
The NT631/NT631C has the following maintenance and check functions.
Item
Function
Page
I/O Settings
Adjustment of display panel contrast and brightness of the backlight.
Page 208
Calendar Check
Display and setting of the time data of the NT631/NT631C clock function.
Page 211
PT Settings
Direct connection setting of the screen data in the NT631/NT631C and display of the
setting statuses of the serial ports.
Page 213
Display history record
Display and printing of display history record data.
Page 215
Alarm history record
Display and printing of alarm history record data.
Page 217
Screen data check
Display of each screen stored in the NT631/NT631C.
Page 219
I/O
check
Device check Checking of the I/O functions of the NT631/NT631C.
Page 222
I/F check
Page 231
Checking of the communication functions of the NT631/NT631C.
This section describes how to use these functions.
6-11-1
I/O Settings
This function is used to adjust the contrast of the display panel and the brightness
of the backlight.
Contrast Adjustment (for NT631C–ST141j–EV1 only)
The NT631C–ST141j–EV1 allows the contrast to be adjusted in 100 steps. The
“CONTRAST ADJUST” screen enables you to make the adjustment while actually
checking the contrast on the screen. Once the contrast has been set, it remains in
effect even if the power is turned OFF or the NT631/NT631C is reset (and even if
the voltage of the built-in battery becomes low).
Adjust the contrast of the display panel by following the menu operation from the
System Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “I/O Settings”.
208
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Select “Contrast Adjust”.
Adjust the contrast with the touch switches in
the left half of the screen.
[
]: Increase 10 steps
[Y]: Increase 1 step
[B]: Decrease 1 step
[
]: Decrease 10 steps
Press “Quit”.
The contrast is set and the NT631/NT631C
returns to the “I/O SETTINGS MENU”
screen.
Backlight Brightness Adjustment (for NT631C-ST141j-EV1 only)
The NT631C–ST141j–EV1 allows the brightness of the backlight to be adjusted
in 3 steps. The “BRIGHTNESS ADJUST” screen enables you to make the adjustment while actually checking the brightness on the screen.
Reference
In the NT631C–ST151j–EV1, adjustment is not possible even though this screen
is displayed.
Adjust the backlight brightness by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
209
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Select “I/O Settings”.
Select “Brightness Adjust”.
Adjust the contrast with the “High”, “Middle”,
and “Low” touch switches in the left half of the
screen.
Press “Quit”.
The contrast is set and the NT631/NT631C
returns to the “I/O SETTINGS MENU”
screen.
210
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
6-11-2
Displaying/Setting the Calendar and Clock
The NT631/NT631C has a “clock function” for setting and displaying the date and
time.
This section describes how to display and set the clock data by menu operation
from the System Menu.
Reference
- The clock function does not strictly check the date and day of the week settings.
When setting the clock data, be sure to set the correct date and day of the week.
If a mistake is made — for example entering a value in the range 13 to 19 when
entering the month — the buzzer sounds three times.
Make sure that the data is correct when the month changes.
- Numeral memory tables 247 to 255 are reserved for the clock function. Clock
data can be displayed and set during operation of the NT631/NT631C by using
these numeral memory tables.
- For details on the clock function, refer to 7-15-6 “Clock Function” (page 445).
- No clock data is set on shipment from the factory.
- The clock data is backed up by the built-in battery of the NT631/NT631C. If the
battery voltage becomes low, the clock data cannot be retained when the power
to the NT631/NT631C is turned OFF or the NT631/NT631C is reset and the
clock function will not operate correctly.
- When writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting made for
“System Setting” in the System Installer mode, it is not possible to set the date
and time.
Display/set clock data by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “Calendar Check”.
211
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Press “Set”.
If you are just checking the display, press
“Quit” at this point; the NT631/NT631C will return to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU”
screen.
Set the date.
Each of the digits of the year, month, date,
hour, minute, and second settings, and the
day of the week setting, are touch switches:
press these touch switches to change the corresponding settings.
Press “Quit”.
The clock data is set and the NT631/NT631C
returns to the date and time display.
S Pressing “Abort” causes the NT631/NT631C to return to the date and time display without executing setting (with the previous settings still effective).
212
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
6-11-3
Checking the PT Setting Status
The direct connection settings of the NT631/NT631C screen data, and the settings for serial port A and serial port B, can be checked.
Screen Configuration and Display Contents
There are the following three PT setting status screens.
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
S Display contents of the first screen
Item
Meaning
Screen Data Type
The host type set for the screen data
PT Control Area
Word at the host to which the PT status control area is allocated
PT Notification Area
Word at the host to which the PT status notify area is allocated
Window Control
Area
Word at the host to which the window control area is allocated
Numeric Expression
Default for the method of interpretation of the contents of host
words to which numeral memory tables are allocated (numeric value storage method).
Expansion I/F
Type of unit installed at the expansion interface connector
S Display contents of the second screen
Item
Meaning
Comm. Port A
Communication type set for serial port A (fixed as RS-232C)
Comm. Method
Communication method set for serial port A
Comm. Setting
Communication conditions set for serial port A (display contents differ according to the communication method)
S Display contents of the third screen
Item
Meaning
Comm. Port B
Communication type set for serial port B (RS-232C/RS-422A)
Comm. Method
Communication method set for serial port B
Comm. Setting
Communication settings set for serial port B (display contents
differ according to the communication method)
213
Section 6-12
Programming Console Function
Display Method
Display the PT setting statuses by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “PT Settings”.
Switch the screen as required by pressing the
[ ] (next screen) or [ ] (previous screen)
touch switch.
Press “Quit”.
The NT631/NT631C returns to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen.
214
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
6-11-4
Displaying and Printing the Display History Record
The “display history record function” is a function that records the order of display
of each screen during operation, and the number of times each screen is displayed. Only the screens for which the “display history” screen attribute has been
set in advance are processed by this function.
The record data can be displayed, and printed out at a printer connected to the
NT631/NT631C by operation from the System Menu.
This section explains how to display and print out the display history record data
recorded in the NT631/NT631C.
Note that there are two display methods “sort by occurrence” (display time order)
and “sort by frequency” (order of number of times displayed).
Reference
- With the NT631/NT631C, the record data can also be displayed by calling
screen No. 9001 (sort by occurrence) or screen No. 9002 (sort by frequency)
during the RUN mode.
- For details on the display history record function, refer to 7-15-1 “Display History
Record Function” (page 435).
- The order of display for “sort by occurrence” display (from oldest record or from
newest record) is set with the “Hist. Disp. Method” memory switch (page 197).
- The printing method and other information must be set in advance with the
“Printer Controller” (page 191) and “Print Method” (page 192) memory switches.
Display and print the display history record data by following the menu operation
from the System Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “Display History”.
215
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Select “Sort by Occurrence” or “Sort by Frequency”.
If necessary, select the next or previous
screen by pressing [ ] (next screen) or [ ]
(previous screen).
The example screen to the left shows a display for the “sort by occurrence” method
(from oldest record).
If required, press “Prt.” to print the display history record data.
Press “Quit”.
The NT631/NT631C returns to the “DISPLAY
HISTORY MENU” screen.
S Example print-out
All of the recorded data is printed out in the same order as on the currently displayed screen.
Example:
“Sort by occurrence”, from oldest record
No.
216
Scrn
YY/MM/DD HH:MM Comment
1
1
98/01/12
10:21
Coolant Error
2
2
3
8
98/01/12
11:53
Motor Error
98/01/13
09:35
Compressor Error
4
2000
98/01/13
14:22
Emergency Stop
01/01
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
6-11-5
Displaying and Printing the Alarm History Record
The “alarm history record function” is a function that continually monitors, during
operation, the status of bits at the host designated in advance with a bit memory
table, and records the time when these bits come ON, and the number of times
they come ON.
The record data can be displayed, and printed out at a printer connected to the
NT631/NT631C by operation from the System Menu.
This section explains how to display and print out the alarm history record data
recorded in the NT631/NT631C.
Note that there are two display methods “sort by occurrence” (“ON” time order)
and “sort by frequency” (order of number of times the bits have come “ON”).
Reference
- With the NT631/NT631C, the record data can also be displayed by registering
an “alarm history” display element on the screen.
- For details on the alarm history record function, refer to 7-15-2 “Alarm History
Record Function” (page 438).
- The order of display for “sort by occurrence” display (from oldest record or from
newest record) is set with the “Hist. Disp. Method” memory switch (page 197).
- The printing method and other information must be set in advance with the
“Printer Controller” (page 191) and “Print Method” (page 192) memory switches.
Display and print the alarm history record data by following the menu operation
from the System Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “Alarm History”.
217
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Select “Sort by Occurrence” or “Sort by Frequency”.
If necessary, select the next or previous
screen by pressing [ ] (next screen) or [ ]
(previous screen).
The example screen to the left shows a display for the “sort by occurrence” method
(from oldest record).
If required, press “Prt.” to print the display history record data.
Press “Quit”.
The NT631/NT631C returns to the “ALARM
HISTORY MENU” screen.
S Example print-out
All of the recorded data is printed out in the same order as on the currently displayed screen.
Example:
“Sort by occurrence” method, from oldest record
No. Comment
218
YY/MM/DD
98/02/06
HH:MM 01/01
1
Remote I/O Error
16:02
2
PIC Unit Error
98/02/07
09:21
3
Cycle Time Over
98/02/17
15:44
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
6-11-6
Checking Screen Data
The NT631/NT631C allows the registered screens (Nos. 1 to 3999) to be displayed and checked by operation from the System Menu.
Reference
- Window screens cannot be displayed by operation from the System Menu.
- Only the user screens (Nos. 1 to 3999) can be displayed. Screens for system
use cannot be displayed.
S Specifying the display method
Specify the display method for the screens as indicated in the table below.
Setting Item
*
Function
Setting
Options
Display of Lamp/
Touch SW No.
Allows designation of whether the bit number of the lamp bit set for a lamp or touch
switch is displayed or not.
The display format is as follows “Ljfffffff” (j: area type, fffffff: bit
number).
ON, OFF*
Display of Memory
Table No.
Allows designation of whether the table numbers of numeral and character string
memory tables are displayed or not.
The display format for numeral memory tables is “Nffff” and the display format for
character string memory tables is “Sffff”.
This function is valid for the following display elements.
- Numeral displays
- Character string displays
- Bar graphs
- Numeral setting input fields (including thumbwheel type)
- Character string input fields
ON, OFF*
Display of image/
Library No.
Allows designation of whether image/library code numbers are displayed or not.
ON, OFF*
Display of Broken
Line Frame
Allows designation of whether or not broken line frames are displayed around the display ON, OFF*
elements for showing the positions registered.
Default (factory) setting
Reference
Each setting of the screen data check is effective only on this menu. Exiting from
this screen data check menu resets the settings to the default (all the settings are
set to “OFF”).
S Operations on the “SCREEN DATA CHECK” screen
The function shown below can be set on the “SCREEN DATA CHECK” screen.
Use this function as required when displaying complex screens on which multiple display elements have been registered overlapping each other.
a) Equivalent to 2 touch switches (14.4 mm)
NT631 : 14.4 mm
NT631C : 13.2 mm
c)
b) Equivalent to 2 touch switches (14.4 mm)
NT631 : 14.4 mm
NT631C : 13.2 mm
a) Display the previous display element on the upper most portion of the screen
in the order in which the display elements were registered (excluding fixed
display elements).
b) Display the next display element on the upper most portion of the screen in
the order in which the display elements were registered (excluding fixed display elements).
c) Return to the screen on which screens are specified.
219
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Displaying the “SCREEN DATA CHECK” Screen
Display the “SCREEN DATA CHECK” screen by following the menu operation
from the System Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “Screen Data Disp.”
Specify the screen to be displayed in the input
field in the middle of the screen.
Each of the digits can be incremented or decremented by pressing the associated “+”
and “−” keys.
Press “Set”.
220
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Press the touch switches to specify the display method in each case.
The setting option changes each time a touch
switch is pressed.
Press “Quit” to return to the screen number
selection screen.
Press “Disp”.
BOILER OPERATION
T 015003
RUN
T 015301
STOP
L 020000
L 020005
Start
Confirmation
Stop
Confirmation
T 016312
ERROR
L 020013
Error
Occurrence
BOILER OPERATION
T 015003
RUN
T 015301
STOP
L 020000
L 020005
Start
Confirmation
Stop
Confirmation
T 016312
ERROR
Touching the top or bottom of the screen
changes the way the display elements overlap each other in the order in which they are
registered.
In this example, the bottom portion of the
touch switch, which is under the lamp, will be
displayed over the lamp.
When you have finished checking the screen,
press the central part of the screen to return to
the screen number selection screen.
L 020013
Error
Occurrence
221
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
If you wish to continue by checking another screen, repeat the operation, starting
by specifying the screen number.
To end the operation, press “Quit” on the screen number selection screen. The
NT631/NT631C returns to the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen.
6-11-7
Device Check
The NT631/NT631C provides checks on the functions of the following items.
- Buzzer
Page 222
- LED
Page 223
- LCD
Page 224
- Backlight
Page 225
- Screen data memory
Page 226
- Touch switches
Page 228
- Battery voltage
Page 229
Checking the Buzzer
Check if the buzzer sounds correctly.
Reference
The buzzer will sound in this check regardless of the setting made with the “Buzzer
Sound” memory switch.
Check the buzzer by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown
below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “I/O Check”.
222
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Select “Device Check”.
Select “Buzzer Check”.
S If the buzzer functions correctly, it will sound continuously. At this time, the
“Buzzer Check” touch switch will be displayed in reverse video.
S To stop the buzzer while it is sounding, press the “Buzzer Check” touch switch
again.
Checking the RUN LED
Check if the RUN LED functions normally.
Check the RUN LED by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “I/O Check”.
223
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Select “Device Check”.
Select “LED Check”.
S If the RUN LED is functioning normally, it will operate as follows. At this time the
“LED Check” touch switch will be displayed in reverse video.
Lit in green → OFF → lit in red → OFF → lit in green...
S To end the LED check, press the “LED Check” touch switch on the “DEVICE
CHECK MENU” screen again.
Checking the LCD (Screen Display)
Check if the LCD display (or EL display for NT631) functions normally by following
the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “I/O Check”.
224
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Select “Device Check”.
Select “LCD Check”.
S The check screen displays all the dots on the screen: either press anywhere on
the touch panel or wait for three seconds and all the dots will be cleared.
With the NT631C, the display and clearance of all the dots on the screen is repeated for each color in turn (red → green → blue → magenta → cyan → yellow
→ white → black).
On completion of the display and clearance of all dots, the NT631/NT631C returns to the “DEVICE CHECK MENU” screen.
S To abort the LCD check, press the top right corner of the touch panel. The
NT631/NT631C will return to the “DEVICE CHECK MENU” screen.
Checking the Backlight (for NT631C only)
Check if the backlight functions normally with the NT631C by following the menu
operation from the System Menu shown below. This function is not available with
the NT631.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
225
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Select “I/O Check”.
Select “Device Check”.
Select “Backlight Check”.
S If the backlight is normal, it flashes. At this time, the “Backlight Check” touch
switch is displayed in reverse video.
S To end the backlight check, press the “Backlight Check” touch switch again.
Screen Data Memory Check
Check if the screen data memory is functioning normally.
Reference
- In the screen data memory check, a write test is performed on the screen data
memory. Since all the screen data in the NT631/NT631C is lost in this check,
confirm that this data is backed up at the Support Tool or memory unit before
executing it.
- If writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting for “System Settings” in the System Installer mode, it is not possible to execute a screen data
check.
- Once a screen data check has been started, it cannot be stopped.
226
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Check the screen data memory by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “I/O Check”.
Select “Device Check”.
Select “Screen Memory”.
Press “Execute”.
227
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
S During the check, the message “Checking Now...” is displayed.
S On normal completion of the check, the message “Memory Check OK” is displayed.
S If an error is discovered in the check, the message “Memory Check NG” is displayed.
After confirming the result of the check, press “Quit”. The NT631/NT631C returns
to the “DEVICE CHECK MENU” screen.
Checking Touch Switches
Check whether or not the touch switches function normally by following the menu
operation from the System Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “I/O Check”.
Select “Device Check”.
228
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Select “Touch Switch”.
Press the touch switches displayed on the
screen. A touch switch is normal if it is displayed in reverse video while pressed.
To end the check, press the touch switch at the top right corner (NT631: displayed
in reverse video; NT631C: displayed in yellow). The NT631/NT631C will return to
the “DEVICE CHECK MENU”.
Reference
- The functions of touch switches pressed during the I/O check are not notified to
the host.
- The check cannot be performed until the touch switch at the top right corner is
displayed in reverse video (for NT631) or displayed in yellow (NT631C). Start
the check after the status of the touch switch at the top right corner has changed.
Checking the Battery Voltage
Check the voltage of the NT631/NT631C’s built-in battery by following the menu
operation from the System Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
229
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Select “I/O Check”.
Select “Device Check”.
Select “Battery”.
“The voltage is within the normal range.” or
“The voltage is lowered.” is displayed.
After confirming the result of the check, press “Quit”. The NT631/NT631C returns
to the “DEVICE CHECK MENU” screen.
Notice
230
When “The voltage is lowered” is displayed, replace the built-in battery immediately. For details on the replacement method, refer to 11-3-1 “Replacing the Battery” (page 623).
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
6-11-8
Checking Interfaces
The NT631/NT631C allows the following communication functions to be checked.
- Communication with the Support Tool
Page 231
- Communication at serial ports
Page 232
- Communication with printers
Page 235
Checking Communication with the Support Tool
Check communication with the Support Tool by following the menu operation from
the System Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “I/O Check”.
Select “I/F Check”.
Select “Tool Comm.”.
231
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
The check on communication with the Support Tool starts.
S If communication with the Support Tool is normal, data transmitted from the Support Tool is displayed as hexadecimal data when received by the
NT631/NT631C.
After confirming the result of the test, press “Quit”. The NT631/NT631C returns to
the “I/F CHECK MENU” screen.
Checking Communication at Serial Ports
Check communication at the serial ports (A, B).
S Check screen
The check screen and check method differ according to the communication
method set for the port to be checked.
- For host link
Example:
Serial port A while using the host link
Press “Execute” to start the check. The data for checking communication is
sent to the host, and is displayed as the “Sending Data” in hexadecimal.
- If communication with the host is normal, the reply from the host is displayed
at “Received Data” in hexadecimal.
- If a communication error occurs while checking the communication conditions with the host, a communication error screen is displayed. Since this
indicates that there is a communication fault, check the communication
cables and settings.
232
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
- For NT link (1:1 or 1:N)
Example:
Serial port B while using the NT link (1:N)
Press “Execute” to start the check. The data for checking communication is
sent to the host, and is displayed as “∗∗” symbols at “Sending Data”.
- If communication with the host is normal, the reply from the host is displayed
at “Received Data” as “∗∗” symbols.
- If a communication error occurs while checking the communication conditions with the host, a communication error screen is displayed. Since this
indicates that there is a communication fault, check the communication
cables and settings.
- For Memory link
Example:
Serial port A while using the memory link
The check is started as soon as the check screen is displayed. Send the command from the host.
- If communication with the host is normal, the data received from the host is
displayed in hexadecimal text code at “Received Data”.
- If nothing is displayed at “Received Data” when the command is sent from
the host, there is a communication fault: check the communication cables
and settings.
233
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
- For a bar code reader
The check starts when the check screen is displayed. Read data with the bar
code reader in this status.
- If communication with the bar code reader is normal, the read character
strings are displayed in hexadecimal text code at “Received Data”.
- If nothing is displayed at “Received Data” when data is read with the bar
code reader, there is a communication fault: check the communication
cables and settings.
S Check method
Check communication with the serial ports by following the menu operation from
the System Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “I/O Check”.
234
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Select “I/F Check”.
Select “Comm. Port A” or “Comm. Port B”.
The check screen is displayed (“Check
screen”, page 232).
After confirming the result of the check, press “Quit”. The NT631/NT631C returns to the “I/F CHECK MENU” screen.
Checking Communication with a Printer
Check communication with a printer by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Select “I/O Check”.
235
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Select “I/F Check”.
Select “Printer”.
Confirm that a printer is connected to the
NT631/NT631C, then press “Execute”:
“Printer Interface Check” will be printed out at
the printer.
S While data is being sent to the printer, the message “Checking Now...” is displayed.
S When the sending of data to the printer is completed, “Finished Normal by
“Printer Interface Check” is displayed.
S If data does not reach the printer within 60 seconds after sending starts, the
message ‘Finished Printer output failed’ is displayed.
After confirming the result of the check, press “Quit”. The NT631/NT631C returns
to the “I/F CHECK MENU” screen.
236
Programming Console Function
6-12
Section 6-12
Programming Console Function
As an expansion function, the NT631/NT631C features the “programming console
function”, which allows it to be used instead of a programming console (type
C200H-PRO27-E) for a C-series CPM1, CQM1, C200HX/HG/HE (–ZE), or
CS1-series CS1G/CS1H.
Except for recording (saving) ladder programs on cassette tape and replaying
(reading) them, almost all the functions of a programming console can be executed.
Notice
When the programmable controller functions are used, carefully check that the
system is safe before carrying out the following operations.
-
Changing monitor data
Switching the operating mode
Forced set or reset
Changing a present value or set value
237
Section 6-12
Programming Console Function
6-12-1
Usable Systems
The programming console function can be used with an NT631/NT631C connected to a PC when using the communication method indicated below.
Communication Communication
Type
Method
Connected Port
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E(*1)
CPU built-in RS-232C
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E(*1)
port
C200HX-CPU65-ZE(*1)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE(*1)
CQM1-CPU4j-EV1(*1)
SRM1-C02-V1
NT Link (1:1)
RS-232C
NT Link (1:N)
Applicable PCs
CPM1-10CDR-j
CPM1-20CDR-j
CPM1-30CDR-j
CPM1A-10CDj-j
CPM1A-20CDj-j
CPM1A-30CDj-j
CPM1A-40CDj-j
CS1G-CPU42-E(*1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(*1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(*1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(*1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(*1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(*1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(*1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(*1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(*1)
Peripheral port (*2)
S CPU built-in
RS-232C port
S Peripheral port (*3)
*1 The peripheral port programming console always has priority. If a programming
console is connected later, the programming console function of the NT631/NT631C
is invalidated and operation from the NT631/NT631C becomes impossible.
*2 An RS-232C cable cannot be connected to the peripheral port. An RS-232C adapter
(CPM1-CIF01) is required.
*3 The RS-232C cable cannot be directly connected to the peripheral port. An RS-232C
converting cable (CS1W-CN118) is required.
Reference
Note that the programming console function cannot be used with CPM1, CQM1,
and C200HX/HG/HE PCs of the following lot numbers.
CPM1: jjj5, jj*6
where * is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y.
CQM1: jjj3, jjj4, jjj5, jj*6
where * is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y.
C200HX/HG/HE: jjj5 jj*6
where * is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y.
238
Programming Console Function
6-12-2
Section 6-12
Connection Method
For CQM1, C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE), SRM1
The connection method is exactly the same as for the NT link (1:1). Make the connection to the PC by referring to Section 4 “Connecting to the Host from the
RS-232C Port”.
For CPM1
The connection method is the same as for the NT link (1:1). Connect the RS-232C
cable to the peripheral port via an RS-232C converting adapter (CPM1-CIF01).
Make the connection to the PC by referring to Section 4 “Connecting to the Host
from the RS-232C Port”.
For CS1G/CS1H
The connection method is exactly the same as for the NT link (1:N). Make the connection to the PC by referring to Section 4 “Connecting to the Host from the
RS-232C Port”.
The programming console function can be used only when the PT side unit number is “0” and only one unit is connected. In addition, this function cannot be used
simultaneously at the CPU built-in RS-232C port and a peripheral port.
6-12-3
Method of Use
For CS1G/CS1H
The connection method is exactly the same as for the NT link (1:N). Make the connection to the PC by referring to Section 4 “Connecting to the Host from the
RS-232C Port”.
The programming console function can be used only when the PT side model
number is “0” and only one unit is connected. In addition, this function cannot be
used simultaneously at the CPU built-in RS-232C port and a peripheral port.
Only the points of difference with an actual programming console are described
here. For details on using the NT631/NT631C as a programming console, refer to
the instruction manual for the programming console (C200H-PRO27-E).
239
Section 6-12
Programming Console Function
The “programming console” screen is displayed by operating the system menu as
described below.
Select “Expansion Mode”.
Select “Programming Console”.
The programming console screen is displayed.
Press the programming console sheet keys
(touch switches) for the operation.
Press the “Quit” touch switch to exit the
screen.
An error is displayed if a wrong communication protocol is selected or a programming
console is connected to a peripheral port.
Reference
240
When an error screen is displayed, press the “Check” touch switch on the screen
to return to the system menu. In addition, pressing two of the four corners of the
touch panel simultaneously in the error screen enables the display of the system
menu.
Section 6-12
Programming Console Function
Key Operations
S Mode selection keys, mode lock key
The display element on the programming console screen shown below comprises the mode selection keys, which change the operation mode of the PC,
and the mode lock key, which prevents unintended mode changes.
Mode selection keys
Mode lock key
The RUN, MONITOR, and PROGRAM mode selection key elements are touch
switches and pressing them causes the PC operation mode to change (unlike an
actual programming console, it is possible to switch directly between the RUN
mode and the PROGRAM mode.)
When the programming console function is started, the PC operation status is
read and reflected at the PC.
The mode lock key element is also a touch switch, and it alternates between the
“lock ON” (with no key displayed) and “lock OFF” (with key displayed) states
when pressed. During the lock ON state, mode selection key operations are ineffective. The mode displays change as indicated in the figures below during the
lock ON status and during the lock OFF status.
When the programming console function starts, the lock ON status is established.
If the RUN, MONITOR, or PROGRAM mode selection key is pressed in the lock
OFF status, the mode changes and the lock ON status is established.
- During lock OFF
RUN mode
MONITOR mode
PROGRAM mode
- During lock ON
RUN mode
MONITOR mode
PROGRAM mode
241
Programming Console Function
Section 6-12
S Programming console keyboard
The programming console keyboard used on the screen when the programming
console function is used is comprised entirely of touch switches (shown by the
dashed line frames in the figure below). On pressing a touch switch, a key operation is executed. However, since there is a discrepancy between the size of
the displayed keys and the size of the touch switches, take care to press as close
to the center of the key as possible by referring to the figure below.
In addition, if the connected host is the CS1G/CS1H, the programming console
key sheet for the CS1 series is automatically displayed.
[Standard Programming console key sheet]
[Programming console key sheet for CS1 series]
242
Programming Console Function
Section 6-12
Differences with Respect to Programming Consoles
S Programs cannot be stored (recorded) or read (replayed). If it is necessary to
store or read a program, use a peripheral tool.
S It is not possible to adjust the volume of the key press sound. Whether or not the
key press sound sounds is determined by the setting for the “Key Press Sound”
memory switch of the NT631/NT631C. It sounds when the setting is “ON” and
does not when the setting is “OFF” (page 188).
S If an error occurs when using the programming console function, an error screen
is displayed. Whether or not the buzzer sounds at this time is determined by the
setting for the “Buzzer Sound” memory switch of the NT631/NT631C (page
189).
Reference
If, when using the programming console function, “Communication Condition Setting for RS-232C port” in the PC system setting area is changed, for example by
memory clearance, a communication error occurs and it becomes impossible to
use the programming console function.
243
SECTION 7
NT631/NT631C Functions
This section describes the functions of the NT631/NT631C.
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-14
244
NT631/NT631C Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-1 Screen Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-2 Screen Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-3 Screen Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-4 Screen Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-5 Color Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-6 Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Areas for Control/Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-1 PT Status Control Area (Host ↔ NT631/NT631C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-2 PT Status Notify Area (NT631/NT631C to Host) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-3 Window Control Area (Host ↔ NT631/NT631C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-1 Numeral Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-2 Character String Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-3 Bit Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixed Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-1 Circles, Arcs, Sectors, Polylines, Polygons, Rectangles
(Fixed Displays) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-2 Text (Fixed Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-3 Tiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-4 Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image and Library Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-1 Image Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-2 Library Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numeral Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character String Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-10-1 Bar Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-10-2 Analogue Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-10-3 Broken Line Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-10-4 Trend Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm List, Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inputting Numeric Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-12-1 Numeric Key Type (“Numeral Input”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-12-2 Thumbwheel Type (“Thumbwheel”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inputting Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Window Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-14-1 What are windows? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-14-2 Window Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-14-3 Window Screens and Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-14-4 Opening/Closing and moving a window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-14-5 Size and display position of a window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-14-6 Changing the displaying order of windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-14-7 Checking the display status of a window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
246
246
246
246
251
254
257
259
259
268
272
277
277
284
288
294
294
303
306
308
312
312
315
319
327
347
355
361
361
366
373
379
394
405
405
413
421
426
426
427
428
429
430
430
431
7-14-8 Temporary Input Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-14-9 Focus window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-15 Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-15-1 Display History Record Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-15-2 Alarm History Record Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-15-3 Resume Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-15-4 Screen Saver Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-15-5 Buzzer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-15-6 Clock Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-15-7 Print Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-15-8 Programming Console Function (Expansion Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-16 PT Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-16-1 “PT Configuration” Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
432
432
434
434
437
440
441
442
444
445
448
450
450
245
246
Section 7-1
NT631/NT631C Screen
7-1
NT631/NT631C Screen
This section gives an outline of the screen, which is the basis of NT631/NT631C
functions.
7-1-1
Screen Composition
The NT631/NT631C screen is 640 dots wide by 480 dots high. Each dot is set by a
combination of an X coordinate (horizontal direction) and a Y coordinate (vertical
direction). The coordinate origin (0, 0) is at the top left of the screen.
0
X coordinate (horizontal direction)
639
0
Coordinates (X, Y)
Y coordinate (vertical direction)
479
7-1-2
639,479
Screen Numbers
The screens of the NT631/NT631C are classified and managed by “screen numbers”.
Screen numbers are used to designate the first screen displayed when the
NT631/NT631C is started up, and to designate the objective screen when switching the screen display, etc.
The NT631/NT631C allows up to 3999 screens to be registered, apart from those
screens reserved for specific functions. For these 3999 screens, screen numbers
can be designated without restriction within the range 1 to 3999. There are also no
restrictions on the order of screen numbers, they can be discontinuous either.
When creating a screen at the NT631/NT631C with the Support Tool, designate a
screen number and then register the display elements.
7-1-3
Screen Types
The screens that can be displayed by the NT631/NT631C are classified as follows
according to their function.
- Normal (Standard) screens
- Overlapping screens
- Window screens
- System screens
Normal (Standard) Screens
Normal (Standard) screens are the basic screens of the NT631/NT631C. There
are no specific functions themselves and their purpose is to display elements that
have already been registered.
Normal (Standard) screens can be registered under any screen numbers in the
range 1 to 3999.
247
Section 7-1
NT631/NT631C Screen
Overlapping Screens
The NT631/NT631C allows up to 8 screens to be displayed overlapped as one
screen. A group of overlapped screens is called an “overlapping screen”.
To allow distinction, the screen that results when the multiple component screens
are overlapped is called the “parent screen”, and the individual component
screens are called the “child screens”.
Both parent screens and child screens can be registered under any screen numbers in the range 1 to 3999. Note that a new screen must be designated as a parent screen.
[Parent screen]
[Child screen]
Screen No. 10
This is an
Screen No. 8
Screen No. 7
This is an
overlapping
screen.
overlapping
Screen No. 25
screen.
248
Section 7-1
NT631/NT631C Screen
S Child screen registration and display result
Child screens are created as normal (standard) screens. Therefore they can
also be displayed independently by designating their screen numbers.
Parent screens are special screens used for the purpose of displaying overlapping screens. They are created by designating a new screen as a parent screen
at the Support Tool. Register only the screen numbers of the child screens to be
overlapped for this new screen. Direct registration of elements on a parent
screen is not possible.
To display an overlapping screen on the NT631/NT631C, designate the screen
number of the parent screen. The child screens will be displayed in the order
they were registered (i.e., the first one registered will be the “bottom-most”
screen) to build up the compound image.
Note that the order in which the child screens are registered may affect the way
that overlapped screens are displayed.
Child screen 1
Registration order:
Child screen 1 → Child screen 2
Child screen 2
Registration order:
Child screen 2 → Child screen 1
S Restrictions on overlapping screens
Note the following points, when creating an overlapping screen.
- “Numeral input” and “character string input” input fields — which allow the input of numeric values and character strings — can each only be set on one of
the child screens. (Thumbwheel switches can be used but temporary input
fields cannot.) For details on numeral input, refer to 7-12 “Inputting Numeric
Values” (page 406), and for details on character string input, refer to 7-13 “Inputting Character Strings” (page 422).
- Arrange the touch switches registered for each child screen, so that they do
not overlap on the parent screen. If touch switches are overlapped, the intended operation may not be performed when a touch switch is pressed.
- On an overlapping screen, the screen attributes of the child screens are invalid
and the screen display is governed by the attributes of the parent screen. For
details on screen attributes, refer to 7-1-4 “Screen Attributes” (page 252).
249
Section 7-1
NT631/NT631C Screen
Window Screens
Apart from the normal (standard) screen display method, which a screen is displayed over the entire panel area, the NT631/NT631C also allows screens to be
displayed in one part of the screen area only. This partial screen is called a “window”, and a screen on which a window is displayed is called a “window screen”.
Window screens can be registered under any screen numbers 1 to 3999. However, screens that are registered as window screens cannot be displayed independently like normal (standard) screens.
Base screen
Keypad
Keypad
Touch switch for opening
the window
7 8 9 "
4 5 6 .
1 2 3 0
Window displayed on the screen at
the registered size and position
Window screen
7 8 9 "
4 5 6 .
1 2 3 0
Window area
Windows can be called anytime, regardless of which screen is currently displayed.
It is possible to display multiple windows (max : 3) on the same screen, and to
open, close or move windows by the control from the host.
With NT631/NT631C, up to three windows can be displayed at the same time.
One of these window is called a “global window”. This window can be displayed all
the time, regardless of which screen is currently displayed.
Other two windows are called “local windows”. These windows can be displayed
by linking to the currently desplayed screens. When the screen is switched, the
local window is closed automatically.
For details, refer to 7-14 “Window Function” (page 427 ).
250
Section 7-1
NT631/NT631C Screen
System Screens
Screens with predetermined functions are called “system screens”.
The types of system screens are indicated in the table below.
Screen No.
Name
Function
0
No-display screen
If screen number “0” is designated as the display
screen, the screen of the NT631/NT631C is made
blank.
9000
“System initializing” This screen is displayed during the initial processscreen
ing when the NT631/NT631C starts operation.
During operation, screen number 9000 cannot be
designated for display, but it is possible to create
and register a screen under screen number 9000 at
the Support Tool, and this screen can then be displayed instead of the default system initialization
screen. Note however that only “fixed display” elements can be registered for screen number 9000.
9001
Occurrence history
screen
The NT631/NT631C features the “display history
record function”, which records the display status of
screens. By designating screen number 9001 as
the display screen, you can check the screens that
have been displayed up to the present time in display order.
You can set whether the records are presented in
the order of newest first or oldest first by setting an
NT631/NT631C memory switch.
9002
Frequency history
screen
The NT631/NT631C features the “display history
record function”, which records the display status of
screens. By designating screen number 9002 as
the display screen, you can check the screens that
have been displayed up to the present time in order
of frequency of display.
9020
Programming console function
screen
As an expansion function, the NT631/NT631C features the “programming console” function, which
allows equivalent functions to those of a programming console. When the NT631/NT631C is connected to a host which supports the programming
console function, it can be used in the place of a
programming console by designating screen number 9020 as the display screen.
9999
“Return to previous
screen” designation
The NT631/NT631C has a function which allows
the screen numbers of up to 32 screens to be recorded in their order of display. When screen number 9999 is designated as the display screen, the
screen that was displayed immediately before the
currently displayed screen is redisplayed. However, note that if a system screen is displayed in the
middle of operation, the record of displayed
screens is cleared.
For details on the display history function, refer to 7-15-1 “Display History Record
Function” (page 435); for details on the programming console function, refer to
6-12 “Programming Console Function” (page 237); and for details on screen
switching refer to 8-3-1 “Switching the Screen” (page 468).
251
Section 7-1
NT631/NT631C Screen
7-1-4
Screen Attributes
The NT631/NT631C allows attributes to be set for each screen, so that the function specified by the attribute is executed when the screen is displayed. For example, when a screen for which the “buzzer attribute” has been set is displayed, the
buzzer sounds.
Set the screen attributes as properties of each screen using the Support Tool.
The screen attributes that can be set are listed below. It is possible to set more
than one attribute for the same screen at one time.
- Backlight (Light/Flash)
- Buzzer (None/Continuous/Long/Short)
- Background (NT631C only)
- Screen comment
- History (record/don’t record)
- History title
- Load Local1 (Keyboard) (screen number)
- Load Local2 (screen number)
S Backlight (NT631C only)
Set if the backlight is to light continuously or flash when the screen is turned on.
Setting
Function
Light
The backlight is lit. (Default)
Flash
The backlight is flashed.
S Buzzer
The buzzer attribute allows the buzzer to sound when a screen is displayed.
There are the following four types of buzzer attribute setting.
Setting
None
Function
The buzzer does not sound when the screen is displayed. (Default)
If the buzzer is sounding when the screen is displayed, it stops.
The buzzer sounds continuously when the screen is displayed.
Continuous If a buzzer type other than continuous is sounding when the screen is
displayed, the sound changes to continuous.
252
Long
The long intermittent buzzer sounds when the screen is displayed.
If a buzzer type other than long intermittent is sounding when the
screen is displayed, the sound changes to long intermittent.
The “long intermittent” buzzer sound is the repeated alternation of 1.0
second on and 1.0 second off.
Short
The short intermittent buzzer sounds when the screen is displayed.
If a buzzer type other than short intermittent is sounding when the
screen is displayed, the sound changes to short intermittent.
The “short intermittent” buzzer sound is the repeated alternation of 0.5
seconds on and 0.5 seconds off.
Section 7-1
NT631/NT631C Screen
The setting for the “Buzzer Sound” memory switch at the NT631/NT631C takes
priority in determining whether or not the buzzer actually sounds. When this
memory switch is set to “ON”, the buzzer set with a screen attribute can sound.
Reference
- The buzzer can also sound by PT status control bit operation (page 458).
- The following methods can be used to stop the buzzer when it is sounding.
@ Switching to a screen whose buzzer attribute is “None”
@ Stopping the buzzer by PT status control bit operation (page 459)
@ Registering the “buzzer stop” touch switch on the screen (page 460)
S Background color (NT631C only)
With the NT631C, the background color of the entire screen can be set for each
screen. The following 8 background colors can be set.
Black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow, white
S Screen comment
A comment indicating the contents of the screen can be set as any required
character string of up to 24 characters.
S History
When a screen for which this attribute is set is displayed, the screen number,
display time, number of times displayed, and history title of the displayed screen
are recorded as display history data.
Setting
Reference
Function
Checked
When the screen is displayed, its data is recorded in the display history.
Not
checked
When the screen is displayed, its data is not recorded in the display
history. (Default)
The display history can be checked in the Maintenance mode of the
NT631/NT631C, and can also be read during operation by displaying screen number 9001 (occurrence order) or screen number 9002 (frequency order). It is also
possible to transmit the display history record data to the personal computer by
operation at the Support Tool. For details, refer to NT-series Support Tool Ver. 3.0
for Windows95/98 Operation Manual, 11-5 “Receiving (Uploading) the History Record”.
S History title
This attribute sets a character string to be recorded in the display history along
with the display time and other information when a screen for which the “history”
attribute is set is displayed.
The history title can be set as any required character string of up to 24 characters.
This setting is only valid for screens for which the “history” attribute is set. When
a screen for which the “history title” attribute is set is displayed by the
NT631/NT631C, the designated character string is recorded together with the
screen number in the display history.
253
Section 7-1
NT631/NT631C Screen
S Load Local1, Load Local2
Specify whether or not a window (Local1, Local2) pops up at the same time the
screen is displayed by screen switching. Set the window screen number to be
displayed when you check these attribute.
For details of a window, refer to 7-14 “Window Function” (page 427), and for details of using method of a window, refer to 8-4 “Display and Control of Windows”
(page 477)
Reference
- A window can also be opened, closed or moved by the operation at Window
control area (refer to page 480)
- To control (open close or move) a window, follow the methods below.
@ Register “Input key-Window/Keyboard” touch switch or “Window Move” touch
switch on ascreen. (refer to page 478, 480)
@ Register “Cursor Move” touch switch which has a window open function. (refer
to page 479)
@ Operate Window control area from the host. (refer to page 480)
@ Switch to the screen which has “Load Local1” (keyboard) or “Load Local2”
screen attribute.
254
Section 7-1
NT631/NT631C Screen
Restrictions Relating to Screen Attributes
The functions of the backlight and buzzer attributes can also be performed using
the PT status control bits. (And the buzzer can also be operated with a touch
switch.) When a screen for which one of these attributes is set is displayed, the set
function is executed regardless of the status of the PT status control bits, but the
status of the backlight or buzzer can be changed later by using another operation.
Depending on the screen attribute settings and the PT status control bit statuses,
the PT status control bit statuses may not match the actual operation (ex. the
buzzer bit in the PT status control bits may be set to “stopped” although the buzzer
is actually sounding). In such a case, carry out PT status control bit operations to
make the statuses agree with the actual status of the NT631/NT631C.
For details on the PT status control bits, refer to 7-2-1 “PT Status Control Area”
(page 260).
7-1-5
Color Display
The NT631C can display the entire screen, and elements such as text and graphics, in eight different colors. Specify a color as an attribute for each display element when creating a screen with the Support Tool.
Available Colors
The NT631C can display the following eight colors.
Black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow, white
The four color combinations below are in an XOR relationship.
The NT631/NT631C has a function which prevents the display of an element on a
background of the same color (making it invisible) by changing the color of the element to the color which is in XOR relationship with its present color.
Black ⇔ White, Blue ⇔ Yellow, Red ⇔ Cyan, Magenta ⇔ Green
The following kinds of display elements are displayed in the above combinations of
colors.
- Frame of input fields for numeral/character string input, and screen background color (page 406).
- Display color of eight dots beyond the top of a bar graph, and screen background color (page 362).
Reference
XOR is the abbreviation of eXclusive OR. Color combinations that are opposites
in terms of the three primary colors — red, green, and blue — are called to be in an
XOR relationship.
Example: Blue (red 0, blue 1, green 0) ⇔ Yellow (red 1, blue 0, green 1)
255
Section 7-1
NT631/NT631C Screen
S Color correspondence between NT631C and NT631
The only colors that an NT631 can display are white and black.
The screen data for an NT631C can be displayed on an NT631 without alteration
and in this case the color correspondences are as follows.
Colors at NT631C
Reference
Colors at NT631
Black, blue, red, magenta
White
Green, cyan, yellow, white
Black
When screen data is created for an NT631, black and white are displayed as white
and black respectively at the Support Tool. On the display of a monochrome personal computer, the display at the NT631 matches the colors displayed at the Support Tool, but when a personal computer with a color display is used, the colors are
reversed.
Transparent Display
When elements are displayed on top of others, normally the background color of
the element on top conceals the element below so that it cannot be seen.
Besides the above eight colors, the color “transparent” is available for the background of some display elements.
When “transparent” is set, nothing appears behind a display element, and the display element or screen background color underneath it is visible.
<Normal display>
<Transparent display>
Graphic under character
A
Character
Background color
Graphic under character
A
Character
Background color (transparent)
S Possible applications of the color designation “transparent”
- Background color of normal display text
- Background of labels for lamps and touch switches (fixed as “transparent”)
- Display color of lamps and touch switches when they are off
- Background color of tiling patterns for graphics
- Background color of marks
256
Section 7-1
NT631/NT631C Screen
S Impossible applications of the color designation “transparent”
- Background of character strings displayed from character string memory
tables
- Background of numeric values displayed from numeral memory tables
- Background of numeric values and character strings in numeral setting input
fields and character string input fields
- Background of characters indicating percentages (%) on graphs
- Display color of lamps and touch switches when lit
- Background color of temporary input fields
- Display color of alarm list/history
Screen Background Color
The background color of the entire screen can be designated with the “Background” screen attribute. Screen attributes are properties set for each screen with
the Support Tool.
Text Display Color
The color of characters (character color) and that of their rectangular frames
(background color) can be specified.
A
Background color
Character color
Graphics Display Color
The colors of lines and tiling patterns can be specified for graphics.
The colors that can be designated for tiling patterns are the color of the pattern
itself, the background color of the pattern, and the color of the outline of the tiled
area.
Outline color (Border)
Tiling
Pattern display color
(Foreground)
Pattern background color
(Background)
Line color
Reference
When a lamp, a touch switch, and a graphic are displayed in color, part of the
frames of the display elements may be invisible because of the combination of the
background, outline, and tiling colors. This is a phenomenon peculiar to a color
LCD, not a failure of the system. In such a case, change the color combination.
257
Section 7-1
NT631/NT631C Screen
7-1-6
Display Elements
The NT631/NT631C can display the following elements.
Mark
Text
95/04/10 14:10
LINE B PRODUCTION
STATUS
Image data
EMERGENCY
STOP
Graphic
Touch switch
Lamp
OUTPUT TARGET
Character strings
PRODUCT
C
Numeric keys
PRODUCT
D
Numeral display
Element
Fixed
display
Lamps
Numeral
input
Graph
Description
Arcs
Possible display modes: standard/flash/inverse/inverse flash. Other display
modes are not available.
Page 295
Circles
Possible display modes: standard/flash/inverse/inverse flash. Other display
modes are not available.
Page 295
Rectangles
Possible display modes: standard/flash/inverse/inverse flash. Other display
modes are not available.
Page 295
Polygons
Possible display modes: standard/flash/inverse/inverse flash. Other display
modes are not available.
Page 295
Polylines
Possible display modes: standard/flash. Other display modes are not available.
Page 295
Sectors
Possible display modes: standard/flash/inverse/inverse flash. Other display
modes are not available.
Page 295
Text
Character strings. Possible display modes: standard/flash/inverse flash.
Other display modes are not available.
Page 304
Tiling
The inside of an enclosed area is filled with a tiling pattern.
Page 307
Image data
Graphics of any required size, composed of dots. The display mode cannot
be changed.
Page 313
Library data
These are groups of elements used as a single element. Fixed display
graphics can be registered as library data.
Page 316
Marks
These are graphics composed of 16 by 16 dots which are treated as characters.
Page 309
Normal (Standard)
lamps
These are graphics that light (flash) and go off depending on the status of a
bit at the host. The following shapes can be selected for normal (standard)
lamps: rectangles, polygons, circles, fans.
Page 320
Image/library lamps These are elements that display different image/library data depending on
the status of a bit at the host.
Touch switches
258
For Details,
Refer to
These are elements that can be used as switches: they allow the execution
of various functions, such as notification to the host, to be executed by
pressing the touch panel of the NT631/NT631C. They also have the same
display functions as normal (standard) lamps. They can be displayed in any
of the following forms: standard, shadow, 3-dimension, rectangle, circle,
polygon, sector — (standard without frame can be displayed also.).
Page 320
Page 328
Section 7-1
NT631/NT631C Screen
Element
Description
For Details,
Refer to
Numeral display
The contents of a numeral memory table in the internal memory of the
NT631/NT631C are displayed. The display changes in accordance with
changes in the data contents.
Page 348
Character string display
The contents of a character string memory table in the internal memory of
the NT631/NT631C are displayed. The display changes in accordance with
changes in the data contents.
Page 356
Graphs
Bar graphs
The data contents of a numeral memory table in the internal memory of the
NT631/NT631C are displayed in bar graph form.
Page 362
Analogue meter
The data contents of a numeral memory table in the internal memory of the
NT631/NT631C are displayed in the form of a quarter, semi-circle or circleshaped graph.
Page 367
Broken line graphs
The data contents of multiple numeral memory tables in the internal memory
of the NT631/NT631C are displayed in the form of a broken line graph.
Page 374
Trend graphs
The data contents of multiple numeral memory tables in the internal memory
of the NT631/NT631C are displayed in the form of a trend graph.
Page 380
Alarm list
This element monitors the status of host bits designated in advance, and
displays the message corresponding to the bit that comes ON. By pressing
the displayed message, the corresponding image/library data can be displayed and the screen can be switched.
Page 395
Alarm history
@ Occurrence order
This element monitors the status of host bits designated in advance, and
displays the contents of the alarm history record (occurrence order) which
records the time when the bits come ON, together with the messages corresponding to each bit. As with “alarm list”, it is possible to display the
messages or image/library data corresponding to each bit.
@ Frequency order
This element monitors the status of host bits designated in advance, and
displays the contents of the alarm history record (frequency order) which
records the number of times each bit has come ON, together with the
messages corresponding to each bit. As with “alarm list”, it is possible to
display the messages or image library data corresponding to each bit.
Page 395
This is an element for inputting numeric values to a numeral memory table
by using touch switches as numeric keys.
Page 406
Character string
input
This is an element for inputting character strings to a character string
memory table by using touch switches as input key – string.
Page 422
Thumbwheel
switch
This is an element for inputting numeric values to a numeral memory table
by using “+” and “−” touch switches for each digit.
Page 414
Alarms
Input
Numeral input
Settings
259
Section 7-2
Areas for Control/Notification
7-2
Areas for Control/Notification
The following areas are provided for the control and exchanging information of PT
(such as changes in status) between the NT631/NT631C and the host.
- PT status control area
This area is used to designate the screen to be displayed at the
NT631/NT631C, to copy data contents between memory tables in the
NT631/NT631C, and to control the status of the backlight and other statuses.
- PT status notify area
This area is used to notify the memory table number to the host when there is a
change in the data contents of a memory table in the NT631/NT631C, and to
notify information such as changes in the PT status.
- Window control area
This area is used to designate the window screen number or display position
from the host, and to notify these information from PT.
Reference
- The PT status control area and PT status notify area must be allocated to the
host. Screen data cannot be downloaded from the Support Tool unless they
have been allocated.
- The PT status control area, PT status notify area and window control area must
be set so that they do not overlap.
- When multiple PTs are connected to one PLC, the PT status control area, PT
status notify area and window control area of each PT must be set so that they do
not overlap, or the movement of PT will be unstable.
- Allocate window control area to the host only when the window is used and when
the window is controlled from the host. Even if the window control area is not
allocated to the host, a window can be controlled by touch switch operation etc.
7-2-1
PT Status Control Area (Host ↔ NT631/NT631C)
When data is written to this area from the host, the NT631/NT631C reads the data
and operates accordingly. However, note that the number of the currently displayed screen is written to the “screen switch setting” word from the
NT631/NT631C too.
The PT status control area is configured as five consecutive words as shown below. The first word (word n) is set in the “Control/Notify Area” settings in the PT
configuration settings made with the Support Tool.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Word
n
260
Screen No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
n+1
Copy source memory table No.
(4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
n+2
Copy destination memory table No.
(4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
n+3
PT status control bits
n+4
Reserved for system use
Screen switch setting
Copy memory table
setting
PT status control
Section 7-2
Areas for Control/Notification
Allocated Words of the PT Status Control Area
The PT status control area (host ↔ NT631/NT631C) can be allocated to the following host (PC) areas.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocation
CVM1/CV Series PCs
Allocation
CS1 Series PCs
Allocation
DM
Data memory
3
Data memory
3
Data memory
3
CH
I/O relay
3
I/O relay
3
I/O relay
3
TIM
Timer present value
Timer present value
Timer present value
CNT
Counter present value
Counter present value
Counter present value
HR
Holding relay
3
–
AR
Auxiliary relay
3
Special auxiliary relay
LR
Link relay
3
–
EM
EM Current Bank
*1 *2
3
–
Special auxiliary relay
–
EM Current Bank
*2
Holding relay
n
3: OK
–
–
EM Current Bank
: NG
*2
3
n: Host link not available
*1 : EM (Extended data memory) of C series is available only with C200HX/HG/HE (–Z).
*2 : Only current bank can be allocated for EM (Extended data memory).
Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1/CV series PCs are all allocated to
system functions, they cannot be used for purposes other than system use.
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. refer to APPENDIX L “PC Memory Map”, page 674.
Functions of the PT Status Control Area
S Screen switch setting
Data is written to the “screen switch setting” word from both the NT631/NT631C
and the host. The meaning of the data differs according to whether it is written
from the NT631/NT631C or the host. However, if the NT631/NT631C is currently operating, the number of the screen displayed is always written to the “screen
switch setting” word.
- When data is written from the host
To switch the screen displayed at the NT631/NT631C by an instruction from
the host, write the screen number, as a 4-digit BCD or hexadecimal value, to
the “screen switch setting” word. Whether the value is expressed in BCD or
hexadecimal is determined by the setting for numeral storage type in the PT
configuration settings made with the Support Tool.
NT631/NT631C
PC
PT status control area
Screen switch setting
← Screen number
Designated screen
Copy memory
table setting
PT status control setting
Reserved for system use
261
Section 7-2
Areas for Control/Notification
[Screen switch setting in the PT status control area]
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Word
n
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 Bit
Screen switch setting
Screen number (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
The screen numbers that can be set are as follows.
BCD
Reference
Hexadecimal
Screen
0000H
0000H
No-display (screen cleared)
0001 to 3999H
0001 to 0F9FH (3999)
Screen numbers 1 to 3999
9001H
2329H (9001)
Occurrence history screen
9002H
232AH (9002)
Frequency history screen
- The screen can also be switched by bit memory table operation (page 468), by
touch switch operation (page 469), or by using the alarm list/history function
(page 472).
- To display overlapping screens, designate the screen number of the parent
screen.
- If there are no elements registered for the designated screen number, or if a keyboard screen is designated, the screen does not switch.
- When the NT631/NT631C starts operating, the screen is displayed according to
the contents of the “screen switch setting” word. If the contents of the “screen
switch setting” word are invalid, the screen is displayed according to the “Initial
Screen” in the PT configuration settings made at the Support Tool. If the setting
for “Initial Screen” is also invalid, an error message is displayed.
- When data is written from the NT631/NT631C
When the screen display has been switched by operation at the
NT631/NT631C, the new screen number is written as a 4-digit BCD or hexadecimal value into the “screen switch setting” word by the NT631/NT631C. At
the same time, the “ON” status is also notified to the screen switch strobe flag
of the “PT status” word of the PT status notify area by the NT631/NT631C (after notification, the OFF status is re-established) (page 474). Whether the
data is written in BCD or hexadecimal format is determined by the setting for
“numeral storage type” in the PT configuration settings made at the Support
Tool.
NT631/NT631C
PC
PT status control area
Screen switch setting
← Screen number
Currently displayed
screen
Copy memory
table setting
PT status control setting
Reserved for system use
PT status notify area
Content update memory table
PT status
262
← Screen switch strobe flag
Section 7-2
Areas for Control/Notification
[“Screen switch setting” word of the PT status control area and “PT status” word
of the PT status notify area]
PT status control area
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Word
n
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
0 Bit
1
Screen switch setting
Screen number (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
PT status notify area
Word
m+1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 Bit
–
0
–
–
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
–
–
0
PT status
Screen switch strobe flag
The screen numbers notified are as follows.
BCD
Reference
Hexadecimal
Screen
0000H
0000H
No-display (screen cleared)
0001 to 3999H
0001 to 0F9FH (3999)
Screen numbers 1 to 3999
9001H
2329H (9001)
Occurrence history screen
9002H
232AH (9002)
Frequency history screen
- The screen number is notified only when the screen is switched by operation at
the NT631/NT631C.
- When an overlapping screen is displayed, the screen number of the parent
screen is notified.
S Copy source/copy destination memory table numbers
Designate the memory table numbers of the copy source and copy destination
memory tables as 4-digit BCD or hexadecimal values, when copying data between memory tables in the NT631/NT631C. Whether the values are BCD or
hexadecimal is determined by the setting for numeral storage type in the PT configuration settings made with the Support Tool.
The memory table numbers that can be designated are indicated in the table below.
BCD
Hexadecimal
0001 to 1999H
0000 to 07CFH (1999)
Numbers
Memory table numbers 0 to 1999
Note that it is only possible to copy between the following combinations.
- A numeral memory table and a numeral memory table
- A character string memory table and a character string memory table
263
Section 7-2
Areas for Control/Notification
Reference
- What is designated here is the memory table number only. The type of memory
table (numeral/character string) is set by the “memory table copy type” bit in the
PT status control bits.
- Copying is not executed just be writing the memory table numbers. It is executed when the “memory table copy execution” bit in the PT status control bits is
turned ON.
- Since the memory table numbers start from 0, if there are 2000 memory tables,
the range is 0 to 1999, and if there are 1000, the range is 0 to 999.
S PT status control bits
The PT status control bits have the functions indicated below.
15
n+3ch
14
13
12
11
10
9
0
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
0
1 (ON)
0 (OFF)
15
Screen display
Controlled Item
Performed
Not performed
14
Processing priority registration (for NT link (1:N))
Registered
Canceled
13
Continuous buzzer
Sounded
Stopped
12
Intermittent buzzer (short)
Sounded
Stopped
11
Display history initialization
10
Not used
9
Intermittent buzzer (long)
8
Backlight mode
Lit
Flashing
7
Screen printing
Performed
Not performed
6
PT window opening
Disabled
Enabled
5
Numeral/character string input
Disabled
Enabled
4
PT screen switching
Disabled
Enabled
3
Memory table copy execution
2
Memory table copy type
1
Alarm history initialization
0
Not used
Performed
Not performed
Always “0”
Sounded
Stopped
Performed
Not performed
Numeral
Character string
Performed
Not performed
Always “0”
Note: The backlight mode (bit 8) is effective only for the NT631C.
Reference
- Since the statuses of the PT status control bits do not change even if the status
of the NT631/NT631C changes in accordance with the settings of attributes or
memory switches, the statuses of the PT status control bits may sometimes disagree with the status of the NT631/NT631C. For example, the buzzer may be
sounding even though the “continuous buzzer” bit is OFF. In such a case, perform PT status control bit operations to achieve agreement with the status of the
NT631/NT631C.
- The PT status control bits are checked in bit units by the NT631/NT631C. The
only functions that are actually performed are those for which the corresponding
bits have changed in status.
264
Section 7-2
Areas for Control/Notification
- Screen display (bit 15)
The “screen display” bit displays and clears screens. It is used to prevent the
formation of an afterimage on the display panel, etc. When bit 15 is turned
OFF, the screen is cleared and the backlight also goes off. However, if the
screen saver function is set with the memory switches of the NT631/NT631C,
the screen saver is activated (the operation depends on the setting made for
the screen saver function).
If bit 15 is turned ON (1), or the touch panel is pressed, while the screen is
cleared (or while the screen saver function is working), the screen that was
displayed immediately before the screen was cleared is redisplayed. The
backlight also comes back on (or flashes).
Reference
Even when bit 15 is OFF, the designated screen will be displayed if screen switching is designated from the host, or the status of bit 7 (backlight mode) changes, or
the touch panel of the NT631/NT631C is pressed.
- Processing priority registration (for NT link 1:N) (bit 14)
One of the PTs connected by the NT link (1:N) method can be registered for
priority processing. The PT for which bit 14 is set to ON (1) is given priority
over the other PTs, and has more rapid response time for screen display, touch
switch operations, etc.
When bit 14 is set to OFF (0), this registration is canceled and the response
speed is returned to normal. If priority registration is set for more than one PT,
the one set last is given priority.
The unit number of the PT given priority registration can be checked by monitoring (reading) a word at the CS1G/CS1H, C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE). For details
on the word monitoring operation at a PC, refer to the manual for the PC you
are using.
265
Section 7-2
Areas for Control/Notification
The contents of the words that reflect the status of an NT link (1:N) system are
indicated below.
Word
Bit
〈C200HX/HG/
HE (–Z)〉
Word 265
(standard port)
Word 284
(port A)*1
Word 285
(port B)*1
0
“Communication in progress” flag of unit No. 0:
ON when connected
1
“Communication in progress” flag of unit No. 1:
ON when connected
2
“Communication in progress” flag of unit No. 2:
ON when connected
3
“Communication in progress” flag of unit No. 3:
ON when connected
4
“Communication in progress” flag of unit No. 4:
ON when connected
5
“Communication in progress” flag of unit No. 5:
ON when connected
6
“Communication in progress” flag of unit No. 6:
ON when connected
7
“Communication in progress” flag of unit No. 7:
ON when connected
8
Priority registration flag of unit No. 0: ON when priority given
9
Priority registration flag of unit No. 1: ON when priority given
〈CS1G/CS1H〉
AR393
(RS-232C
port)
AR394 (peripheral port)
1909CH
(port1)*1
1919CH
(port2)*1
n+9CH
(port1)*2
n+19CH
(port2)*2
Function
10 Priority registration flag of unit No. 2: ON when priority given
11 Priority registration flag of unit No. 3: ON when priority given
12 Priority registration flag of unit No. 4: ON when priority given
13 Priority registration flag of unit No. 5: ON when priority given
14 Priority registration flag of unit No. 6: ON when priority given
15 Priority registration flag of unit No. 7: ON when priority given
*1 Communication board ports
*2 Communication unit board ports
n=1500)25 unit No. of communication unit
- Continuous buzzer (bit 13), short intermittent buzzer (bit 12), long intermittent
buzzer (bit 9)
The “continuous buzzer” continues buzzing with no interruptions.
The short intermittent buzzer repeatedly alternates between sounding for 0.5
seconds and stopping for 0.5 seconds.
The long intermittent buzzer repeatedly alternates between sounding for 1.0
seconds and stopping for 1.0 seconds.
If more than one of these bits is ON at the same time, the buzzer sounds in
accordance with the following order of priority.
266
Section 7-2
Areas for Control/Notification
1. Continuous buzzer
2. Short intermittent buzzer
3. Long intermittent buzzer
When stopping the buzzer by PT status control bit operation, set all three of the
bits above to 0 (OFF).
Reference
- The buzzer will actually sound only when the “Buzzer Sound” memory switch of
the NT631/NT631C is set to “ON”.
- The buzzer can also be stopped in other ways: by using a touch switch to which
the buzzer stop attribute has been assigned (page 469), or by setting the screen
attribute that stops the buzzer sound (page 252).
- The buzzer can also be controlled by using the “Buzzer” screen attributes (page
252).
- Display history initialization (bit 11)
This bit is used to initialize the display history recorded in the NT631/NT631C.
When it is switched from 0 (OFF) to 1 (ON), the display history in the
NT631/NT631C is initialized.
After initialization, return its status to “0”.
Reference
The display history can also be initialized from the “MEMORY INIT. MENU” screen
under the System Menu of the NT631/NT631C.
- Backlight mode (bit 8) (NT631C only)
The backlight mode is used for controlling the backlight of the NT631.
This function is not available with the NT631.
The status of bit 8 has the following effects.
- 1 (ON):
lit
- 0 (OFF): flashing
- Screen printing (bit 7)
Hard copies of the screen can be made by connecting a printer to the
NT631/NT631C.
When bit 7 is set from “0” (OFF) to “1” (ON), printing of the currently displayed
screen starts. Note that it is not possible to stop printing while printing is in
progress.
Check that bit 7 (printer operating status) of the PT status notify area is in the
“0” (OFF) status before starting printing.
When printing starts and bit 7 has been set to the “1” (ON) status, return the
“screen printing” bit to “0” (OFF).
Reference
- It is also possible to print screens by using a touch switch assigned the “Print
screen” function.
- The printer type (control protocol) and printing method, are set with the memory
switches of the NT631/NT631C.
267
Section 7-2
Areas for Control/Notification
- PT window opening bit (bit 6)
The “PT window opening” bit is used to disable opening of a window by operation at the NT631/NT631C.
The status of bit 6 has the following effects.
Bit 6
Function
0 (OFF) Windows can be opened by operation at the NT631/NT631C.
1 (ON)
Windows cannot be opened by operation at the NT631/NT631C (windows that are already open can be closed by operation at the
NT631/NT631C).
Also, when a local window (keyboard screen) attribute is designated for
a screen, the window will not open when the screen is switched by operation at the NT631/NT631C.
- Numeral/character string input (bit 5)
This bit is used to disable the input of numeric values and character strings into
numeral setting/character string input fields by operation at the
NT631/NT631C. It also controls input from thumbwheel switches and bar
code readers.
The status of bit 5 has the following effects.
Bit 5
Function
0 (OFF) Input into numeral setting input fields and character string input fields is
possible.
1 (ON)
Input into numeral setting input fields and character string input fields is
disabled (it is also not possible to change the contents of numeral/character string memory tables by operation at the NT631/NT631C, such as
copying memory tables with touch switches).
The contents of numeral/character string memory tables can be
changed without restriction from the host. It is also possible to copy
memory tables using the PT status control area.
- PT screen switching (bit 4)
This bit is used to disable screen switching by operation at the
NT631/NT631C.
The status of bit 4 has the following effects.
Bit 4
Function
0 (OFF) Screen switching by operation at the NT631/NT631C is possible.
1 (ON)
Screen switching by operation at the NT631/NT631C is not possible.
The screen can be switched by the instructions from the host (“screen
switch setting” word of the PT status control area, bit memory table operations).
- Memory table copy execute (bit 3), memory table copy type (bit 2)
The “memory table copy execute” and “memory table copy type” bits are used
to copy data between memory tables in the NT631/NT631C by PT status control area operations.
Proceed as follows to copy between memory tables using the PT status control area.
268
Section 7-2
Areas for Control/Notification
Operation 1
Set the numbers of the copy source and copy destination memory tables for
“copy source memory table No.” (word n + 1) and “copy destination memory
table No.” (word n + 2) of the PT status control area.
2
Set the type of the memory table to be copied for “memory table copy type” (bit
2) of the PT status control bits (word n + 3) as follows.
@ 1 (ON): When copying between numeral memory tables
@ 0 (OFF): When copying between character string memory tables
3
Set “1” (ON) for “memory table copy execution” (bit 3) of the PT status control
bits (word n + 3).
The memory table data is copied.
4
Reference
After copying has been executed, return “memory table copy execution” (bit 3)
to “0”.
- If the display method or number of registered words is different for the copy
source and copy destination memory tables, the data may not be displayed correctly.
- If the contents of memory tables are changed by PT status control area operation, the change in memory table contents is not notified by the PT status notify
area.
- Alarm history initialization (bit 1)
This bit is used to initialize the alarm history recorded in the NT631/NT631C.
When it is switched from “0” (OFF) to “1” (ON), the alarm history in the
NT631/NT631C is initialized.
After initialization, return its status to “0”.
Reference
7-2-2
The alarm history can also be initialized from the “MEMORY INIT. MENU” screen
under the System Menu of the NT631/NT631C.
PT Status Notify Area (NT631/NT631C to Host)
The PT status notify area is provided to notify the host of changes in the status of
the NT631/NT631C. The host can determine the status of the NT631/NT631C by
reading this area.
The PT status notify area is configured as two consecutive words as shown below.
The first word (word m) is set in the “Control/Notify Area” settings in the PT configuration settings made with the Support Tool.
Word
m
m+1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 Bit
Numeral/character string memory table number
(4-digit BCD or hexadecimal value)
PT status notify bits
0
Content update
memory table
0
0
PT status
269
Section 7-2
Areas for Control/Notification
Allocated Words of the PT Status Notify Area
The PT status notify area (NT631/NT631C → host) can be allocated to the following host (PC) areas.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocation
CVM1/CV Series PCs
Allocation
CS1 Series PCs
Allocation
DM
Data memory
3
Data memory
3
Data memory
3
CH
I/O relay
3
I/O relay
3
I/O relay
3
TIM
Timer present value
Timer present value
Timer present value
CNT
Counter present value
Counter present value
Counter present value
HR
Holding relay
3
–
AR
Auxiliary relay
3
Special auxiliary relay
LR
Link relay
3
–
EM
EM Current Bank
*1 *2
3
–
Special auxiliary relay
–
EM Current Bank
*2
Holding relay
n
3: OK
–
–
EM Current Bank
: NG
*2
3
n: Host link not available
*1 : EM (Extended data memory) of C series is available only with C200HX/HG/HE (–Z).
*2 : Only current bank can be allocated for EM (Extended data memory).
Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1/CV series PCs are all allocated to
system functions, they cannot be used for purposes other than system use.
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. Refer to APPENDIX L “PC Memory Map”, page 674.
Notice
S Set so that there is no overlap between the PT status control area and PT status
notify area.
S When using the NT link (1:N) method, allocate a PT status control area and PT
status notify area — making sure that they do not overlap — for each connected
NT631/NT631C.
Functions of the PT Status Notify Area
S Content update memory table number
When the contents of a numeral/character string memory table have been
changed by operation at the NT631/NT631C, the number of the memory table
subject to the change is written to the “content update memory table number”
word as a 4-digit BCD or hexadecimal value. Whether the value is expressed in
BCD or hexadecimal is determined by the setting for numeral storage type in the
PT configuration settings made with the Support Tool.
NT631/NT631C
PC
Numeral memory table 1
12345678
12345678
789
456
123
0.
PT status notify area
Table number
Numeral setting
strobe flag
Content update memory table
PT status
Allocated word (numeral memory table 1)
12345678 → 5 6 7 8 First
1 2 3 4 First + 1
270
Section 7-2
Areas for Control/Notification
[“Content update memory table” and “PT status” of the PT status notify area]
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Word
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Content update
memory table
Screen number (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal value)
m
m+1
–
0
–
–
–
0
0
–
–
–
–
–
0
Bit
0
0
PT status
Numeral setting strobe flag
BCD
Hexadecimal
0001 to 1999H
Reference
Numbers
0000 to 07CFH
Memory table numbers 0 to 1999
The memory table number is notified only when the memory table contents are
changed by operation at the NT631/NT631C.
S PT status notify bits
The PT status notify bits have the functions shown below.
15
14
0
13
12
11
10
9
0
8
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
1
0
0
Bit
0
1 (ON)
0 (OFF)
15
PT operation status
Notified Information
Run
Stop
13
Battery status
Low
Normal
12
Screen switch strobe
11
Numeral setting strobe flag
10
Character string setting strobe flag
7
Printer operating status
6
Backlight status
Printing
Stopped
Off
Lit/Flashing
5
4
grobal window status
Open
Close
Local window1 status
Open
Close
3
Local window2 status
Open
Close
- PT operation status (bit 15)
When the NT631/NT631C is in the RUN mode, this bit is set to “1”. In other
modes, and when the System Menu screen is displayed, it is set to “0” (OFF).
When this bit is set to “0” (OFF), the allocated bits and words are neither read
or written.
During the RUN mode, “1” (ON) is periodically written to this bit. In order to
check whether the NT631/NT631C is operating normally or not, write “0”
(OFF) to this bit, then read it 30 seconds later. If the setting for the bit is “1”
(ON), the NT631/NT631C is judged to be running, and if it is “0” (OFF), the
NT631/NT631C is judged to be stopped.
Notice
To ensure system safety, be sure to periodically read the PT operating status bit
from the host in order to ensure that the PT is always operating normally.
271
Section 7-2
Areas for Control/Notification
- Battery status (bit 13)
This bit is set to “1” (ON) when the voltage of the battery that backs up the internal memory of the NT631/NT631C (built-in battery) is low.
If the battery voltage drops, it is impossible to retain data with the resume function and to retain history records, therefore the battery must be replaced with a
new one within one week after the “battery” bit is set to “1” (ON). For details on
how to replace the battery, refer to 11-3-1 “Replacing the Battery” (page 623).
- Screen switching strobe (bit 12)
This bit is set to “1” (ON) when the NT631/NT631C screen is changed by an
instruction from the host or by operation at the NT631/NT631C (ex. use of
screen changeover function). After notification to the host, it is automatically
returned to “0” (OFF).
- Numeral setting strobe flag (bit 11)
This bit is set to “1” (ON) when a numeric value is input to a numeral memory
table using the numeral input function of the NT631/NT631C. After notification
to the host, it is automatically returned to “0” (OFF).
At the same time, the number of the numeral memory table to which the input
was made is notified to the “content update memory table” word.
- Character string setting strobe flag (bit 10)
This bit is set to “1” (ON) when a character string is input to a character string
memory table using the character string input function of the NT631/NT631C.
After notification to the host, it is automatically returned to “0” (OFF).
At the same time, the number of the character string memory table to which the
input was made is notified to the “content update memory table” word.
- Printer operating status (bit 7)
This bit is set to “1” (ON) when a printer connected to the NT631/NT631C is
printing due to touch switch operation at the NT631/NT631C or an instruction
from the host. On completion of printing, it returns to “0” (OFF). It is also returned to “0” (OFF) even while printing is in progress if the NT631/NT631C displays the System Menu or an error screen.
The NT631/NT631C can print the following data in the RUN mode.
- The currently displayed screen image (by touch switch operation, or operation of the “screen printing” bit of the PT status control bits)
- Display history record data (by pressing the “Print Screen” touch switch
when screen number 9001 or 9002 is displayed)
- Backlight status (bit 6)
The EL screen status of the NT631 and the backlight status of the NT631C are
notified as follows.
@ 1 (ON): The EL screen is cleared or the backlight is off.
@ 0 (OFF): The EL screen is displayed or the backlight is lit (flashing).
However, this bit is returned to “0” (OFF) when the NT631/NT631C displays
the System Menu or an error screen.
272
Section 7-2
Areas for Control/Notification
Reference
Whether the backlight is lit continuously or flashes when the “backlight status” bit is
set to “1” (ON) is determined by the “backlight mode” bit (bit 8) of the PT status
control bits and the “Backlight” screen attribute.
S Global window open status (bit5), local window1 open status (bit4), local window2 open status (bit3)
This bit is set to “1” (ON) when a corresponding window is open. It is returned to
“0” (OFF) when a corrensponding window is closed. (It remains “1” (ON) even if
the window screen number is switched in the middle of operation.)
It is possible to know the screen number of the window which is currently open or
the display position (bottom-left coordinate) by checking the window control
area.
S Strobes
The screen switching, numeral setting, and character string setting strobes are
automatically returned to “0” (OFF) after notification to the host. The status of
operations at the NT631/NT631C can easily be ascertained by detecting the
leading edges of these strobes.
However, when connected to a CVM1/CV series CPU, if the PC is set for asynchronous operation, the leading edge may not be detected.
7-2-3
Window Control Area (Host ↔ NT631/NT631C)
Data is written to the window control area from both the NT631/NT631C and the
host. The status of the window is always written.
When the data is written to this area from the host, the NT631/NT631C reads the
data and display the window wit the specified number at the designated position.
When the display status of the window (screen No., display position) is changed
due to the operation at NT631/NT631C , current status of the window is written to
the area allocated to the host. The host can determine the display status of the
window by reading this area.
The window control area is configured as nine consecutive words as shown below.
The first word (word k) is set in the “Control/Notify Area” settings in the PT configuration settings made with the Support Tool.
Word 15
k
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Screen No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+1
X coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+2
Y coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+3
Screen No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+4
X coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+5
Y coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+6
Screen No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+7
X coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+8
Y coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
Global window
Local Window1
Local Window2
273
Section 7-2
Areas for Control/Notification
Reference
It is not necessary to allocate word to window control area when the window is not
controlled from the host or when the window is not used.
Allocated Words of the Window Control Area
The window control area (NT631/NT631C(host) can be allocated to the following
host (PLC) areas.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocation
CVM1/CV Series PCs
Allocation
CS1 Series PCs
Allocation
DM
Data memory
3
Data memory
3
Data memory
3
CH
I/O relay
3
I/O relay
3
I/O relay
3
TIM
Timer present value
Timer present value
Timer present value
CNT
Counter present value
Counter present value
Counter present value
HR
Holding relay
3
–
AR
Auxiliary relay
3
Special auxiliary relay
LR
Link relay
3
–
–
–
–
EM
EM Current Bank *1 *2
3
EM Current Bank *2
n
EM Current Bank *2
3
–
Holding relay
Special auxiliary relay
3: OK
: NG
n: Host link not available
*1 : EM (Extended data memory) of C series is available only with C200HX/HG/HE (–Z).
*2 : Only current bank can be allocated for EM (Extended data memory).
Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1/CV series PCs are all allocated to
system functions, they cannot be used for purposes other than system use.
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. Refer to APPENDIX L “PC Memory Map” , page 674 .
The screen No. which can be specified is as follows.
BCD
Hexadecimal
Screen
0000
0000H
No display (window closed)
0001X3999
0001X0F9FH
Window screen No. 1X3999
The X coordinate which can be specified is as follows.
BCD
0000X0620
Hexadecimal
0000X026CH
Contents
X coordinate at the bottom left position of
window 0X620 (multiple of 20)
The Y coordinate which can be specified is as follows.
BCD
0019X0479
274
Hexadecimal
0013X01DFH
Contents
Y coordinate at the bottom left of window
19X479 (multiple of 20-1)
Section 7-2
Areas for Control/Notification
Reference
- Local window can be also opened, closed or moved by the operation of touch
switch (page 478, 479). In addition, by setting the attribute of the screen (base
screen) to be displayed, local window pops up at the same time the screen is
displayed (refer to page 252).
- Global window can be controlled only by writing to the window control area from
the host.
- Window position (coordinate) can be specified by 20 dot unit. (Y coordinate =
multiple of 20-1, because of the bottom–left coordinate specification)
Window can not be controlled and the contents of the window remains unchanged when the number other than multiple of 20 is specified for X coordinate
or when the number other than multiple of 20-1 is specified for Y coordinate.
However, when opening a new window, the window is displayed at the position
which was specified when the window screen was created using the Support
Tool.
Functions of the Window Control Area
If the NT631/NT631C is currently operating, the status of the window is always
written to the window control area. The contents of the window control area depends on the window type (global window/local window) and the circumstances as
follows.
S When the window is opened by touch switch operation (local window only):
Window screen which is set for a touch switch pops up at the position which was
specified when the window was created using the Support Tool. At this time, the
status of the window is written to the “screen No.”, “X coordinate” and “Y coordinate” of window control area (corresponding window type).
S When the window is closed by touch switch operation (local window only):
The “screen No.”, “X coordinate” and “Y coordinate” of window control area (corresponding window type) are all cleared to “0”.
S When the window screen No. is specified for “screen No,” of window control
area:
The specified window is opened as the corresponding window type. The window
position follows the contents of “X coordinate” and “Y coordinate” of window control area. However, in the following cases, the window is opened at the position
which was specified when the window was created using the Support Tool. (Window move operation is not performed and the X, Y coordinates return to the existing value when the incorrect “X coordinate” and “Y coordinate” are specified
without changing the “screen No.”.)
- When the contents of X coordinate is not multiple of 20, or when the contents
of Y coordinate is not multiple of 20-1
- When the window will extend out of the screen with the specified value (ex.
When X coordinate: 500, Y coordinate: 299 are specified for the window
screen of 200 200 dots).
S When 0 is written to the “screen No.” of window control area:
Window of the corresponding type is closed. The contents of “X coordinate” and
“Y coordinate” is retained.
275
Section 7-2
Areas for Control/Notification
S When the screen is switched to the other while the window is being displayed
(other than system screen):
The behavior depends on the screen type as follows. (Even when the global window and the local window were displayed before screen switching, the each
screen also behaves as the table below. )
Window type
*
Screen No.
X coordinate
Y coordinate
Global window
Retains the existing value
Local window
Cleared to 0
Status
Remain opened
Closed (*)
If the local window open attribute is set for the screen switched to, the local window
opens.
S When the screen is switched to system screen, error screen or system menu,
while the window is being displayed.
The behavior depends on the screen type as follows. (Even when the global window and local window were displayed before screen switching, the each screen
also behaves as the table below. )
Window type
Screen No.
X coordinate
Y coordinate
Status
Global window
Retains the existing value
Closed
Local window
Cleared to 0
Closed
If a standard screen or an overlapping screen is displayed again, the same global window will be opened at the same position but the local window will not be
opened.
System screens which close global window are as follows:
- System initializing screen (screen No.9000)
- Programming console function screen (screen No.9020)
- No-display screen (screen No.0)
With Occurrence history screen (screen No.9001) and frequency history screen
(screen No.9002) global window remains opened.
Data is written to the window control area from both the NT631/NT631C and the
host. The meaning of the data differs according to whether it is written from the
NT631/NT631C or the host.
276
Section 7-2
Areas for Control/Notification
S When the data is written from the host:
To switch, open, close or move a window on the NT631/NT631C by an instruction from the host, write the window screen number or coordinates to the “window No.”, “X coordinate” or “Y coordinate” as 4-digits BCD or hexadecimal.
Whether the values are BCD or hexadecimal is determined by the setting for numeral storage type in the PT configuration settings made with the Support Tool.
By changing the “screen No.”, window can be switched, opened or closed.
It is possible to move the window position by changing the “X coordinate” and “Y
coordinate”.
NT631/NT631C
PLC
Local Window1 opens
(Window screen No.125)
Window control area
Screen No.
X coordinate
Local Window1
Y coordinate
Botom left coordinate (120, 359)
[”Screen No.”, “X coordinate” and “Y coordinate” of the window control area]
15
Word
k
k+3
13
12
k+4
k+7
k+2
k+5
k+8
Local
Window1
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Screen No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+6
k+1
Grobal
Window
14
X coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
Y coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
Local
Window2
S When the data is written from the NT631/NT631C:
When the display status of the window is changed by the operation at
NT631/NT631C, new window screen No. or coordinates is written to the “window No.”, “X coordinate” or “Y coordinate” as 4-digits BCD or hexadecimal from
the NT631/NT631C. When the window is opened or closed, window open/close
status is written to the “window open status” (page 483) of “PT status” in PT
notify area.
Whether the values are BCD or hexadecimal is determined by the setting for numeral storage type in the PT configuration settings made with the Support Tool.
PLC
NT631/NT631C
Window open
touch switch
Local Window2 opens
(Window screen No.314)
open
Window control area
0314
Screen No.
0400
X coordinate
0439
Y coordinate
Local Window2
PT notify area
Bottom left coordinate (400, 439)
Local Window2
Open Status
PT status
277
Section 7-3
Memory Tables
7-3
Memory Tables
The NT631/NT631C has the following three types of memory area that can be written to freely from the host.
- “Numeral memory tables” for numeric value data
Page 278
- “Character string memory tables” for text data
Page 285
- “Bit memory tables” for bit data
Page 289
The contents of numeral/character string memory tables can be displayed for individual memory tables at the Support Tool, and set in table editing.
7-3-1
Numeral Memory Tables
[Function Outline]
“Numeral memory tables” are internal memories of the NT631/NT631C for recording numeric value data.
Since they can be allocated to words at the host, the contents of host words can be
displayed as numeric values at the NT631/NT631C via numeral memory tables.
Numeral memory tables are assigned numeral memory table numbers so that
they can be managed and designated individually.
NT631/NT631C
1 2 3 4
9 9 9 9
Display
Display
PC
Numeral memory table No. 1
Allocated word
Numeral memory table No. 5
[Restrictions]
S The number of numeral memory tables can be set as one of the following in the
“System” settings in the PT configuration settings made at the Support Tool.
- 512 (numeral memory table numbers 0 to 511)
- 1000 (numeral memory table numbers 0 to 999)
- 2000 (numeral memory table numbers 0 to 1999)
Since the numeral memory tables share memory area with the screen data, setting a large number of numeral memory tables reduces the memory area available for screen data.
S The data quantity of one numeral memory table can be set to either of the following by setting at the Support Tool.
1 word (2 bytes)/2 words (4 bytes)
S Since numeral memory table numbers 1000 and higher are not backed up by the
battery, they return to the initial values set with the Support Tool when the power
to the NT631/NT631C is turned ON, when the NT631/NT631C is reset, and on
transition from the System Menu to the RUN mode, regardless of the setting
made for the resume function.
S Numeral memory table numbers 247 to 255 are used with the clock function of
the NT631/NT631C. These tables cannot be used for other applications. For
details on the clock function, refer to 7-15-6 “Clock Function” (page 445).
278
Section 7-3
Memory Tables
[Common Attributes]
Numeral memory tables have the following properties.
Possible Settings
Property
Meaning
@ For BCD format:
−9999999 to 99999999
@ For binary format:
−2147483648 (80000000H) to 2147483647 (7FFFFFFH)
Value
The initial values that can be set as the contents of memory tables by the
Support Tool
The format is determined by the system memory of the NT631/NT631C
and the “Numeral Storage Type” setting (“Storage type and stored data”,
page 281).
Check mark (initialize)/No check mark (do not initialize)
Initial
This setting determines whether or not the allocated words at the host are
initialized when the power to the NT631/NT631C is turned ON, when the
NT631/NT631C is reset, and on transition from the System Menu to the
RUN mode.
“Initialization” here means initialization of the allocated words at the host:
when a check mark is set, the previously existing numeral memory table
contents are written to the host words. When no check mark is set, the
data at the host is read and set in the numeral memory tables.
System/Binary/BCD
Storage
Type
Method for storing numeric data in numeral memory tables.
This setting is valid only when the numeral table is allocated to the host.
Numeral memory tables that are not allocated to the host always use
binary format. If a setting is made for “System”, it complied with the “Numeral Storage Type” setting of PT configuration.
For details, refer to “Storage type and stored data” (page 281).
1/2
Words
The number of words used at the host when a numeral memory table is
allocated to the host.
For details, refer to “Allocated words” (page 280).
Any word address at the host
PC
Address
I/O
Comment
Word at the host to which the numeral memory table is allocated
When the numeral memory table is allocated to two words, designate the
first (lower) word.
For details, refer to “Allocated words” (page 280).
Up to 16 characters of text
Comment that describes the contents of a numeral memory table
279
Section 7-3
Memory Tables
S Allocated words
Numeral memory tables can be allocated either to 1 word or two words at the
host.
Numeral memory tables can be allocated to the following host (PC) areas.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocation
CVM1/CV Series PCs
Allocation
CS1 Series PCs
Allocation
DM
Data memory
3
Data memory
3
Data memory
3
CH
I/O relay
3
I/O relay
3
I/O relay
3
TIM
Timer present value
n1
Timer present value
n1
Timer present value
n1
CNT
Counter present value
n1
Counter present value
n1
Counter present value
n1
HR
Holding relay
3
–
AR
Auxiliary relay
3
Special auxiliary relay
LR
Link relay
3
–
EM
EM Current Bank *1 *2
3
EM Current Bank *2
–
Holding relay
Special auxiliary relay
–
3: OK
: NG
n2
–
–
EM Current Bank *2
3
n1 :Available for 1 word
n2: Host link not available
*1 : EM (Extended data memory) of C series is available only with C200HX/HG/HE (–Z).
*2 : Only current bank can be allocated for EM (Extended data memory).
Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1/CV series PCs are all allocated to
system functions, they cannot be used for purposes other than system use.
Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1/CV series PCs are all allocated to
system functions, they cannot be used for purposes other than system use.
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. Refer to APPENDIX L “PC Memory Map”, page 674.
The relationships among the allocated words, the number of allocated words,
and the contents of numeral memory tables are indicated in the figure below.
- When the number of allocated words is 1 word
NT631/NT631C
PC
Numeral memory table
Only four digits read
5 6 7 8 ← Allocated word
0000162E
1 2 3 4
(Decimal number 5678)
- When the number of allocated words is two words
NT631/NT631C
Numeral memory table
Eight digits read
00BC614E
(Decimal number 12345678)
280
PC
5 6 7 8 ← Allocated word
1 2 3 4
Section 7-3
Memory Tables
S Storage type and stored data
Internally, numeral memory tables store numeric values comprising eight signed
binary (or hexadecimal) digits. When the initial value or contents of the allocated
word(s) are stored in a memory table, the numeric value is interpreted in accordance with the setting for “Storage Type” and is stored after conversion to signed
binary data. Accordingly, the same data will be interpreted in different ways by
the NT631/NT631C depending on the setting made for “Storage Type”.
Reference
Signed binary data expresses negative values as the complement of two (the bits
are inverted and 1 is added).
- Storage type for the BCD format
When using BCD format, the “Value” (initial value) and contents of the word(s)
at the host are interpreted as BCD (binary coded decimal) data. However,
since it is not possible to input a negative sign in a host word, the letter “F” at
the most significant digit is used instead to denote negative values (a negative
sign can be used in the setting for “Value”, so negative values can be input in
the normal manner for this setting).
If a value with a letter from “A” to “E” inclusive as its most significant digit, or a
value with a letter from “A” to “F” inclusive at any position other than the most
significant digit is stored in a host word, it is invalidated as illegal data and the
existing value is retained.
If the contents of a numeral memory table exceed the range that can be handled by the allocated words of the host, the value is written to the host as “negative sign + less significant digits” (see below).
Contents of numeral memory table
(decimal notation)
Data at host
12345
→
2345
−1234
→
F234
123456789
→
23456789
−12345678
→
F2345678
Conditions
1 allocated word
When using BCD format
2 allocated words
When using BCD format
- Storage type for binary format
When binary format is used, the initial value and contents of the host word(s)
are interpreted as signed binary data and are stored without change in the numeral memory table.
With binary format, the most significant bit is the sign bit (when this bit is “1” it
indicates a negative value). When there is one allocated word, the most significant bit is bit 15; when there are two allocated words it is bit 31.
However, when the initial value is input using the Support Tool, the basis for input
is always the decimal system, regardless of the setting for “Storage Type”. The
“−” symbol can be input to indicate a negative value. If “$” is input at the head of
the input value, it will be input as a hexadecimal value (after confirmation of input,
it is displayed in decimal).
281
Section 7-3
Memory Tables
- Stored data
The table below indicates how the set “Value” (initial value) and the contents of
host words are stored in numeral memory tables.
Storage of “Value” set at the Support Tool
Input Value
Storage Type
Number
of Words
BCD
123456
−123456
Binary
2
BCD
Binary
2
BCD
$F001
Binary
1
BCD
$FFFF
Binary
1
BCD
$FFFFFFFF
Binary
2
Display After
Confirmation
Stored Value
123456
0001E240
123456
0001E240
−123456
FFFE1DC0
−123456
FFFE1DC0
61441
0000F001
61441
0000F001
65535
0000FFFF
65535
0000FFFF
−1
FFFFFFFF
−1
FFFFFFFF
Storage of contents of host words
Contents of
Word
Storage Type
Number
of Words
BCD
1234
Binary
1
BCD
F123
Binary
1
BCD
123B
Binary
Binary
2
BCD
FFFF
Binary
Binary
282
Binary
1234
00001234
4660
FFFFFF85
−123
FFFFF123
−3805
0000123B
4667
FFFFFB2E
−1234
F0001234
−268430796
FFFFFFFF
−1
(not stored ... existing value retained)
2
BCD
FFFFFFFF
000004D2
(not stored ... existing value retained)
1
BCD
0000FFFF
Decimal for
Stored Value
(not stored ... existing value retained)
1
BCD
F0001234
Stored Value
0000FFFF
65535
(not stored ... existing value retained)
2
FFFFFFFF
−1
Section 7-3
Memory Tables
S “Initial” setting and initial value
The “Initial” setting determines whether the contents of numeral memory tables
are written to the allocated word(s) at the host when the power to the
NT631/NT631C is turned ON, when the NT631/NT631C is reset, or on transition
from the System Menu to the RUN mode.
Here, “Initial” (initialization) means the initialization of the contents of host
word(s) as they are overwritten by the contents of the numeral memory table. If
the numeral memory table is not allocated to a host word or words, this setting
has no effect.
Reference
When the NT631/NT631C starts operation, the contents of numeral memory
tables is as follows depending on whether or not the numeral memory table is allocated to the host, on the “Initial” setting for the numeral memory table, and on
whether or not the resume function is used.
Allocated
“Initial” Setting
to Host?
Checked
Yes
Not checked
Resume Function
Used
Not Used
Existing numeral memory
table value retained (at host
word(s) also)
Initial value of numeral
memory table used (at host
word(s) also)
When the numeral memory table is initialized by System
Menu operation: initial value of the numeral memory table
(at host word(s) also)
Contents of host word(s)
Existing numeral memory
table value
No
(Ineffective)
Initial value of numeral
memory table
When the numeral memory table is initialized by System
Menu operation: initial value of the numeral memory table
[Display Functions]
Numeral memory tables themselves have no display function.
To display the contents of numeral memory tables, use 7-8 “Numeral Display”
(page 348) or 7-10 “Graphs” (page 362).
[Input Functions]
When a numeral memory table is allocated to a word or words at the host, the contents of the word are read and stored.
However, reading is only executed for those numeral memory tables that are being
used for the currently displayed screen (when copying a memory table, the contents of the allocated word(s) of the copy source memory table are read).
283
Section 7-3
Memory Tables
[Output Functions]
When a numeral memory table is allocated to a word or words at the host, the contents of the numeral memory table are written to the word(s).
However, writing is only executed in the following cases.
S When the contents of the numeral memory table have changed as a result of
operations at the NT631/NT631C, such as memory table copying by touch
switch operation, or use of the numeral setting function
S When the “Initial” setting at the Support Tool is checked when the power to the
NT631/NT631C is turned ON, the NT631/NT631C is reset, or on transition from
the System Menu to the RUN mode (the contents of all numeral memory tables
that are allocated to the host and whose “Initial” setting is checked are written)
[Processing Functions]
The set “Value” (initial value) and the contents of the allocated word(s) at the host
are interpreted and stored in accordance with the set attributes (refer to “Common
Attributes”, page 279).
[Relationship with Other Elements]
S When “numeral display” is used, the contents of numeral memory tables can be
displayed in real time as numeric values (page 348).
S When a “bar graph” is used, the contents of a numeral memory table can be displayed in real time in bar graph form (page 362).
S When an “analogue meter” is used, the contents of a numeral memory table can
be displayed in real time in the form of quarter, semi-circle or circle-shaped
graph.
S When a “broken line graph” is used, the contents of multiple, consecutive numeral memory tables can be displayed in real time in the form of a broken line graph
(page 374).
S When a “trend graph” is used, changes over time in the contents of a numeral
memory table can be displayed in the form of a broken line graph (page 380).
S When a “numeral setting” is used, numeric values can be input into the numeral
memory table from the screen of the NT631/NT631C (page 406).
S When the touch switch copy setting function is used, the contents of a numeral
memory table can be copied, and constants can be input to the numeral memory
table (page 328).
S By operation of the “PT status control area”, data can be copied between
memory tables from the host (page 260).
S If the contents of numeral memory tables are changed by operation at the
NT631/NT631C, the change is notified to the “PT status notify area” (page 269).
284
Section 7-3
Memory Tables
7-3-2
Character String Memory Tables
[Function Outline]
“Character string memory tables” are internal memories of the NT631/NT631C for
recording character string data.
Since they can be allocated to words at the host, the contents of words at the host
can be displayed as character strings at the NT631/NT631C via character string
memory tables.
Character string memory tables are assigned character string memory table numbers so that they can be managed and designated individually.
NT631/NT631C
abcde
ABCDE
Display
Display
PC
Character string memory table No. 8
Read
Allocated word
Character string memory table No. 12
[Restrictions]
S The number of character string memory tables can be set as one of the following
at the Support Tool.
- 256 (character string memory table numbers 0 to 255)
- 1000 (character string memory table numbers 0 to 999)
- 2000 (character string memory table numbers 0 to 1999)
Since the character string memory tables share memory area with the screen
data, setting a large number of character string memory tables reduces the
memory area available for screen data.
S The data quantity of one character string memory table can be set as follows by
setting at the Support Tool (a setting of “0” indicates no allocation).
0 to 40 characters (= 0 to 40 bytes, which is 0 to 20 words)
S Character string memory table numbers 500 and higher always remain at the
initial value set with the Support Tool. These values cannot be changed later and
can only be read. These tables cannot be allocated to the host either.
S The characters that can be stored in character string memory tables are alphanumerics, symbols, and marks (codes FF20 to FFFFH).
Reference
- If “00H” (NULL code) is encountered in a character string, the subsequent data
is ignored.
- If codes outside the ranges indicated above are written to the allocated words at
the host, the character strings may not be displayed correctly.
285
Section 7-3
Memory Tables
[Common Attributes]
Character string memory tables have the following properties.
Possible Settings
Property
Value
Meaning
Alphanumerics and symbols, Marks
Character string in the initial status after the contents of the character
string memory table have been initialized.
Initial
Check mark (initialize)/No check mark (do not initialize)
This setting determines whether or not the allocated words at the host are
initialized when the power to the NT631/NT631C is turned ON, when the
NT631/NT631C is reset, and on transition from the System Menu to the
RUN mode.
“Initialization” here means initialization of the allocated words at the host:
when a check mark is set, the previous character string memory table
contents are written to the host words. When no check mark is set, the
data at the host is read and set in the character string memory tables.
PC
Address
Any word address at the host
Words
1 to 20
Host word(s) to which the character string memory table is allocated
Designate the first (lower) word.
For details, refer to “Allocated words (page 286).
The number of words used at the host when a character string memory
table is allocated to the host.
For details, refer to “Allocated words” (page 286).
I/O
Comment
Up to 16 characters of text
Comment that describes the contents of a character string memory table
S Allocated words
Character string memory tables can be allocated to 1 to 20 words at the host.
Character string memory tables can be allocated to the following host (PC)
areas.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocation
CVM1/CV Series PCs
Allocation
CS1 Series PCs
Allocation
DM
Data memory
3
Data memory
3
Data memory
3
CH
I/O relay
3
I/O relay
3
I/O relay
3
TIM
Timer present value
Timer present value
Timer present value
CNT
Counter present value
Counter present value
Counter present value
HR
Holding relay
3
–
AR
Auxiliary relay
3
Special auxiliary relay
LR
Link relay
3
–
–
–
–
EM
EM Current Bank *1 *2
3
EM Current Bank *2
n
EM Current Bank *2
3
–
Holding relay
Special auxiliary relay
3: OK
: NG
n: Host link not available
*1 : EM (Extended data memory) of C series is available only with C200HX/HG/HE (–Z).
*2 : Only current bank can be allocated for EM (Extended data memory).
286
Section 7-3
Memory Tables
Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1/CV series PCs are all allocated to
system functions, they cannot be used for purposes other than system use.
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. Refer to APPENDIX L “PC Memory Map”, page 674.
The relationships among the allocated words, the number of allocated words,
and the contents of character string memory tables are indicated in the figure
below.
Example:
Number of allocated words = 4 words
“A” = 41H, “B” = 42H
First word
4 1 4 2
“C” = 43H, “D” = 44H
First word + 1
4 3 4 4
“Y” = FF01H
First word + 2
F F 0 1
“E” = 45H, “F” = 46H
First word + 3
4 5 4 6
“ABCDYEF”
S “Initial” setting and initial value
The “Initial” setting determines whether the contents of character string memory
tables are written to the allocated word(s) at the host when the power to the
NT631/NT631C is turned ON, when the NT631/NT631C is reset, or on transition
from the System Menu to the RUN mode.
Here, “Initial” (initialization) means the initialization of the contents of host
word(s) as they are overwritten by the contents of the character string memory
table. If the character string memory table is not allocated to a host word or
words, this setting has no effect.
Reference
When the NT631/NT631C starts operation, the contents of character string
memory tables are as follows depending on whether or not the character string
memory table is allocated to the host, on the “Initial” setting for the character string
memory table, and on whether or not the resume function is used.
Allocated
“Initial” Setting
to Host?
Resume Function
Used
Existing character string
memory table value retained (at host word(s) also)
Checked
Yes
Not checked
(Ineffective)
Initial value of character
string memory table used
(at host word(s) also)
When the character string memory table is initialized by
System Menu operation: initial value of the character
string memory table (at host word(s) also)
Contents of host word(s)
Existing character string
memory table value
No
Not Used
Initial value of character
string memory table
When the character string memory table is initialized by
System Menu operation: initial value of the character
string memory table
287
Section 7-3
Memory Tables
[Display Functions]
Character string memory tables themselves have no display function.
To display the contents of character string memory tables, use 7-9 “Character
String Display” (page 356).
Character strings can also be displayed as messages by using the “alarm list”
(page 395) and “alarm history” (page 395) functions.
[Input Functions]
When a character string memory table is allocated to a word or words at the host,
the contents of the word are read and stored.
However, reading is only executed for those character string memory tables that
are being used for the currently displayed screen (when copying a character string
memory table, the contents of the allocated word(s) of the copy source memory
table are read).
[Output Functions]
When a character string memory table is allocated to a word or words at the host,
the contents of the character string memory table are written to the word(s).
However, writing is only executed in the following cases.
S When the contents of the character string memory table have changed as a result of operations at the NT631/NT631C, such as memory table copying by
touch switch operation, or use of the input setting function
S When the “Initial” setting of string table is checked when the power to the
NT631/NT631C is turned ON, the NT631/NT631C is reset, or on transition from
the System Menu to the RUN mode (the contents of all character string memory
tables that are allocated to the host and whose “Initial” setting is checked are
written.)
[Processing Functions]
Character string memory tables have no data processing function.
[Relationship with Other Elements]
S When “character string display” is used, the contents of character string memory
tables can be displayed in real time as character strings (page 356).
S When “alarm list” or “alarm history” is used, the contents of the character string
memory table can be displayed as a message (page 395).
S When “character string input” is used, character strings can be input into the
character string memory table from the screen of the NT631/NT631C (page
422). It is also possible to input character strings from a bar code reader connected to the NT631/NT631C.
S When the touch switch copy setting function is used, the contents of a character
string memory table can be copied (page 328).
S By operation of the “PT status control area”, data can be copied between
memory tables from the host (page 270).
S If the contents of character string memory tables are changed by operation at
the NT631/NT631C, the change is notified to the “PT status notify area” (page
269).
288
Section 7-3
Memory Tables
7-3-3
Bit Memory Tables
[Function Outline]
Bit memory tables are internal memories for bit data.
They are allocated to a bit at the host to monitors a bit, and can execute a specific
function in accordance with the status of that bit.
Bit memory tables are assigned bit memory table numbers so that they can be
managed and designated individually.
Bit memory tables have the following functions.
S Screen changeover function
When the host bit to which a bit memory table is allocated changes status from
“0” (OFF) to “1” (ON), the screen whose screen number is set in the bit memory
table is displayed.
Bit
Screen number 11
displayed
Screen number 10
Screen number 11
Screen number 12
No. 1
0
0
0
No. 2
No. 3
PC
← 1 (ON)
If the allocated bits of multiple bit memory tables come ON at the same time, the
bit memory table with the smallest number takes priority.
S Alarm list/history function
When the status of the host bit to which a bit memory table is allocated changes
to 1 (ON), the contents of the character string memory table (message), and
image/library data set for that bit memory table are displayed (this is the “alarm
list function”). In order to use the alarm list function, it must be registered for the
screen in advance. If more than one bit memory table is set for the alarm list
function, those with smaller bit memory table numbers are given display priority,
therefore it is possible to assign an order or priority to displayed messages.
If registration in the alarm history is designated, the time when the status of the
host bit to which the bit memory table is allocated changes to “1” (ON) is recorded in the alarm history (“alarm history function”).
For details, refer to 7-11 “Alarm List, Alarm History” (page 395 ).
Character string
memory table No. 32
Image/library
data 102A
Character string memory table No. 50
Image/library data 0F51
No. 13
Character string memory table No. 32
Image/library data 102A
No. 14
Character string memory table No. 54
Image/library data 12AB
No. 15
Bit
0
0
0
PC
← 1 (ON)
Message (character string memory table
No. 32) and image/library data (102A)
set for bit memory table No. 14.
289
Section 7-3
Memory Tables
S Operation when using the alarm list/history function
The operation when using the alarm list/history function is as follows.
Reference
- For the alarm list function, display is in ascending order of bit memory table
numbers. For the alarm history function display is in occurrence order (from
newest record/from oldest record) or frequency order.
- With the alarm list function, when the host bit to which the bit memory table is
allocated returns to “0” (OFF) during display, the message and image/library
data is automatically cleared.
(1) When the status of a bit memory table changes to “1” (ON), the contents of the
set character string memory table are displayed as a message.
Contents of character string memory table set
for the bit memory table whose status has
changed to “1” (ON).
If an alarm list with multiple lines is
created, alarms are displayed in
ascending order of bit memory table
numbers.
If the bit memory tables are set in
ascending order of priority, the display
will also be arranged in accordance
with the order of priority.
PROCESS 3 STOPPED
WATER TANK OVERHEATING
(2) Each message area is a touch switch and pressing a message displays the
set image/library data. At the same time, the pressed message is displayed in
reverse video.
Image/library data corresponding to the first alarm message
PROCESS 3 STOPPED
WATER TANK OVERHEATING
FAULT
The alarm list is composed of
touch switches. When a displayed
alarm message is pressed, the
corresponding image/library data
is displayed. The pressed alarm
message is displayed in reverse
video.
Process 3 stopped by fault.
Check DM2500.
(3) In case multiple messages are displayed, pressing another message will
cause the newly pressed one to be displayed in reverse video, and the corresponding image/library data will be displayed.
Image/library data corresponding to the second alarm message
PROCESS 3 STOPPED
WATER TANK OVERHEATING
URGENT
It is also possible to set
correspondence between bit memory
tables and screen numbers. Here, if
the second alarm message is
pressed again, the corresponding
screen will be displayed.
Check the thermostat!
(4) When a message displayed in reverse video is pressed again, the display will
switch to the screen with the set screen number.
290
Section 7-3
Memory Tables
Reference
- In the case described above, both “image/library display” and “screen changeover” functions are set. The operation when a touch switch is pressed is determined as follows in accordance with these settings.
Touch switch
Image/library
display
Screen
changeover
First time
Second time
Not set
Not set
No effect
No effect
Not set
Set
Screen changeover
–
Set
Not set
Image/library data display
No effect
Set
Set
Image/library data display
Screen changeover
- Note that the text will be invisible when the message is pressed, if the color of
message display (color of bit memory table) and the background color in reverse
video of alarm list/history are the same.
[Restrictions]
S The number of bit memory tables can be set as one of the following at the Support Tool.
- 256 (bit memory table numbers 0 to 255)
- 1000 (bit memory table numbers 0 to 999)
Since the bit memory tables share memory area with the screen data, setting a
large number of bit memory tables reduces the memory area available for
screen data.
[Common Attributes]
Bit memory tables have the following common properties.
Possible Settings
Property
Function
Meaning
None/Switch screen/Alarm
Function of the bit memory table
When “None” is set, nothing will happen even if the host bit to which the
table is allocated comes ON.
Description
Indicates the settings particular to each function.
PC
Address
Any bit address at the host
I/O
Comment
Up to 16 characters of text
Host bit to which the bit memory table is allocated
Comment that describes the contents of a bit memory table
291
Section 7-3
Memory Tables
S Allocated bit
Bit memory tables can be allocated to the following host (PC) areas.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocation
CVM1/CV Series PCs
Allocation
CS1 Series PCs
Allocation
DM
Data memory
3
Data memory
3
Data memory
3
CH
I/O relay
3
I/O relay
3
I/O relay
3
TIM
Timer present value
Timer present value
Timer present value
CNT
Counter present value
Counter present value
Counter present value
HR
Holding relay
3
–
AR
Auxiliary relay
3
Special auxiliary relay
LR
Link relay
3
–
–
–
–
EM
EM Current Bank *1 *2
3
EM Current Bank *2
n
EM Current Bank *2
3
–
Holding relay
Special auxiliary relay
3: OK
: NG
n: Host link not available
*1 : EM (Extended data memory) of C series is available only with C200HX/HG/HE (–Z).
*2 : Only current bank can be allocated for EM (Extended data memory).
Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1/CV series PCs are all allocated to
system functions, they cannot be used for purposes other than system use.
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. Refer to APPENDIX L “PC Memory Map”, page 674.
If the data memory (DM) is designated, a bit number (00 to 15) must be specified
after the word number.
[Display Functions]
S Screen changeover function
When using the screen changeover function, the following attribute must be set
in addition to the common attributes.
Possible Settings
Property
Screen
Number
Meaning
0001 to 3999: Screen numbers 1 to 3999
9001: Occurrence history screen
9002: Frequency history screen
9020: Screen for programming console function (expansion function)
9999: “Return to previous screen” designation
Number of screen displayed when bit memory table status changes to
“1” (ON)
- When a bit memory table is used with the screen changeover function, when
the status of the bit to which the bit memory table is allocated changes to “1”
(ON), the display switches to the screen set for the bit memory table (this
screen remains displayed even if the bit returns to “0” (OFF)).
292
Section 7-3
Memory Tables
Reference
- The screen display can also be switched by PT status control area operation
(page 468), touch switch operation (page 469), and by using the alarm list/history function (page 472).
- To display an overlapping screen, designate the screen number of the parent
screen.
- If there are no registered elements for the designated screen number, the screen
does not switch.
S Alarm list/history function
When using the alarm list/history function, the following properties must be set in
addition to the common attributes.
Possible Settings
Property
History
Meaning
Check mark (record)/No check mark (do not record)
Determines whether or not an alarm history is recorded
When a check mark is set, a record is logged in the alarm history when
the status of the allocated bit of the bit memory table changes to “1”
(ON).
Switch
Screen
Check mark (screen switched)/No check mark (screen not switched)
Screen
No.
0001 to 3999: Screen numbers 1 to 3999
9001: Occurrence history screen
9002: Frequency history screen
9020: Screen for programming console function (expansion function)
9999: “Return to previous screen” designation
Determines whether or not the screen changeover function is used
When a check mark is set, pressing the message (which is displayed
when the status of the bit allocated to the bit memory table changes to
“1” (ON)) twice switches the display to the designated screen.
Number of screen displayed when the message (which is displayed
when the status of the allocated bit of the bit memory table changes to
“1” (ON)) is pressed twice.
String
Table
Entry
0 to 1999 (within the character string memory table range)
Image/
Library
Code
000H: No display (No check mark)
0001 to 0FFFH: Image data
1000 to 3FFFH: Library data
Number of the character string memory table whose contents are displayed as a message in the alarm list/history when the status of the allocated bit of the bit memory table changes to “1” (ON).
Code (expressed as 4 hexadecimal digits) of the image/library data corresponding to the message displayed when the status of the allocated
bit of the bit memory table changes to “1” (ON).
Foreground
Color
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
Color of message text (white and black for NT631)
- If the “alarm list” and “alarm history” functions are registered for a screen, messages and image/library data are displayed in accordance with the status of
the bit memory table (refer to “Common Attributes”, page 291).
293
Section 7-3
Memory Tables
Reference
The alarm history can also be checked by pressing the “Alarm History” touch
switch on the “MAINTENANCE MODE MENU” screen of the NT631/NT631C. For
details, refer to 6-11-5 “Displaying and Printing the Alarm History Record” (page
217).
[Input Functions]
When a bit memory table is allocated to a bit at the host, the contents of the bit are
read and processing in accordance with the bit status is executed.
However, reading is only executed in the following case.
S When a function (screen changeover, alarm history) is set for the bit memory
table.
[Output Functions]
Bit memory tables have no output function. The contents of bit memory tables are
not written to bits at the host.
[Processing Functions]
Bit memory tables have no data processing function.
[Relationship with Other Elements]
S When the alarm list function is used, messages and image/library data can be
displayed in real time in accordance with the status of bits at the host (page 395).
S When the alarm history function is used, the time when the status of the host bit
changes to “1” (ON), and the number of times it comes ON, can be displayed
(page 395).
Reference
When the alarm history record area has become full, processing is carried out in
accordance with the settings made for “History Setting” under “Tools” – ”PT Configuration” – “System” at the Support Tool.
- Alarm (Use Ring Buffer)
If a check mark is set here, when an alarm occurs after the record area become
full, the oldest record data is deleted in order to allow the new alarm history data
to be stored (alarm pushup storage).
If no check mark is set, no more new alarm history data is stored after the record
area becomes full.
- Screen (Use Ring Buffer)
If a check mark is set here, when a screen for which the history property is set
after the record area has become full, the oldest record data is deleted and new
display history data is stored (alarm pushup storage).
If no check mark is set here, when the record area becomes full, no more new
display history data is stored.
294
!
"
#
$
%
&
"' ' (
)
*
(+ )' '
+ (
'
(
)
+ $* ,(
-)
.
/
01
"
+ + + *
) " "' /
) 1+ (' ) ( 2+ ) ' "' 3 4 ) /"
(
1 ( 5 + (
('( 5 /4 5 1
+ + + + + + + +
(
&
'() ) 6 '() ) 7 ( ' 4 & ' 7 ) ' 8( 9 ' ) / ( '
+ ' 1
(( )' ) (
!
) )
* ! "
# $
% #&% '( )*$
+,+-+, -
-
% #
. /0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7
& ! "' + + + ' ) : + ' '(
*
* .
)' '
% 8 ,
0 -
&' / , -
&' &'
) )
* "
# $
% #&% '( )9$
+,+-+, -
-
% #
. /0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7
& ! "' + ' )
* .
)' '
% 8 ,
0 -
&' , -
/ &' &'
#
) )
* : "
7 # $
% #&% '( ))$
+,+-+, -
-
% #
. /0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7
& ! "' + '
) / ( )( 1 ;
+ < '(
* .
)' '
% 8 ,
0 -
&' , -
&' &'
) *
)
* % #&% '( 2;;$
+,+-+, -
-
% #
. /0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7
& ! "' + ' )
+ ) *
'() )' '(
/ ) 1
!
* .
)' '
% 8 ,
0 # $
-
&' , -
&' &'
# $
, (' + & )+ )' ) )
* < < 4. 3= = % #&% '( 2;3$
+ -
% #
. /0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7
& ! "' + ' )
+ )
'() !
* .
)' '
% 0 -
&' "
) )
* ! "
# $
% #&% '( 2;2$
+,+-+, -
-
% #
. /0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7
& ! "' + + + + ' ) ' '(
* .
)' '
% 8 ,
0 -
&' , -
&' &'
' ' + + + + + *
'' ' + + + + + *
' + + + + *
+ : '+ ) '' ) /
$1 2+ )& + + ' ' )'
+ + ) )'
, ) (
& )
) () (' ( , )' ( ' , + ( ( (
; /
1 (
& /
1 2+ ) "' '
"
*
+ + ) / ) *
) ' )
&' 1
" ( "' /
1+ (' ) !
'( () ) 3 4 ) 9' ( 5 + (
('( 5 /4 5 1
+ + + + + + + +
(
&
'() ) 6 '() ) '() ) *
(+ 00 /8='
16 3 5 0 /216
3 5 0 /:16 3 6
3 6
3 4 6
3 556
3 0 , <+ "' *
'(
, ) "' + (
) , + '() <
) ( *
)
%
% :
( 5.
:
- 0
- +> >
: #&! '( 2;$
33 #!?$( 3 #>$( 3 #7$( ( 22(
( 99
7 : #&'( 2;1$
. . # :
$+
/ . . # :
$
% : #&% '(
2;$
+-+, -
-
% : #
. /0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7+
0
4
. 4
. : #
. /0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7+
0
" !
#
$ * 8
/ (
&1 ) %% &
'% (
%' )
**
++
''
,,
: ,"755 *0 + '(
*
* 2+ (
& 04 04 * ( /04 04 '1
>40*"00*8
>40*"00*8
>40*"0 0*8
"(
) '
'(
( ' (
> ( ) ' (
&
( -
( -
"( ( * .
)' '
% 0 : . -
&' , -
:
. ' '
'' '
'
, ) (
& )
) () (' ( , )' ( ' *
, + ( ( (
+ + + + + /
1 (
&
/
1 2+ ) "'*
) 3 4 ) ( 5 + (
('( 5
/4 5 1
+ + + + + + + +
(
&
'() ) 6 '() ) ) (' ) ) ( , )& + + ' ' )'*
+ + ) )
. ()
' / 1+
)
&' + ) + ( (
) ) ( '
-.+ ' , ' )(+ ()
) ( )
0 #& '( 2;9$
@ 4:
4
% > -
% #
. /0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7
4
. 4
. #
.(
( /0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7+
0
4
#
.
/0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7
) '
)+ & ?
(
$
#
$ (
."
/ 0 1
' '
'' '
'
) ' )
+ + + + + /
1 (
&
/
1 2+ ) "'*
' "() ' >* "' @5 / 1+ ' ()+ ()
' )
&' ) ; ()+ ' =' )9 & ' () + *
(
'
"' /A **80**01
!"
%
& ( ( 04 ) 04 %
& (
& "' + + (
=' ) ) ' (( )+ ' ' (
&
' (
& ( )
) + 7
%
'
"' - 1
- 1
-1
! - -1
- 1
- 1
! (
('( (
& ) 6 (
& =' )
) (
2+ (
& 8 ) ' ) ( + ' (
) + , (
& + ( ( + + (
&
+ (
& (
& ' '
3 4 ) /"
(
1 ( 5 + (
('( 5 /4 5 1
+ + + + + + + +
(
&
'() ) 6 '() ) : (
& ' ( ' '+ (
& ')9 (
%
& 04 04 (+ *
+ (
& + (
& )
2+ (
& + ) (
& + *
(
& ' + $** / .
1 /
1 $* "
.
/
41
.
.
--; ----
% . #&% '( 233$
+-+, -
"
. #&! '( 233$
33 #!?$( 3 #>$( 3 #7$( ( 22( ( 99
-
% . #
. /0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7+
0
4
. 4
. . #
. /0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7+
0
- #
%2 $ %2 8
%
& ) %% &
'% (
++
%' )
''
**
,,
8 (
&+ ) ( ) ( '
* .
)' '
% 0 . . -
&' . , -
:
. %
& ' '
%
& '' '
%
& '
, ) (
& )
) () (' ( , )' ( ' , + ( ( (
%
& ( 2+ )
"' #
$%
,(
(
( ) < :6 5 + 5* '
26 5 + 5* '
,(
(
"' + + (
=' ) , ) ( ;% (
: (
(
# =' ' ( (
(
( )
='
: (
(+ ' )
&*
' ) : (
5 (+ / ( *
) 1 ) : (
+ ) ( 2*
+ & ( (
) (
' ' (
' (
( *
) ( + 7
%
'
"'
-
1
-
1
3--
0 -
! -
-
1
- 1
-
1
! (
('( + (
) 6 (
=' 0 )
/(
@)
1 ) (
! ' 4 ( ) ( 5 + (
('( 0
,(
+ )
< (
) :6 5 + 5* '
26 5 + 5* '
' (
(
@)
'
,(
) ' ( (
&
,(
9 ' ) (
( )
"
" ,+ ;;;3 ;---
5
#
$
+9 #
$
# /0123( & ' &5'
-
% 4
.+4++5+++6+7
4
. 4
. 4
.+4++5+++6+7+
0
#
-
$
"
-
1
, )
& '' (
+ ' (
;
( )
&' (
: ( (
+ )
& )( : ' : (
+ () *
' /
1 "' + )' >[email protected]>40 ,(
' '
,(
'' '
,(
'
. ) (
)
,(
& ( ( + )' )
) ) () " (
*
)
+ )
& ' (( (
+ *
=' ) ) ! ) (
+ )' )
) ( )' ( ( ( (
, ) (
@)
( /(
@)
(1 7> 7 /
1
, ) (
@)
(
( @
( ' /
41
,(
( ( 2+ ) "' #
&' -)
()
(' (
( -)
) =' <
-)
)
"' + + (
=' ) # =' ' ( (
)
( )
='
" '
( )
"' /
) 1+ (' ) (
4 -
! - -
&
1
' ' )
' )
( *
) ) + 7
%
'
"'
1
1
1
1
! 1
1
1
! (
('( 0+55 )
) 6 )
=' 0 )
/(
@)
1 ) (
! ' 4 ( ) /"
( 1 ( 5 + (
('( 4
,(
+ )
(
('( '() ( ) )
4
( ) )
(6 ( ) + + + + + + + + (
&
' )
(
@)
'
-)
) ' ( (
&
-)
9 ' ) )
( )
"
" ,+ 3;;; 2---
#
$
: ' : )
+ () *
' /
1 "' + )' >[email protected]>40 -)
' '
-)
'' '
-)
'
. ) (
)
,(
& ( ( + )' )
) ) () " (
*
)
+ )
=' (( (
(
+ =' ) ) ! ) (
+ )' )
) ( )' ( ( ( (
, ) (
@)
( /(
@)
(1 7> 7 /
1
, ) (
@)
(
( @
( ' /
41
-)
( ( 2+ ) "' -
( ' ) -
(
(
9 )
>(
/
1 (
>(
/
1 ( ' /[email protected]>@
1 5
5
)
5## 5 ,(
@)
(
,(
@)
( /(
@)
1 7> 7 '
5
5## )
5 -
( "' ! (
('( 4 ( ) ( 5 + (
('( 0
'() ( ) 6 '() ) 2+ '() ( + & ( ( ) .
#*
/
4 1
: ' (
/
1 (+
) ' ,(
@)
( ')9 (
('( ('
' *
( (
)
(
(
('( 4
(
@)
( (
)
) ( 5 + (
('( 0
: )
(
@)
(+ )
*
9 ' + 3'
+ "' ' 9 ' , (
@)
( + )
!( (+ ( ) (
2+ ( ( ) "'*
(( )' (+ ) >(
/
1 -
(
) (
/
1 ( *
)
* "
7 # $
<
#$ : . . #
$+
/ . . # $
%
: ( 5.
. " - ( *== &0:
#-: %$' # 2;$
-
+
. . # $+/ . . # $
# $
( ( ( -
# . . &-' $ . /0123 4
.+4++5+++6+7
8/
+-
8/ #
. /0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7
8--
8-- #
. /0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7+
0
< -
4
#&
'( 22$
,+8
31 < 8/ 0
% 8/
<+-
"
7 7> ) ( ) 2+ )
&*
' * "
(
#
.6
/
#-
.5/3.5##/
.6
/
#-
.5/3.5##/
"
.6
/
#-
.6
/
.5/3.5##/
#-
.5/3.5##/
* !
)
-
( ) ) /1 %5
>
>
% ,+8 0 > : <
<. !: 3 0,5
/0
!5
B 8C
<
A53+A
<
% ,+8 0 : !: 3 <
% ,+8 0 > : !5 4. B / B > . /
3 == !5 #!: 5$ ;;>D+>+>! #=E$
0 !5 #!: 5$ .
" '
A%[email protected] ( '+ ) ' ' ( '
(( # !8>.,B - %( %
+ 4$ * .
(
-
( ' )
/716
0 /7>16
7
7>+ : ( '' ( ) 0
/7>1 ( ) 7> )'
> ( 7> ) (
: (6 ( : (6 ( (
) ) 7
7 C: ( D
5##
C: ( D
5##
4
4
#
#
5 -
1
4- 7
8
1
* )
) (
/
1 ( (
& )
+ (
@)
( (
@)
7 7> ,(
@)
(
) (
@)
( *
)
* 8-- D( 6
+ 8-- 7( >
7+ + 8-
,+ 8-- # & '$
-
- + 8- #
. /0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7
4
.
4
. + 8- #
. /0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7+
0
8/ D( 6
+ 8/
7( >
7+ + 8/
+ 8/ # & '$
-
- + 8- #
. /0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7
4
.
4
. + 8- #
. /0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7+
0
< -
4 #&
'( 21$
,+8 @ 31 5## 5 * !
)
-
( ) ) /1 %5
>
>
% ,+8 0 > : <
<. !: 3 0,5
/0
!5
B 8C
<
A53+A
<
% ,+8 0 : !: 3 <
% ,+8 0 > : !5 4. B / B > . /
3 == !5 #!: 5$ ;;>D+>+>! #=E$
0 !5 #!: 5$ .
" '
A%[email protected] ( '+ ) ' ' ( '
(( # !8>.,B - %( %
+ 4$ -
( ) ' ) '
2+ ) 6
: ( ' ' -
( '' '
-
( '
' /
51 ( ' (
/
*
1 (
-
( ( "' 2+ ) "' >[email protected]>40 ' ( ' ; /'1 ' + >[email protected]>40 )
+ ) (
) *' 7
! '+ 5
7 -
-
7 -
1
# !
(
7 0
!
1
! (+ ' ) ' + + )+ ' '
) / ' 1 (
' "' : ' + ' '
' ) "
7 (
1111
7
6
-
" 7 !
. ' ' ' ' '(
) ' (
+ ( * . ' >
* . ' )
& 7 ( (
'
)
7 ' ( ( * , ' '+ ' (
) '*
' ( ' ' ) '' )
( * ' ' : (' ' ( ) ( (+ (
' ' ' '*
' (
(
; ' ' ' 8
(6 : ' ! ; .
-
7 -
9 7
0 $0 -
5 -
-
0
7 6 7 -
5 7 -
-1
9 7
0 $0 6 -
5 -
-
0
7 7 -
5 7 -
-1
' ) ' ! ' ) ' + ' /
41
2 '
: ' + ' ) ' / )1 , (
' * %(
) 0 /7>1 ' + *
' /71 ' * !
8
( ' + ) 0 /7>1 ' /71+ /71 ' 0 /7>1
* "
: ' ) 0 /7>1
* #
: ' ) /71
/0123+/0123
" 7 %
$ 7 %
3
" '
: ' + " ! (
7 %
-
:
.
-
:/ 7 %1
,' & E '
: ' ()
'(
@
'+
' '( ' /
)1 ) ' ' , ) ' ' ' & ' '*
( ' + ( ' ( )
' &
/0123+/0123
0
-
9
' & '
: ' ' ()
'*
+ ) ) ' ' ) ' : & '
' (
& ) ) '
" 7 & '
' (( ) ) (( ) '(
@
' + ) ' 6
-
-
- ' ( & '
: '() '(
' + ' (
& ) ( ' ='
' - 9 - 9 : (
; ' + ) ( ) '
>[email protected]>40
(7 - 71
" 7
77 7 - 1
" & '
' ' ) ' >[email protected]>40 ) ' (
0
1
5
""
5
4
(
0 1
-1; '<
-;
'<
F0
F0
0
0
! (
('( 4 ' ) /"
( 1 ( 5 + (
('( 4 '() ' ) 6 '() ) *
2+ '() ( +
& ( ( ) .
# /
4 1
: ' ' + *
) ' (( ' ) . '+ ' (
) "
<
%
-
8/
-
8/
8--
-
7 # $
#$ . . #
$+
/ . . # $
( 5.
: ; # ?$
. " - ( *== &0: #-:
%$' # 2;$
+
. . # $+/ . . # $
# $
-:= / +++2=%
-= ( ( ( 7 # . . &-' $ # . /0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7
% 8/ #
. /0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7
% 8-- #
. /0123 $
4
.+4++5+++6+7+
0
:
/ 4
, C F , C F , C F C
5
7 5
< -
4
#&
'(
22$
,+8 31 < 8 0
, 8/ # &' &2=%' &'$
<+-
-
( G: *
(H
: *
'+ ( ' / ' 1
: > ( + ) ' /
1 *
' ( ' / ) + ) ' ' 1
> (
"
.6
/
" 7
5## 3
5 .6
/
#-
= 7 5## 3
5 "
*.(
.6
/
#-
= 7 5## 3
5 .6
/
#-
= 7 5## 3
5 G: *
(H
: *
( '+ ) *
+ ' /' 1
#
.6
/
.6
/
#-
#-
5## 3
5 "
7 5## 3
5 "
7 6
6
"
.6
/
#-
.6
/
#-
5## 3
5 "
6
7 5## 3
5 "
6
7 !
)
-
( ) ) /1 %5
>
>
% ,+8 0 > : <
<. !: 3 0,5
/0
!5
B 8C
<
A53+A
<
% ,+8 0 : !: 3 <
% ,+8 0 > : !5 4. B / B > . /
3 = !5 #!: 5$ ;;>D+>+>! #=E$
0 !5 #!: 5$ .
" '
A%[email protected] ( '+ ) ' ' ( '
(( # !*
8>.,B - %( %
+ 4$ ' ' + ) *
(' ) ( )
! (+ ) ' *
' ) ) ' ( )
' ( ) /716
0 /7>16
-
( 7
-
( 7> : ( 7> ( ) 0 /7>1 *
( ) (
7 ' : ( ) + ' ( " 7> "
'
/0123+/0123
7 %
3 3
5
" 7 %
: " 7> "
+ ' ' ( >[email protected]>40 (
'*
) , ) *
'
' ' (' ' (
*' 7
! '+ 5
7 -
-
7 -
1
# !
(
7 0
!
1
, ' ( ' +
' ) + '*
'
: " 7> "
+ ((+ ' , ' ' *' &)
' ' ) + & ' ) ' #
& ' (
& '' '*
(
* 2 '
! ) (
* " & '
! ' ) ' >[email protected]>40
+ ' )
, ) ' & ' ' : & ' ' ) & '
(( /# 0551
: ' + ' '
' ) ' + * 2 '
* " '
* & '
* ' & '
* : & '
* & '
* ' ( & '
* " & '
2 '
' ' ) : ' '+ ) / )1 (' ) ' ' ' ' >[email protected]>40 ) ) , ) +
' ' / ' ( 1
' 4
,+8
31 0
/ 5( ( ( ' ( ) * %(
: ' ) 7>I 7 % 5
< 5##
* !
8
( ' + 7 7>+ 7> 7
' ) ' % 5
< 5##
* "
: ' + ) ( 7>+ (
7>
% 5
< 5##
* #
: ' + ) 7+ (
7
% 5
< 5##
, (' ((
' ( )+ (' (
(+ 7 ' ) ( > (
' ' (('
( 0 7 .
7 /0 . #%5 $
7 /0 .
# %5 $
5 #3$ / # 8--$
#2$ / #$ / # $
#$ / : ' ' ' + * , /01 )+ ) ( ' 7 )
$ 3 3
; 3
3;
;3
" 7 " 7 $ 3 3
; ;
3;
3;
$ 5##
* , /1 )+ ' )
) + ) *
2+ '
+ ) )
) * , ((
' + '
7 ' ) + /01 )+ ) ) 7 '
* : ' &+ ) ' )+ '
) ) ((
@@
' * : ' >4"@>4+ () ((
' ' ' /
+ + 1 ( + )' ) >[email protected]>40
* , ' ) ' ) ' J ( ) (( J ' ) '
( / 7> 7 (
) 1
* , /1 /1 ) )+ ) , /01 ) )+ ) ' ) K88 ' ( ) ' 7 ,
+ ) .% ' > &
!
)
) ) /1 %5
>
>
% ,+8 0 > : <
<. !: 3 0,5
/0
!5
B 8C
<
A53+A
<
% ,+8 0 : !: 3 <
% ,+8 0 > : !5 4. B / B > . /
3 = !5 #!: 5$ ;;>D+>+>! #=E$
0 !5 #!: 5$ .
" '
A%[email protected] ( '+ ) ' ' ( '
(( # !*
8>.,B - %( %
+ 4$ " '
' ) ) ' >[email protected]>40+ ' ' ( : ' '+ ) ' : ' + /
(+ '() ' 1
* : '() ) ' + ' *
(
* ) ) ' /
41+
) ) (( ) /
$1+ ) (@ '
/
$1
* + '() )' /
3 2)))( );;3( );;( );;( ))))
* " '() >[email protected]>40 '()+ * " > 0 '() '() * " > 0
/' 1 " '()
0 * " > /=' 1 " '()
0 * " > (( " '() *
(
& ) ' (( ' #3> (
/2+ (( ' ) ' - ' (( '*
1 #3% ( (( ' )
' !+ ( + ' *
' ' ( (( '+ '+
) /, ) ' ( 1
* " > ((
) '() 2+ ' ' ' &
C" > D
" ! (
7 % -
:
.
-
:/ 7 %
C" > D
%' "
5
%
5
'
.
-
>>>>/ 7 %
" 7 % ' & '
3 ' ' ' '
)' ) & : ' &+ ) ' ' ' * ,' ' ) ' &
' / + ! 1+ ( )
>[email protected]>40
* ! & ' /8> C D1 ( '
'
' '
& ' '( & / + ! 1 '(
' '*
+ & ' ; & ' + ) ' ' '
)' & .
.
' ) ' &
C
-
; )( -
@ #3 $
<
@ >85!
@ ( ( ( @ ? ""
(
5!/@
@ 5
: 4
% %!<
% ( @ !/0
# ( :
$
*' @&)
'
' ' '
' /$*0 : '+ 51
* : ) ' 0 /*
)1+ ) ) >[email protected]>40
' ' * ; ' ( & ' "' + ) ) ' ( &
* , ) ) ' )' & /
<
3
#C$
<
7 D
6
0
<
7
. 3 3 2)))
. 3 2)))
D ; 1; # ;$
6 3) *) # ;=3$
8++0
#<
3+<
$ . . #
$+/ . . # $
)
! #
-
:
* ;
' ! 7 6 7 ) /
0 1
: '
' #
-
:
: , ( + )
' ( #
-
:
, + (
6 /
0 1
: & + ) , ) + '
6 7 /
0 1
, ) + ( 7
&
: '
' #
-
:
: , ( + )
' ( #
-
:
, + (
, ) + ( &
* ;
' #
-
:
& (
&
6 , ( +
+ > & (
& 6 , ( + (
& '
' ' (( ) (( ) ' , '' '(
@
+ ' ( / *
'1 (' '(
@
' ) ) ()
6
-
-
- -
-
- -
-
- -
- -
-
- -
* , ) ) (( ) ) *
' * , '(
@
(( ) ) ) >[email protected]>40 ' ' & ' )' & -
0
0 / 0
0
5 0
/+-:
A
( - +
; 3)))
- 3*9219 3*921*
0
0
0 / 0
0
#+
$
5 0
/
5 #
& ' & 0'$
; 3)))
' ( & '
' ( ' *
'(
@
*
' '
, ) ('
' '
(+ '(
' * ' ( & ) '(
'(
@
*
' * ,' ) ' ' & E )' ' ( & @ 7+C 8 +.G
. . #$+/ . . # $
/
<
3
#C$
+. # . . &<
3
#C$' &@ 7+C '$
3 2)))
<
#
. . &<
' &@
7+C '$
3 2)))
7 D
D ; 1; # ;$
6
6 3) *) # ;=3$
<
7
% #
3+
$ . . #
$+/ . . # $
5 0G
. . #$+/ . . #$
" ) ' ' 3 :@K*
)
" ( ' &*@&)
' 7 # : & ' /
01
" ) ' 3 :@K)
*
)' ( ' &**@&)
'
7 # : & ' /
01
: ( & '
' ( ) ( &+ *
+ >[email protected]>40 '
: ( & ) * : ) ( ) /# 501
* : ( & ) ' , ' )
: ( & )'
* % ) ( &
( ) ( &+ *
' )
/01 * ( & ) (
/1 ( & ) ( >[email protected]>40 '
( + (
& (7 - /1 ' >[email protected]>40 ( : ( ( (+ .
- : ( ' /
(
& 1+ ( (
' '
* ( ' ' ' ' *
/)
@1 7 *
( )
* " ( (' )
* " ' ) ((
)+ ' )
* " ' &
* (*( ( ' , ' *
(
' ' ' ( * : ( ) (('( ' < /1
* ; ' ( ( (
'+ )
' ( (
' *
'
" & '
' ' / (
1 >[email protected]>40
* >[email protected]>40 ' ' * ( /@(( /5 11 ( ) (( >[email protected]>40
* ! ) ) '
) , + ) ' )
' )' % +
; ' ' & E ' & E ()
>'*
(
,' /
$1 " ,' /
1+ '( ' *
) '
# & (
& ) ( =' '
"
' ' /' & E 1 '(
*
(
/
501+ ( /
41+ ( /
41+
'() /
0 1
' ( ( "' !
""""
""""
# $ % & ' ()
* + !
, !
- ./ 0$
-
/ ( !
- / % -%
/ -12/ -1/ - / -/ -+/ - %/ & "!0!( -3
4 / "'
5
!"#
$
%&'!
() !
*+,
%'-,) . % !,) . %$
,) ..) ) //)
00
!
$
! ..
!
%&!() !
*+,
1 1 %! 2
,
1 1 %! 2
,
3#
" %&" #
!
() !
*+,
4
!
" % #1 ,
515
6
7!
8
$
51! 51! % #1 ,
515
6
7!
8
$
!
6
4
6
7
! #
%&"
() !
*,
1 1 %4
6
,
1 1 %"
6
,
#
'
#
#
%&"
() !
*,
/9! 5" $
&"
6
( :
#
#
#
#
$
&4
6
( :
#
#
#
#
#
#
" " %&
() !
*.,
"
2
%&#
! () !
*,
4
!
#
! !
"
#
! !
;
$
<
%&;
()
!
*.,
1 1 %<
,
1 1 %<
,
" !
$
!
#
%
!
& 2
( #
&" (,
1 1 %
!
#
,
1 1 %
!
#
,
!"
#
6 3
%&
'
( )
$$
**
7 - %8 ''$9!(/ !
0 !! 0 !! ((
30(!%(( !6
30(2!%()( !6
30(2!%($( !6
%
2 !
-/
') ")
') ")
% !! 3#
"! 6
! #1! 6
&( 4
6
2!
! #1! !
* 3 :
""""
""""
3
# !
-/ -(/ 3 - / -/ -/ # , , -;
%
/
-(0)$/
! % - / < '= -/ < *
.
* (0)$
! % - / < )= -/ < )*
.
* (0)$
! % - / < -/ < )*
.
* (0)$
! % - / < ( -/ < )*
.
* ; !>
- / -/
3 ? 7 , , -;
%
/ ? ,
') +
",,
""
) ) " ", " ') +
",,
""
% -/@-+/
% A2 - /B
- /
! -/*
! -+/*
3
A6 B
& & !
-/
A5 B
- /
- %/ " "
!
#
" 6!
=!
+ ./>/0/0
!
./>/0/0 ./>/0/>
?
+ 2
7 -% /
-7/ !
!
$
" "
2
5"
.
"
2
"
2
5
.
"
2
A
!
#
" 6!
=!
+ @@@@
!
@@@ @@@@
?
+ .>+
=!
+ @@@@@@@@
!
@@@@@@@ @@@@@@@@
?
+ **'+
=!
+ .>0
!
.>0 .>>
?
+ =!
+ ./>/0/0
!
./>/0/0 ./>/0/>
?
+ !
%!
/+>, .>0 #
0+++ %.>0,)
./>/0/0 #
0+++++++ %./>/0/0, #
!
) ! #
4 #
.>0 ./>/0/0 A. B
7 - / - %/ -7/ -% /
# -" ./
)"
0,1
*$
#*
#*$
*$
#*
-
#*$
#*
#*$
*$
#*
#*$
*$
#*
*$
#*
#*$
*$
#*$
.'
"1
5
2
"
.",
0,1
/ $ *$
######3 #####% $ ",
2
4" *$
######3 *
*$
/ *
#####% *$
$ $
######3 (5
?
##3
#####% #####%
*$ $
#####* #*$ *$ 4" #####* *3
$*6
$
/ *3
#*$ $*6
*$ *$
#####* #*$ (5
?
#*
#*$
)
-% / -12/ 12
-&/ 12 -% / -1/ + !
( ! !
-&(0/ 7 -C!
/ & -C/ -2 #
/ 0)9
3
3
7 -C/ & -C/ -2 #
/ 0)9
-
/ )"
& "!0!( -3
4 / "'
3
%
+ %
#
,
&& &&&& ( -)
"
3
)
"
3
* $
!
$(
-)
"
3
3 * $
)
"
3
# $ % & ' ()
!
* + , - ./ 0$
- / ( !
- /
% (( 6:
* D ) ( 7* D ) ( +*
D ) *
D ) 00*
D ))*
D ''*
D ( ? ? !
%
4,
4, -+ +/ &
!
, , -+ +/ -& / !
4, 4, , , , !
5
! ! %&'!
9
() !
*@,
!
%'-,) . % !,) . %$
,) ..) ) //)
00
!
$
! .. !
%&!() !
*@,
1 1 %! 2
,
1 1 %! 2
,
3#
" ! %&" #
! () !
+,
4
!
" 2 % #1 ,
515
6
7!
8
$
51! 51! 2 % #1 9
,
515
6
7!
8
$
!
6
4
6
7
! ! #
#
%&"
9
() !
+,
1 1 %4
6
,
1 1 %"
6
,
#
'
#
#
%&"
() !
+,
$
&"
6
( :
#
#
#
! #
$
&4
6
( :
#
#
#
#
! #
#
B
!
#
/+
!"
#
6 2 %&
'
( )
**
$$
7 - %8 ''$9!!(/ 0 !! + , !
(( 0 ! ((
3 0(!%(( !6
30(2!%()( !6
30(2!%($( !6
%
2 !
-/
3 ,
') ")
') ")
% ! -E/ -E/ !
-E/ ? -E/
-%/ !>
!
3#
"! 6
! ! #1! 6
&( 4
6
2!
! #1! -)
"
3
)
"
3
* $
* 3 :
$(
-)
"
3
3 * $
)
"
3
-C/ & -C/ -2 #
/ 0$'
2 2 2 )0 & "!0! -2 % 4 / '$
2 !
%
+
%
30(@30(2 !
! 1 5 0
! # 5 0"
! 1, 5 0"$
! 5 0'(
!
7
# $ % !
& ' !
)
* + , - .!
/ 0$
1 5
# ! <
$ ! # ! % ,
$
! $: . /+
!: . /0+
1 1 %
,
1 1 %
,
" !
$
!
1 1 %
, 1 1 % ,
"
"
# ! 2
%&4
"
5 () !
*,
="B
6!
" % #1 9
,
515
6
7!
8
$
C 6!
" !
% #1 ,
6!
" !
!
% #1 , %
1
1 &" !(,
515
6
7!
8
$
515
6
7!
8
$
!
D
#
'
" E
#
#
#
9
#
!
#
%&7
! !
() !
*,
1 1 %
!
,
1 1 % !
,
&" E( ) >9/9. &
2 %2
",( %!
+/,
++E %
++E ! &#
'( &D
(,
#
'
#
#
1
++E !
"
!
#
#
++E 6!
: + @@@
D
1
++E !
"
!
++E %
: ++,
6!
: ./>/0/0 ./>/0/>
! ,
! !
+E %
+E ! &#
'( &D
(,
#
'
#
#
1
+E !
"
!
#
#
+E 6!
: + @@@
D
1
+E !
"
!
+E %
: +,
6!
: ./>/0/0 ./>/0/>
++E %
9++E ! &#
'( &D
(,
#
'
#
#
1
++E !
"
!
#
#
++E 6!
: + @@@
D
1
++E !
"
!
++E %
: ++,
6!
: ./>/0/0 ./>/0/>
A ++E ) +E ) ++E !
:
++E F +E F ++E '
&#
'( &D
( #
) # &#
'( &D
( ! #
A. 4 #
#
#1! !
.
A7 , , - %/B
!"
0, ) ) ,) ,
",
#
!
",
/+
9 7
", ) 8 /+ : 7 ,"
7 ,"
A7 , , - %/B
F -(F/ -F/ -(F/
!"
0, ) ) ,) ,
",
!
",
/+
9 #
7
", ) /+ : 7 ,"
7 ,"
7 ,"
-/ , , -
%/
&=(:
# ! &"(:
# ! &B
(:
# ! &6!(:
# ! !
4 -F/ ! 7 -F/ , , - %/*
5 <
GFH
G(FH GFH
(
! 7 A -F/*
5 <
GFH
GFH G(FH
(
( 7 - %/ ! 3 , ,*
F - F/ ! 2, ,*
7 (F 999F
- %/ ! 3 , ,*
-&/*
A7 B
!
",
6667
7 ,"
7 ," ;
,) )< "
A7 B
!
",
6667
7 ,"
== ",
7 ," ;
,) )< "
! 2, ,*
, , 0 7 (F
- %/*
! 3 , ,* -IIIF/
! 2, ,*
-IIIIF/
1 -C/ & -C/ -2 #
/ 00
1 1 1 -%/
& -%/ -2 #
/ 00
& "!0!( -3
4 / "'
1 %
+ %
!! !
# 7
# $ & ' !
)
* + , - ./ 5 0$
#
!
5
!
!
<
6
+ .+
$
! 1 1 %
,
1 1 %
,
" % #1 ,
515
6
7!
8
$
" !
$
!
1 1 %
, 1 1 % ,
"
"
2
% &4
!
() !
>,
199
3991
G
99
"
"
!
2
+E " #
+E
$ 6
7
+ ++E %
!! ++E,
"
$
1 1 %
,
1 1 %
,
"
+ *+E %
!! ++E,
++EHI B
!
!
+ +E %
!! ++E,
++EH
! " #
#
.+
% #1 ,
515
6
7!
8
$
7
!
! %
, % #1 ,
515
6
7!
8
$
51! 51! !
% #1
,
515
6
7!
8
$
C6!
" !
% #1 ,
515
6
7!
8
$
996!
" !
!
% #1 , %
1
1 (" !(,
515
6
7!
8
$
!
D
#
'
" E
#
#
#
#
!
#
%&7
! !
() !
>.,
1 1 %
!
,
1 1 % !
,
&" E( ) >9/9. &
2
%2
",( %!
+/,
++E A %
++E ! &#
'( &D
(,
#
'
#
#
1 ++E !
"
!
#
#
++E 6!
:
+ @@@
D
1 ++E !
"
!
++E %
:
++,
6!
:
9./>/0/0 ./>/0/>
+E A %
+E ! &#
'( &D
(,
#
'
#
#
1 +E !
"
!
#
#
+E 6!
:
+ @@@
D
1 +E !
"
!
+E %
: +,
6!
:
9./>/0/0 ./>/0/>
9++E A %
9++E ! &#
'( &D
(,
#
'
#
#
1 99++E !
"
!
#
#
99++E 6!
:
+ @@@
D
1 99++E !
"
!
99++E %
:
99++,
6!
:
9./>/0/0 ./>/0/>
A 99++E ) +E ) ++E !
: !(F FF A(F 6 !
, ! ,
! .
A6B .
:
A7 , , - %/B
!"
4,,
)
", "
,) ,
>
", !
", 7
7
/+
9=5"
7
?"
/+ :=5"
A7 , , - %/B
!"
4,,
)
", "
,) ,
!
>
",
8
", 7
7
/+
9=5"
= ", ?"
/+ :=5"
-4 %/ - / -4 / +E 9
G
+E # 9
4 #
$ !: +E "
!
,
! %
,:
1
H
+E 3991
H
+E ! %5 !
,
$ !: +E %"
!
,
! %
,:
1
H +E 3991
H
+E ! %5 !
,
4 /F/ 7 -F/ , , -!
%/*
5 <
! GFH
G(FH ! GFH
(
7 A-F/*
5 <
! GFH
GFH ! G!(FH
(
%
2
7 - %/ 83 -
%/ F (F !!(F
! 7 (F (F
! 7 !!(F !!(F
7 - %/ 8&& F (F ! 7 F F
! 7 (F (F
8 %!!2 J
7 - %/ 83 F (F !!(F
7 - %/ 8&& F (F
& -3/ -&/ (F !!(F -&/
-&/ 8&& ( !
*
F 5 F @A
@#A
>
", >
", 7
7
- "
= ",
=7 7
8
",
- "
8
",
= ",
=7 7
=7 7
!! 7 .
% F F (F (F (F !!
(F 7 !!
% % E
% F (F
% ($F *
% F !
(F
F
3 % $F
% (F
% ((F
% (F % ( ((F *
% F (F
3 * % (F
% -3 / K( # - %/ 83 !( F (F !( (F !
3 6 3 <
.", / 1 " B##
-
') ?"
.", / 1 " B
/ )
-
') / "
?"
/ )
/ "
#
-C/ !
& -C/ -2 #
/ 0"
#
#
1, , !
, , ++E
+E
++E
)" 5,C ) 2" " ", ) ) " 7 , (F F (F , + !
8 , % !
& ' ' !
, $
, % , * + , - ./ 0$
$( , 1, , !
5
%
,
! <
$ ! #1
! % ,
$: . /+ !: . /0+
$
! 1 1 %
,
1 1 %
,
" !
$
!
1 1 %
, 1 1 % ,
"
"
#
#1
! %
#
!
#
,
%&"
#1
!() !
>@,
="B
6!
" % #1 9
,
C 6!
" !
% #1 ,
515
6
7!
8
$
515
6
7!
8
$
6!
" !
!
% #1 , %
1
1 &" !(,
515
6
7!
8
$
! %
#1
,
#
' #
#
#
#1
#
#1
%
#
2,
6!
: + @@0
6!
: . *.
4
4
#
#
#1
'
=
% <
, %+ <
#1
! &"
( ,
B
" #1
% #1 ,
515
6
7!
8
$
B
#1
!
:
51
:
9 :
.9 :
! %
#1
,
++E %
++E ! &#
'( &D
(,
#
'
#
#
1
++E !
"
!
#
#
++E 6!
: + @@@
D
1
++E !
"
!
++E %
: ++,
6!
: ./>/0/0 ./>/0/>
+E
%
+E ! &#
'( &D
(,
#
'
#
#
1
+E !
"
!
#
#
+E 6!
: + @@@
D
1
+E !
"
!
+E %
: +,
6!
: ./>/0/0 ./>/0/>
++E
%
99++E ! &#
'( &D
(,
#
'
#
#
1
++E !
"
!
#
#
++E D
1
++E !
6!
: + @@@
"
!
++E %
: ++,
6!
: ./>/0/0 ./>/0/>
A $
1! !) #
' 2
2 #
A. ++E ) +E ) ++E !
:
++E F +E F ++E &#
'( &D
( #
) #
&#
'( &D
( ! #
, , ( - / -, / -(! / -! / .
A7 , , - %/B
!"
0, ) ) ,)
#
7 ,"
", ) 8 /+
9 D C "
7 ,"
2 2"
",
/+
: A7 , , - %/B
F -(F/ -F/ -(F/
!"
0, ) ) ,)
#
7 ,"
", 8 D C ,
/+
9 7 ,"
", 2 2"
",
7 ,"
/+ : , , -!
/ -/ , !
!
(F -/ -/ &=(
# &"(
#
&B
(
! &6!(
!
3
!
, $( ( :
7 -3 5/
#>
:
7 -6/ - / , 1, 4 -F/ + , ! 7 -F/ , , - %/*
5 <
GFH
G(FH GFH
(
! 7 A -F/*
5 <
GFH
GFH G(FH
(
, , ( 7 - %/ ! 3 , ,* F
! 2, ,*
7 (F
(F , (F !
++E
+E
E" " )"
",
++E
& , -C!
/ , -%/ & -C/ -%/
-2 #
/ 0"
7 , 7 , L8. $$ :
,
1, 1, 1, -%/ , & -%/ , -2 #
/ 0"
& "!0!( -3
4 / "'
1, %
+ %
* - / 7 (F F (F !
5 , , -
/ -,
/
8 % & ' ' $ ,
$ , % !
!
* + !
, !
- ./ 0$
, , !
, , !
,= 5
! <
$ ! ! % ,
$: . /+ !: . /0+
"
7
! %&B
! () !
00,
"!
$
4
#
! %&"! () !
0>,
6
$
! 1 1 %
,
1 1 %
,
" !
$
!
1 1 %
, 1 1 % ,
"
"
! %&B
! () !
00,
=
!
:
"
! ! :
"
!
%
, ! %! !,
6!
: +* *** +* %* *** % +, J #
*,
" % #1 9
,
C 6!
" !
% #1 ,
6!
" !
!
% #1 , %
1
1 &" !(,
515
6
7!
8
$
515
6
7!
8
$
515
6
7!
8
$
! %
,
#
'
#
#
6!
: + @@@
" E
#
!
#
%&7
! !
() !
[email protected],
1 1 %
!
,
1 1 % !
,
&" E( ) >9/9. &
2
%2
",( %!
+/,
B
" % #1 ,
515
6
7!
8
$
B
:
51
:
9 :
.9 :
++E
%
++E ! &#
'( &D
(,
#
'
#
#
1
++E !
%
1 1 &" E(,
"
!
#
#
++E 6!
: + @@@
D
1
++E !
%
1 1 &" E(,
"
!
++E %
: ++,
6!
: ./>/0/0 ./>/0/>
! %
,
+E %
+E ! &#
'( &D
(,
#
'
#
#
1
+E !
%
1 1 &" E(,
"
!
#
#
+E 6!
: + @@@
D
1
+E !
%
1 1 &" E(,
"
!
+E %
: +,
6!
: ./>/0/0 ./>/0/>
++E
%
9++E ! &#
'( &D
(,
#
'
#
#
1
++E !
%
1 1 &" E(,
"
!
#
#
++E D
1
++E !
%
1 1 &" E(,
"
!
++E %
: ++,
6!
: + @@@
6!
: ./>/0/0 ./>/0/>
B!!!
" B!!!
$
!!! %&" !!!
#1! () !
@+,
1 1 %!!! ,
1 1 %!!! ,
51! $
#1! %&" !!!
#1! () !
@+,
1 1 %#1! ,
1 1 %#1! ,
#
2
!
1 1 % ,
1 1 % ,
6
#
!
1 1 % ,
1 1 % ,
B!
#
!!! 1 1 % ,
1 1 % ,
B!!!
" #
!
1 1 % ,
1 1 % ,
"
#
!
1 1 % ,
1 1 % ,
#
!
1 1 % ,
1 1 % ,
A ++E ) +E ) ++E !
:
++E F +E F ++E '
&#
'( &D
( #
) # &#
'( &D
( ! #
A. ! !!! , ( ! - / -, / -(! /
-! / ! -(F/ -F/ -(F/ - 6/ !
6*
++E
-" ) ) 7 2
) ,
)
)
,) ",
+E
# 6 )) ) ,) " ",
37
$7
!
2 ) " 0) ")" ) ,) ",
AC B
-C/ !
A5 B
, , - F/ -%/ !
- F/ ? -%/ /!
#
/
A
B
7 !
-
% &
/ = ? .
A7 , , - %/B
!"
0, ) )
,)C ,
",C ) ")"
#
7 ,"
", ) 8 /+
9 D C "
D C "
7 ,"
/+ : A7 , , - %/B
F -(F/ -F/ -(F/
!"
0, ) )
,)C ,
",C ) ")"
#
/+ : 7 ,"
", 8 D C ,
7 ,"
/+
9 D C ,
", 7 ,"
!
)
E -/
-/
(F -/ -/ A7 -%/ -/B
7 !
-/ -/ 7 !
< D" 0 "
C )
0*F0*
- " )
" < D" < D" < D" < D" 0)
C )
0*F0*
" ) " ) " -/ &=(:
! &B
(:
! &"(:
! &6!(:
! !
A7 -5 ./ -/B
7 # -/ !
7 -/ 7 < D" 0 "
C )
0*F0*
- " )
" < D" < D" < D" < D" 0) "
,
""2
C "
"
-/ &"(:
&=(:
&B
(:
&6!(:
!
4 -F/ ! 7 -F/ , , /!
%/*
5 <
GFH
G(FH GFH
(
! 7 A -F/*
5 <
GFH
GFH G(FH
(
( 7 - %/*
! 3 , ,*
F - F/ ! 2, ,*
7 (F 999F
( 999F ( 999F
> , , - F/ ++E
D" 37
+E
D" *7
++E
0 7 (F
(F (F
> , , - F/ ! -F/
,
!
3 , , 7 30(@30(2 ' :
())
-2 E/ ,
D
1 ,
!
, , ,
>
+!
,
30(@30(2 ! 30(@30(2 8&&
! 30(@30(2 ! # ! 7 % 4
!
,
= !
,
A7 ,
B
/
")
?
0
,) "
B)
"
0
,) "
,) "
"
,
A7 ,
B
/
")
0
,) "
,
?
B)
"
0
,) "
)" ,
,
A7 ,
B
/
")
0
,) "
?
B)
"
0
,) "
,
2 !
+
? , -%/ % D 7 -/ 7 ,
-/ ,
7 !
# -./ . -/ D -/ %5
2E.
- / E8C
2E.
-E / 2 !
2 # !
!
-5
/ 7 ,, -
/ -3 / 7 -
/ - / @ @ -./ -/ G* %H
, ",
B"
!
2" , 5 , D"
G* 5 .H
, ",
5 , D"
!
2" , B"
7 7 !
! % , ",
D" ",
D" ! 5 7 , ",
D" ",
D" & -C/ !
, -%/ & -C/ -%/
-2 #
/ 0'
7 , 7 , L8. $$ :
,
-%/ & -%/ -2 #
/ 0'
& "!0!( -3
4 / "'
%
+ %
!"# ! # $ % $
$ % #
! "
&
' '( % '
!"# " ! # $ % $
& ' "(( $
$ % - )
*+ ,*,
*+ ,,
&
' '( % '
) "(( $
*
' $ ( + ,
! -.#$
/ $
"
!
#
$ %!
&
! ' (
!
) *'$+ !
!
! ,- (
!
'
!
&
$ (
! ' (
"
) *'$+ *
$&/0)1$&/0)"+
! ,- (
' ) *'$+ -
.
* - +
" $
& $ & $
& 0 $ ' & $ 1 $
1 $ *
0$ /$ 2
$
) 3 !"((# $
) ' 3 !"((# $
2
4 2 $
!# *
!"# $
% % . / 01 % . /' ( ' % /
% % '( '
. . % '
2-344 45223"
& 53- 5 6 73-#3 58
!-# 5
$ ' '$
'
% 2-344 45223"
& 53- 5 6 73-#3 58
,2&
2 '' %/
: "$
5 ' %
/ . &
'
'( '
' 5 ' ' 9
9
!# ) ' ' $
'
2-344 45223"
& 53- 5 6 73-#3 58
2#34$&
' '
.
/ #( %
' ( '
. '
: ;
!.# *
' ' $
) ' ' $ $
& 1
5
,
$ $ $ $ $ 5
6
$ 1
$ 1
5
. $ !4 # ) ' 6 % .$
% -. $
$333$
!*
333 #
% -7 -77 1$
*
% $ % -7 $ ( ' 6 % 3-.$
) 8 $ ) $
) $
$
*
*
"((
" $
2 ' $
$ / ' $
$
9
3
.
"
1
7
1
*
+
*8 !
!
7 +
%
#( ) 9:
, -
#
; %
#( ) <9
*4 0=>+
)) *4-+ )< *
+ <) * + << 00 99
??
<< *
0=>+
"@ @ *
%+1
$ @ @ *
%+
&
.1 "@ @ * +1
$ @ @ * +
. &
.1 "@ @ * +1
$ @ @ * +
3
"
,
" * @ !
$&/0)" +
[email protected]#1131"1A1 [email protected]
'$
'$ * @ $&/0)" +
[email protected]#1131"1A1 ',,
',, * @ $&/0)" +
[email protected]#1131"1A1 B .1 "@ @ *+1$ @ @ *+
"
,
, *5
< " +
* @ $&/0)" +
[email protected]#1131"1A1 [email protected]
[email protected] 1
* @ $&/0)" +
[email protected]#1131"1A1 1
& *& +
#
$
! " ' %&%"" : ) $
$
0' : $
( ; , 2
! -6<#$
' $
9
8
&
4
,
#( : )>>>
$ 8
#
$ #( ) ):::
( <
+
=
*
" ) *+
& ) +
/ % = $
( = ! .33#$
$ ( ; , 2 ! -6<#$
' $
9
.1 1
- *
- -+
"@ @ *+1$ @ @ *+
' &
& -1 &
*
!
5 ' &
@ @ +
A11 (
A11 (
*)= +
1 (
1 (
*)< +
(
(
*/ +
/ =
4 $
,
& "- . "-)
/ . ! )) 0+ . , ))
0* . 1))
2 ( = ! .33#$
$ ( ; , 2 ! -6<#$
( 1 $
) !"# $ ' & $ 0'
!"# $
/ *
$
*
*
!"#
& 3
!"((# !
#$
>*
?
) ! # $
) $
>*
?
) ! # $
) % $
) !
# $ !( % ' ; ;$#
*
!"# !
#$
*
& 3 !"((# $
) !"# ' $
>/ ?
4 $ 0' ' '
$
>/ ?
$ *
$
1 *
1 !"# !"# 1 $ *
& 3 !"((# 1 $
) 1 $
1 $ !
# $
@
$
2 *
!
#$ & $
@ *
' $ & $
9 ) ' $ & $
!:# $
4 2 2 2 )$
4 2$
0 4 ! :# 9 !"#$
' $
( ; , 2
! -6<#$
' $
' $
$ $ ( ; , 2 !
-6<#$
' 4 $
0' ' 4 $
& ' $
' $
' % $
" & $
!# ' $
$&/0)1$&/0)"
& 3
-.
<
+ = *
3
4
5
!-# " ' 5 & $
' 9 $
$&/0)1$&/0)" $&/0)1$&/0)"
-.
<
+ = *
# -.
&
1
&
% 4 3
5
% -7 ! $ 5
& #$ 5' ' $
! & #
!
#
A %$ 0' & / +
! 7#$
) !
& # $
) ' %
$
' 4 !,/ , # / !/
0% # / 4 $ ( ; 2 ! -;6#$
) ! & # $
' $
9
3
.
"
, &
, 1 1
5 *4
0=:+
)) *4-+ )< *
+ <) * + << 00 99
??
<< *
0=:+
"@ @ *
%+1
$ @ @ *
%+
*
0=:+
1,15 ,
"
,
* @ $&/0)" +
[email protected]#1131"1A1 [email protected]
[email protected] * @
$&/0)" +
[email protected]#1131"1A1 & 4
$ 5 #( : )>>>
&
5 * 5
9))+
1%
, *$ 9))+
$ 5
#( ) ):
$ 5
#( : >
%
): *21 *%1
+ @ 9)9+
%
2 5 5 C 7 *C
0=<+
"@ @ *7 +1
$ @ @ *7 +
5 *
5 %
,+ * 5 9))+
"@ @ *
5 +1
$ @ @ *
5 +
, ,
.1 "@ @ * +1
$ @ @ * +
, 5 *
0=:+
151,15 ,
" (4 $ ' / $ $
' ) / $
/ -.7
4 ) B 6C / B 3A
+ A 33-.7
4 ) B .C / B .A
+ A 33-$.7
4 ) B - / B .A
+ A -$.7
4 ) B / B .A
+ A ( % $
) ' ' ' $
/ !/ 0% #
/ 4 !
' ' #
D' / E
' / $
/ A
' ' $
0% A
' % $
' $
D9 E
/ / 4 % $
&
%
.
#
2
: <)9D9?0/9DE
<)9D9?0/9? <)9D9?0/9D
6
: ,,,,,,,,
*
4 * ' $ $ ) ' & ' $
&
&
)
%
8"
<
%
)
%
8
<
%
E
.
#
2
: >>>>
>>> >>>>
6
,")> ,,,, *
5 +
: <D:, *
5 +
2
: >>>>>>>>
>>>>>>> >>>>>>>>
6
,,/D/>?) ,,,,,,,,
*
5 +
: =,=4:,, *
5 +
2
: 0<D/D
0<D/? 0<D/D
6
: ,,,,
2
: <)9D9?0/9D
<)9D9?0/9? <)9D9?0/9D
6
: ,,,,,,,,
$ 5 5 5 5 0<D/? <)9D9?0/9? D+
' E
*
' ' ' % / / 4 * 4 $ * 4
!,/ , #$
3
& 3
6
7 99999/#*
0 0*8/
999999;(
0 90*8
99999/#*
* 99990*8/
99999/#*
0 0*8/
""""""<+
0 0*8/
"""""(*=
* "9990*8/
99999/#*
99999/#*
0 0*8/
""""""<+
0 "0*8
"""""(*=
* "9990*8/
99990*8/
0 0*8/
9"""=#77
* 9"""=#77
99990*8/
0 0*8/
""""<999
9999<999A
0 *2</89;@2
"9990*8/
* 0*8/
99990*8/
0 0*8/
"""""0*8
9999"0*8A
0 "0*8
"9990*8/
* "9990*8/
#
0*8/
0*8
0*8/
0*8/
:
#
0*8
""""""<+ 1>
?
"""""(*=
/229
:
*2</89;@2
/229
#
8*;2<
"0*8 1>
"9990*8/
E
?
(7#
"0*8
<999
(
"9990*8/
& 5 5 0<!
5 5 *
4 ,/ !
% #
' !,/ # $
) ' ' ( $ % ' ! F
# '$
*
4 , $
0' ' ' $
*
1 ' - ' ' $
G !%$$# &
& ' ' ' ' ' $
( & & % '$ ) ' :: ' !
#$
!
*
' &$
' = $
( = ! .3<#$
' & $
' C ' % !
' #$
0' ' ' 9 $
*
' ' 4 $
( ' 4 ! .3<#$
! .6# ' $
( ' ; 2 ! -;6#$
) 1 $ ) ' ! 737#$
' 4 $ 0'
' 4 $
'
$
' ' & ' $
' % $
" $
!# ' !F # $
&280&2807
0*8/
BBBB
CD 4 5
CBD 4 5
!-# 5
' ' 9 $
&280&2807
0*8/
BBBB
# -.
&
1
&
= CBD CD 4 3
5
% -7 ! * #$ 5' ' $
! & #
!
#
A %$ 0' & / +
! 7#$
) !
& # $
) ' %
$
' 4 !,/ , # / !/
0% # / 4 $ ( ; 2 ! -;6#$
) ! & # $
' $
9
3
.
"
7
7 1
1
4 .
.1 "@ @ * +1
$ @ @ * +
*
0=:+
1,15 ,
& "
,
" *
@ $&/0)" +
[email protected]#1131"1A1 ,
, *
@ $&/0)" +
[email protected]#1131"1A1 [email protected]
[email protected] *
@ $&/0)" +
[email protected]#1131"1A1 " "
,
* @ $&/0)" +
[email protected]#1131"1A1 [email protected]
[email protected] * @
$&/0)" +
[email protected]#1131"1A1 & 4
$ 5 #( : )>>>
&
5 * 5
9)?+
1%
, *$ 9)?+
$ 5
#( ) ):
$ 5
#( : >
%
): *21 *%1
+ @ 9<)+
%
2 5 5 5 *
5 %
,+ * 5 9)?+
"@ @ *
5 +1
$ @ @ *
5 +
% '/ % %/
:/
% '
2
) :/
% /
3 3 3 3 3 3 $ 3 3 3
4
'
/ % '
" '
3
'
/ % %
5 :$ : -- & !-3-3 # $
,
- .
/ #
& @ ,
# 5 ,
# % @
$ ' / $ $
% 3 $ $
' ) / $
/ -.7
4 ) B 6C / B 3A
+ A 33-.7
4 ) B .C / B .A
+ A 33-$.7
4 ) B - / B .A
+ A -$.7
4 ) B / B .A
+ A ) ' ' ' $
/ !/ 0% #
/ 4 !
' ' #
D' / E
' / !
%# / 4
!
' ' $#$
/A
' ' $
0%A
' % $
' $
D) ' %E
/ / 4 % $
&
%
.
#
2
: <)9D9?0/9D
<)9D9?0/9? <)9D9?0/9D
6
: ,,,,,,,,
*
4 * ' $ $ ) ' & ' $
&
&
)
%
8"
<
%
)
%
8
<
%
E
.
#
2
: >>>>
>>> >>>>
6
,")> ,,,, *
5 +
: <D:, *
5 +
2
: >>>>>>>>
>>>>>>> >>>>>>>>
6
,,/D/>?) ,,,,,,,,
*
5 +
: =,=4:,, *
5 +
2
: 0<D/D
0<D/? 0<D/D
6
: ,,,,
2
: <)9D9?0/9D
<)9D9?0/9? <)9D9?0/9D
6
: ,,,,,,,,
$ 5 5 5 5 0<D/? <)9D9?0/9? *
4 ,/ !
% #
' !,/ # $
) ' ' ( $ % ' ! F
# '$
*
4 , $
G !%$$# &
& ' ' ' ' ' $
!%$$# & % $
( & % & $
*
$$$ D $$$ > A
$$$ A 3$$$ ! ' #? ' $
) ' ' -33 -3 '
' A -3 <<< ' ' 333 -33 ' .
'$
!%$$# & ' 3 3$
' ' $$$ $$$ ' ' ' $
!
*
' &$
' = $
( = ! .#$
' F ' $
' C ' % !
' ' #$
0' ' ' 9 $
' $
! .6# ' $
( ' ; 2 ! -;6#$
' 4 $ 0'
' 4 $
$
$
, $
A $ *
4
2 !4 , + $ 4 $#
" $
!# ) $ % $
&280&2807
'/ %
"'
&2807
'/
!-# 5 & A !
#$
' 9 $
% $ * % 5 & & $
&280&2807
# &2807
&
&2807
7 1
% -7 ! * $ 5
& * #$ 5' ' $
! & #
!
#
A %$ 0' & / +
! 7#$
) $
$
!51#A G .3 - !0
#A
G .3 - !*#A G .3 --A
G .3 A
G - ..A
G -3 66A
G 3 2&$
2& ' 0 0
(
$ & & $
) 0 0
( 2& 2& $
) & & & ' $
) $
$
9
3
.
"
, &
, 1 *4
0=>+
)) *4-+ )< *
+ <) * + << 00 99
??
<< *
0=>+
"@ @ *
%+1
$ @ @ *
%+
% *
+
1,15 ,
"
,
% * @ !
$&/0)" +
[email protected]#1131"1A1 [email protected]
[email protected] % * @ $&/0)" +
[email protected]#1131"1A1 & 4
$ #( : )>>>
%
#( ) 9:
, ,
.1 "@ @ * +1
$ @ @ * +
, *
9</+
151,15 ,
" (4 ) % $
) $ ' $ & & & !,4 /[email protected] $# $
/ #
& @ ,
# 5 ,
# % @ = $
( = ! .-7#$
& H & H $
( . , + ! .#$
C ' % ! #$
0' ' 9 $
' $
! 7# $
( ;- 4 2 ! -67#$
) 1 $ ) ' 1 ! 7-#$
' 4 $ 0'
' 4 $
!" #
'
! #$ * ' $
9 $
!
' ! #$ ) : $ * $
% [email protected] $
#3!2
#3!2
&
. '
2 , & !
# & 1 ' $
'/ %
2 0
/1
) < 0
9 = /
&
. % /
2 01
8 "
4 ,
&
. % ) & & ' 1$ 5 & 5 ! # & &$
, & !
# $
$3?
$3?
&
08'1 '
2 &
0>1 '
$3?
$3?
1$
#$$
!"
2 &
. % %
'$
= $ 0' $
4 4 : !4 $<333#
5 9 !4 $<3-3#
!4 $ 3#
= ' $
!) ' $#
" $
= ' $ ( * ! -; #$
@ $ , $
G $ [email protected] @
-#
" ' $
4 ! $#
! && '
#
* $
) $ 0' $
"
*
$ ! - #
# $
%
G <<< ! #
*
: $ :$
) $ ' $
*
$
0' ! # $
, & & $
5 8 $
*
$
&
'() ' *
' * $
" *
4 $
, $ & $ ( 4 ! -7- #
&
.
'
4. #
" $ " & $
, $
& $
%& '()' *+) '(
&
. '
'
' ' $
&
. 9 / .
,
,
2 '
( ;; 4
$
) $
#
" $ " " *
I J ! # ' $
* $ ( 6. / * ! .;6#$
&280&2807
7
! .
. '
&
. &
. . )(
- )(
*
! .
. % ( *
+
#
, - 4: -3 $ !2 :A -3 -3#
) ' $ !/ ' -3 $#
5%A
'
"
2
,
,( / 0$
,( / 0$
.
)'
' ' - *
' $ ' ' $
' ' $
2'@/' .
.:
/ .
&
. '
&
. '
*
% $
.
. %
5 .
. ' > %
*
$ 0' $
*
% / .
5/ '
/ .
5 / .
. %
*
% / .
%
1
5/ / .
&
. / 5/ . %/
)/
' - *
9 9 $
* ! # $
& & $
( 6. / * ! .;6#$
0
1
$
!" $#
' $
' & $
/ '/ % 5' '/ % ' '/
<
+
/
+
= *
<
35
&
.
0' ' ! & # ! #$
) ! F F F # $
) $
2
1 ( ' ! # $ !) ' '
$#
*
$
$
*
' $
' $
*
'$
' ' $
5%A
5' '/ % '/ %
5' '/ % 1
5
3
4
2
&
. &
. &
. ) % ' - $ -$
) & ) & ) & ) & ) *
$
$
#
% $
/ 9 .
9 .<
+ 9 ..-
4 ' 9 ..
,:: 9 ...
& 9 ..
9 9 ..;
9 !% #
9 .73
$
+
$
3
4 1
' 1 $ & 4 2 $
" % & " $
!# >4 ?
*
4 0 $ ( ! # $ -. $
" 0 8 $
!-# >): ?
, : 4 2 $
!# >+ ?
" $
*
0 $
!.# >
& ?
/ & $
A 4
2 $
) ! # 1 ! 1 #$
0 $ ) 1 $
*
' $
, ! :# 9 : $
" & "
( 0 $
4 / & ' "(( $
' ! "
" 3-. $ 3-. % 4 !G + ,# 9 H 4
4 A $
) & & 4 !G + ,# & & $
(1 -77 1 $ 5' % -77 $
( "
& A & 2 $
/ ) 1 -<$ ' &$
) / $ $
" $
*
$
" 1
1 !
# $
& 2 4 2 4 2 $
( 4 2 . / 9
/ 0 + ! -7#$
& & $
4 $ <33A " 4 $ <33-A (1 +
4 <33 <33- ' $ $
5 3
4 1
' !"#$ $
& ' 4 2$
" % & " $
!# >4 ?
4 0
$ $
" 0 8 $ , 0 $
!-# >): ?
, : 4 2 $
!# >+ ?
" $
*
0 ' " $
!.# >
& ?
/ & $
A 4
2 $
) ! # 1 ! 1 #$
" & "
( !"#$
2 ! #
& ' "(( $
, ! :# 9 : $
' ! "
" -7 !# $ -7 % !G + ,# 9 H 4 4 A $
) & & !G + ,# & & ' $
(1 -77 1 $ 5' % -77 $
( "
& A & 2 $
2 $
/ $
" !# !"#$ *
$
(1 ' !"#$
& 2 4 2 4 2 $
( 4 2 7 / 9
0 + ! -;#$
*
& 2 & $
" (1 & & $
) $
0' $ ( ; @ 0 ! <#$" F
%
9292
02)9*
F
929;
[email protected])*0
7
3
920;
0+)//
" 74 %
E
(1 +"
7
3
00/
F
0+8
F
%
[email protected]
% 33 K
4) 4 5
3 #,22++)'0''
4 1
' ! # ' "(( % $ $
*
: "(( %
4 2$
% ' $ 0' : ' $
5' : % : 4 $
*
$ ( <3 4 + ( !
<<#$
*
' L ' " $
+
# #* 1
%: ' &
' &
$
) ! -. # $ ' ' $
' $
4 ' &
4 ' $ 3
!
#$ *
' &
$
!
/ &
$
$
!
!%$
-. #$
' ' $
) ' 7 ! # 9 $
"
" )
*
' ' ! &
& #$ ' $
) ) )$ *
' % $
( <; 4 4 4' 2'
! <.# <6 4 4 4' 4 ! <#$
++
6,, 1
:: $
*
:: $ :: $
"((A
:: ' $
5++ "A :: $
"A
:: $
( <. 4 ,:: 4 ! 6<#$
* +,,
:: $
::
,:: 4
::
,:: 3$7
$
@ ::
,:: $3
$
) :: 9 !
#$
!# ::
!-# 4
::
!# @ ::
( % :: :: :: $
)" +,,
5% :: :: $ ::$
4 :: :: 9 ! .7<#$
,:: , ,:: 4
:: ! .76#$
) +,,
*
:: $
, 9 ! .3#$
0' :: :: M M 3 !"((#$
, :: ! .3#$
, & :: ! .#$
, :: !
> ? & H
# :: :: $
+.
)/ 1
& $ & & $
*
' 1 & $
& & 4 $ 4 2 $
$
!
' *
%" ( $ -.; -77 & $
-.; -7 -7. -77 $
-.; -7 & &
$ $
$
,
1
1
F
<9D
:: =>
<9?
:: =>
<9>
:: <0 <9! <=:
:) 0)
<=)
:) )<
<=<
A
<=0
#@
:: >> < @ :: :/ <=9
# 1
1
,
<==
:: =>
:: =>
:: <0 <9! :) 0)
:) )<
A
G !
,
# 4
:: >> < @ :: :/
F
::
' & $
@
&
F
::
:)
:<
:0
4 %A 2
-; !(# <<6 .A7A3
+ * = &
,
:9
:=
:/
$ -.; -77 ' & $
) ( & $
4 4 2
/ & 4 2
& $ ( - /4 & ! -#$
+ -7. -77
-7. -77 & & ! -7. -77 #$ ( 63 / 4 & ! 7#$
+
7
1
$
!
#
/ ) ) $
A
A 5 9
9+-30 549 -.N6 !# 549
-.N6- !
# [email protected] 7$
9 A
*
$ *
%
6 ' ! # $ 0' $
*
[email protected] 7 ! #$
( <7 4 9 ! <# < 4 9 2
!
"# ! <-#$
) ' $
G *
$
*
$
( ;; 4
! -6#$
$
) $
2
9 *
! ;# 9 !"# $
( ;- 9 4 !0 #
! -3#$
$
, !"# ! ;# 9 3
!"((#$
*
% 9 $
9 %
& " & " 4 2$
$
4
9 $ 9 " $
A
" A
<33
(1 A
<33-
9 %
/ " &5
0
*
8
/
+
2
;
<
@
09
00
0*
08
0/
0
/
8
/
0
/
8
0
/
0
8
/
0
8
!!,,##
@<9**8
@<9**8
@<9**8
@<9**8
@<9**8
@<9**8
@<9**8
@<9**8
@<9**8
@<9**8
@<9**8
@<9**8
@<9**8
@<9**8
11),,
9<)/+
9<)/2
9<)/;
9<)/;
9<)/<
9<)+9
9<)+0
9<)++
[email protected])92
[email protected])9;
[email protected])9;
09)+9
09)+0
09)+*
7
00
(1 &5
0
*
8
0
/
8
75
0/
09
<
7
00
" &5
0
*
8
/
+
2
;
<
@
09
00
0*
08
0/
0+
7
6F=H F&I %G=H1=F&J
H%7= 8 %=#
H%7= 8 %=#
:! ,F=HF F
6F=H F&I %G=H1=F&J
6F=H F&I =,5 %% %6
6F=H F&I %G=H1=F&J
H%7= + =,=HJ=&7! %
=,5 %: %" =&J HF&J=
:! F(= F=H
:! ,F=HF F
=,5 %: %" =&J HF&J=
6F=H F&I =,5 %% %6
:! ,F=HF F
=,5 %: %" =&J HF&J=
!!,,##
@<9***
@<9***
@<9***
@<9***
@<9***
@<9***
@<9***
@<9***
@<9***
@<9***
@<9***
@<9***
@<9***
@<9***
@<9***
11),,
08)9+
08)92
08)9<
08)[email protected]
08)09
08)0*
08)0+
08)*9
08)*0
0+)/*
0+)/*
0+)/+
0+)/@
0+)+*
0+)+;
00
(1 &5
0
*
8
/
+
2
;
<
@
09
+0
7
6F=H F&I %G=H1=F&J
6F=H F&I =,5 %% %6
H%7= 8 %=#
=,5 %: %" =&J HF&J=
:! ,F=HF F
H%7= + =,=HJ=&7! %
:! F(= F=H
:! ,F=HF (
H%7= * %=#
H%7= 0 %=#
75
0+
0/
09
<
;
;
2
+
0
0
00
7'
' ) 1
%8 1
% !
-3309+"-;5# 4) 4=40 92 !92# O2 -330I0=05P5$
2 % !# !# $
( 9 - 9 ( ! -;#$
9 ' [email protected] $
' $ !+G @5/ "((#
9 O 8 $
[email protected] [email protected]$
%
&' (
9 4 $
9 $ 0'
4 $ ( 4 Q$ $3 *<7 "
2 !Q375#$
.
7 )-
'
#
'
9 $
>9 2?
4 9 $ !+ 6 4 9
! <-#
>[email protected] Q?
4 "2+"
2
2
(I
[email protected])R
>( ?
4 $
'$
9.;
)4" 667<
>?
4 $ $
>9 9 ?
4 9 9 $ + ;- ! -3#$
>) 4?
4 $ 0' 9
$ ( (
9 4 ! -#$
>0 4?
4 $ + !
-<#$
> 5?
4 $ ( ;
2 ! -;6#$
> 4 ?
4 ,/ $ 0' ' ' 4 4 $ ( ; 2 ! -;6#$
SECTION 8
How to Use the PT
This section describes how to use the functions provided by the PT.
8-1
8-2
Screen Creation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buzzer, Backlight, and Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-1 Sounding the Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-2 Stopping the Buzzer Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-3 Controlling the Backlight (for NT631C only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-4 Turning off the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-5 Redisplaying the Turned-off Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3 Screen Display and Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-1 Switching the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-2 Finding the Screen Number of the Presently Displayed Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4 Display and Control of Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-1 Opening/Closing/Moving a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-2 Checking the display status of a window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-3 Disabling/Enabling the Opening of a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5 Changing Numeral and Character String Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-1 Changing Numeric Values and Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6 Display of Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6-1 Changing the Trend Graph Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-7 Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-7-1 Inputting a Numeric Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-7-2 Inputting Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-8 Using the Alarm List/History Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-8-1 How to Use the Alarm List/History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-9 Using the Display History Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-9-1 How to Use the Display History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-10 Display and Setting of Calendar Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-10-1 Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-10-2 Displaying the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-11 Printing Data and Checking the Printer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-11-1 Printing the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-12 Enabling/Disabling PT Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-12-1 Enabling and Disabling the Operation of the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
454
456
456
458
460
462
464
467
467
473
476
476
482
485
486
486
502
502
503
503
519
523
523
528
528
531
532
536
539
540
543
543
455
Section 8-1
Screen Creation Procedure
8-1
Screen Creation Procedure
Follow the procedure shown below to create screens for the NT631/NT631C.
The following gives the procedure assuming that the setting for the
NT631/NT631C has been completed. The operating procedure for a Support Tool
is not given here. For the operating procedure for the Support Tool, refer to the
NT-series Support Tool Ver. 3.0 for Windows95 Operation Manual (V053-E1-j).
[Creating a New Screen]
Tool Setting (for PT Type)
[Correcting an Existing File]
[Importing DOS Version Data]
File Designation
File Designation
Set “NT631” for creating a screen for NT631, Designate a work file.
and “NT631C” for NT631C.
NT-series Support Tool
Designate the work file to be data converted.
NT-series Support Tool
System Setting (Memory Switch Setting)
Set the memory switches that determine the
basic operation of the NT631/NT631C.
The numeral/character string/bit memory table
settings should also be made at this stage.
Setting for PT Status Control/Notify Area
Allocate the PT status control area and PT
status notify area, necessary for the direct
connection function, to words at the host.
For details, refer to 7-2 “Areas for
Control/Notification” (page 260).
Reference
456
If is not necessary to allocate words to window control area, when the window is
not used or when the window is not controlled from the host.
Section 8-1
Screen Creation Procedure
Creating and Correcting a Screen
After designating a screen, set the screen properties
and register elements for the screen or correct the
screen. If necessary, create marks, image data, and
library data, and set the initial values of memory tables.
For details of screens and elements, refer to SECTION
7 “NT631/NT631C Functions”.
Saving a File
Save the created screen data to a file.
Transmitting the Screen Data
Transmit the created screen data to the
NT631/NT631C. After setting the NT631/NT631C in
the Transmit mode, execute the screen data
transmission operation with the Support Tool.
NT631/NT631
C
Support Tool
457
Buzzer, Backlight, and Display Control
8-2
Section 8-2
Buzzer, Backlight, and Display Control
The procedure for controlling the PT status including sounding the buzzer, backlight ON/OFF status, and turning ON/OFF the screen display is described below.
8-2-1
Sounding the Buzzer
The NT631/NT631C provides the following three types of buzzer sounds.
- Continuous sound
The buzzer sounds continuously.
- Short intermittent sound
The buzzer sounds intermittently at 0.5 second intervals.
- Long intermittent sound
The buzzer sounds intermittently at 1 second intervals.
With the NT631/NT631C, the following two methods are used for sounding the
buzzer.
- Displaying a screen for which the buzzer attribute is set
- Using a PT status control area operation
Reference
Whether or not the buzzer actually sounds depends on the setting of the memory
switch in the NT631/NT631C. The memory switch has the following three setting
positions.
- OFF:
The buzzer never sounds.
- ERR ON: The buzzer only sounds when an NT631/NT631C error occurs.
- ON:
The buzzer sounds in response to instructions from the host and
screen attributes and when an error occurs.
To control the buzzer, set the memory switch at “ON”. For details, refer to 7-15-5
“Buzzer Function” (page 444).
Sounding the Buzzer by Displaying a Screen for Which the Buzzer Attribute Is Set
If this method is used, the buzzer sounds automatically when a specific screen is
displayed.
[Setting]
When creating a screen using the Support Tool, set any of the following buzzer
attributes for the screen. Nothing is set in the default setting.
- Continuous
- Short beep
- Long beep
458
Section 8-2
Buzzer, Backlight, and Display Control
[Operation]
When the screen where the buzzer attribute has been set is displayed during the
operation of the NT631/NT631C, the buzzer sounds automatically according to
the setting. For the procedure for changing the screen, refer to 8-3-1 “Switching
the Screen” (page 469).
Sounding the Buzzer by the Operation at the Status Control Area
This method allows the operator to sound the buzzer at any required time.
NT631/NT631C
PC
PT status control area
Screen switch setting
Buzzer sounds
Copy memory
table setting
PT status control setting
← Control data
Reserved for system use
[Setting]
The PT status control area must be allocated to a word in the host and, accordingly, there are no special settings required for the control of buzzer.
[Operation]
The bit for controlling the PT status (PT status control bit) is provided at the fourth
word (n + 3 words) from the beginning of the PT status control area.
15
14
13
12
11
10
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
0
Controlled Item
1 (ON)
0 (OFF)
15
Screen display
Performed
Not performed
14
Processing priority registration (for NT link (1:N))
Registered
Canceled
13
Continuous buzzer
Sounded
Stopped
12
Intermittent buzzer (short)
Sounded
Stopped
Performed
11
Display history initialization
10
Not used
Not performed
9
Intermittent buzzer (long)
Sounded
Stopped
8
Backlight mode
Lit
Flashing
7
Screen printing
Performed
Not performed
6
PT window opening
Disabled
Enabled
5
Numeral/character string input
Disabled
Enabled
4
PT screen switching
3
Memory table copy execution
2
Memory table copy type
1
Alarm history initialization
0
Not used
Always “0”
Disabled
Enabled
Performed
Not performed
Numeral
Character string
Performed
Not performed
Always “0”
459
Section 8-2
Buzzer, Backlight, and Display Control
To sound the buzzer during the operation of the NT631/NT631C, operate the PT
status control area as indicated below.
(1) Set “1” (ON) for the following bit in the fourth word (n + 3 words) from the beginning of the PT status control area according to the required buzzer sound.
- Continuous sound:
Bit 13
- Short intermittent sound: Bit 12
- Long intermittent sound:
8-2-2
Bit 9
Stopping the Buzzer Sound
With the NT631/NT631C, the following three methods are used for stopping the
buzzer sound.
- Displaying a screen for which the buzzer attribute is not set
- Operating the PT status control area
- Pressing a touch switch which has the “buzzer stop” function
Stopping the Buzzer by Displaying a Screen for Which the Buzzer Attribute Is Not Set
When this method is used, the buzzer stops sounding automatically when the
screen is switched to the one where the buzzer attribute is not set.
[Setting]
When creating a screen using the Support Tool, cancel the check mark for the
buzzer attribute at the screens where the buzzer should not sound. (Usually, the
buzzer attribute is not checked.)
[Operation]
When the screen for which the buzzer attribute is not checked is displayed during
operation of the NT631/NT631C, the buzzer automatically stops sounding. For
the procedure for switching the screen, refer to 8-3-1 “Switching the Screen” (page
469).
Stopping the Buzzer by the Operation at the PT Control Area
This method allows the operator to stop the buzzer at any required time.
NT631/NT631C
PC
PT status control area
Stopping the buzzer
Screen switch setting
Copy memory
table setting
PT status control setting
← Control data
Reserved for system use
[Setting]
The PT status control area must be allocated to a word in the host and, accordingly, there are no special settings required for the control of buzzer.
460
Section 8-2
Buzzer, Backlight, and Display Control
[Operation]
The bit for controlling the PT status (PT status control bit) is provided at the fourth
word (n + 3 words) from the beginning of the PT status control area.
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
0
1 (ON)
0 (OFF)
15
Screen display
Controlled Item
Performed
Not performed
14
Processing priority registration (for NT link (1:N))
Registered
Canceled
13
Continuous buzzer
Sounded
Stopped
12
Intermittent buzzer (short)
Sounded
Stopped
Performed
Not performed
11
Display history initialization
10
Not used
9
Intermittent buzzer (long)
Sounded
Stopped
8
Backlight mode
Lit
Flashing
7
Screen printing
Performed
Not performed
6
PT window opening
Disabled
Enabled
5
Numeral/character string input
Disabled
Enabled
4
PT screen switching
Disabled
Enabled
3
Memory table copy execution
2
Memory table copy type
1
Alarm history initialization
0
Not used
Always “0”
Performed
Not performed
Numeral
Character string
Performed
Not performed
Always “0”
To stop the buzzer during operation of the NT631/NT631C, operate the PT status
control area as indicated below.
(1) Set “0” (OFF) for all of the following bits in the fourth word (n + 3 words) from
the beginning of the PT status control area.
- Continuous sound:
Bit 13
- Short intermittent sound: Bit 12
- Long intermittent sound:
Reference
Bit 9
If more than one bit among the bits indicated above is “1” (ON) at the same time,
only one type of buzzer sounds according to the priority: continuous buzzer > short
intermittent sound > long intermittent sound. To stop the buzzer when it is sounding, set “0” (0) for all bits indicated above; setting “0” (OFF) only for the bit corresponding to the type of buzzer sound may not stop the buzzer.
Stopping the Buzzer by Pressing a Touch Switch Which Has the “Buzzer Stop” Function
Using this method, an operator can stop the buzzer by the operation at the
NT631/NT631C. Usually, a “buzzer stop” touch switch is registered to a screen for
which the buzzer attribute is set to sound the buzzer.
[Setting]
There is an “input key – control” touch switch that has the “buzzer stop” (
tion.
) func-
Register this touch switch on the screen when creating it using the Support Tool.
461
Buzzer, Backlight, and Display Control
Section 8-2
[Operation]
(1) Press the touch switch with the “buzzer stop” function to stop the buzzer.
8-2-3
Controlling the Backlight (for NT631C only)
The NT631/NT631C provides the following two backlight modes.
- Light: The backlight is lit continuously.
- Flash: The backlight alternates between lit and unlit states.
With the NT631/NT631C, the following two methods are used for controlling the
backlight mode.
- Displaying a screen for which the backlight attribute is set
- Operating the PT status control area
Reference
If the screen saver function is set to “Display erased”, the backlight is turned off
with the screen, which is turned off by the screen saver function if the
NT631/NT631C not operated for a while, or by operation at the PT status control
area. Even when the backlight has gone off, it may light or flash according to the
setting if the backlight mode is changed by operation at the PT status control area.
This setting has no effect for NT631.
Controlling the Backlight Status by Displaying a Screen for Which the “Backlight” Attribute Is Set
By using this method, it is possible to control the backlight automatically when a
specific screen is displayed.
[Setting]
Set either of the following statuses for the “backlight” screen attribute of the screen
for which the backlight is to be controlled when creating it using the Support Tool.
(The default setting is “Light”.)
- Light
- Flash
[Operation]
When the screen is changed over during the operation of the NT631/NT631C, the
status of the backlight is controlled according to the setting for the backlight attribute of the newly called screen.
462
Section 8-2
Buzzer, Backlight, and Display Control
Controlling the Backlight Status by the Operation at the PT Status Control Area
Using this method, the backlight status (lit/flashing) can be controlled at any required time.
PC
NT631/NT631C
Backlight is flashing
PT status control area
Screen switch setting
Copy memory
table setting
PT status control setting
← Control data
Reserved for system use
[Setting]
The PT status control area must be allocated to a word in the host, accordingly, no
special settings are required for the control of buzzer.
[Operation]
The bit for controlling the PT status (PT status control bit) is provided at the fourth
word (n + 3 words) from the beginning of the PT status control area.
15
14
13
12
11
10
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
0
1 (ON)
0 (OFF)
15
Screen display
Performed
Not performed
14
Processing priority registration (for NT link (1:N))
Registered
Canceled
13
Continuous buzzer
Sounded
Stopped
12
Intermittent buzzer (short)
11
Display history initialization
10
Not used
9
Intermittent buzzer (long)
8
Backlight mode
Lit
Flashing
7
Screen printing
Performed
Not performed
6
PT window opening
Disabled
Enabled
5
Numeral/character string input
Disabled
Enabled
4
PT screen switching
Disabled
Enabled
3
Memory table copy execution
2
Memory table copy type
1
Alarm history initialization
0
Not used
Controlled Item
Sounded
Stopped
Performed
Not performed
Always “0”
Sounded
Stopped
Performed
Not performed
Numeral
Character string
Performed
Not performed
Always “0”
To control the backlight status during the operation of the NT631/NT631C, operate
the PT status control area as indicated below.
(1) Set “0” (OFF) or “1” (ON) for bit 8 in the fourth word (n + 3 words) from the
beginning of the PT status control area.
Word n + 3, bit 8
- To turn the backlight on: 0 (OFF) → 1 (ON)
- To flash the backlight:
1 (ON) → 0 (OFF)
463
Buzzer, Backlight, and Display Control
8-2-4
Section 8-2
Turning off the Screen
By turning off the screen while it is not in use, the backlight lasts for a long time and,
at the same time, afterimage on the display panel can be prevented. In the
NT631C, the backlight is turned off automatically when the screen is turned off. If
the screen saver function is set to “Display”, however, it is not possible to prolong
the life of the backlight since it is not turned off when the screen is turned off.
The NT631/NT631C provides the following two methods for turning off the screen.
- Using the screen saver function of the NT631/NT631C
- Operating the PT status control area
Notice
To prevent the formation of an afterimage, either use the screen saver function or
periodically switch screens.
Reference
- The screen can be made to enter the no-display state by specifying screen No.
0. In this state, however, the backlight remains lit or flashing.
- While the screen is in the no-display state, only screen switching operations
from the host are permitted.
- While the screen is set off, the display of the screen immediately before the
screen is turned off remains output by the NT631/NT631C.
Turning off the Screen Using the Screen Saver Function of the NT631/NT631C
If this method is used, the screen is automatically turned off when no operation is
attempted for a preset length of time.
[Setting]
Using the system menu of the NT631/NT631C, set a value other than “000” for
“Screen Saver Start up Time” (the length of time before the screen saver is activated after the last NT631/NT631C operation) and “Display erased” for “Screen
Saver Movement”. (The screen saver function is not executed if “000” is set for
“Screen Saver Start up Time”.)
Reference
If a value is set other than “000” for “Screen Saver Start up Time” and “Display” for
“Screen Saver Movement”, the character string set in character string table No. 0
is displayed on the screen at random. In this case, the backlight is not turned off.
[Operation]
If the NT631/NT631C has not been operated (touch switch operation, screen
switching operation) for the preset length of time during operation of the
NT631/NT631C, the screen is automatically turned off.
464
Section 8-2
Buzzer, Backlight, and Display Control
Turning off the Screen by the Operation at the PT Status Control Area
This method makes it possible to turn off the screen at any required time.
PC
NT631/NT631C
Turning off the screen
PT status control area
Screen switch setting
Copy memory
table setting
PT status control setting
← Control data
Reserved for system use
[Setting]
The PT status control area must be allocated to a word in the host, accordingly, no
special settings are required for the control of buzzer.
[Operation]
The bit for controlling the PT status (PT status control bit) is provided at the fourth
word (n + 3 words) from the beginning of the PT status control area.
15
14
13
12
11
10
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
0
1 (ON)
0 (OFF)
15
Screen display
Performed
Not performed
14
Processing priority registration (for NT link (1:N))
Registered
Canceled
13
Continuous buzzer
Sounded
Stopped
12
Intermittent buzzer (short)
Sounded
Stopped
Controlled Item
Performed
11
Display history initialization
10
Not used
Not performed
9
Intermittent buzzer (long)
Sounded
Stopped
8
Backlight mode
Lit
Flashing
7
Screen printing
Performed
Not performed
6
PT window opening
Disabled
Enabled
5
Numeral/character string input
Disabled
Enabled
4
PT screen switching
Disabled
Enabled
3
Memory table copy execution
2
Memory table copy type
1
Alarm history initialization
0
Not used
Always “0”
Performed
Not performed
Numeral
Character string
Performed
Not performed
Always “0”
To turn off the screen during operation of the NT631/NT631C, operate the PT status control area as indicated below.
(1) Set “0” (OFF) for bit 15 in the fourth word (n + 3 words) from the beginning of
the PT status control area.
465
Section 8-2
Buzzer, Backlight, and Display Control
8-2-5
Redisplaying the Turned-off Screen
The following operations redisplay the screen which has been turned off by the
screen saver function or due to the operation at the PT status control area.
- Switching the displayed screen (the new screen is displayed normally)
- Operation at the PT status control area (the previously displayed screen is redisplayed)
- Pressing the touch panel (the previously displayed screen is redisplayed)
Redisplaying the Screen by Switching the Displayed Screen
If this method is used, no special operation is necessary to redisplay the screen.
The screen is redisplayed automatically.
[Setting]
No special setting is necessary.
[Operation]
Switching the screen during operation of the NT631/NT631C cancels the screen
off status and displays the new screen. For the procedure for switching the
screen, refer to 8-3-1 “Switching the Screen” (page 469).
Redisplaying the Screen by the Operation at the PT Status Control Area
This method allows the operator to redisplay the screen at any required time.
NT631/NT631C
Redisplaying the screen
PC
PT status control area
Screen switch setting
Copy memory
table setting
PT status control setting
← Control data
Reserved for system use
[Setting]
The PT status control area must be allocated to a word in the host, accordingly, no
special settings are required for the control of buzzer.
466
Section 8-2
Buzzer, Backlight, and Display Control
[Operation]
The bit for controlling the PT status (PT status control bit) is provided at the fourth
word (n + 3 words) from the beginning of the PT status control area.
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
0
1 (ON)
0 (OFF)
15
Screen display
Controlled Item
Performed
Not performed
14
Processing priority registration (for NT link (1:N))
Registered
Canceled
13
Continuous buzzer
Sounded
Stopped
12
Intermittent buzzer (short)
11
Display history initialization
10
Not used
9
Intermittent buzzer (long)
8
Sounded
Stopped
Performed
Not performed
Always “0”
Sounded
Stopped
Backlight mode
Lit
Flashing
7
Screen printing
Performed
Not performed
6
PT window opening
Disabled
Enabled
5
Numeral/character string input
Disabled
Enabled
4
PT screen switching
Disabled
Enabled
3
Memory table copy execution
2
Memory table copy type
1
Alarm history initialization
0
Not used
Performed
Not performed
Numeral
Character string
Performed
Not performed
Always “0”
To redisplay the screen during the operation of the NT631/NT631C, operate the
PT status control area as indicated below.
(1) Set “1” (ON) for bit 15 in the fourth word (n + 3 words) from the beginning of the
PT status control area.
Redisplaying the Screen by Pressing the Touch Panel
Using this method, an operator can redisplay the screen easily by operation at the
NT631/NT631C.
Screen is redisplayed
Notice
Do not press the touch panel carelessly while the backlight is off or while the
screen is displaying nothing.
Confirm system safety before pressing the touch panel.
Reference
- Even if a position on the touch panel where a touch switch is set is pressed, the
touch switch function is not executed but the screen is displayed.
- If the contents of an element have been changed while the screen is off, the element is redisplayed in the new state.
467
Buzzer, Backlight, and Display Control
Section 8-2
[Setting]
No special setting is necessary.
[Operation]
Pressing the touch panel cancels the screen off status to redisplay the screen
which was displayed immediately before the screen was turned off.
468
Section 8-3
Screen Display and Notification
8-3
Screen Display and Notification
This section describes the each procedure for changing and checking the screen
displayed by the NT631/NT631C.
8-3-1
Switching the Screen
The NT631/NT631C provides the following four methods for switching the screen.
- Operation at the PT status control area
- Pressing a touch switch that has the “Switch Screen” function
- Using the screen switching function in the bit memory table
- Using the screen switching function of the alarm list/history function
Switching the Screen by the Operation at the PT Status Control Area
With this method, the screen can be switched to the required screen at the required time by the command given by the host.
NT631/NT631C
PC
PT status control area
← Screen number
Screen switch setting
Copy memory
Designated screen
table setting
PT status control setting
Reserved for system use
[Setting]
The PT status control area must be allocated to a word in the host, accordingly, no
special settings are required for the control of buzzer.
[Operation]
At the beginning of the PT status control area (word n), there is an area (screen
switch setting area) for the screen switching command and screen number notification.
Word
n
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
Screen No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
n+1
Copy source memory table No.
(4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
n+2
Copy destination memory table No.
(4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
n+3
PT status control bits
n+4
Reserved for system use
2
1
0
Bit
Screen switch setting
Copy memory table
setting
PT status control
469
Section 8-3
Screen Display and Notification
To switch the screen, operate the PT status control area as indicated below.
(1) Write the screen number of the screen to be displayed at the beginning of the
PT status control area (word n) either in 4-digit BCD or 4-digit hexadecimal.
Which of the BCD or hexadecimal notation should be used is set for “Numeral
Storage Type” of “Tools – PT Configuration – System” with the Support Tool.
The screen numbers that can be set are:
- 0000:
No display (screen off)
- 0001 to 3999: Screen No. 1 to No. 3999
Reference
- 9001:
Occurrence history screen
- 9002:
Frequency history screen
- To display overlapping screens, specify the screen number of a parent screen.
- When the NT631/NT631C is started up, the screen of which screen number is
stored for “Screen Switch Setting” in PT status control area is displayed.
If the screen number stored for “Screen Switch Setting” is not correct, the screen
is displayed according to the screen number set for “Initial Screen” of “System” in
“PT Configuration”.
If the screen number set for “Initial screen” is not correct, the error screen (No
Starting Screen) is displayed.
- The screen is not switched if elements have not been registered for the specified
screen number.
Switching the Screen by Pressing the Touch Switch with the Switching Screen Function
This method allows the screen to be switched by operation at the NT631/NT631C.
Setting “screen No. 5” for the touch switch
To next screen
Screen No. 5
[Setting]
When creating the screen using the Support Tool, set the “Switch Screen” function
for a touch switch and specify the screen number of the screen to be switched to.
This screen number should be registered to the screen.
The screen numbers that can be specified are:
S 0001 to 3999: Screen No. 1 to No. 3999
470
S 9001:
Occurrence history screen
S 9002:
Frequency history screen
S 9020:
Programming console function screen (expansion function)
S 9999:
Return to the previous screen
Section 8-3
Screen Display and Notification
Reference
- To display overlapping screens, specify the screen number of a parent screen.
- The screen is not switched if elements have not been registered to the specified
screen number.
[Operation]
(1) Press the touch switch with the screen switching function when the screen is
to be switched.
Reference
When the screen is changed over, the “screen switching strobe” of the PT status
notify bit changes to “1” (ON), after the new screen number is written to the “screen
switching setting area” in the PT status control area, so that the event of screen
switching is notified to the host. After that the “screen switching strobe” returns to
“0” (OFF) automatically.
[Example of Use]
[Screens other than No. 9999]
To next screen
When touch switch 1 is pressed
Screen number 5
“Screen number 5” is set for touch switch 1
[Screen No. 9999]
Previous screen
Menu Screen
Operation 1
Operation 2
Screen switching
@ Instruction from host
@ Screen switchover key
“Screen number
9999” is set for
touch switch 1
Touch switch 1 pressed
471
Section 8-3
Screen Display and Notification
Switching the Screen by Using the Switch Screen Function of the Bit Memory Table
If this method is used, it is possible to switch the screen by bit operation at the host.
NT631/NT631C
Display
Screen No. 3
PC
Bit table 1
Screen No. 3
Allocated bit (bit table 1)
1
To be set by the
Support Tool
← 1 (ON)
After confirming that the screen
has been switched by the data at
the “screen switch setting area”
in the PT status control area
Allocated bit (bit table 1)
0 ← 0 (OFF)
(On the PT, the screen number
remains at “3”.)
[Setting]
When creating a screen with the Support Tool, set the “Switch Screen” function in
the bit memory table and specify the screen number of the screen to be displayed.
Allocate the bit memory table to the bit in the host.
The screen numbers that can be specified are:
S 0001 to 3999: Screen No. 1 to No. 3999
Reference
S 9001:
Occurrence history screen
S 9002:
Frequency history screen
S 9020:
Programming console function screen (expansion function)
S 9999:
Return to the previous screen
- To display overlapping screens, specify the screen number of a parent screen.
- The screen is not switched if elements have not been registered to the specified
screen number.
[Operation]
(1) Set the bit in the host to which the bit memory table with the “Switch Screen”
function is allocated to “1” (ON) when switching the screen.
(2) After making sure that the screen has been changed over from the data by
referring to the “screen switch setting” word in the PT status control area or
other data, return the bit in the host to “0” (OFF).
Reference
472
The screen of the NT631/NT631C is switched at the timing the status of the bit to
which the bit memory table is allocated is changed from “0” (OFF) to “1” (ON).
Please note that the screen is not switched if it is changed from “1” (ON) to “0”
(OFF).
Section 8-3
Screen Display and Notification
Switching the Screen Using the Screen Switching Function of the Alarm List/History Function
This method allows the screen to be switched to the screen corresponding to the
message displayed by the alarm list/history function.
The alarm list/history function monitors bits in the host via a bit memory table. If
the specified bit in the host is turned to “1” (ON), the function displays the corresponding message (character string memory table) or image data/library data.
The function can also switch over the screen to a specified one.
Message and image/library data which
correspond to bit memory table No. 10
Character string
memory table No. 32
Image
Library
10C5
NT631/NT631C
Character string table 50
No. 9
Image library 124A
Screen No. 100
Character string table 32
No. 10
Image library 10C5
Screen No. 121
PC
Allocated bit (bit table 10)
1 ← 1(ON)
Character string table 54
No. 11
Image library 13CA
Screen No. 65
Screen No. 121
Touching the message changes
over the screen to the one set
in the bit memory table
[Setting]
(1) When creating a screen with the Support Tool, set the bit memory table as
indicated below and allocate the bit memory table to the bit in the host.
- Function:
Alarm (Alarm list/history function)
- Switch Screen:
Check mark set
- String Table Entry:
Table number of the character string memory table where the message to
be displayed when the bit is “1” (ON) is stored.
@ 0 to 1999
- Image/Library Code:
Code of the image data/library data which is displayed when the bit is “1”
(ON).
@ 0001 to 0FFFH: Image data
@ 1000 to 3FFFH: Library data
473
Section 8-3
Screen Display and Notification
- Screen number:
Screen number of the screen which corresponds to the “1” (ON) bit in the bit
memory table (in the host).
@ 0001 to 3999:
Screen No. 1 to No. 3999
@ 9001:
Occurrence history screen
@ 9002:
Frequency history screen
@ 9020:
Programming console function screen
(expansion function)
@ 9999:
Return to the previous screen
For details of the setting for bit memory tables, refer to 7-3-3 “Bit Memory
Tables” (page 289).
Reference
- To display overlapping screens, specify the screen number of a parent screen.
- The screen is not switched if elements have not been registered to the specified
screen number.
(2) When creating the screen, register an alarm list/history element for it.
For details of the alarm list/history, refer to 7-11 “Alarm List, Alarm History”
(page 396).
[Operation]
(1) If the specified allocated bit in the host changes to “1” (ON) while the element
of the alarm list/history is displayed, the corresponding message is displayed
(with the alarm list, the message is deleted from the list if the allocated bit returns to “0” (OFF)).
(2) The message area is a touch switch and the set image data/library data is displayed when the touch switch is pressed. The message is displayed in reverse video at the same time.
(3) The screen is switched to the specified screen when the reversed message is
pressed again.
474
Section 8-3
Screen Display and Notification
Reference
- The description above applies to the case where both the image/library code
and the screen numbers are set in the bit memory table. If the image/library
code is not set, the screen is switched over the first time the message is
pressed.
- The NT631/NT631C screen is switched when the reversed message is pressed.
The screen is not switched if the status of the allocated bit changes from “1” (ON)
to “0” (OFF).
- When the screen is switched by operation at the NT631/NT631C, the “screen
switching strobe” of the PT status notify bit changes to “1” (ON) so that the event
of screen switching is notified to the host. The screen number of the new screen
is written to the “screen switch setting” word in the PT status control area at the
same time. (page 475)
[Example of Use]
For an example of use of screen switching using the alarm list/history function, refer to 8-8 “Using the Alarm List/History Function” (page 525).
8-3-2
Finding the Screen Number of the Presently Displayed Screen
The NT631/NT631C has a function to notify the host of the occurrence of a screen
switching event, and the screen number of the new screen when the display
screen is switched by operation at the NT631/NT631C.
The host uses the following method to ascertain the screen switching timing and
the new screen number.
- Reading the PT status notify area and the PT status control area
Reading the PT Status Notify Area and the PT Status Control Area
When the screen is switched, it is notified to the following areas.
- Screen switching timing:
“Screen switching strobe” in the PT status notify area
- Screen number of the presently displayed screen:
“Screen switch setting” word in the PT status notify area
NT631/NT631C
PC
PT status control area
Screen switch setting
← Screen No.
Copy memory
Displayed screen
table setting
PT status control setting
Reserved for system use
PT status notify area
Content update memory table
PT status
← Screen switch strobe flag
[Setting]
The PT status notify area and the PT status control area must be allocated to a
word in the host, accordingly, no special settings are required for reading the status.
475
Section 8-3
Screen Display and Notification
[Operation]
Follow the procedure indicated below to check the screen switching executed by
operation at the NT631/NT631C.
S Reading screen switching timing
The bit for notifying the PT status (PT status notify bit) is provided at the second
word (word m + 1) from the beginning of the PT status notify area.
15
14
13
12
11
10
0
9
8
0
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
Bit
Notified Information
1 (ON)
0 (OFF)
15
PT operation status
Run
Stop
13
Battery status
Low
Normal
12
Screen switch strobe
11
Numeral setting strobe flag
10
Character string setting strobe flag
Printing
Stopped
Off
Lit/Flashing
Global window open status
Open
Closed
Local window1 open status
Open
Closed
Local window2 open status
Open
Closed
7
Printer operating status
6
Backlight status
5
4
3
(1) Make a program which runs in the host so that leading edge of bit 12 (screen
switching strobe) in the second word (word m + 1) from the beginning of the
PT status notify area is checked.
If this bit changes to “1” (ON), it indicates that the screen has been switched
by operation at the NT631/NT631C.
Reference
The screen switching strobe automatically returns to “0” (OFF) when the occurrence of the event is notified to the host.
S Notifying the screen number
The area for the screen switch command and notification of the screen number
is provided at the beginning (word n) of the PT status notify area.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Word
Screen No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
n
n+1
Copy source memory table No.
(4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
n+2
Copy destination memory table No.
(4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
n+3
PT status control bits
n+4
Reserved for system use
Screen switch setting
Copy memory table
setting
PT status control
(1) Read out the beginning (word n) of the PT status control area with the program in the host.
The screen number of the screen displayed at the NT631/NT631C is stored
in a 4-digit BCD or a 4-digit hexadecimal. Whether BCD or hexadecimal
notation is to be used is set for “Numeral Storage Type” of “PT Configuration” at the Support Tool.
476
Section 8-3
Screen Display and Notification
Reference
While the NT631/NT631C is running, the screen number of the currently displayed
screen is always recorded in the “screen switch setting” word in the PT status control area (except when the screen displayed is an error screen or the System Menu
screen, in which case the screen number of the screen displayed immediately before remains recorded).
[Example of Use]
An example of a PC program which reads the screen number each time the screen
is switched by the NT631/NT631C is described below. This example program
stores the previous screen number also.
S Setting with the Support Tool
Set the following words with the Support Tool.
- Allocated word in the PT status control area:
00100 (word 100 in the CIO area)
- Allocated word in the PT status notify area:
00110 (word 110 in the CIO area)
S PC program
Create the PC ladder program as indicated below.
11112
Screen
switching
strobe
@MOV(21)
DM0100
DM0101
@MOV(21)
100
DM0100
(1)
Word for storing the screen number of the previous screen
(2)
Word for notifying the screen number of the presently displayed screen
Word for storing the screen number of the new screen
S Program operation
(1) When the screen switching strobe (bit 11112) comes ON as the screen is
switched by operation at the NT631/NT631C, the program transmits the
data at DM0100 to DM0101. The previous screen number is saved to the
word provided for that purpose.
(2) The program reads out the new screen number that was notified to the
NT631/NT631C to transmit it to DM0100. The screen number of the screen
presently displayed at the NT631/NT631C is stored to DM0100.
477
Display and Control of Windows
8-4
Section 8-4
Display and Control of Windows
A window means a partial screen which can be displayed on the presently displayed screen (base screen).
A window can be created by registering a screen under a screen number from 1 to
3999 as a “window screen”.
This section describes the following types of operation which can be performed for
a window.
- Opening/closing/moving a window
- Checking the display status of a window
- Disabling/enabling the opening of a window
Reference
- Window screen is called “window/keyboard screen” at the Support Tool.
- Window has the following two types.
Global window :
Local window :
8-4-1
Opening/Closing/Moving a Window
The NT631/NT631C provides the following methods to open/close/move a window.
- Pressing a touch switch that has the “input key-window/keyboard” function.
(Opening/closing are possible)
- Pressing a touch switch that has the “cursor moving key” function. (window
opening only)
- Pressing a touch switch that has the “window moving key” function. (window
moving only)
- Controlling the window by the operation of the window control area from the
host (Window opening/closing/moving are possible)
- Setting “Load Local 1 (Keyboard)”, “Load Local 2” screen attribute for a standard screen and perform screen switch. (window opening only)
Reference
- If “1” (disable) is set for the “window opening” PT status control bit, it is not possible to open a window by operation at the NT631/NT631C. (Closing of a window is allowed.)
- If the window for which “open” is specified is not a window screen, the window
open command is disregarded.
- When creating a screen with the Support Tool, it is possible to designate a window which is opened at the same time the screen is displayed (set with the “Load
Window/Keyboard Screen” attribute of Screen Property).
478
Section 8-4
Display and Control of Windows
Opening/Closing a Window by Pressing a Touch Switch That Has the “Input Key – Keyboard” Function
If this method is used, the specified window can be opened and closed by operation at the NT631/NT631C.
By this method, only the local window can be controlled.
No changes after pressing [CLOSE]
Base Screen
Opening window 1
SCREEN 1
Opening/closing window 2
SCREEN 2
Closing
CLOSE
No changes after pressing [SCREEN 1]
Pressing [SCREEN 1]
Base Screen
Screen 1
SCREEN 1
Pressing [CLOSE]
SCREEN 2
CLOSE
Pressing
[SCREEN 1]
Pressing [SCREEN 2]
Pressing [SCREEN 2]
Pressing [CLOSE]
Pressing
[SCREEN 2]
Base Screen
SCREEN 1
Screen 2
SCREEN 2
CLOSE
[Setting]
When creating a screen, set the “input key – keyboard” function which opens/
closes a window for the touch switch and specify the window screen number (keyboard screen number) of the window to be opened. Register the window number
for the screen.
The window screen numbers that can be set are:
0001 to 3999: Screen (keyboard screen) No. 1 to No. 3999
Reference
If the specified number is not the number of a window screen, no window opens.
[Operation]
(1) Press a touch switch that has the “input key – keyboard” function to open/
close a window.
The window set for the touch switch opens.
Reference
When a window control area is allocated to a host, window screen number and the
bottom left coordinate of the window which is opened are notified to the window
control area. (Refer to page 484)
Also, window open status bit of the corresponding window type in PT status notify
area goes ON. (Refer to page 484)
479
Section 8-4
Display and Control of Windows
Opening/Closing a Window by Pressing a Touch Switch That Has the “Cursor Moving” Function
It is possible to give a “cursor moving key”, which is used to specify numeral or
character string input fields, the function of opening a window.
By this method, only the local window can be controlled.
In this method, a specific window (keyboard screen) can be opened at the same
time as a numeral or character string input field is specified by operation at the
NT631/NT631C.
When a cursor moving key is used, the window opens in the same manner as an
input key-window/keyboard function which has “open” action type.
Numeral/character string input field
Touch switches for which
cursor moving and
window opening
functions set
Numeral/character string input field
123456
123456
−41.8
ABCDE
When the top
touch switch
is pressed...
−41.8
1 2
4 5
3
6
The specified window opens
[Setting]
When creating a screen using the Support Tool, set the “cursor moving” function
for a touch switch and specify the input field. Then, specify the window number of
the window screen (keyboard screen) to be displayed at the same time and register them for the screen.
The window screen numbers that can be set are:
0001 to 3999: Screen (keyboard screen) No. 1 to No. 3999
Reference
If the specified number is not the number of a window screen, no window opens.
[Operation]
(1) Press the touch switch which has the “cursor moving” function to specify the
numeral/character string input field. The specified window is automatically
opened.
Reference
480
When a window control area is allocated to a host, window screen number and the
bottom left coordinate of the window which is opened are notified to the window
control area. (Refer to page 484)
Also, window open status bit of the corresponding window type in PT status notify
area goes ON. (Refer to page 484)
Section 8-4
Display and Control of Windows
Opening a Window by Pressing a Touch Switch That Has the “Window Moving” Function
In this method, a window can be moved by operation at the NT631/NT631C.
By this method, only the local window can be controlled.
[Setting]
When creating a screen using the Support Tool, set the “window moving” function
for a touch switch and register it for the window to be moved.
[Operation]
(1) Press the touch switch which has the “window moving” function on the window to be moved.
The window is changed to a frame display only with a “+” mark at the center of
it.
(2) Press the touch panel of NT631/NT631C at a destination position of the window.
Window is moved to that position. (The center position of the window comes
to the pressed position. )
If the window is going to extend out the screen boundary with the specified
position, the position of the window is automatically adjusted so that the window comes within the screen.
Window move touch switch
Move
Move
Press the destination position
Reference
When a window control area is allocated to a host, the bottom left coordinate of the
window after moving operation is notified to the window control area. (Refer to
page 484)
Opening/Closing/Moving a Window by the Operation of Window Control Area
If this method is used, the window can be opened, closed and moved by operation
from the host.
By this method, both the global window and local window can be controlled.
[Setting]
To use a window control area, allocate the window control area to a word in the host
when creating a screen using the Support Tool.
481
Section 8-4
Display and Control of Windows
[Operation]
In the window control area, the following three words are provided for each global
window, local window 1 and local window 2.
Word 15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Screen No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k
k+1
X coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+2
Y coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+3
Screen No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+4
X coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+5
Y coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+6
Screen No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+7
X coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+8
Y coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
Global window
Local Window1
Local Window2
To control a window, operate the window control area as follows.
(1) To open a window, write window screen number in 4-digit BCD or hexadecimal to “window screen number” of the window type to be used. Then, write the
coordinate of window (bottom left coordinate of the window) in 4-digit BCD or
hexadecimal to “X coordinate” and “Y coordinate”. Which of BCD or hexadecimal is used is determined by the setting of [Tools] – [PT Configuration] – [System] – [Numeral Storage Type] at the Support Tool.
The window screen numbers that can be set are:
0001 to 3999 : Screen (keyboard screen number) 1 to 3999
The coordinates that can be set are:
X coordinate : 0000 to 0620
Y coordinate : 0019 to 0479
Reference
- When a new window is opened (when a window screen number is changed from
0000), window open status bit of the corresponding window type in PT status
notify area goes ON. (Refer to page 484) However, when a window which is already opened is switched (when a window screen number is changed), window
open status bit does not change.
- The position on which a window is actually displayed is by 20 dot unit. When the
X coordinate is not multiple of 20 or when Y coordinate is not multiple of 20 – 1,
the specification is disregarded. (In case of moving operation, nothing is executed. In case of opening a new window, the window is displayed at the position
which was specified when it was created.)
This rule also applies when the specification is made so that the window is going
to extend out the screen boundary with the specified value.
- If the specified number is not the number of a window screen, no window is
opened, and “window screen number” in window control area is returned to
0000,consequently, the window is closed.
- Displayed window is switched when the “window screen number” of presently
displayed screen is changed.
482
Display and Control of Windows
Section 8-4
(2) To move the position of a presently displayed window, write the new coordinate to “X coordinate” and “Y coordinate” in the window control area which
corresponds to the window.
The values which can be specified is same as for (1) (open).
(3) To close a presently displayed window, write 0000 to “window screen number”
in the window control area which corresponds to the window.
Window is closed, however, “X coordinate” and “Y coordinate” retain existing
values.
Reference
When a window is closed, window open status bit of the corresponding window
type in the PT status notify area goes OFF. (Refer to page 484)
Opening a Window by Setting “Load Local 1 (Keyboard)” or “Load Local 2” Screen Attribute
If this method is used, the specified window can be opened automatically at the
same time the screen is displayed by setting the screen number of the local window to be displayed for a screen attribute of a standard screen.
Each time the screen is switched to the one for which “Load Local 1 (Keyboard)” or
“Load Local 2” screen attribute is set, the specified window opens.
By this method, only the local window can be opened. It is not possible to open a
global window.
[Setting]
When creating a screen using the Support Tool, set ”Load Local 1 (Keyboard)” or
”Load Local 2” for a screen attribute.
Reference
If the specified number is not the number of a window screen, no window opens.
[Operation]
(1) Switch to a screen for which “Load Local 1 (Keyboard)” or “Load Local 2”
screen attribute is set.
(2) The set window opens. The window is opened by the size and at the position
which was specified when it was created.
Reference
When a window control area is allocated to a host, window screen number and the
bottom left coordinate of the window which is opened are notified to the window
control area. (Refer to page 484)
Also, window open status bit of the corresponding window type in PT status notify
area goes ON. (Refer to page 484)
(3) When the screen is switched to others, the window is closed.
483
Section 8-4
Display and Control of Windows
8-4-2
Checking the display status of a window
NT631/NT631C has a function to notify the open/close status of a window, the
screen number and the position of presently displayed window to a host when the
display status of a window is switched.
It is possible to know the occurrence of opening/closing of a window, window
screen number and the display position from the host by the following method.
S Reading out the contents of PT status notify area and PT status control area
Reading Out the Contents of PT Status Notify Area and PT Status Control Area
Display status of a window is always written to the following areas
Opening/Closing status of a window:
“Window open status” in PT status notify area
Screen number of a presently displayed window:
“Window screen number” in window control area
Position of a presently displayed window (bottom left coordinate):
“X coordinate” and ”Y coordinate” in window control area
[Setting]
The PT status notify area must be allocated to a word in the host, accordingly, no
special settings are required for the control of a window.
To use a window control area, allocate the window control area to a word in the host
when creating a screen using the Support Tool.
Word 15
k
484
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Screen No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+1
X coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+2
Y coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+3
Screen No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+4
X coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+5
Y coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+6
Screen No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+7
X coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+8
Y coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
Global window
Local Window1
Local Window2
Section 8-4
Display and Control of Windows
[Operation]
To check the display status of a window, operate as follows.
S Reading out the opening/closing status of a window
The bit for notifying the PT status (PT status notify bit) is provided at the second
word (word m + 1) from the beginning of the PT status notify area.
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
0
0
8
7
6
5
4
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
Bit
0
1 (ON)
0 (OFF)
15
PT operation status
Run
Stop
13
Battery status
Low
Normal
12
Screen switch strobe
11
Numeral setting strobe flag
10
Character string setting strobe flag
Notified Information
Printer operating status
7
Printing
Stopped
6
Backlight status
Off
Lit/Flashing
5
Global window open status
Open
Closed
4
Local window1 open status
Open
Closed
3
Local window2 open status
Open
Closed
(1) Check the bits from 3 to 5 of the second word (word m + 1) from the beginning
of the PT status notify area with the program in the host.
The status of each bit and the correspondence to a window are as follows.
Bit
Name
1 (ON)
0 (OFF)
5
Global window open status
Open
Closed
4
Local window 1 open status
Open
Closed
3
Local window 2 open status
Open
Closed
By checking the status of the bit shift, it is possible to know the occurrence of
opening/closing of the window.
S Notification of window screen number and coordinates
In the window control area, the following three words are provided for each global window, local window 1 and local window 2.
Word 15
k
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Screen No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+1
X coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+2
Y coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+3
Screen No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+4
X coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+5
Y coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+6
Screen No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+7
X coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
k+8
Y coordinate (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
Global window
Local Window1
Local Window2
485
Display and Control of Windows
Section 8-4
(1) With the program in the host, read out “window screen number”, “X coordinate” and “Y coordinate” in a window control area which corresponds to the
window of which display status is to be checked.
The window screen number and bottom left X, Y coordinates of the window
which is presently displayed on the NT631/NT631C are stored in 4-digit BCD
or hexadecimal. Which of BCD or hexadecimal is used is determined by the
setting of “Numeral Storage Type” in “PT Configuration” at the Support Tool.
When the window is not displayed, 0000 is stored in “window screen number”.
In the case of global window, however, when the screen other than user
screen (such as system menu or error screen) is displayed, the window is automatically closed, but the window screen number retains the existing value.
The value in a window control area is effective only when the window is displayed.
Reference
486
While the NT631/NT631C is operating (the user screen is being displayed), window display status is always reflected in the window control area.
Section 8-4
Display and Control of Windows
8-4-3
Disabling/Enabling the Opening of a Window
Opening of a window by operation at the NT631/NT631C can be enabled/disabled
by using the method indicated below.
- Controlling the window by operation at the PT status control area
Controlling the Window by Operation at the PT Status Control Area
This method allows the opening of a window by operation at the NT631/NT631C to
be disabled. (Even if the opening of a window is disabled, it is possible to close the
window by operation at the NT631/NT631C, or to move a window by a touch
switch operation which has “window move” function. Also, opening/closing/moving a window by operation of the window control area is always possible.)
[Setting]
The PT status control area must be allocated to a word in the host, accordingly, no
special settings are required for the control of a window.
[Operation]
The bit for controlling the PT status (PT status control bit) is provided at the fourth
word (word n + 3) from the beginning of the PT status control area.
15
14
13
12
11
10
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
0
Controlled Item
1 (ON)
0 (OFF)
15
Screen display
Performed
Not performed
14
Processing priority registration (for NT link (1:N))
Registered
Canceled
13
Continuous buzzer
Sounded
Stopped
12
Intermittent buzzer (short)
11
Display history initialization
10
Not used
9
Intermittent buzzer (long)
8
Backlight mode
Lit
Flashing
7
Screen printing
Performed
Not performed
6
PT window opening
Disabled
Enabled
5
Numeral/character string input
Disabled
Enabled
4
PT screen switching
3
Memory table copy execution
2
Memory table copy type
1
Alarm history initialization
0
Not used
Sounded
Stopped
Performed
Not performed
Always “0”
Sounded
Stopped
Disabled
Enabled
Performed
Not performed
Numeral
Character string
Performed
Not performed
Always “0”
To disable the opening of a window by operation at the NT631/NT631C during the
operation of the NT631/NT631C, operate the PT status control area as indicated
below.
(1) Set “1” (ON) for bit 6 in the fourth word (word n + 3) from the beginning of the
PT status control area.
487
Section 8-5
Changing Numeral and Character String Display
8-5
Changing Numeral and Character String Display
This section describes the procedure(s) for changing the contents of the numeral
and character string memory tables which are allocated to the host and also the
procedure for changing the display on the NT631/NT631C by operation at the
host.
For the procedure for displaying the contents of the numeral and character string
memory tables at the NT631/NT631C, refer to 7-8 “Numeral Display” (page 348)
and 7-9 “Character String Display” (page 356).
8-5-1
Changing Numeric Values and Character Strings
The NT631/NT631C provides the following methods for changing the contents in
the numeral and character string memory tables.
- Changing the contents of the allocated word of a numeral memory table
- Changing the contents of the allocated word of a character string memory
table
- Copying the contents by operation at the PT status control area
- Pressing a touch switch which has the “Copy Setting” function
Reference
It is possible to input the data to numeral memory tables and character string
memory tables by operation at the NT631/NT631C using the numeral setting function and the character string setting function.
For details of this operation, refer to 8-7 “Input of Numeric Values and Character
Strings” (page 505).
Changing the Contents of the Allocated Word of a Numeral Memory Table
By allocating a numeral table to a word in the host, it is easy to reflect changes
made at the word in the host to the numeral memory table.
With this method, however, only the contents of the allocated words of memory
tables being used for display on the current screen of the NT631/NT631C can be
read out. Contents of an allocated word which is not related to the display are not
read out.
S Direct specification
NT631/NT631C
PC
Numeral memory
table No. 18
0062
0062
Allocated word
(numeral memory table No. 18)
DM0100
0 0 6 2
Direct
specification
S Indirect specification
PC
NT631/NT631C
Numeral memory
table No. 18
7777
0062
Indirect
specification
7777
Numeral memory
table No. 62
488
Allocated word
(numeral memory table No. 18)
DM0100
0 0 6 2
DM0200
7 7 7 7
Allocated word
(numeral memory table No. 62)
Changing Numeral and Character String Display
Section 8-5
When allocating a numeral memory table to the host, the following properties can
be specified. Even with the same data, the method of storage in a numeral
memory table differs depending on these specifications.
S Storage type
- BCD:
The contents in the allocated word are regarded as BCD (binary coded decimal) and they are converted into the signed binary data to be stored to the
table. If the data at the most significant bit is “F”, the numeral is regarded as a
negative value. If contents of the word are illegal (“A” to “E” at the most significant bit, or “A” to “F” at any bit other than the most significant bit), such a numeral is not stored to the table. (The previous contents are retained in the numeral memory table.)
- Binary:
The contents at the allocated word are stored to the numeral memory table as
they are.
S Words
- 1 word:
The data of one word in the host is read out.
If the Storage Type is “Binary”, the contents are converted into 2-word (32 bits)
binary data to be stored to the numeral memory table. If the contents of the
word are “FFF0” (−16 in decimal), they are first converted to “FFFFFFF0” to be
stored to the numeral memory table.
- 2 words:
The data of 2 words in the host is read out. The words are ordered as follows:
the word with the smaller word number is the lower word (least significant digits), and the word with the larger number is the higher word (most significant
digits).
Reference
In a numeral memory table, a numeric value is stored as signed binary data.
489
Section 8-5
Changing Numeral and Character String Display
S Examples of allocated word data stored in a numeral memory table
How the contents at a word in the host are stored to a numeral memory table is
shown below.
Contents of
a word in the host
1234
Words
1 word
F123
1 word
123B
1 word
F0001234
2 words
FFFF
1 word
0000FFFF
2 words
FFFFFFFF
2 words
Storage Type
Contents of
numeral memory table
BCD
000004D2
Binary
00001234
BCD
FFFFFF85
Binary
FFFFF123
BCD
(previous value is retained)
Binary
0000123B
BCD
FFFFFB2E
Binary
F0001234
BCD
(previous value is retained)
Binary
FFFFFFFF
BCD
(previous value is retained)
Binary
0000FFFF
BCD
(previous value is retained)
Binary
FFFFFFFF
S Examples of display of numeral memory table allocated to a host
How the contents of a numeral memory table allocated to the host are displayed
is shown below.
In this case, the numeric value to be displayed differs depending on the selection
for “Words” and “Storage Type” for the numeral memory table and the settings
for “Display Type” and “Display Sign” for a numeral display.
Contents of
word at host
Storage
Type
1234H
1
F123H
F0001234H
2
1234H
F123H
BCD
F0001234H
1234H
1
F0001234H
2
1234H
1
F123H
F0001234H
2
1234H
F0001234H
1234H
F123H
F0001234H
490
1
2
F123H
F123H
Words
Binary
1
2
1
2
Numeric value
stored in
numeral
memory table
Display Type
Sign
000004D2H
1234
FFFFFF85H
FFFFFB2EH
000004D2H
Without
Decimal
FFFFFF85H
1234
With
4D2
Hexadecimal
–
FFFFFB2EH
00001234H
4660
Without
4660
With
−3805
−268430796
F0001234H
00001234H
F0001234H
3805
268430796
Decimal
FFFFF123H
FFFFF123H
FFFFFF85
FFFFFB2E
FFFFF123H
00001234H
−123
−1234
000004D2H
F0001234H
123
1234
FFFFFB2EH
FFFFFF85H
Displayed
numeric value
1234
Hexadecimal
–
F123
F0001234
Changing Numeral and Character String Display
Section 8-5
Actually, a decimal point is set according to the “number of digits in integer part
and decimal fraction part” (page 351).
As shown in the table above, although the contents of a word are displayed as
they are for the combinations indicated below, the displayed numeric values are
different from the contents in other cases.
- Displaying the contents of the numeral memory table for which the “Storage
Type” is “BCD” in a numeric value for which “Display Type” is “decimal”.
- Displaying the contents of a numeral memory table for which “Storage Type” is
“binary” in a numeral for which “Display Type” is “hexadecimal”.
[Setting]
When creating a screen using the Support Tool, set the allocated word for the numeral memory table. When making this setting, the “Words” and “Storage Type”
settings must be taken into careful consideration.
Reference
The range of numeral memory table numbers which can actually be used depends
on the number of numeral memory tables set for “Tools” – “PT Configuration” −
“System” setting at the Support Tool.
[Operation]
(1) Change the contents of the word in the host to which the numeral memory
table is allocated.
The contents of the word are reflected to the numeral memory table according
to the setting of the numeral memory table.
Note that the contents of a numeral memory table allocated word can only be
read out when the memory table is being used for an element that is currently
displayed by the NT631/NT631C (if the background function is set for a trend
graph, the contents of the corresponding word are always read out). The contents of an allocated word which is not related to the display are not read out.
491
Section 8-5
Changing Numeral and Character String Display
[Example of Use]
[Direct specification]
An example of displaying the contents of a PC word allocated to a numeral
memory table as they are is shown below. The display on the NT631/NT631C
screen changes as the contents of the PC word change.
S Setting at the Support Tool
Set as indicated below using the Support Tool.
- Numeral memory table No. 1:
D0000 (Words: 2, Storage Type: BCD)
- Numeral memory table No. 2:
D0002 (Words: 1, Storage Type: BCD)
- Contents to be registered for the screen:
Numeral display (numeral memory tables No. 1 and No. 2)
Numeral memory table No. 1 (8-digit display)
Line 1
Qty.
15289
Defects
23
units
units
Numeral memory table No. 2 (4-digit display)
S PC program
Make a PC program as shown below.
25502 (1-sec clock)
DIFU (13)
00100
00100
(1)
INC (38)
DM0000
Lower 4-digit word of No. 1
INC (38)
DM0001
Higher 4-digit word of No. 1
25506 (=)
(2)
00001
@INC (38)
DM0002
492
(3)
Word of No. 2
Section 8-5
Changing Numeral and Character String Display
S Program operation
(1) The value “1” is added to the contents of D0000 every second. At the
NT631/NT631C, the displayed value of the numeral memory table No. 1 increases by “1” every second.
(2) Each time carry over occurs during processing at (1) above, the contents of
D0001 are incremented by 1. At the NT631/NT631C, the value of the higher
4 digits in numeral memory table No.1 increases by 1.
(3) When bit 00001 comes ON, the value “1” is added to the contents of D0002.
At the NT631/NT631C, the displayed value of numeral memory table No. 2
increases by “1”.
[Indirect specification]
The following shows an example of changing the displayed numeric value by
adding a value to the contents of a numeral memory table allocated word which
is referenced in indirect specification.
S Setting at the Support Tool
Set as indicated below using the Support Tool.
- Numeral memory table No. 51:
D0000 (Value: 100, Words: 1, Storage Type: BCD)
- Numeral memory table No. 100:
D0010 (Words: 1, Storage Type: BCD)
- Numeral memory table No. 101:
D0011 (Words: 1, Storage Type: BCD)
- Touch switch (upper):
@ Function setting:
“Notify Bit”
@ PC Address:
0000100
@ Action Type:
“Momentary”
@ Label:
TARGET
- Touch switch (lower):
@ Function setting:
“Notify Bit”
@ PC Address:
0000101
@ Action Type:
“Momentary”
@ Label:
ACHIEVED
- Contents to be registered for the screen:
Numeral display (numeral memory table No. 51, indirect specification),
touch switches (two, indicated above)
493
Section 8-5
Changing Numeral and Character String Display
Touch switch No. 10
LINE
TARGET
320
units
ACHIEVED
Numeral display
(numeral memory table No. 51 is designated in indirect specification)
Touch switch No. 11
S PC program
Make a PC ladder program as shown below.
The program must also be made so that the value of “ACHIEVED” is stored to
D0010 and the value of “TARGET” is stored to D0011.
00100
(1)
@INC (38)
DM0000
Numeral memory table No. used
in indirect specification
@DEC (39)
DM0000
Numeral memory table No. used
in indirect specification
00101
(2)
S Program operation
(1) When “TARGET” (touch switch No. 10) is pressed, the contents of numeral memory table No. 101 (the value of the target production) is displayed.
(2) When “ACHIEVED” (touch switch No. 11) is pressed, the contents of
numeral memory table No. 100 (the value of the production actually
achieved) is displayed.
In this example, the contents of numeral memory table No. 51, which is referenced in indirect specification is not checked. If the program is actually tested,
the contents of numeral memory table No. 51 must not be outside the range of
0100 to 0101.
By using the lamp bit of the touch switch, it is possible to identify which of the
numeral memory tables is used for display. For details, refer to 7-7 “Touch
Switches” (page 328).
494
Section 8-5
Changing Numeral and Character String Display
Changing the Contents of the Character String Memory Table Allocated Word
By allocating a character string table to a word in the host, changes made at the
word in the host can be easily reflected to the character string memory table.
With this method, however, the contents of a memory table allocated word can
only be read out when the character string memory table is being used for an element that is currently displayed by the NT631/NT631C. The contents of an allocated word which is not related to the display is not read out.
When a character code is written to a word at the host, the character code is stored
without change in the character string memory table. By specifying FF20 to FFFH,
it is possible to include marks in character strings.
Character codes stored in words at the host are stored in the following sequence in
character string memory tables.
“A” = 41H, “B” = 42H
First word
4 1 4 2
“C” = 43H, “D” = 44H
First word + 1
4 3 4 4
“Y” = FF01H
First word + 2
F F 0 1
“E” = 45H, “F” = 46H
First word + 3
4 5 4 6
“ABCDYEF”
When the code for mark data straddles two words:
“A” = 41H, “B” = 42H
First word
4 1 4 2
“C” = 43H
First word + 1
4 3 F F
“Y” = FF01H
First word + 2
0 1 4 4
“D” = 44H, “E” = 45H,
First word + 3
4 5 4 6
“ABCYDEF”
“F” = 46H
Reference
- If the control code 00H is written to a word, it is displayed as a space by the
NT631/NT631C. The character string is displayed only up to this code since it is
regarded as the end of the characters. When writing character codes to a word,
do not write 00H in a character string.
- When the NT631/NT631C reads out the words in a character string memory
table, it reads the number of words specified in the “Words” setting. Character
strings are not read out beyond this range.
[Setting]
When creating a screen using the Support Tool, set the allocated word for the character string memory table. The “Words” setting must be set carefully.
Reference
The range of character string memory table numbers which can actually be used
depends on the number of character string memory tables set in the “PT Configuration” − “System” settings at the Support Tool.
[Operation]
(1) Change the contents of the word in the host to which the character string
memory table is allocated.
The contents of the word are reflected to the character string memory table
according to the setting of the character string memory table.
Note that the contents of a character string memory table allocated word can
be only be read out when the memory table is being used for an element that is
currently displayed by the NT631/NT631C. The contents of an allocated
word which is not related to the display are not read out.
495
Section 8-5
Changing Numeral and Character String Display
[Example of Use]
[Direct specification]
An example of displaying the contents of a PC word allocated to a character string
memory table as they are is shown below. The display on the NT631/NT631C
screen changes as the contents of the PC word change. If the system is so configured that the character string is written to the word using a personal computer via a
communication unit, the required message can be displayed on the
NT631/NT631C.
S Setting at the Support Tool
Set as indicated below using the Support Tool.
- Character string memory table No. 150:
D00300 (Words: 6)
- Contents to be registered for the screen:
Character string memory table No. 150
SETTING UP
Character string memory table No. 150
S PC program
When changing the contents of a word using a personal computer, no special
ladder program used for controlling the NT631/NT631C is necessary.
S Program operation
The contents of the word are always displayed as a character string.
496
Section 8-5
Changing Numeral and Character String Display
[Indirect specification]
The following shows an example of changing the displayed numeric value by adding a value to the contents of a numeral memory table allocated word which is referenced in indirect specification.
S Setting at the Support Tool
Set as indicated below using the Support Tool.
- Numeral memory table No. 51:
D00000 (Words: 1), Value: 100
- Character string memory table No. 100: Value: “NT631C” (6 digits)
- Character string memory table No. 101: Value: “NT631 ” (6 digits)
- Character string memory table No. 102: Value: “NT31C ” (6 digits)
- Character string memory table No. 103: Value: “NT31
” (6 digits)
- Contents to be registered for the screen: Numeral display (numeral memory
table No. 51, indirect specification)
LINE
PRODUCT
NT631C
Character string display
(numeral memory table No. 51 is designated in indirect specification)
S PC program
Make a PC ladder program as shown below.
00100
@INC (38)
DM0000
Numeral memory table No. used
in indirect specification
@DEC (39)
DM0000
Numeral memory table No. used
in indirect specification
(1)
00101
(2)
S Program operation
(1) The display on the NT631/NT631C changes to the next item in the sequence “NT631C” → “NT631 ” → “NT31C ” → “NT31 ” each time bit
00100 comes ON.
(2) The display on the NT631/NT631C changes to the next item in the sequence “NT31 ” → “NT31C ” → “NT631 ” → “NT631C” each time bit
00101 comes ON.
In this example, the contents of numeral memory table No. 51, which is referenced in indirect specification is not checked. If the program is actually tested,
the contents of numeral memory table No. 51 must not be outside the range of
0100 to 0103.
497
Section 8-5
Changing Numeral and Character String Display
Changing Numerals/Character Strings by Copying the Contents by Operation at the PT Status Control
Area
If this method is used, contents can be copied between any required memory
tables at any time in response to a command from the host. Note that this method
is possible only for the following combinations.
- Numeral memory table
→
Numeral memory table
- Character string memory table
→
Character string memory table
NT631/NT631C
PC
Memory table
A
PT status control area
A
Copy source
Screen switch setting
Copy destination
(for display)
Copy memory
← Copy source memory table No.
A
table setting
← Copy destination memory table No.
PT status control setting
← Copy execution command
Reserved for system use
Reference
If the “Words” settings differ between the memory tables (copy source and copy
destination tables), numerals or character strings are copied correctly since 2
words are secured for a numeral memory table and 20 words for a character string
memory table in the NT631/NT631C. If the memory table is allocated to a word in
the host, however, copying may not be executed correctly if the “Words” settings
differ between the memory tables (copy source and copy destination tables).
[Setting]
The PT status control area must be allocated to a word in the host, accordingly, no
special settings are required for copying the data between memory tables.
498
Section 8-5
Changing Numeral and Character String Display
[Operation]
The following areas are provided in the PT status control area to be used for copying the data between memory tables.
- 2nd word from the beginning of the area (word n + 1)
Copy source memory table No.
- 3rd word from the beginning of the area (word n + 2)
Copy destination memory table No.
- 4th word from the beginning of the area (word n + 3)
Memory table type (bit 2) and PT status control bit that instructs the execution
of copying (bit 3)
(n: Beginning word number of the PT status control area)
Word 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
n
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Screen No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
n+1
Copy source memory table No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
n+2
Copy destination memory table No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
n+3
PT status control bits
n+4
Reserved for system use
Bit
Screen switch setting
Copy memory
table setting
PT status control
PT Status Control (word n + 3)
15
14
13
12
11
10
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
0
Controlled Item
1 (ON)
0 (OFF)
15
Screen display
Performed
Not performed
14
Processing priority registration (for NT link (1:N))
Registered
Canceled
13
Continuous buzzer
Sounded
Stopped
12
Intermittent buzzer (short)
Sounded
Stopped
11
Display history initialization
10
Not used
9
Intermittent buzzer (long)
8
Backlight mode
Lit
Flashing
7
Screen printing
Performed
Not performed
6
PT window opening
Disabled
Enabled
5
Numeral/character string input
Disabled
Enabled
4
PT screen switching
3
Memory table copy execution
2
Memory table copy type
1
Alarm history initialization
0
Not used
Performed
Not performed
Always “0”
Sounded
Stopped
Disabled
Enabled
Performed
Not performed
Numeral
Character string
Performed
Not performed
Always “0”
Operate the PT status control area in the manner shown below to copy data between memory tables.
499
Section 8-5
Changing Numeral and Character String Display
(1) Write the memory table numbers in the PT status control area as indicated
below in either 4-digit BCD or 4-digit hexadecimal. Which of the BCD and hexadecimal notations is used is determined by the setting for “PT Configuration”
– “Storage Type” made at the Support Tool.
- 2nd word from the beginning (word n + 1)
0000 to 1999: Copy source memory table No. (0 to 1999)
- 3rd word from the beginning (word n + 2)
0000 to 1999: Copy destination memory table No. (0 to 1999)
Reference
The range of numeral/character string memory table numbers which can actually
be used depends on the number of numeral memory tables and the character
string tables set in “PT Configuration” − “System” setting at the Support Tool.
(2) Set bit 2 of the 4th word (word n + 3) from the beginning of the PT status control area as indicated below to match the type of memory table for which copying is to be executed.
Memory table type: Bit 2
- Character string memory table: 0 (OFF)
- Numeral memory table:
1 (ON)
(3) Set “1” (ON) for bit 3 of the 4th word (word n + 3) from the beginning of the PT
status control area.
Data copy is executed between the specified type and specified numbers of
memory tables. If the copy destination table is allocated to a word in the host,
the contents at the word in the host are also changed. Then, the occurrence
of a change in the contents of the memory table is notified to the PT status
notify area.
(4) After the execution of memory table copying, return the setting for bit 3 of the
4th word (word n + 3) from the beginning of the PT status control area to “0”
(OFF).
500
Section 8-5
Changing Numeral and Character String Display
[Example of Use]
S Setting at the Support Tool
Set the word and the contents with the Support Tool as indicated below.
- Allocated word in the PT status control area:
00100 (word 100 in the CIO area)
- Contents to be registered for the screen:
Character string memory table No. 4
LINE 1
NORMAL
Character string memory table No. 4
Contents of setting in character string memory tables
No.
Contents
Number of digits
4
NORMAL
4 digits
10
FAULT
4 digits
11
NORMAL
4 digits
501
Section 8-5
Changing Numeral and Character String Display
S PC program
Make a PC ladder program as shown below.
09000
Error flag
(1)
@MOV(21)
#0004
102
Copy destination memory table No.
Copy destination word
@MOV(21)
#0010
101
Copy source memory table No.
Copy source word
@ORW(35)
#0008
103
103
Copy type, memory table copy execution bit
Word of PT status control bits
TIM #0010
001 (1.0S)
TIM001
@ANDW(34)
#FFF7
103
103
Memory table copy execution bit set from 1 to 0
09000
Error flag
@MOV(21)
#0004
102
(2)
Copy type, copy destination memory table No.
Copy destination word
@MOV(21)
#0011
101
Copy source memory table No.
Copy source word
@ORW(35)
#0008
103
103
Copy type, memory table copy execution bit
Word of PT status control bits
TIM #0010
002 (1.0S)
TIM002
@ANDW(34)
#FFF7
103
103
Memory table copy execution bit set from 1 to 0
S Program operation
(1) If an error occurs (bit 09000 goes ON), the display on the NT631/NT631C
changes to “FAULT”.
(2) When the error is eliminated (bit 09000 goes OFF), the display on the
NT631/NT631C returns to “NORMAL”.
502
Section 8-5
Changing Numeral and Character String Display
Changing Numerals/Character Strings by Pressing a Touch Switch Which Has the “Copy Setting” Function
This method allows an operator to change the contents of a memory table simply
by operation at the NT631/NT631C. It is also possible to copy data to a numeral
setting/character string input field by using this method. With the “Copy Setting”
function, data can only be copied in accordance with the predetermined method.
The touch switch “Copy Setting” function executes copying in the following combinations.
Copy Source
Copy Destination
Numeral memory table
Numeral memory table
Numeral setting input field
Character string memory table
Character string memory table
Character string input field
Constant
Numeral memory table
Numeral setting input field
Example:
A touch switch with the “Copy Setting” function is used to reset a
counter.
Copy key
00000
Display
Numeral memory table
00000
12345
67890
Code
Copy
00000
[Setting]
When creating a screen using the Support Tool, set the “Copy Setting” function for
a touch switch. Specify the copy source and copy destination memory table numbers, values and input field, then register them for the screen.
The numbers and values that can be specified are:
- Memory table:
0000 to 1999: Numeral/character string memory table No. (0 to 1999)
- Constant:
−2147483648 to 2147483647
- Input field:
Specify an input field already registered for the screen.
Reference
The range of numeral/character string memory table numbers which can actually
be used depends on the number of numeral memory tables and the character
string tables set in “PT Configuration” − “System” setting at the Support Tool.
[Operation]
(1) Press the touch switch with the “Copy Setting” function to copy data.
Reference
If the contents of the numeral/character string memory table have been changed
by operation at the NT631/NT631C, by using the copy key, etc., this event is notified to the PT status notify area in the host (page 270).
503
Section 8-6
Display of Graphs
8-6
Display of Graphs
This section describes the method for changing the graph display which shows the
contents of numeral memory table, taking the trend graph as an example.
For details of changing the contents of numeral memory table, refer to 8–5
“Changing Numeral and Character String Display” (page 488).
8-6-1
Changing the Trend Graph Display
For details of the graph, refer to 7–10 “Graphs”(page 362).
[Setting]
When creating the screen using the Support Tool, register a trend graph for the
screen and set a check mark for the “data logging function”, with the setting for
displaying special touch switches. The special touch switches will then be automatically attached to the screen. The position of these special touch switches can
be moved using the element editing function of the Support Tool.
[Operation]
(1) Press the touch switch which has the required function.
The trend graph display changes according to the function of the pressed
touch swich.
For the examples of actual applications using the data logging function of
trend graph, refer to “Continuously Reading Out the Contents of a PC Word
and Displaying a Trend Graph by Backtracking” (page 599).
504
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings
8-7
Section 8-7
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings
The procedure for inputting numeric values and character strings by operation at
the NT631/NT631C is described below.
8-7-1
Inputting a Numeric Value
The touch switch “control code input function” is used to input numeric values.
Basically, a numeric value is directly input into a numeral setting input field by using
touch switches with the “control code input function” (referred to as “input key –
control” hereafter) which are arranged on the same screen. If necessary, input key
– control registered in a window (keyboard screen) and a “temporary input field”
registered in a window can also be used. It is possible to register more than one
numeral setting input field in one screen. For specifying the input objective among
multiple input fields, input key – control for moving the input objective or cursor
moving keys are used.
This section describes each of following operations.
- Inputting numeric values using the “input key – control” on the same screen
- Cases where multiple numeral setting input fields exist on a screen (without
cursor moving keys)
- Cases where multiple numeral setting input fields exist on a screen (with cursor moving keys)
- Inputting numeric values using the “input key – control” in a window
- Inputting numeric values using a temporary input field
The method for using thumbwheel type numeral setting input fields is also described.
- Inputting numeric values using the thumbwheel type numeral setting input
field
Inputting Numeric Values Using the “Input Key – Control” on the Same Screen
The following describes the basic numeric value input procedure using the “input
key – control” on the same screen. The explanation of the procedure for inputting a
numeric value into the numeral setting input field assumes that there is only one
input field on the screen.
12345678
Input
Reference
789
456
123
0.
It is possible to copy a constant or contents in a numeral memory table to a numeral setting input field using the touch switch “Copy Setting” function (page 503).
505
Section 8-7
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings
[Setting]
When creating a screen using the Support Tool, set the elements indicated below
on the screen.
- Numeral setting input field (numeric key type)
- Touch switch “input key – control”
@ 0 to 9
@ A to F
(only for the numeral setting input field of the hexadecimal
display format)
@ ENT or
(necessary for confirming the input)
The following keys can be registered if necessary.
@ CLR
(for clearing the numeric value being input)
@"
(necessary for inputting a negative value)
@.
(necessary for inputting a decimal fraction)
@ CA
(for canceling the input)
@ BS
(for deleting a character located immediately before the
input cursor)
@ DEL
(for deleting a character located immediately after the input
cursor)
@ A, "
(for moving the input cursor)
[Operation]
(1) Display the screen where a numeral setting input field is registered.
(2) Input a numeric value using the “input key – control”.
For the procedure for inputting a numeric value, refer to “Inputting operation
using touch switches” (page 507).
Reference
When the screen has only one numeral setting input field, pressing a “control key”
(0 to 9, A to F) automatically starts the input of a numeric value. It is not necessary
to specify the objective numeral setting input field.
(3) Press the ENT key of the “input key – control” or the
key to confirm the input.
When the input is confirmed, the input numeric value is stored to a numeral
memory table. Then, the occurrence of a change in the contents of the numeral memory table is notified to the host via the PT status notify area (page
270).
Reference
506
If the “upper/lower (max./min.) limit check” function is set for the numeral setting
input field, the function checks if the input numeric value falls within the specified
range when the input is confirmed. If the numeric value is outside the specified
range, the buzzer sounds three times, the input numeric value is canceled, and the
screen returns to the display before starting the input. In this case, neither writing
to a numeral memory table nor notification to the host is executed.
Section 8-7
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings
S Inputting operation using touch switches
A numeric value can be input in the same manner as when using an electronic
calculator by using the touch switch “input key – control”.
<Initial display>
When a numeral setting input field is displayed, the contents of a numeral
memory table where the input numeric value is written are displayed.
<Cursor frame>
If a “Cursor frame” is set for the numeral setting input field, the frame that encloses the input field is displayed while the field is accepting input.
Cursor frame
Input field
1234
<Inputting an integer part and a decimal fraction part>
In the integer part, numerals are input from the lowest digit position and the input
value is shifted to the left as new numerals are input. If the input value exceeds
the number of display digits of the integer part, the numeral at the highest digit
position is cleared.
After the input of a decimal point, the succeeding numeric input is regarded as a
decimal fraction. In the decimal fraction part, the numeral input first is displayed
in the first place. After that the input numerals are displayed to the right of the
preceding input. If the input value exceeds the display range, the numeral occupying the first position to the right of the decimal point is cleared.
Key input
Displayed numeric value
(Initial state)
1234.5678
9
0009.0000
0
0090.0000
.
0090.0000
4
0090.4000
5
0090.4500
<Display of a sign>
If the numeral setting input field is assigned the “signed value” setting, the sign (+
and −) toggles each time the " key is pressed.
<Confirming the input numeric value>
After inputting a numeric value, always press the ENT key or key to confirm
the input. When the input is confirmed, the input numeric value is written to the
numeral memory table and the occurrence of a change in the contents of the
numeral memory table is notified to the PT status notify area (page 270).
The ENT key and the
key differ from each other in the following respects.
- ENT key
When more than one numeric key type numeral setting input field exits on the
screen, the input objective shifts to the next input field when the input is confirmed. The input objective shifts in the order specified by the Support Tool.
507
Section 8-7
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings
-
key
Even when more than one numeric key type numeral setting input field exits on
the screen, the input objective does not shift after the confirmation of the input.
<Initial operation of input keys>
How the sign (") key, the decimal point (.) key, and alphabetic letter (A to F) keys
operate in the initial input (the first input after the screen is displayed or after the
confirmation of the previous input) is described below.
- Sign (") key:
The display is cleared to “0”.
- Decimal point (.) key:
The display is cleared to “0” and the input starts in the decimal fraction part. If
the number of digits of the decimal fraction part is “0”, numeric input is not the
input for the decimal fraction part.
- Alphabetic letter (A to F) key:
In decimal input:
The input is disregarded, and the buzzer sounds
three times.
In hexadecimal input:
The input alphabetic letter is displayed.
<Input example>
In actual numeric input, the input numeric value changes as shown below.
Input example 1)
Decimal display, signed, 4 digits in integer part, 3 digits in decimal fraction part
Order
Key
Initial value
Displayed
numeric
value
Order
Key
Displayed
numeric
value
Order
Key
Displayed
numeric
value
0000.000
7
A
−1524.000
14
.
0000.000
1
1
0001.000
8
.
−1524.000
15
7
0000.700
2
5
0015.000
9
1
−1524.100
16
2
0000.720
3
2
0152.000
10
5
−1524.150
17
4
B
0152.000
11
2
−1524.152
18
"
0000.000
5
"
−0152.000
12
7
−1524.527
19
1
0001.000
6
4
−1524.000
13
−1524.527
20
"
−0001.000
0000.720
Input example 2)
Decimal display, unsigned, 4 digits in integer part, 3 digits in decimal fraction part
Order
Key
Initial value
508
Displayed
numeric
value
Displayed
numeric
value
Order
Key
Order
0000.000
5
"
0152.000
10
Key
Displayed
numeric
value
1524.130
1
1
0001.000
6
4
1524.000
11
.
0000.000
2
5
0015.000
7
.
1524.000
12
9
0000.900
3
2
0152.000
8
1
1524.100
13
5
0000.950
4
B
0152.000
9
3
1524.130
14
0000.950
Section 8-7
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings
Cases Where Multiple Numeral Setting Input Fields Exist on a Screen (Without Cursor Moving Keys)
The following describes the procedure for inputting a numeric value at a screen
which has multiple numeric key type numeral setting fields. The explanation is given for the operation which uses the “input key – control” without using the touch
switch “cursor moving keys” to specify the input field.
For the operation using the “cursor moving keys”, refer to “Cases When Multiple
Numeral Setting Input Fields Exist on a Screen (With Cursor Moving Keys)” (page
511).
Here, the basic method for inputting numeric values is not explained: the explanation concentrates on how the multiple numeral setting input fields should be handled. For the numeric value input procedure and other related operations, refer to
“Inputting Numeric Values Using the “Input Key – Control” on the Same Screen”
(page 505).
[Setting]
When creating a screen using the Support Tool, set the elements indicated below
for the screen.
- Numeral setting input fields (numeric key type, without cursor moving keys) (2
or more fields)
- Touch switch “input key – control”
@ 0 to 9
@ A to F
(only for the numeral setting input field of
the hexadecimal display format)
@ ENT or
(necessary for confirming the input)
@ HOME or ↑, ↓, ←, →,
,
(necessary for specifying an input field)
The following keys can be registered if necessary.
Reference
@ CLR
(for clearing the numeric value being input)
@"
(necessary for inputting a negative value)
@.
(necessary for inputting a decimal fraction)
@ CA
(for canceling the input)
@ BS
(for deleting a character located
immediately before the input cursor)
@ DEL
(for deleting a character located
immediately after the input cursor)
@ A, "
(for moving the input cursor)
If the screen has multiple numeric key type numeral setting fields (without cursor
moving keys), it is necessary to specify the input field using these keys: HOME, ↑,
↓, ←, →, , .
509
Section 8-7
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings
[Operation]
(1) Display the screen where a numeral setting input field is registered.
(2) Specify the objective numeral setting input field using the “input key – control”
(HOME, ↑, ↓, ←, →, , ).
For the procedure for specifying the objective input field, refer to “Specifying
the objective numeral setting input field using input key – control” (page 510).
(3) Input a numeric value using the “input key – control”.
For the procedure for inputting a numeric, refer to “Inputting operation using
touch switches” (page 507).
(4) Press the ENT key of the “input key – control” or the
key to confirm the input.
When the input is confirmed, the input numeric value is stored to a numeral
memory table. Then, the occurrence of a change in the contents of the numeral memory table is notified to the host via the PT status notify area (page
270).
Reference
- If the objective input field is shifted before confirming the input, the input numeric value is canceled and the screen returns to the one displayed before the numeric value was input.
- If the “upper/lower (max./min.) limit check” function is set for the numeral setting
input field, the function checks if the input numeric value falls within the specified
range when the input is confirmed. If the numeric value is outside the specified
range, the buzzer sounds three times, the input numeric value is canceled, and
the screen returns to the display before starting the input. In this case, neither
writing to a numeral memory table nor notification to the host is executed.
- If the key is pressed to confirm the input, the same field remains as the objective input field even after the previous input has been confirmed. If the ENT key
is used for the confirmation of the input, the next input field is selected as the
objective input field.
S Specifying the objective numeral setting input field using the input key – control
To specify the objective numeral setting input field using the touch switch “input
key – control”, follow the procedure described below.
<Specifying the objective input field using the HOME, ↑, ↓, ←, → keys>
Pressing the HOME and ↑, ↓, ←, → keys selects the objective input field in the
manner shown below.
3200
6563
HOME
4568
0000
5107
4624
Pressing the HOME key selects the field at the upper left of the screen as the
objective input field. If several input fields are arranged at the same distance
from the upper left corner of the screen, the one at the left most position is selected as the objective input field.
510
Section 8-7
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings
<Specifying the objective input field using the
and
keys>
Pressing the and keys shift the objective input field in the order the input
fields were created using the Support Tool.
When three numeral setting input fields have been created, for example, the objective input field shifts in the order they were created as shown below.
key: 1st → 2nd → 3rd → 1st → ...
key: 1st → 3rd → 2nd → 1st → ...
Cases When Multiple Numeral Setting Input Fields Exist on a Screen (With Cursor Moving Keys)
The following describes the procedure for inputting a numeric value at a screen
which has multiple numeric key type numeral setting fields. The way in which the
touch switch “cursor moving keys” are used to specify the input field is explained.
For the operation which uses the “input key – control” to specify the objective input
field, refer to “Cases When Multiple Numeral Setting Input Fields Exist on a Screen
(With Cursor Moving Keys)” (page 509).
When a numeric key type input field is registered on a screen using the Support
Tool, a “cursor moving key” touch switch can be created overlapping the input field.
This enables the input field to be selected to accept input just by pressing it.
Here, the basic method for inputting numeric values is not explained: the explanation concentrates on how the multiple numeral setting input fields should be handled. For the numeric value input procedure and other related operations, refer to
“Inputting Numeric Values Using the “Input Key – Control” on the Same Screen”
(page 505).
Press here
Input position
moves
Cursor
moving keys
Input position
511
Section 8-7
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings
[Setting]
When creating a screen using the Support Tool, set the elements indicated below
for the screen.
- Numeral setting input fields (numeric key type, with cursor moving keys)
(2 or more fields)
- Touch switch “input key – control”
@ 0 to 9
@ A to F
(only for the numeral setting input field of
the hexadecimal display format)
@ ENT or
(necessary for confirming the input)
The following keys can be registered if necessary.
@ CLR
(for clearing the numeric value being input)
@"
(necessary for inputting a negative value)
@.
(necessary for inputting a decimal fraction)
@ CA
(for canceling the input)
@ BS
(for deleting a character located
immediately before the input cursor)
@ DEL
(for deleting a character located
immediately after the input cursor)
@ A, "
(for moving the input cursor)
[Operation]
(1) Display a screen where a numeral setting input field is registered.
(2) Press the numeral setting input field where a numeric value is to be input to
specify it as the objective input field.
(3) Input a numeric value using the “input key – control”.
For the procedure for inputting a numeric value, refer to “Inputting operation
using touch switches” (page 507).
(4) Press the ENT key of the “input key – control” or the
key to confirm the input.
When the input is confirmed, the input numeric value is stored to a numeral
memory table. Then, the event of changing the contents of numeral memory
table is notified to the host via the PT status notify area (page 270).
Reference
- If the objective input field is shifted before confirming the input, the input numeric value is canceled and the screen returns to the one displayed before the numeric value was input.
- If the “upper/lower (max./min.) limit check” function is set for the numeral setting
input field, the function checks if the input numeric value falls within the specified
range when the input is confirmed. If the numeric value is outside the specified
range, the buzzer sounds three times, the input numeric value is canceled, and
the screen returns to the display before starting the input. In this case, neither
writing to a numeral memory table nor notification to the host is executed.
- If the key is pressed to confirm the input, the same field remains as the objective input field even after the previous input has been confirmed. If the ENT key
is used for the confirmation of the input, the next objective input field is selected.
512
Section 8-7
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings
Inputting Numeric Values Using the “Input Key – Control” in a Window
The following describes the procedure for inputting a numeric value into a numeral
setting input field in the base screen using the “input key – control” registered for
the window.
Here, the basic method for inputting numeric values is not explained: the explanation concentrates on how the “input key – control” in a window should be handled.
For the numeric value input procedure and the procedure for specifying the numeral setting input field, refer to the explanation for the numeric value input method
given previously.
12345678
Input
789
456
123
0. "
Window
[Setting]
When creating a screen using the Support Tool, register the following elements for
the screen.
- Numeral setting input field (numeric key type)
- “Window open key” touch switch
Specify the window screen number of the window used for inputting a numeric
value.
(Used when opening the window for inputting a numeric value. This operation
is not necessary if the “window open” function is set for the “cursor moving
key”.)
Create the window screen used for the input and register the following elements
for it.
- Touch switch “input key – control”
@ 0 to 9
@ A to F
(only for the numeral setting input field of
the hexadecimal display format)
@"
(necessary for inputting a negative value)
@.
(necessary for inputting a decimal fraction)
@ ENT or
(necessary for confirming the input)
The following keys can be registered if necessary.
@ HOME or ↑, ↓, ←, →, ,
(necessary for specifying an input field)
@ CLR
(for clearing the numeric value being input)
@ CA
(for canceling the input)
@ BS
(for deleting a character located
immediately before the input cursor)
@ DEL
(for deleting a character located
immediately after the input cursor)
@ A, "
(for moving the input cursor)
513
Section 8-7
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings
Reference
For the registration of touch switch “input key – control”, it is useful to register the
keys which will be required for inputting the data on the base screen, and those
which will be switched according to need during input — such as letters and numerals — in the window.
[Operation]
(1) Display a screen on which numeral setting input fields are registered.
(2) Specify the objective numeral setting input field using the “input key – control”
and the “cursor moving keys”.
For the procedure for specifying the objective numeral setting input field, refer
to “Specifying the objective numeral setting input field using the input key –
control” (page 510).
Reference
If the “window open” function is set to the “cursor moving keys”, the specified window automatically opens.
(3) Press the “window open key” to open the window which is used for inputting a
numeric value.
Reference
The way in which the window is opened differs according to the property set for the
“window open key” (page 341).
(4) Input a numeric value using the “input key – control”.
For the procedure for inputting a numeric value, refer to “Inputting operation
using touch switches” (page 507).
(5) Press the ENT key in the “input key – control” or the
key to confirm the input.
When the input is confirmed, the input numeric value is stored to a numeral
memory table. Then, the occurrence of a change in the contents of the numeral memory table is notified to the host via the PT status notify area (page
270).
Reference
- If the objective input field is shifted before confirming the input, the input numeric value is canceled and the screen returns to the one displayed before the numeric value was input.
- If the “upper/lower (max./min.) limit check” function is set for the numeral setting
input field, the function checks if the input numeric value falls within the specified
range when the input is confirmed. If the numeric value is outside the specified
range, the buzzer sounds three times, the input numeric value is canceled, and
the screen returns to the display before starting the input. In this case, neither
writing to a numeral memory table nor notification to the host is executed.
- If the key is pressed to confirm the input, the same field remains as the objective input field even after the previous input has been confirmed. If the ENT key
is used for the confirmation of the input, the objective input field shifts to the next.
514
Section 8-7
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings
Inputting Numeric Values Using the Temporary Input Field
The following describes the procedure for inputting a numeric using a “temporary
input field” which is registered for a window. The term “temporary input field”
means a numeric key type numeral setting input field registered for a window. It is
used as a “temporary input field” before the input is confirmed.
When a temporary input field is used, it is possible to input a numeric value while
leaving a numeric value which was active before the input in the numeral setting
input field on the base screen.
Here, the explanation concentrates on how to use a “temporary input field” in a
window. For the numeric value input procedure (page 505) and the procedure for
specifying the numeral setting input field (page 509, 511) and for opening the window (page 513), refer to the explanation for the numeric value input method given
previously.
Input
12345678
5322
789
456
123
0. "
Temporary input field
Window
[Setting]
When creating a screen using the Support Tool, register the following elements for
the screen.
- Numeral setting input field (numeric key type)
- Touch switch “input – key control”
@ ENT or
(necessary for confirming the input)
The following keys can be registered if necessary.
@ HOME or ↑, ↓, ←, →,
,
(necessary for specifying an input field)
@ CLR
(for clearing the numeric value being input)
@ CA
(for canceling the input)
@ BS
(for deleting a character located
immediately before the input cursor)
@ DEL
(for deleting a character located
immediately after the input cursor)
@ A, "
(for moving the input cursor)
515
Section 8-7
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings
- “Window open key” touch switch
Specify the window screen number of the window used for inputting a numeric
value.
(Used when opening the window for inputting a numeric value. This operation
is not necessary if the “window open” function is set for the “cursor moving
key”.)
- “Window close key” touch switch
Create the window screen used for the input and register the following elements
for it.
- Touch switch “input key – control”
@ 0 to 9
@ A to F
(only for the numeral setting input field of the
hexadecimal display format)
@"
(necessary for inputting a negative value)
@.
(necessary for inputting a decimal fraction)
- Numeral setting input field (numeric key type) (temporary input field) 1 field
Reference
Only one numeral setting input field (numeric key type) can be registered in a window, and this numeral setting input field is used as a temporary input field (a
thumbwheel type numeral setting input field cannot be registered for a window).
[Operation]
(1) Display the screen where a numeral setting input field is registered.
(2) Specify the objective numeral setting input field using the “input key – control”
and the “cursor moving keys”.
For the procedure for specifying the objective numeral setting input field, refer
to “Specifying the objective numeral setting input field using the input key –
control” (page 510).
Reference
If the “window open” function is set for the “cursor moving keys”, the specified window automatically opens.
(3) Press the “window open key” to open the window which is used for inputting a
numeric value.
Reference
The way in which the window is opened differs according to the property set for the
“window open key” (page 341).
(4) Input a numeric value into the temporary input field using the “input key – control”.
The same procedure as used for inputting a numeric value into a normal numeral setting input field can be used. For the procedure for inputting a numeric value, refer to “Inputting operation using touch switches” (page 507).
For restrictions on using a temporary input field, refer to “Restrictions on using
a temporary input field” (page 517).
516
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings
Reference
Section 8-7
- If a temporary input field is set in a window, the input is automatically set in the
temporary input field.
When multiple windows are opened and the each window has an input field
(temporary input field), the data is set in the input field in a focus window.
For details of focus window, refer to “Focus Window” (page 434).
- In the initial state, the initial state content of the objective input field is displayed
in the temporary input field.
- The objective input field on the base screen maintains the initial state display
until the input is confirmed.
(5) Press the ENT key in the “input key – control” or the
key to confirm the input.
When the input is confirmed, the input numeric value is stored to a numeral
memory table. Then, the occurrence of a change in the contents of the numeral memory table is notified to the host via the PT status notify area (page
270).
Reference
- If the objective input field is shifted before confirming the input, the input numeric is canceled and the screen returns to the one displayed before the numeric
value was input.
- If the “upper/lower (max./min.) limit check” function is set for the numeral setting
input field, it is checked if the input numeric value falls within the specified range
when the input is confirmed. If the numeric value is outside the specified range,
the buzzer sounds three times, the input numeric value is canceled, and the
screen returns to the display before starting the input. In this case, neither writing to a numeral memory table nor notification to the host is executed.
S Restrictions on using a temporary input field
- For a thumbwheel type numeral input field, it is not permissible to use a temporary input field.
- If the number of digits in a temporary input field is smaller than the number of
digits (integer part digits + fraction part digits + decimal point digit + sign digit)
necessary for the objective input field on the base screen, the input is made
within the range of the number of digits in the temporary input field.
- If an input field does not exist on the base screen, a temporary input field is not
displayed.
517
Section 8-7
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings
[Example of Use]
<Base screen>
5 input settings
<Window>
Temporary input field
8 integer digits, no sign display
(8 digits can be displayed)
00000001
2
00. 03
−00. 04
−00000005
Numeric
key
Integer digits: 8; Decimal fraction digits:
Sign display: No; Zero suppress: No
Integer digits: 8; Decimal fraction digits:
Sign display: No; Zero suppress: Yes
Integer digits: 2; Decimal fraction digits:
Sign display: No; Zero suppress: No
Integer digits: 2; Decimal fraction digits:
Sign display: Yes; Zero suppress: No
Integer digits: 8; Decimal fraction digits:
Sign display: Yes; Zero suppress: No
0;
0;
7
4
1
0
2;
2;
0;
Window open key
8 9
5 6
2 3 CLR
. " ENT
Input key – control
Numeric
key
ENT
7
00000001
2
00. 03
−00. 04
−00000005
Numeric
key
00000001
7
4
1
0
8
8 9
5 6
2 3 CLR
. " ENT
00000001
2
00. 03
−00. 04
−00000005
Numeric
key
00000078
7
4
1
0
00000078
2
00. 03
−00. 04
−00000005
8 9
5 6
2 3 CLR
. " ENT
Numeric
key
Open window
Display set data
00000078
2
00. 03
−00. 04
−00000005
Numeric
key
2
7
4
1
0
8 9
5 6
2 3 CLR
. " ENT
Confirm, notify PC
Move frame
Display set data
00.03
7
4
1
0
1
8 9
5 6
2 3 CLR
. " ENT
00000078
2
00. 03
−00. 04
−00000005
Numeric
key
01.03
.
5
7
4
1
0
8 9
5 6
2 3 CLR
. " ENT
00000078
2
00. 03
−00. 04
−00000005
Numeric
key
01.50
7
4
1
0
8 9
5 6
2 3 CLR
. " ENT
Move frame
Display set data
3
00000078
2
00. 03
−00. 04
−00000005
Numeric
key
Move frame
Display set data
518
−00.04
7
4
1
0
8 9
5 6
2 3 CLR
. " ENT
.
8
"
00000078
2
00. 03
−00. 04
−00000005
Numeric
key
03.80
7
4
1
0
8 9
5 6
2 3 CLR
. " ENT
00000078
2
00. 03
−00. 04
−00000005
Numeric
key
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
7
4
1
0
8 9
5 6
2 3 CLR
. " ENT
Move frame
Number of input digits exceeded
Delete temporary input field
Section 8-7
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings
Inputting Numeric Values Using a Thumbwheel Type Input Field
The following describes the procedure for inputting a numeric value into a thumbwheel type input field.
––––
1234
++++
Decrease by “1” when
Increase by “1” when
–
+
key is touched
key is touched
[Setting]
When creating a screen using the Support Tool, register the following element for
the screen.
- Numeral setting input field (thumbwheel type)
Reference
Since a thumbwheel type numeral setting field itself has a touch switch for inputting a numeric value, it is not necessary to register other elements for inputting a
numeric value.
[Operation]
(1) Display a screen which has a thumbwheel type numeral setting field.
(2) Change the numeric value using the increment/decrement (+, −) keys provided at the top and bottom of each digit position of the thumbwheel type numeral setting field.
For the procedure for changing a numeric value, refer to “Using a thumbwheel
type input field” (page 520).
Reference
- In a thumbwheel type numeral setting field, a numeric value is confirmed immediately after it is changed and written to a numeral setting field. At the same
time, the occurrence of a change in the contents of the numeral setting memory
table is notified to the host.
- When a thumbwheel type numeral setting field is displayed, the numeric value
which has been stored in the numeral memory table prior to the input is displayed.
- Even if more than one thumbwheel type numeral setting field exists on a screen,
specification of an objective input field is not necessary since input is performed
by using the thumbwheel switch in the required input field.
- If the “upper/lower (max./min.) limit check” function is set for the numeral setting
input field, the function checks if the input numeric value falls within the specified
range when the input is confirmed. If the numeric value is outside the specified
range, the buzzer sounds three times, the input numeric value is canceled, and
the screen returns to the display before starting the input. In this case, neither
writing to a numeral memory table nor notification to the host is executed.
519
Section 8-7
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings
S Using a thumbwheel type input field
At a thumbwheel type input field, input a numeric value using the increment/
decrement (+, −) keys provided at each digit position of the thumbwheel type
numeral setting field.
<Specifying a numeric value>
When an increment/decrement (+, −) key is pressed, the numeric value at the
corresponding digit increases or decreases by “1”. Each time the [+] key or the
[−] key is pressed, the changed numeric value is stored to the numeral memory
table and the occurrence of a change in the contents of the numeral memory
table is notified to the host. It is not necessary to confirm the input numeric value
by pressing the ENT key or the key, which is required when a numeric key type
input field is used.
With a thumbwheel type numeral setting input field, inputting of a numeric value
using the “input key – control” is not possible.
Setting a numeric value in the thumbwheel type input field.
Numeral memory table
– – – –
1
2
3
4
+
+
+
+
Press
–
–
–
–
2
2
3
4
+
+
+
+
1234
2234
Host
The relevant numeral increases by “1”.
<Changing a sign>
If a check mark is set for “Display sign” of a thumbwheel type numeral setting
input field, the [+] and [−] keys are used to change the sign if the keys in the sign
display digit are pressed. Pressing the [+] key changes the sign to “+” and pressing the [−] key changes the sign to “−”.
<Checking the upper/lower limit>
The NT631/NT631C has a function to check the correctness of an input numeric
value to prevent a numeric value outside the allowable range from being input so
that the input of an illegal value will not adversely affect the system.
The upper/lower (max./min.) limit check is executed in the timing indicated below according to the type of a numeral setting input field.
For a thumbwheel type numeral setting input field, the check is executed each
time the increment/decrement key of each digit position is pressed.
With a thumbwheel type numeral setting input field, if n...n < m...m [upper limit:
1n...n, lower limit: 0m...m (“n” and “m” are arbitrary values at each digit)], carry
over and underflow are not possible at the highest digit position.
Example:
If the upper limit value and the lower limit value are 1200 and 201, respectively,
the numeric value can be changed only in the following range: from 201 to 999 if
an initial value is a 3-digit value and from 1000 to 1200 if an initial value is a 4-digit
value.
The reason for this is that the upper/lower (max./min.) limit check function does
not allow the numeric value at the highest digit position to change from 0 to 1 or
from 1 to 0.
To avoid this, set the upper and lower limit values so that “n...n y m...m”, or provide a touch switch separately to write a numeric value for carry over or underflow.
520
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings
8-7-2
Section 8-7
Inputting Character Strings
To input a character string, the touch switch “input key – string” is used. Basically,
the “input key – string” arranged on the same screen is used to directly input a
character string into a character string input field. It is also possible to use “input
key – string” or a “temporary input field” registered for a “window”.
Registration of more than one character string input field in a screen is permitted.
To specify the objective input field among multiple input fields, either the “input key
– control” provided for shifting between input fields or a cursor moving key should
be used.
When inputting a character string, the specification of an input field, window opening procedure, and the major purposes of a temporary input field are identical to
those for inputting a numeric value. The explanation below concentrates on how a
character string is input; other information is not discussed. For the procedure for
specifying an input field and opening a window, and for the major purposes of a
temporary input field, refer to the corresponding items in the description of the operation for “numeric value input”.
In character string input operation, bar code data can be input as a character string
using a bar code reader which is connected to the NT631/NT631C.
Only the following topics are described here.
- Using the “input key – string” on the same screen
- Using a bar code reader
S Restrictions specific to character string input when using temporary input fields
When inputting a character string, a temporary input field can be used as for inputting a numeric value. But when using a temporary input field for inputting a
character string, the following specific restrictions should be noted.
- When inputting a character string, the temporary input field must also be the
character string input field.
- Even if the number of digits of a temporary input field is smaller than the number of digits of the objective input field on the base screen, the temporary input
field can be used to input a character string. In this case, however, blank digits
remain in the character string input field on the base screen and these blank
digits are filled with spaces. In the initial display, characters which overflow the
temporary input field are disregarded.
- Even if the number of digits of a temporary input field is larger than the number
of digits of the objective input field on the base screen, the temporary input field
can be used to input a character string. In this case, however the input character string will overflow the character string input field on the base screen and
the overflowing characters are ignored.
- A temporary input field is not displayed if an input field does not exist on the
base screen.
521
Section 8-7
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings
Inputting a Character String Using “Input Key – String” on the Same Screen
The following describes the basic character string input procedure — inputting a
character string to a character string input field using the “input key – string” provided on the same screen when the screen has only one character string input
field.
Character string input field
Display
NT631C
Input
NT631C NT631 NT31C
Reference
It is possible to copy the contents in the character string memory table to the character string input field using the touch switch “Copy Setting” function (page 503).
[Setting]
When creating a screen using the Support Tool, register the following elements for
the screen.
- Character string input field
- “Input key – string” for touch switches
Characters registered for “labels” are used for inputting a character string.
Marks can be input by specifying FF20 to FFFFH.
- Touch switch “input key – control”
@ ENT or
(necessary for confirming the input)
The following keys can be registered if necessary.
Reference
@ CLR
(for clearing the character string being input)
@ CA
(for canceling the input)
@ BS
(for deleting a character located immediately
before the input cursor)
@ DEL
(for deleting a character located immediately
after the input cursor)
@ A, "
(for moving the input cursor)
The “input key – control” of 0 to 9 and A to F can be used to input a character string.
[Operation]
(1) Display a screen which has a character string input field.
(2) Input a character string using the “input key – string”.
Reference
522
If the screen has only one character string input field, input of a character string
automatically starts when an “input key – string” is pressed. (Specification of an
objective input field is not necessary.)
Section 8-7
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings
(3) Press the ENT key or the
key to confirm the input.
When the input is confirmed, the input character string is stored to a character
string memory table. Then, the occurrence of a change in the contents of the
character string memory table is notified to the host via the PT status notify
area (page 270).
Reference
If the number of characters of the input character string is smaller than the number
of characters of the character string memory table size, the digits left blank are
filled with spaces.
Inputting a Character String Using a Bar Code Reader
The following describes the procedure for inputting a character string into a character string input field using a bar code reader when the screen has only one character string input field.
Character string input field
NT631C
Display
Input
Bar code reader
When a bar code reader is used, either of the following methods can be selected
for confirming the input.
- Manual confirmation:
Use the ENT key or the
key to confirm the input character string.
- Automatic confirmation:
The input character string is automatically confirmed at the same time the bar
code reader reads out the bar code data (character string).
Reference
- When “Manual” is selected for inputting a character string using a bar code
reader, the touch switch “input key – string” can be used to correct the bar code
data (character string) or add any required character
- Selection of “Auto/Manual” is made in the settings for the communication conditions of a bar code reader at the System Menu of the NT631/NT631C.
- It is possible to copy the contents in a character string memory table to a character string input field using the touch switch “Copy Setting” function (page 503).
523
Section 8-7
Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings
[Setting]
When creating a screen using the Support Tool, register the following elements for
the screen.
- Character string input field
If a bar code reader is used in “Manual”, the following touch switch “input key –
string” and “input key – control” may be set if necessary.
- Touch switch “input key – string”
Characters registered for “labels” are used for inputting a character string.
Marks can be input by specifying FF20H to FFFFH.
- Touch switch “input key – control”
Reference
@ ENT or
(necessary for confirming the input)
@ CLR
(for clearing the character string being input)
@ CA
(for canceling the input)
@ BS
(for deleting a character located immediately
before the input cursor)
@ DEL
(for deleting a character located immediately
after the input cursor)
@ A, "
(for moving the input cursor)
The “input key – control” of 0 to 9 and A to F can be used to input a character string.
[Operation]
(1) Display a screen which has a character string input field.
(2) Read out the bar code data using a bar code reader and input the read out
data as a character string.
Reference
- When the bar code reader is used with “Auto”, the input character string is confirmed at the same time the bar code data is read out. If the screen has other
character string input fields, the objective input field shifts to the next input field
automatically.
- If the screen has only one character string input field, input of a character string
automatically starts when a “input key – string” is pressed. (Specification of an
objective input field is not necessary.)
(3) When the bar code reader is used with “Manual”, press the ENT key or the
key to confirm the input.
When the input is confirmed, the input character string is stored to a character
string memory table. Then, the occurrence of a change in the contents of the character string memory table is notified to the host via the PT status notify area (page
270).
Reference
524
- If the input character string is smaller than the number of characters of the character string memory table, the surplus part is filled with spaces.
Section 8-8
Using the Alarm List/History Function
8-8
Using the Alarm List/History Function
This section describes how to use the “alarm list” and the “alarm history” which
monitor the status of bits in the host and, if a bit status changes to “1” (ON), display
the corresponding message and the image/library data.
The alarm list/history can be checked using the System Menu of the
NT631/NT631C. It is also possible to check them during operation by registering
them to the screen as an element (alarm list can only be used as an element.).
The Support Tool can read out the alarm history record data stored to the
NT631/NT631C to the host as a text file. For the procedure for reading the alarm
history record data, refer to the NT-series Support Tool Ver. 3.0 for Windows95/98
Operation Manual (V053-E1-j).
8-8-1
How to Use the Alarm List/History
An alarm list can only be displayed as an element while an alarm history can be
displayed on a confirmation screen which is called from the System Menu as well
as displayed as an element.
Confirming during Operation as an Element
The status of the bit to be monitored (alarm list) and the record of bit status transition (alarm history) can be confirmed while the NT631/NT631C is operating.
S Alarm list
Message (character string table No. 32)
set for bit memory table No. 14
Character string table No. 32
Image/library
data 113C
No.13
Bit
Character string table No. 32
Image/library data 113C
No.14
Character string table No. 54
Image/library data 1125
No.15
0
1
0
Character string table No. 50
Image/library data 1002
HOST
A000000
L001003
D010015
When the message displayed is pressed, the image/library
data (113C) set for bit memory table No. 14 is displayed.
S Alarm history
Message (character string table No. 13)
set for bit memory table No. 24
Recorded data
Character string table No. 13
Character string table No. 12
Image/library
data 102B
Character string table No. 11
Image/library data 005F
No. 22
Bit memory table No. 24
97/12/04 11:19:20
Character string table No. 12 No. 23
Image/library data 102A
Bit memory table No. 23
97/12/04 11:25:12
Character string table No. 13
Image/library data 102B
No. 24
When the upper message displayed is pressed, the image/library
data (102B) set for bit memory table No. 13 is displayed.
525
Section 8-8
Using the Alarm List/History Function
[Setting]
When creating a screen using the Support Tool, set the following.
S Bit memory table
Set as shown below for the number of bits in the host to be monitored (for information not indicated below, set as needed.).
- PC Address:
Bits in the host to be monitored
- Function:
Alarm
- History:
@ For alarm list:
Check mark set or no check mark
@ For alarm history: Check mark set
- String Table Entry:
Table No. (0 to 1999) of the character string memory table to be displayed as a
message
- Image/Library Code:
Image/library code displayed together with a message
@ 0000H:
No display
@ 0001H to 0FFFH:
Image
@ 1000H to 3FFFH:
Library
- Screen No.
Screen No. (0001 to 3999) of the screen to be displayed when the message is
pressed twice.
This setting is valid only when switching the screen.
S Alarm list/history
Register an alarm list/history to a screen in the manner described below (for information not indicated below, set as needed.).
- Alarm list
@ Start bit table entry:
Table No. of the first bit memory table among the bit memory tables where
the bits in the host to be monitored are registered.
@ No. of bits referenced:
The number of the bit memory tables where the bits in the host to be monitored are registered.
- Alarm history
@ Type: Order of frequency or order of occurrence
To display the alarm history in the order of occurrence, set the display order
(From Old Data/From New Data) of the record data using the Hist. Disp. Method memory switch of the NT631/NT631C.
526
Section 8-8
Using the Alarm List/History Function
[Operation]
(1) Initialize the recorded alarm history record data as needed.
To initialize the alarm history record data using System Menu operation, select “Alarm History” on the “MEMORY INIT. MENU” screen.
To initialize the alarm history record data by operation at the PT status control
area, change the status of bit 1 in the 4th word (word n + 3) from the beginning
of the PT status control area to “1” (ON).
After initializing the alarm history record data by operation at the PT status
control area, return the status of bit 1 to “0” (OFF).
(2) Display the screen where the alarm list/history is registered.
In the case of an alarm history, the recorded data is displayed on the screen.
In the case of an alarm list, the content of the set character string memory
table is displayed as a message if the status of the bit in the host to be monitored changes to “1” (ON).
Dedicated touch switches are provided for the alarm list/history. For the procedure for using these touch switches, refer to “How to use the touch switches
of the alarm list/history” (page 528).
Contents of character string memory table set
for the bit memory table whose status has
changed to “1” (ON).
If an alarm list with multiple lines is
created, alarms are displayed in
ascending order of bit memory table
numbers.
If the bit memory tables are set in
ascending order of priority, the display
will also be arranged in accordance
with the order of priority.
PROCESS 3 STOPPED
WATER TANK OVERHEATING
(3) Since the message area is a touch switch, pressing the message causes the
set image/library data to be displayed. At the same time, the pressed message is displayed in the ON color.
Image/library data corresponding to the first alarm message
PROCESS 3 STOPPED
WATER TANK OVERHEATING
FAULT
The alarm list is composed of
touch switches. When a displayed
alarm message is pressed, the
corresponding image/library data
is displayed. The pressed alarm
message is displayed in ON color.
Process 3 stopped by fault.
Check DM2500.
(4) If another message is pressed, when more than one message is displayed,
the newly pressed message is displayed in reverse video and the corresponding image/library data is displayed.
Image/library data corresponding to the second alarm message
PROCESS 3 STOPPED
WATER TANK OVERHEATING
URGENT
It is also possible to set
correspondence between bit memory
tables and screen numbers. Here, if
the second alarm message is
pressed again, the corresponding
screen will be displayed.
Check the thermostat!
(5) When the reverse video message is pressed, the screen changes to the
screen with the set screen number.
527
Section 8-8
Using the Alarm List/History Function
S How to use the touch switches of the alarm list/history
The touch switches shown below are provided for the alarm list/history element.
Message
(Number of digits complies
with “Length”)
Frequency of occurrence/Time of occurrence
- Frequency
: 3 digits
- Year/month/day hour:minute : 14 digits
- Month/day hour:minute
: 11 digits
- Hour:minute
: 5 digits
Line scrolling touch switches
Page scrolling touch switches
- Line scroll touch switches (scroll to the previous/next line)
The touch switches scroll the display range in units of a line forward and backward.
If data exist before and after the displayed range, the touch switches are displayed in reverse video. Pressing a touch switch not displayed in reverse video is disregarded.
- Page scroll touch switches (scroll to the previous/next page)
The touch switches scroll the display range in units of a page forward and
backward.
If data exist before and after the displayed range, the touch switches are displayed in reverse video. Pressing a touch switch not displayed in reverse video is disregarded.
Displaying the Alarm History Record from the System Menu
The recorded alarm history record data can be confirmed from the System Menu.
It is possible to print the alarm history record data using a printer connected to the
NT631/NT631C.
S Display in the order of occurrence
S Display in the order of frequency
528
Section 8-8
Using the Alarm List/History Function
[Setting]
When creating a screen using the Support Tool, set the following.
S Bit memory table
Set as shown below by the number of bits in the host to be monitored (for information not indicated below, set as needed.).
- Allocated bits:
Bits on the host to be monitored
- Function:
Alarm
- History:
Check mark set
- Switch Screen:
No check mark
- String Table Entry: Table No. (0 to 1999) of the character string memory
table to be displayed as a message
To display the alarm history in the order of occurrence, set the display order
(From Old Data/From New Data) of the record data using the “Hist. Disp. Method” memory switch of the NT631/NT631C.
[Operation]
(1) Initialize the recorded alarm history record data as needed.
To initialize the alarm history record data using System Menu operation, select “Alarm History” on the “MEMORY INIT. MENU” screen.
To initialize the alarm history record data by operation at the PT status control
area, change the status of bit 1 in the 4th word (word n + 3) from the beginning
of the PT status control area to “1” (ON).
After initializing the alarm history record data by operation at the PT status
control area, return the status of bit 1 to “0” (OFF).
(2) From the System Menu, display the alarm history confirmation screen.
The recorded alarm history record data is displayed.
Example:
Display in the order of occurrence
(3) It is possible to display the previous and the next page by pressing the ↑ and ↓
keys.
(4) To end the display, press the “Quit” touch switch.
Reference
For the procedure for displaying alarm history from the System Menu, refer to
6-11-5 “Displaying and Printing the Alarm History Record” (page 217).
529
Section 8-9
Using the Display History Function
8-9
Using the Display History Function
This section describes how to use the “display history” which records the order and
frequency of screen display.
The display history can be checked using the System Menu of the
NT631/NT631C. It is also possible to check it during operation by displaying the
display history screen.
Concerning the display history record data stored to the NT631/NT631C, the Support Tool can read it out to the host as a text file. For the procedure for reading the
display history record data, refer to the NT-series Support Tool Ver. 3.0 for Windows95/98 Operation Manual (V053-E1-j).
8-9-1
How to Use the Display History
A display history can be displayed in the special screen called out during operation
or in the screen called out from the System Menu.
Displaying the Special Screen during Operation
The display history can be confirmed during the operation of the NT631/NT631C.
[Setting]
When creating a screen using the Support Tool, tick the check box of the “History”
property of the screen to be recorded in the display history.
To display the alarm history in the order of occurrence, set the display order (From
Old Data/From New Data) of the record data using the “Hist. Disp. Method”
memory switch of the NT631/NT631C.
[Operation]
(1) Initialize the recorded alarm history record data as needed.
To initialize the alarm history record data using System Menu operation, select “Alarm History” on the “MEMORY INIT. MENU” screen.
To initialize the alarm history record data by operation at the PT status control
area, change the status of bit 11 in the 4th word (word n + 3) from the beginning of the PT status control area to “1” (ON).
After initializing the alarm history record data by the operation at the PT status
control area, return the status of bit 11 to “0” (OFF).
(2) Display the display history screen.
The screen number of the display history screen is:
Order of occurrence: No. 9001
Order of frequency: No. 9002
530
Using the Display History Function
Section 8-9
- Display in the order of occurrence (screen No. 9001)
- Display in the order of frequency (screen No. 9002)
(3) It is possible to display the previous and the next page by pressing the ↓ and ↑
keys.
(4) To end the display, press the “Quit” touch switch.
Displaying the Confirmation Screen from the System Menu
The recorded display history record data can be confirmed from the System Menu.
It is possible to print the display history record data using a printer connected to the
NT631/NT631C.
[Setting]
When creating a screen using the Support Tool, tick the check box of the “History”
property of the screen to be recorded in the display history.
To display the alarm history in the order of occurrence, set the display order (From
Old Data/From New Data) of the record data using the “Hist. Disp. Method”
memory switch of the NT631/NT631C.
[Operation]
(1) Initialize the recorded display history record data as needed.
To initialize the alarm history record data using System Menu operation, select “Alarm History” on the “MEMORY INIT. MENU” screen.
To initialize the alarm history record data by operation at the PT status control
area, change the status of bit 1 in the 4th word (word n + 3) from the beginning
of the PT status control area to “11” (ON).
After initializing the alarm history record data by the operation at the PT status
control area, return the status of bit 11 to “0” (OFF).
(2) Display the display history confirmation screen from the System Menu.
The recorded display history record data is displayed.
531
Using the Display History Function
Section 8-9
- Display in the order of occurrence (screen No. 9001)
- Display in the order of frequency (screen No. 9002)
(3) It is possible to display the previous and the next page by pressing the ↑ and ↓
keys.
(4) To end the display, press the “Quit” touch switch.
Reference
532
For the procedure for displaying display history from the System Menu, refer to
6-11-4 “Displaying and Printing the Display History Record” (page 215).
Section 8-10
Display and Setting of Calendar Clock
8-10
Display and Setting of Calendar Clock
The NT631/NT631C provides a function for displaying and setting the date and
time. This section describes the procedure for using the clock function.
S Numeral memory table used by the clock function
Numeral memory tables No. 247 to No. 255 are reserved for the display and setting of the clock function.
Memory tables No. 247 to No. 253 are for display and reading, and No. 254 and
No. 255 are for setting.
Memory tables No. 247 to No. 253 store the clock data which is updated according to the operation of the clock built into the NT631/NT631C. The data in these
memory tables cannot be changed from the host.
Function
Display/
reading
only
Numeral
memory
table
Digit
position
Information
Value
247
Second
00 to 59
248
Minute
00 to 59
249
Hour
00 to 23 24-hour system
250
Date
01 to 31
251
Month
01 to 12
252
Year
253
Setting
only
Remarks
00 to 99 Last 2 digits of the year
Day of week 00 to 06 See below.
254
Date
Minute
Hour Second
255
Vacant Year
Day of Month
week
Second
00 to 59
Minute
00 to 59
Hour
00 to 23 24-hour system
Date
01 to 31
Month
01 to 12
Year
00 to 99 Last 2 digits of the year
Day of week 00 to 06
Vacant
00
The correspondence between the value and day of week is shown below.
Day of week
Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Value
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
Example of setting: March 27th, ’98 (Fri.), 14 H 53 M 30 S
254 2 7 1 4 5 3 3 0
255 0 0 0 5 9 8 0 3
Reference
The numeral memory tables No. 247 to No. 255, reserved for the clock function,
cannot be allocated to a word in the host.
533
Section 8-10
Display and Setting of Calendar Clock
8-10-1
Setting the Date and Time
The clock data can be set by the following methods.
- Setting from the System Menu
- Changing the value in numeral memory tables No. 254 and No. 255
The following explains the procedure for writing the required clock data to the numeral memory tables. For the procedure for setting the clock data using the System Menu, refer to 6-11-2 “Displaying/Setting the Calendar and Clock” (page 211).
Reference
The clock has an accuracy of maximum monthly error of −39 to +65 seconds at a
room temperature (25_C). Adjust the error periodically to operate the clock accurately.
Changing the Value in Numeral Memory Tables No. 254 and No. 255
Numeral memory tables No. 254 and No. 255 are specially used for setting the
clock data.
These memory tables cannot be allocated to the area in the host. Therefore, to
change the contents in these memory tables, write the data to be set in them into
another numeral memory table first then copy the written value to numeral
memory tables No. 254 and No. 255 using the memory table copy function.
NT631/NT631C
98 / 03 / 08
9 / 50 / 18
PC
Date, hour,
DM0000
Day of week,
year, month
DM0002
0 minute, second
1
Date, hour,
254 minute, second
Day of week,
255 year, month
–
Minute, second DM0000
Copy
Date, hour
DM0001
Year, month
DM0002
Days of week
DM0003
–
To copy a memory table, either use the PT status control area or the touch switch
“copy setting” function. Here, the procedure for copying a memory table using the
PT status control area is described. For the procedure for using the touch switch
“copy setting” function, refer to “Changing Numeric Values/Character Strings by
Pressing a Touch Switch Which Has the “Copy Setting” Function” (page 503).
Reference
534
The NT631/NT631C does not check the set date and time data strictly. Therefore
the data must be set correctly so that there is no discrepancy between the date and
the day of a week.
Section 8-10
Display and Setting of Calendar Clock
[Setting]
Prepare two numeral memory tables to write the required values for copying it to
numeral memory table No. 254 and No. 255.
- PC Address:
Any word in the host
- Words:
2 words
- Storage Type: Binary
Use the PT status control area to copy memory tables. Since the PT control area
must be allocated to a word in the host, no setting is necessary for copying
memory tables.
[Operation]
In the PT status control area, the following areas are provided to be used for copying the data between memory tables.
- Second word from the beginning (word n + 1)
Copy source memory table No.
- Third word from the beginning (word n + 2)
Copy destination memory table No.
- Fourth word from the beginning (word n + 3)
Memory table type (bit 2) and PT status control bit specifying the execution of
copying (bit 3)
(n: First word number in the PT status control area)
Word 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
n
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Screen No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
n+1
Copy source memory table No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
n+2
Copy destination memory table No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
n+3
PT status control bits
n+4
Reserved for system use
0
Bit
Screen switch setting
Copy memory
table setting
PT status control
535
Section 8-10
Display and Setting of Calendar Clock
PT Status Control (word n + 3)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
0
0
Controlled Item
1 (ON)
0 (OFF)
15
Screen display
Performed
Not performed
14
Processing priority registration (for NT link (1:N))
Registered
Canceled
13
Continuous buzzer
Sounded
Stopped
12
Intermittent buzzer (short)
Sounded
Stopped
11
Display history initialization
10
Not used
Performed
Not performed
9
Intermittent buzzer (long)
Sounded
Stopped
8
Backlight mode
Lit
Flashing
7
Screen printing
Performed
Not performed
6
PT window opening
Disabled
Enabled
5
Numeral/character string input
Disabled
Enabled
4
PT screen switching
3
Memory table copy execution
2
Memory table copy type
1
Alarm history initialization
0
Not used
Always “0”
Disabled
Enabled
Performed
Not performed
Numeral
Character string
Performed
Not performed
Always “0”
The operation for setting the date and time data is described below.
The following explains the operation for copying the numeric value from copy
source numeral memory table A to copy destination numeral memory table No.
254 and from copy source numeral memory table B to copy destination numeral
memory table No. 255. The numeric values in numeral memory tables A and B are
stored in “BCD”.
(1) Set the date and time data in the words where numeral memory table A is allocated (word A and word A+1, in the illustration below).
A+1
15
A
...
0
15
Word
...
0
Date
Hour
Minute
Second
(01 to 31)
(00 to 23)
(00 to 59)
(00 to 59)
Bit
Contents of setting
(2) Set the date and time data in the words where numeral memory table B is allocated (word B and word B+1, in the illustration below).
B+1
15
Not used
(always 00)
536
...
B
0
Day of week
(00 to 06
Sun. − Sat.)
15
Year
(00 to 99
last 2 digits of
the year)
Word
...
0
Month
(01 to 12)
Bit
Contents of setting
Display and Setting of Calendar Clock
Section 8-10
(3) Write the memory table numbers to the PT status control area in 4-digit BCD
as shown below (designation of copy source and copy destination memory
table numbers).
- Second word from the beginning (word n + 1): Table number of numeral
memory table A
- Third word from the beginning (word n + 2): 0254
(4) Set “1” (ON) for bit 2 of the fourth word (word n + 3) from the beginning of the
PT status control area (designation of memory table copy type as “numeric
value”).
(5) Set “1” (ON) for bit 3 of the fourth word (word n + 3) from the beginning of the
PT status control area (designation of memory table copy execution).
The contents of numeral memory table A are copied to numeral memory table
No. 254 and the date, hour, minute, second are set for the NT631/NT631C.
(6) Write the memory table numbers to the PT status control area in 4-digit BCD
as shown below (designation of copy source and copy destination memory
table numbers).
- Second word from the beginning (word n + 1): Table number of numeral
memory table B
- Third word from the beginning (word n + 2): 0255
(7) Set “1” (ON) for bit 2 of the fourth word (word n + 3) from the beginning of the
PT status control area (designation of memory table copy type as “numeric
value”).
(8) Set “1” (ON) for bit 3 of the fourth word (word n + 3) from the beginning of the
PT status control area (designation of memory table copy execution).
Contents of numeral memory table B are copied to numeral memory table No.
255 and the day of week, year, and month are set for the NT631/NT631C.
[Example of Use]
Refer to the “Example of Use” (page 538) for the next item 8-10-2 “Displaying the
Date and Time”.
537
Section 8-10
Display and Setting of Calendar Clock
8-10-2
Displaying the Date and Time
The procedure for displaying the date and time data set using the clock function of
the NT631/NT631C by the numeric value display of numeral memory tables No.
247 to No. 253 is described below.
Numeral memory tables No. 247 to No. 253 store the date and time data as shown
below and the stored data is constantly updated.
Numeral memory table
Contents
Range
Comment
247
Sec.
0 to 59
248
Min.
0 to 59
249
Hour
0 to 23
250
Date
1 to 31
251
Month
1 to 12
252
Year
0 to 99
Last 2 digits of the year
253
Day of week
0 to 6
Sunday through Saturday
24-hour notation
The date and time data are stored in signed binary data in a numeral memory
table. Therefore, to display a numeric value, it is necessary to set “Decimal” for
“Display Type”.
[Setting]
Register the “numeric value display” for the display of contents of numeral memory
tables No. 247 to No. 253 for the screen according to the date and time data to be
displayed.
The “Display Type” of “Numeral Display” must be “Decimal”. Set other properties
according to the display requirements.
[Operation]
The current date and time are continually displayed by the “Numeral Display” for
displaying numeral memory tables No. 247 to No. 253.
[Example of Use]
The following describes an example of how to display the date and time, set at the
PC, on the NT631/NT631C.
In this example a C200HX, which has a clock function, is used. The clock function
is allocated to words AR18 to AR21 in the C200HX.
S Setting at the Support Tool
Set using the Support Tool as indicated below:
538
- PT status control area allocated words:
00100 (CIO area, word 100)
- Numeral memory table No. 264:
DM0000 (number of words: 2)
- Numeral memory table No. 265:
DM0002 (number of words: 2)
- Contents to be registered to the screen:
Numeric value display (numeral
memory table No. 247 to No. 252)
Section 8-10
Display and Setting of Calendar Clock
Numeral memory table No. 251 (2-digit display)
Numeral memory table
Numeral memory table
No. 252 (2-digit display)
No. 250 (2-digit display)
19 98 /
4 / 20
9 / 50 / 18
Numeral memory table
No. 249 (2-digit display)
Numeral memory table
No. 247 (2-digit display)
Numeral memory table No. 248 (2-digit display)
S PC program
Create the PC ladder program as shown below.
00000
@XFER(70)
#0004
AR18
DM0000
@MOV(21)
#0254
102
(1)
(2)
@MOV(21)
#0264
101
@ORW(35)
#000C
103
103
TIM #0010
001 (1.0S)
TIM001
@ANDW(34)
#FFF7
103
103
(3)
TIM #0010
002 (1.0S)
TIM002
@MOV(21)
#0255
102
(4)
@MOV(21)
#0265
101
@ORW(35)
#000C
103
103
TIM #0010
003 (1.0S)
TIM003
@ANDW(34)
#FFF7
103
103
539
Display and Setting of Calendar Clock
Section 8-10
S Program operation
When the program is executed after displaying the created screen on the
NT631/NT631C, the operation is controlled as follows.
(1) When bit 00000 comes ON, the date and time (AR 18 to AR 21) set in the PC
is read, and written to words (DM0000 to DM0003) allocated to numeral
memory tables No. 264 and No. 265.
(2) The contents in numeral memory table No. 264 (day, hour, minute, second)
are copied to numeral memory table No. 254, which is used for setting the
clock function.
(3) After waiting about a second for the completion of the memory table copy
operation in step (2), the memory table copy execution bit (10303) is returned to the OFF status.
(4) After a wait of about one second for the NT631/NT631C to confirm that the
memory table copy execution bit has gone OFF, the program copies the
contents of numeral memory table No. 265 (day of the week, year, month) to
numeral memory table No. 255, which is used for setting the clock function,
in the same way as described in steps (2) and (3) above.
The date and time set at the PC is set for the NT631/NT631C and displayed.
540
Section 8-11
Printing Data and Checking the Printer Status
8-11
Printing Data and Checking the Printer Status
The following data below can be output to a printer connected to the
NT631/NT631C while the NT631/NT631C is operating.
- Hard copy of the screen
The status of the printer connected the NT631/NT631C can be checked from the
host.
This section describes the procedure for printing data during operation and also
the procedure for checking the printer operating status.
Reference
- In addition to the hard copy of the screen, some kinds of data can be output to a
printer using the System Menu. For details of printing using the System Menu,
refer to 6-11-4 “Displaying and Printing the Display History Record” (page 215)
and 6-11-5 “Displaying and Printing the Alarm History Record” (page 217).
- The “Printer Controller” and “Print Method” used by the NT631/NT631C for printing are set by the memory switches on the NT631/NT631C.
Checking the Printer Operating State
The printer operating status information in the PT status notify area indicates
whether the printer is operating or not.
[Setting]
The PT status notify area must be allocated to a word in the host, accordingly, no
special settings are required for reading the status.
[Operation]
The bit used to notify the PT status (PT status notify bit) is provided at the second
word (word m + 1) from the beginning in the PT status notify area.
15
14
0
13
12
11
10
9
0
8
7
6
5
0
4
3
2
0
1
0
0
Bit
0
Notified Information
1 (ON)
0 (OFF)
15
PT operation status
Run
Stop
13
Battery status
Low
Normal
12
Screen switch strobe
11
Numeral setting strobe flag
10
Character string setting strobe flag
Printing
Stopped
7
Printer operating status
6
Backlight status
Off
Lit/Flashing
5
Global window open status
Open
Closed
4
Local window1 open status
Open
Closed
3
Local window2 open status
Open
Closed
To check the operating status of the printer, operate the PT status notify area in the
manner shown below.
(1) Read the second word (word m + 1) from the beginning in the PT status notify
area. Bit 7 in the PT status notify bits shows the operating status of the printer.
@ 0 (OFF): Stopped
@ 1 (ON): Printing
541
Section 8-11
Printing Data and Checking the Printer Status
8-11-1
Printing the Screen
With the NT631/NT631C, the screen currently displayed can be printed by using
either of the procedures indicated below.
- By the operation at the PT status control area
- By pressing a touch switch with the “print screen” function.
Printing a Hard Copy by Operation at the PT Status Control Area
When this method is used, an operator can print a hard copy of the screen at any
time.
NT631/NT631C
PC
PT status control area
Screen switch setting
Copy memory
table setting
PT status control setting
Reserved for system use
Bit 7 ON
Printing
Reference
- The NT631/NT631C continues operation even while the screen hard copy is being printed.
- It is necessary to ensure that the “printer operation status” (bit 7) among the PT
status notify bits is “0” (OFF) before starting printing.
- Once screen printing has been started by operation of the PT status control bit, it
is not possible to stop printing.
- If screen printing is specified during printing by the NT631/NT631C, the screen
printing instruction is ignored.
[Setting]
The PT status control area must be allocated to a word in the host, accordingly, no
special settings are required for printing a hard copy of the screen.
542
Section 8-11
Printing Data and Checking the Printer Status
[Operation]
The bit used to control the PT status (PT status control bit) is provided at the fourth
word (word n + 3) from the beginning in the PT status control area.
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
0
0
Controlled Item
1 (ON)
0 (OFF)
15
Screen display
Performed
Not performed
14
Processing priority registration (for NT link (1:N))
Registered
Canceled
13
Continuous buzzer
Sounded
Stopped
12
Intermittent buzzer (short)
Sounded
Stopped
11
Display history initialization
10
Not used
Performed
Not performed
9
Intermittent buzzer (long)
Sounded
Stopped
8
Backlight mode
Lit
Flashing
7
Screen printing
Performed
Not performed
6
PT window opening
Disabled
Enabled
5
Numeral/character string input
Disabled
Enabled
4
PT screen switching
Disabled
Enabled
3
Memory table copy execution
2
Memory table copy type
1
Alarm history initialization
0
Not used
Always “0”
Performed
Not performed
Numeral
Character string
Performed
Not performed
Always “0”
To print the hard copy of the screen, operate the PT status control area in the manner shown below.
(1)
Read the second word (word m + 1) from the beginning in the PT status notify
area and make sure that bit 7 (printer operating status) in the PT status notify
bits is “0” (OFF). (page 541)
(2) Set “1” (ON) for bit 7 in the fourth word (word n + 3) from the beginning in the
PT status control area.
Printing a Hard Copy by Pressing a Touch Switch with the “Print Screen” Function
If this method is used, the screen can be printed out by operation at the
NT631/NT631C. To use this method for printing the screen, however, a touch
switch which has the “print screen” function must be registered for the screen.
Screen hard copy start key
When this key is pressed,
printing of a screen hard copy is started.
[Temperature adjustment]
COPY
START
COPY
CANCEL
Screen hard copy cancel key
When this key is pressed, printing of the
screen hard copy is canceled.
Current temp.: 20_C
Set temp:
20_C
+10
+1
−10
−1
543
Printing Data and Checking the Printer Status
Reference
Section 8-11
- The NT631/NT631C continues operation even while the screen hard copy is being printed.
- By registering a touch switch with the print stop function, it is possible to stop
printing by using this touch switch.
[Setting]
When creating a screen using the Support Tool, set the function “Print Screen” for
a touch switch, set “Start” as the function, and register the touch switch for the
screen.
If necessary, also register a touch switch for which the “Abort” function is set for
“Print Screen” for the screen.
[Operation]
(1) To start or stop screen printing, press the touch switch with the “Print Screen”
function (“Start” for starting screen printing and “Abort” for stopping screen
printing).
544
Enabling/Disabling PT Operations
8-12
Section 8-12
Enabling/Disabling PT Operations
For the following functions of the NT631/NT631C, operations can be enabled or
disabled by instructions from the host.
- Opening a window
- Inputting numeric values and character strings
- Switching the screen
The procedure for enabling and disabling operation at the NT631/NT631C by instructions from the host is described below.
8-12-1
Enabling and Disabling the Operation of the NT631/NT631C
Operation at the NT631/NT631C can be enabled or disabled by the procedure
shown below.
- By operation at the PT status control area
Reference
- When window opening is disabled, all kinds of window opening operations at the
NT631/NT631C, such as operations which use a touch switch or screen property setting, are not possible. Note that window close operations are still possible.
- When input of numeric values and character strings is disabled, all kinds of numeric value and character string change operations at the NT631/NT631C, such
as numeric value input (numeric key type input field, thumbwheel type input
field), character string input, and copying memory tables using a touch switch,
are not possible. Note that operations to change numeric values/character
strings at the PT status control area by an instruction from the host (memory
table copying and screen switching by operation at the PT status control area,
changing the contents of allocated words, etc.) are still possible.
- When screen switching is disabled, all kinds of screen switching operations at
the NT631/NT631C, such as screen switching using a touch switch and by the
alarm list/history function, are not possible. Note that the display of the System
Menu using the touch panel and screen switching by an instruction from the host
using the PT status control area are still possible.
- It is possible to disable the input and change operation using the System Menu
and the display of the System Menu by setting in the System Installer mode
(page 166).
Controlling the Enabling/Disabling of PT Side Operation by Operation at the PT Status Control Area
If this method is used, it is possible to enable and disable the operation at the
NT631/NT631C from the host.
[Setting]
The PT status control area must be allocated to a word in the host, accordingly, no
special settings are required for reading the operation at the NT631/NT631C.
545
Section 8-12
Enabling/Disabling PT Operations
[Operation]
Bits used to control the PT status (PT status control bits) are provided at the fourth
word (word n + 3) from the beginning in the PT status control area.
- Bit 6: Enabling/disabling the PT side window opening
- Bit 5: Enabling/disabling the inputting of numeric values and character strings
- Bit 4: Enabling/disabling the PT side screen switching
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
0
0
Controlled Item
1 (ON)
0 (OFF)
15
Screen display
Performed
Not performed
14
Processing priority registration (for NT link (1:N))
Registered
Canceled
13
Continuous buzzer
Sounded
Stopped
12
Intermittent buzzer (short)
Sounded
Stopped
11
Display history initialization
10
Not used
Performed
Not performed
9
Intermittent buzzer (long)
Sounded
Stopped
8
Backlight mode
Lit
Flashing
7
Screen printing
Performed
Not performed
6
PT window opening
Disabled
Enabled
5
Numeral/character string input
Disabled
Enabled
4
PT screen switching
3
Memory table copy execution
2
Memory table copy type
1
Alarm history initialization
0
Not used
Always “0”
Disabled
Enabled
Performed
Not performed
Numeral
Character string
Performed
Not performed
Always “0”
To control the operation by the NT631/NT631C while it is running, operate the PT
status control area in the manner shown below.
(1) Change the setting of the bits in the fourth word (word n + 3) from the beginning in the PT status control area as indicated below according to the required
control.
word n + 3
@ Bit 6: To control the PT side window opening
@ Bit 5: To control the inputting of numeric values and character strings
@ Bit 4: To control PT side screen switching
To disable operation: 1 (ON)
To enable operation: 0 (OFF)
546
!
!(
!
" # $ !! ' # !!( # $ " !(! ' !(!( *
+ !! ' ,- '. !!( ,- '. !! ,- '. !!& / ,- '. !!% - ,- '. !! - ,- '. !!) ' ,- '. !!0 ,- '. !! ,- '. !!1 / ,- '. !! ' ,23$$. ,- '. !!( ,- '. !! ,- '. !!& / ,- '. !!% ,- ' . !! ,- ' . !!) ,- ' . !!0 4 ,- ' . !! ' ,- ' . !!(1 ' ,- '. !!( +! 5 ,- '. !!(( 6 ,- ' . %&
%&
%&)
%&
%&
%%
%%
%%
%%%
%%
%%0
%1
%
%(
%&
%
%)
%
%)1
%)
%)(
%)
%)&
%)
%))
%01
%0
%0(
%0
!
"
# # $ # ! %&'(%&' %&'(%&' (! # (
%&'(%&' (! # # ! #
) * ++++ !
++++ ,,,,
- ! % -" "
. # ! !
# " $ ! %&'(%&' "!
/
-" ! %&'(%&' " # 0 1 2%&'(%&' 0 3 24! #
$
! %&'(%&' !
5 6
(6"
# %&'(%&' " %&'(%&' "
! - # # 777
% # 771
# 773
8 # 7&+
0 # 7&9
0 # 7&'
5
(6"
! # %&'(%&' " %&'(%&' " ! ! ! "
: " " ! !
! ! # ! # 7&
% ! # 7&&
! # 7&3
8 ! # 7&,
# ! ;:< # 71
% # 71
# 71'
8 # 71
% $ " %&'(%&' / %&'(%&' " ! $ ! " # 717
% " # 71&
" # 713
5 # 71,
# # 739
/" ! ! %&'(%&' " 6% : ! %&'(%&'
" # " ! # 73'
6
%&'(%&' : %&'(%&'
6
= # 73
> "
" ! ! %&'(%&' ! > "
# 737
" ! " ! 609'9 8.0: -"
! %&'(%&' " ! ! "
;< : " " 2/" ;9< : ! %&'(%&' $
%&'(%&'
;'< ' *) ) #
+#
'
%) ))
'
'
!"# $ ) )
'+
))
'+
))
%" "&#
$ '%( %) *)
) )
/ "
/#>% ) /" 609'9 . ; " 31 '<
#6:% ?
) 0
%&'(%&' $ 609'9 :%> :%# ? ) 6$ " %&'(%&'
: $ " = 2:%> :%#
/0> ) 609'9 8.0: /"
:
! ! %&'(%&' !
" ! "
" 2" ! ! ; " 1,<
# ! ! ! 2% "
4!$ ! " # ! ! ! " @ 0 " " $
# ! " %&'(%&' " $
! $ !
0" " " $ $
8.0: " ! "
.0:: % -" " !
" ! " "
" ! " ! ! $ ;85 -
< " .0:: # = A>0B A6B ; A>0B A6B <
: -" -" 2 85 29
-
;"$< 2 .0:: $ -"
85 2 .0:: $ -"
! -
5 " 85 -
! ) ! $ .0:: $ ! !
('
!
-
0 0
'!
0 0
.*/
0 0
./
0 0
.*
/
0 0
.
/
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
! " "
)
)
)
)
+9'
,,
9
; 85 <
; 85 <
;9 85 <
;9 -
<
! !
('
!
'!
,
: 2 -" (" "
" CC .0:: ;! -
< "
# : "
" : "
; < $
: = " %&'(%&' ! " " ! ; $!<
! ! "$ $!
/
" " " " " " "
" 9 .0:: ! ! ; < !
A>0B $ : " " $
: 2/% 2 . ! "
$ 4!$ %&'(%&' "
" ""
" "
! 2 . "
2> 6" " 737
! "
!
('
!
-
,
.*
/
.*/
0 0
.
/
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
./
0 0
'!
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
)
"( ; 85 <
+ ) .
) #
3 ) . ; !
<
, ) # ; !
<
)
!
; 85 <
++++ ,,,,
)
% !
;9 85 <
++
)++ !
+ ,,
) ,, !
3 , 9
)
;9 -
<
+ 3 ('
!
-
,
0 0
0 0
0 0
7
0 0
0 0
'
*
*
0 0
0 0
'!
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
0 0
)
!
; 85 <
++++ ,,,,
)
% !
;9 85 <
+ 7+ ) 7+ !
)
!
; -
<
+ 0 D :
$
!
)
;9 -
<
! 6
"
!
"
!
# # !
! "
! # . - ++ !
: " - 7+ !
: 7+ !
"
" " ! " : " ! 7+ !
% 2 !
" " ! !
!
" !
. ! # )
'
'
('
!
-
'!
,
,
% ;9 !
< !
E +++
6"
('
!
-
,
7
'!
'
,
" !
('
!
0 0
./
0 0
'!
0 0
.*/
0 0
.
/
0 0
.*
/
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
)
"( ; 85 <
+ ) .
) #
3 ) . ; <
, ) # ; <
)
; 85 <
++++ ,,,
)
% ;9 85 <
++
) ++
+ ,,
) ,,
3 , )
;9 -
<
+ 3 - ! "
2 "
;79(+++(9+++< 0"" ('
!
, 1 2
0 0
0 0
*
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
, 1 2
*
0 0
7
'!
'
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
)
; 85 <
++++ ,,,
)
% ;9 85 <
+ 9+) 9+ )
; 3 -
<
+ 0 D 3 $
)
;9 -
<
! 6
"
"
. - ++ : " - 9+ :
9+ "
" " " 9+ % !
" ! !
!
" " !
('
(
.*
/
.*/
0 0
.
/
0 0
./
0 0
'!
0 0
0 0
,
!
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
)
"( ; 85 <
+ ) .
) #
3 ) . ; <
, ) # ; <
)
; 85 <
++++ ,,,
)
% ;9 85 <
+ 9+
) 9+
3 , )
;9 -
<
+ 3 - ! "
2 "
;97&(+++(9+++< 0"" ('
!
(
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
'!
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
)
; 85 <
++++ ,,,
)
;9 ;-
< "
+ <
++ ;#'1 :0/ 337,<
)
;9 -
<
! 6
"
"
. - 9+ : " : " "
" = "
% 2
! "
#
$ " !
('
!
0 0
./
0 0
'!
0 0
.*/
0 0
.
/
0 0
.*
/
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
)
"( ; 85 <
+ ) .
) #
3 ) . ; <
, ) # ; <
)
; 85 <
++++ +,,,
)
% ;9 85 <
++
)++
+ ,,
) ,,
3 , )
;9 -
<
+ 3 - ! "
2 "
;97&(+++< 0"" ('
!
*
*
7
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
'
'!
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
)
; 85 <
++++ +,,,
)
% ;9 85 <
++
)++ + ,,
) ,, )
; -
F<
++++ "
;/E+ /%E< & -
$ ; ! <
&
)
;9 -
<
! 6
"
"
. - ++ : ! " & "
2+ ; <
;< -
$ !)
E; <&
; <
" " #$%& #$'
!
"#
!
$
# %
# "
/
" &
'()) %
!
('
3
!
.
/
./
'!
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
"( ; 85 <
+ ) .
) #
)
;9 -
<
('
3
!
0 0
0 0
'!
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
* +)
; 93 " ;9+4< $ <
)
;9 -
<
! 6
" #
&
!
('
#
.
/
./
'!
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
"( ; 85 <
+ ) .
) #
)
;9 -
<
('
#
'!
,
)
;9 -
<
! ;-
24<
6
" #
" $ ! ! # 6% 6% ;! 6% >5 < " ! $ 0
!
! # "( "
'
(
!
('
-
,
0 0
0 0
, 1 2
0 0
.*
/
0 0 0 0
0 0
, 1 2
0 0
7
.
/
0 0
'
0 0
0 0
0 0
.*/
0 0
./
'!
0 0
,
"( ! ; 85 <
+ ) . 0> ) # 0> 9 ) . .%5 ' ) # .%5 ) . /6 7 ) # /6 & ) . G/6 1 ) # G/6 3 ) . 0> ;! !
<
, ) # 0> ;! !
<
)
!
% ! ; 85 <
++++ ,,,,
)
% !
! ;9 85 <
+ 7+) 7+4
: 3 , )
5 ! !
; -
<
+ : " D )
;9 -
<
: $ / [email protected] 26" ! " ! "
('
-
'!
,
,
)
;9 -
<
! ;-
24<
"
!
"
!
# - "
" ;! < "
# ! ! !
. - 7+ !
! ! "
- ! " " # ! ! 0> ) 0"
! "
#
.%5 ) - .%5 " " # ! !
/6 ) - /6 " "
# ! !
G/6 ) - G/6 " " # ! !
# # 6
0> 9'
'7&
9'
.%5 9'
'7&
+
/6 9'
'7&
'&1&
G/6 9'
'7&
9&&9
)
" (
!
('
, 1 2
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
, 1 2
.*
/
0 0
7
.
/
0 0
0 0
'
0 0
0 0
0 0
.*/
0 0
./
'!
0 0
,
)
"( ; 85 <
+ ) .
) #
3 ) . ; !<
, ) # ; !<
)
! ; 85 <
++++ ,,, ;-
+91 +97'<
)
% ! ;9 85 <
+ 9+) 9+ 3 , )
! ; 3
-
<
+ : " D 3
)
;9 -
<
+ 3 - ! "
"
;79(+++(9+++< 0"" / @ 6" ! " ! "
A('B
'!B
,
)
;9 -
<
! ;-
29+4<
"
"
. - 9+ ! ! -
%91 %97'
; "(
< " ! ! ! $
5 ! ! ! " % " 0"" ;: " # $<
< 9' %+ ;
!
) <
,
&# ( &# - "# . /
!
!
" %
0"" ! ,7(,3 ;H'+< /" ;H+7'><
" (
!
('
(
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
.
/
./
'!
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
)
"( ; 85 <
+ ) .
)#
)
! ; 85 <
++++ +,,
)
! ; + <
++ : " !
"
9 " + )
;9 -
<
+ - ! "
"
;97&(+++(9+++< 0"" 4!$ " ! %7++ / [email protected] 26" ! " ! "
('
(
'!
,
)
;9 -
<
! ;-
2974<
"
"
*
$ " (
!
('
0 0
0 0
, 1 4*)
.*
/
0 0
0 0
0 0
, 1 4*)
0 0
.*/
0 0
7
.
/
./
'!
0 0
0 0
'
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
)
"( ; 85 <
+ ) .
) #
3 ) . ;$ ! !<
, ) # ;$ ! !<
)
! ; 85 <
++++ +,,,
)
% ! ;9 85 <
++
)++ + ,,
) ,, 3 , )
! ; -
F<
++++ "
;/E+ /%E< & "
-
$ ; ! <
: ! & " +
;6 ! <
; -
< & )
;9 -
<
+ 3 - ! "
"
;97&(+++< 0""
/ [email protected] 26" ! " ! "
('
'!
,
)
;9 -
<
! ;-
24<
"
"
. - ++ ! : ! " & "
2+ ; <
;< -
$ "
!)
E; ! <&
; <
( " " #$) #$ *
! "
#!
$%
" (
+,! !
('
3
-
4
4
4
4
)
)
,
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
)
)
.
/
./
'!
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
)
"( ; 85 <
+ ) .
) #
)
! !
; 85 <
++++ ,,,,
)
! !
; 85 <
++++ ,,,,
)
5 ! ; -
<
+ : " D )
;9 -
<
: + / [email protected] 26" ! " ! "
('
3
-
'!
,
,
)
;9 -
<
! ;-
2+>4<
"
!
! "
2
! !
2 ! !
" !
('
'
.4
/
.4/
.4/
.4/
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
.)
/
.)/
.)/
.)/
.
/
./
'!
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
0 0
)
"( ; 85 <
+ ) .
) #
)
; 85 <
++++ ,,,
)
; 85 <
++++ ,,,
)
;9 -
<
: + - ! "
"
;79(+++(9+++<
0"" / [email protected] 26" ! " ! "
('
'
'!
,
)
;9 -
<
! ;-
2+4<
2+ ! "
: 2 2 : " * ! -
%91 %97'
; "(
< " ! ! ! $
" !
('
'
(
.4
/
.4/
.4/
.4/
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
.)
/
.)/
.)/
.)/
.
/
./
'!
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
)
"( ; 85 <
+ ) .
) #
)
; 85 <
++++ +,,
)
; 85 <
++++ +,,
)
;9 -
<
+ - ! "
"
;97&(+++(9+++< 0"" 4!$ " %7++
/ [email protected] 26" ! " ! "
('
'
(
'!
,
)
;9 -
<
! ;-
24<
+ " ;9+4< ! "
: 2 2 : " * #
$ " !
('
'
.4
/
.4/
.4/
.4/
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
.)
/
.)/
.)/
.)/
.
/
'!
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
)
"( ; 85 <
+ ) .
) #
)
; 85 <
++++ +,,,
)
; 85 <
++++ +,,,
)
;9 -
<
+ - ! "
"
;97&(+++< 0""
/ [email protected] 26" ! " ! "
('
'
'!
,
)
;9 -
<
! ;-
2++4<
2/ ;+< ! "
%
( - !
('
(
#
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
'!
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
)
!
; 85 <
++++ ,,,,
!
! ! )
!
; -
<
++++ )
; -
<
++++ 2 !
2
)
;9 -
<
! %
! % ! " !
! !
" 2 / ('
(
#
,
'!
,
!
) ++94
!
;-
<)
'+'4 ; ) ++ ++++ +++ ++<
;-
<)
+++4; ) ++++ ++++ ++++ +++<
;-
<
) +54
2
!
2
! ++ !
++94 2 $ " 2 !
! "
; 2/ " " ! ! ! <
&
- !
('
(
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
'!
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
)
:" ; 85 <
++++ ,,,
! "
+
)
:" ;3 -
<
++++++++ 0 )
;9 -
<
! %
: ! " # " $ " 0 " ! %91 %97'
; "(
< -
('
(
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
'!
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
:" ) %7+
:" $ ;-
<
) '++++4
;-
<
) +74
4 '++++ " %7+
;! '++++ -
'++++ 85 " <
)& &#
//122/+
&# "# . 3/
!
!
///////
///////
///////
'
- !
('
(
(
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
)
'!
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
0 0
:" ; 85 <
++++ +,,
!
"
)
:" ; + <
++ : !
"
9 + )
;9 -
<
! %
: ! " # " " ('
(
(
-
3
,
!
3
3
'!
,
:" ) %9+
:" ;-
<
) /6/%
;-
<
) +4
4 2/6/% " %9+
)
.
!
A>0B
-
0 0
*
*
,
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
'!
0 0
0 0
'
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
)
; 85 <
++++ ,,,,
5) 6) 1 7) 7) ) )
4)
# * )
3 ** ) 2
# 16 )
3 ** ) 2
2
2 * )
3 ** ) 2
)
% !
;9 85 <
+ +'
5) 6) 1 7) 7) ) )
8 1 7) 7) 2
# * )
# 16 )
2 * )
)
) ; -
<
+ 5) 6) 1 7) 7) ) )
') 4) 7)
# * )
( )) 4)
# 16 )
# 16 4
2 * )
2 4)
2 9 )
2 : )
: " D :
$
!
)
;9 -
<
! %
% #
;# # !
!
< $ 4!$ ! " ) % " " ) " 19 2. (% " 9&+
$ #
% # ! !
" # ! " : -" ! !
9 ;85< ! !
('
-
'!
,
,
!
# ) ++4
% !
# ) 4
0 ;-
<
) 74 ; %9 85<
) +4
%$ #
% # ! # ; "< : -" ! " -
1 ; "< # /% ;<
('
-
,
5
'
'!
,
!
# ) +4
% !
# ) 4
# ;-
<
) 3+3+4
;# " " ) /%<
) .4
&$ #
% !
! ! !
! " # : " ! !
! ! "
" " !
! ; ;G @< !
!< : -" ! !
!
%& "
" G) 93+ @) ,,
('
-
,
+
7
7
'
'
'
5
'!
,
3 2 4) 1 22 * ) ; '
4) 1 7) 2 22 * ) ;
'
( )) 4) .7)<) */
; . )) 8
',/
2 9 ) .7)<) */
; . ',/
2 : ) .7)<) */
; . ',/
'7) = ; 5
') 1
) ) 1)
7) 7)
9 ; ! < ;
< + ; < # /%(/ : " ! " " # ! !
6% # ;# " ) /%< . ! # ! !
6%
# ;# " ) /< !
('
(
-
0 0
,
0 0
0 0
0 0
'
*
*
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
'!
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
)
!
# ; 85 <
++++ ,,,,
)
% !
;9 85 <
+ 7+
)
; -
<
+ : " D :
$
!
)
;9 -
<
%
% # *
-
( !
('
-
'
.
/
./
'!
,
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
)
"( ; 85 <
+ ) .
) #
)
/" # !
;9 85 <
-
++ ; <
)
;9 -
<
+ / [email protected] 26" ! " ! "
('
-
'
'!
,
,
4
)
;9 -
<
! ;-
2+84<
% " 2++ !$ 2+ ;'4 '+4< ! " 8 ; !<
" # 6% # 6% $ 25" 0 ! 25
. ! !
" $ 20 # ! 25
! # " . :
! # " 8
2+ ; < " " ! # !
; # " / # < ! : # $
! ! "
# 2# ; "
!
/;+<< " / 0 !
('
!
!
.
/
./
'!
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
)
"( ; 85 <
+ ) .
) #
)
;9 -
<
+ %
" # 6= " ; ! " " " # < #
# " 1
-
!
('
!
0 0
)
'!
0 0
0 0
0 0
,
> ;9 85 <
+ ) :$
. - +9 ) "
+' ) 6 !
( + ) "( " . $ "
"( "
+7 ) . "
-"
!
"
! 7 " +& ) 6
= . = " + ) "
$ $ ! 2# " ! ! # " 8
) . " $ ;
! 2 . ! /% <
)
;9 -
<
: $
# ! $
SECTION 10
Function Applications
This section presents a collection of simple practical examples that will give you hints on how to make best use of the functions of the NT631/NT631C.
Please use these examples for reference when using the NT631/NT631C.
10-1 Examples of Actual Applications of Direct Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2 Examples of Actual Applications of Memory Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
586
600
587
Section 10-1
Examples of Actual Applications of Direct Access
10-1
Examples of Actual Applications of Direct Access
Some examples that will give you an idea of how to actually apply the functions of
the NT631/NT631C such as those indicated below are presented here.
S Continually monitoring a specific PC bit and displaying an alarm when it comes
ON ...... page 588
S Changing display contents in accordance with PC bit status ..... page 593
S Displaying online help with a touch switch ..... page 596
S Continually monitoring a specific PC bit and displaying a message on a window
when it comes ON ..... page 597
S Continuously reading out the contents of a PC word and displaying a thend
graph by backtracking ..... page 599
S Displaying the day of the week using the clock data in the PT ..... page 600
In these examples, only the necessary settings are shown. Make the unspecified
settings according to your requirements. In some of the examples, colors other
than black and white are used for the display colors; note that these examples can
be applied even with monochrome type PTs, for example by setting the display of
black and white in reverse video.
For the method for creating screens with the Support Tool, refer to the NT-Series
Support Tool Ver. 3.0E for Windows95/98 Operation Manual (V053-E1-j).
Continually Monitoring a Specific PC Bit and Displaying an Alarm When It Comes ON
Example:
Displaying “TEMPERATURE ABNORMAL” in red, regardless of the screen currently displayed, when the monitored bit at the PC comes ON.
NT631/NT631C
TEMPERATURE
ABNORMAL
PC
ON
Bit
1
Alarm list
(1) Set “TEMPERATURE ABNORMAL” as the initial value for any character
string memory table.
(2) Make the following settings for any bit memory table.
588
- PC Address:
PC bit number to be monitored
- Function:
Alarm
- String table entry:
Number of the character string memory table for
which settings were made in (1).
Section 10-1
Examples of Actual Applications of Direct Access
(3) Register an alarm list, set as indicated below, for any screen.
- “Color” setting, “Frame”:
Black (same as the background color of other screens)
- “Color” setting, “Background”, “ON”:
Red
- List Settings:
Set the “Start Bit Table Entry” and “No. of Bits Referenced” so as to include
the bit memory table set in (2) above.
(4) Set overlapping screens so that all screens displayed on the PT are overlapped by the screen created in (3).
Hints
S In order to display “TEMPERATURE ABNORMAL” with no frame, make its
background color the same as that of other screens (“Alarm list”, page 396).
S So that “TEMPERATURE ABNORMAL” is displayed regardless of which screen
is currently displayed, display the overlapping screens created in (4) at the PT
(“Overlapping Screens”, page 248).
S As an alternative to making every screen an overlapping screen, the same result
can be achieved by registering an alarm list on every screen.
Example:
Displaying a screen with “TEMPERATURE ABNORMAL” in black on a red background when the monitored PC bit comes ON.
NT631/NT631C
PC
ON
Bit
1
Screen switched
TEMPERATURE
ABNORMAL
(1) Set the properties of the screen displayed when the bit comes ON as follows.
- “Background” color:
Red
(2) Register a fixed display text element for the screen set in (1) as follows.
- Text:
TEMPERATURE ABNORMAL
- “Foreground” color:
Black
- “Background” color:
Transparent
589
Section 10-1
Examples of Actual Applications of Direct Access
(3) Make the following settings for any bit memory table.
- PC Address:
Number of the PC bit to be monitored
- Function:
Switch screen
- Screen No.:
Number of the screen set in (1) and (2)
Hints
S In this method, after switching to the error screen, the error screen remains displayed even if the status of the monitored PC bit changes back from ON to OFF
(7-3-3 “Bit Memory Tables”, page 289). After checking the error at the equipment, one of the following methods must be used to return to the screen that was
displayed before the error occurred: using a touch switch with the switch screen
function (page 328), writing a screen number to the control area (page 260), or
switching the screen by using a bit memory table (page 289).
Example:
Displaying a screen that shows details of the error when the “TEMPERATURE ABNORMAL” alarm message is pressed.
NT631/NT631C
192_C 165_C 183_C
TEMPERATURE
ABNORMAL
Alarm list
250_C 180_C 175_C
Error location displayed in red
(1) Set “TEMPERATURE ABNORMAL” as the initial value for any character
string memory table.
(2) Make the following settings for any bit memory table.
- PC Address:
PC bit number to be monitored
- Function:
Alarm
- Switch screen:
Check mark set
- Screen No.:
Number of the screen that displays details of the error (refer to (4))
- String table entry:
Number of the character string memory table for which settings were made
in (1).
590
Section 10-1
Examples of Actual Applications of Direct Access
(3) Register an alarm list, set as indicated below, for any screen.
- “Color” setting, “Background”, “ON”:
Red
- List Settings:
Set the “Start Bit Table Entry” and “No. of Bits Referenced” so as to include
the bit memory table set in (2) above.
(4) Register the following elements on the screen that displays the error details.
Numeral displays that display the temperature in each part
_C
_C
_C
_C
_C
_C
Image/library lamp corresponding to each part
(When the bit that indicates the error location comes ON,
the corresponding image/library lamp lights in red.)
Hints
S The ladder program must be written so that at the same time as the bit that indicates the temperature error comes ON, the bit that indicates the error location
for the relevant temperature also comes ON.
Example:
Displaying a screen with details of the times at which alarms occurred in the past
when the “TEMPERATURE ABNORMAL” alarm message is pressed.
NT631/NT631C
TEMPERATURE ABNORMAL13:12
TEMPERATURE
ABNORMAL
Alarm list
CONVEYOR STOPPED
11:47
PROCESS 3 STOPPED
11:23
Alarm history
(1) Set “TEMPERATURE ABNORMAL” as the initial value for any character
string memory table.
591
Section 10-1
Examples of Actual Applications of Direct Access
(2) Make the following settings for any bit memory table.
- PC Address:
PC bit number to be monitored
- Function:
Alarm
- History:
Check mark set
- Switch screen:
Check mark set
- Screen No.:
Number of the screen that displays the alarm history (refer to (4))
- String table entry:
Number of the character string memory table for which settings were made
in (1).
(3) Register an alarm list, set as indicated below, for any screen.
- “Color” setting, “Background”, “ON”:
Red
- List Settings:
Set the “Start Bit Table Entry” and “No. of Bits Referenced” so as to include
the bit memory table set in (2) above.
(4) Register the set alarm history as follows on the screen that displays the alarm
history.
- History Info: Check mark set
- Order type:
Order of occurrence
Hints
S When designating the screen number with a bit memory table, the alarm history
can also be displayed by designating the following screen numbers.
- No. 9001: Occurrence History Screen (page 436)
- No. 9002: Frequency History Screen (page 436)
In this case, there is no need to register an alarm list.
Example:
Displaying the corrective action (help information) when the alarm message
“TEMPERATURE ABNORMAL” is pressed.
NT631/NT631C
Library data
Inspect ...
TEMPERATURE
ABNORMAL
Alarm list
592
TEMPERATURE
ABNORMAL
Section 10-1
Examples of Actual Applications of Direct Access
(1) Set “TEMPERATURE ABNORMAL” as the initial value for any character
string memory table.
(2) Create library data, registering for it a fixed display text element in which the
corrective action for the temperature alarm (for example “Inspect ...”) is written.
(3) Make the following settings for any bit memory table.
- PC Address:
PC bit number to be monitored
- Function:
Alarm
- String table entry:
Number of the character string memory table for which settings were made
in (1)
- Image/library code:
Check mark set, code of the library data created in (2)
(4) Register an alarm list, set as indicated below, for any screen.
- “Color” setting, “Background”, “ON”:
Red
- “Display ImageLib”:
Check mark set
- List Settings:
Set the “Start Bit Table Number” and “No. of Bits Referenced” so as to include the bit memory table set in (3) above.
Changing Display Contents in Accordance with PC Bit Status
Example:
Changing the status of a graphic depicting the opening and closing of a valve in
accordance with the status of one PC bit.
NT631/NT631C
PC
OFF state
Bit
ON/OFF
0 OFF
1 ON
ON state
593
Section 10-1
Examples of Actual Applications of Direct Access
(1) Create figures depicting the valve when open (“A” in the figure below) and the
valve when closed (“B” in the figure below), either by using library data (fixed
display graphic) or image data (comprised of dots).
A
B
(2) Register image/library data set as indicated below for the screen.
- “OFF State”, “Code”:
Check mark set, code of the figure depicting the closed valve created in (1)
- “ON State”, “Code”:
Check mark set, code of the figure depicting the open valve created in (1)
- PC Address:
Number of the bit used to change between the figures
Example:
When the displayed character string is changed in accordance with the status of
one PC bit
NT631/NT631C
TRANSPORTING
PC
OFF state
Bit
ON/OFF
0 OFF
1 ON
TRANSPORT
OVER
ON state
(1) Create library data with fixed display text reading “TRANSPORTING”, and
another library data with fixed display text reading “TRANSPORT OVER”.
(2) Register an image/library lamp set as indicated below for the screen.
- “OFF State”, “Code”:
Check mark set, code of the library data reading “TRANSPORTING”
created in (1)
- “ON State”, “Code”:
Check mark set, code of the library data reading “TRANSPORT OVER”
created in (1)
- PC Address:
Number of the bit used to change between the text items
594
Section 10-1
Examples of Actual Applications of Direct Access
Example:
PC bits 0 to 15 come ON according to the position of an automatic guided vehicle,
and the position of the vehicle is shown on the screen.
NT631/NT631C
PC
Automatic guided vehicle
at bit 0 position
15
0 Bits
Automatic guided vehicle
at bit 1 position
(1) Create figures depicting the automatic guided vehicle with library data (fixed
display graphics) or image data (composed of dots). If there is a figure with a
different orientation, create it separately.
(2) Register image/library lamp set as shown below for the position corresponding to bit 0 on the screen.
- “OFF State”, “Code”:
Check mark not set
- “ON State”, “Code”:
Check mark set, code for the library data for the automatic guided vehicle
created in (1) (shape corresponding to the position)
- PC Address:
Bit number of bit 0 indicating the automatic guided vehicle’s position
(3) Register image/library lamps set for bits 1 to 15 in the same way as in (2).
Reference
With NT631/NT631C, once an element has been drawn, it is not redrawn unless
the display contents change (this applies even with overlapping screens). Consequently, if a rail is drawn as a fixed display element underneath the automatic
guided vehicle, when the automatic guided vehicle moves, the rail underneath the
position where the automatic guided vehicle was originally placed, cleared together as the vehicle moves. Bear this in mind when creating the screen data.
The rail is cleared.
595
Section 10-1
Examples of Actual Applications of Direct Access
Displaying Online Help with a Touch Switch
Example:
Displaying help information in a window when a touch switch is pressed.
NT631/NT631C
How to
use ...
HELP
Window opens
Close
HELP
Window closes
(1) Create a new screen as a keyboard screen.
(2) Register help information as text and graphics for the screen created in (1).
(3) Make settings like those indicated below to register a touch switch for the
screen created in (1).
- Label:
Check mark set, Description “Close”
- Function:
Input key – keyboard
- Keyboard screen No.: Number of keyboard screen currently being created
- Action type:
Close
(4) Specify the area to be displayed as a window, making sure that it will accommodate the help information and the touch switch created in (3).
(5) Register a touch switch on the screen on which the help information is to be
displayed (base screen), making the following settings for it.
- Label:
Check mark set, Description “HELP”
- Function:
Input key – keyboard
- Keyboard screen No.: Numbers of keyboard screens created in (1) to (4)
- Action type:
Open
By setting the action type of the touch switch on the base screen as “Toggle”, the
window can be opened and closed from the base screen.
596
Section 10-1
Examples of Actual Applications of Direct Access
Continually Monitoring a Specific PC Bit and Displaying a Message on a Window When It Comes ON
Example:
Opening a window and displaying an error message on it when the monitored bit at
the PC comes ON.
NT631/NT631C
PC
Bit
TEMPERATURE
ABNORMAL
MOVE
ON
CLOSE
Window
(1) Set “TEMPERATURE ABNORNAL” as the initial value for any character
string memory table.
(2) Make the following settings for any bit memory table.
- PC Address:
PC bit number to be monitored
- Function:
Alarm
- String table entry:
Number of the character string memory table for
which settings were made in (1).
(3) Register an alarm list, set as indicated below, for window screen.
- List Settings:
Set the “Start Bit Table Entry” and “No. of Bits
Referenced” so as to include the bit memory table
set in (2) above.
(4) Register “Window Move” touch switch and “Window Close” touch switch on a
window same as (3).
597
Section 10-1
Examples of Actual Applications of Direct Access
(5) Create the following ladder program so that the window is opened from the
host when the bit comes ON. (Word numbers are not shown in the ladder program below, set the value when programming.)
error bit
@MOV(21)
Window screen No.
Word of the
“Screen No.”
in window
control area
@MOV(21)
Value for X coordinate
Word of “X
coordinate in
Window control area
@MOV(21)
Value for Y coordinate
Word of “Y
coordinate”
in window
control area
@MOV(21)
error bit
#0000
Word of
“Screen No.”
in window
control area
With this ladder program, the specified window is displayed at the designated
position when the error bit comes ON, and the window is closed when the error bit goes OFF.
Hints
S Window can be moved closed or opened by the operation of touch switch, when
the window move touch switch is registered on the window like the example
above.
S Detailed screen is displayed, or the screen is switched by pressing on the message position in an alarm list on the window. (Refer to page 590)
S Multiple windows can be displayed at the same time (up to three windows). (Refer to page 430)
S It is possible to display windows so that they do not overlap when multiple windows are displayed, since the position of each window can be specified. (Refer
to page 481)
S When the windows are overlapped, the displaying order of windows can be
changed by touching the window which is displayed under the other window.
(Refer to page 433)
598
Section 10-1
Examples of Actual Applications of Direct Access
Continuously Reading Out the Contents of a PC Word and Displaying a Trend Graph by Backtracking
Example:
Utilizing the trend graph logging function and background function
(1) Register a trend graph set as indicated below for the screen.
- Line Properties:
Word No. of the PC word to be monitored
- Data Logging:
Check mark set
- Background:
Check mark set
- Touch switches for logging:
Check marks set for all
- Touch switches for display function:
Check marks set for all
Regardless of whether or not the trend graph is displayed, reading of the contents of the word starts at the same time as PT operation is started.
START
OPERATION
Due to the background function, data reading is started at the
same time as operation is started.
↓
When the trend graph screen is displayed, the latest status is displayed.
The latest trend graph is displayed on the basis of collected
data.
↓
Even if another screen is displayed during data collection, the contents of the
word continue being read by the background function.
Other screen
Data collected while
the other screen was
displayed.
↓
599
Section 10-1
Examples of Actual Applications of Direct Access
If required, past status changes can be displayed as a trend graph.
Old
Part being displayed
“Previous Page”
(Rewind)
touch switch
New
“Next Page”
(Forward)
touch switch
Hints
S Apart from the “Previous Page” (Rewind) and “Next Page” (Forward) touch
switches indicated above, the following touch switches can be created without
restriction to control the display and data recording (7-10-4 “Trend Graphs”,
page 381).
- “Stop” touch switch
Stops data sampling.
- “Restart” (Continue) touch switch
Restarts data sampling when it has been stopped.
- “Display Clear” (Clear display) touch switch
Clears the currently displayed trend graph, then starts drawing the graph from
the new status (past records are retained).
- “Log Clear” (Clear log) touch switch
Clears past records.
Displaying the Day of the Week Using Clock Data in the PT
At the PT, numeric values are stored in numeral memory table No. 253 as shown
below.
Value (decimal)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Day of week
Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
By indirect reference of character string displays, the displayed characters are
changed using these values to change, the character string memory table whose
contents are to be displayed.
Example:
Displaying “Sun” to “Sat”, stored in character string memory tables No. 0 to 6, by
indirect reference of numeral memory table No. 253.
Fixed display text
Display of numeric value in
numeral memory table No. 251
Display of numeric value in
numeral memory table No. 250
600
3 / 12 (Thu)
The display here is explained
in this example.
Section 10-1
Examples of Actual Applications of Direct Access
(1) Set the initial values indicated below for character string memory tables No. 0
to No. 6. Do not allocate these character string memory tables to words at the
host.
Character string memory table
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Initial value
Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
(2) Register the part that displays the month and day for the screen, following the
example given above.
(3) Register the part that displays the day of the week by indirect specification of a
character string display, as indicated below.
- Indirect Reference:
Check mark set
- Table Entry:
253 (numeral memory table that stores the day of the week data)
The settings above will display the month and day set with the “calendar and clock”
in the System Menu.
Hints
S The clock data can be set on the “CALENDAR & CLOCK SET” screen in the
System Menu (page 211).
S To set the year, month, date, and day of the week in numeral memory tables 254
and 255, the memory table copy function must be used (pages 498 and 503).
S If character string memory tables No. 0 to No. 6 are used for other applications at
the same time as they are used to display the day of the week.
(1) Copy the contents of numeral memory table 253 to a number that can be
allocated to a PC word by using the memory table copy function.
(2) To achieve correspondence between the numbers of the character string
memory tables that store “Sun” to “Sat” and the contents of numeral
memory table No. 253 (0 to 6), add a constant.
(3) Display the day of the week indirectly by following the example above.
Example:
Storing “Sun” to “Sat” in character string memory tables No. 200 to
206.
Character string
memory table
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
Initial value
Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Adding 200 to the contents of numeral memory table No. 253 enables indirect specification of the character string memory tables
that store Sun to Sat.
601
Section 10-2
Examples of Actual Applications of Memory Link
10-2
Examples of Actual Applications of Memory Link
Some examples that will give you an idea of how to actually apply the memory link
are presented below.
S Switching screen by the operation at PT control area
Page 602
S To know the event that a numeral/character string is input to PT
Page 603
The examples below give you the explanation centered on which commands are
sent to apply the function and the method to use the responses returned from PT.
For method on using programming language which is run at the host, refer to the
manual of each programming language etc. For details of commands used with
memory link, refer to Section 9 “Using Memory Link”.
Switching screen by the operation at PT control area
Example:
Switching screen by the operation at PT control area:
Allocated word in PT control area: 0100CH
Host
NT631/NT631C
Command
Screen No. 10
Screen No. 15
Use “PT memory write command” (sent from host to PT) for this case since it is
necessary to write new screen number to the first word in PT control area.
S Command
[ESC]
W
M
8
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
F
[CR]
1B
57
4D
38
30
31
30
30
30
30
30
46
0D
(1)
(2)
(3)
S Explanation
602
(1) Write attribute
word)
: Check sum absent, SET attribute (writing 1
(2) First word No. written
Number of words written
: 0100CH
: Omitted, since the write attribute is as above.
(3) Data of written word
: 000FH
Section 10-2
Examples of Actual Applications of Memory Link
Screen switch is executed by writing the screen number to the first word in PT control area.
In this example, screen is switched from screen No.10 to screen No.15.
“000F” is specified in the example above since it is necessary to specify data of
written word in PT memory write command in binary.
If “Yes” is set for the “Response” memory switch for the communication setting of
memory link, the response indicated below is returned from PT after sending command. (If “No” is set, no responses will be returned.)
S Response
[ESC]
W
M
0
0
1
F
[CR]
1B
57
4D
38
30
31
46
0D
S Explanation
Format of response is fixed.
Hint
S In the same way, by changing the status of PT control bit, buzzer can be beeped
or backlight ON/OFF status can be controlled from the host. see page ??
S By writing the value in window control area, it is possible to control window
(open/close/move). see page ??)
S Use “bit memory table write command” to switch screens by the operation of bit
memory table. see page ??
To know the event that a numeral/character string is input to PT
Example:
Host
NT631/NT631C
Production
volume
No. of
parts
0001
Numeral data
0005
Processed data
Numeral input and numeral display
(Input production volume number
of required parts is calculated at
the host
The returned result is displayed)
When the numeral was input on PT, “numeral input notify command” (sent from PT
to host) is issued from the PT. At the host, numeral data was taken out and processed, then it is written to the PT by the “numeral memory table write command”
(sent from host to PT).
603
Section 10-2
Examples of Actual Applications of Memory Link
(1) When numeral data is input on PT (“numeral input notify command” sent from
PT to host):
S Command
[ESC]
S
N
0
1
4
2
1B
53
4E
30
31
34
32
(1)
0
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
30
30
30
30
30
30
46
30
(2)
1
9
[CR]
31
39
0D
(3)
S Explanation
- Numeral memory table number
: 142
- Input numeral
: 00000000F0H (240 in decimal)
- Check sum
: 19H
It is ascertained that “240” is input to numeral memory table No.142. With numeral
input notify command, input numeral data is expressed as binary. Here, input data
(240) is expressed as binary (000000F0H).
(2) When numeral is written to PT (“numeral memory table write command” (sent
from host to PT) )
S Command
[ESC]
W
N
8
0
1
4
2
1B
57
4E
38
30
31
34
32
(1)
(2)
0
0
0
0
0
4
B
0
[CR]
30
30
30
30
30
34
42
30
0D
(3)
604
Section 10-2
Examples of Actual Applications of Memory Link
S Explanation
- Check sum present/absent
: None (writing 1 word)
- First numeral memory table No. written : 142
- Data of written numeral memory table : 000004B0H (1200 in decimal)
In this way, numeral data which is input from the PT is processed at the host and
the result is notified to the PT.
Hints
S Same as numeral, “character string input notify command” (sent from PT to
host) is issued from the PT for the character string which is input at PT. (see
page )
S Character string which is input from bar code reader is also notified to the host.
(see page )
S Data of numeral/character string memory table can be cleared by “memory table
clear command”. (Numerals are cleared to “0”, and character strings are cleared
to the space code “20 H”) (see page )
605
SECTION 11
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
This section describes the action to take when NT631/NT631C errors occur, and how to carry out maintenance and inspection
to prevent the occurrence of errors.
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responding to Displayed Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-1 Errors Occurring at Start of Operation and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-2 Errors Occurring during Operation and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-3 Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization and Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-4 Errors in the System Installer Mode and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-5 Communication Errors and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-1 Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
606
609
609
611
612
613
614
616
622
624
607
Section 11-1
Troubleshooting
11-1
Troubleshooting
When a fault relating to the operation of the NT631/NT631C occurs, find the symptoms in the table below and respond by following the corresponding “Remedy” indicated in the table.
Notice
- Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF or resetting.
- Do not disassemble the PT for repair or modification.
NT631/NT631C
Symptoms
Power LED fails to come
ON
Nothing is displayed on
the screen.
Cannot communicate with
the Support Tool
Cannot communicate with
the host
Cannot switch from the
system initializing screen.
Communication error
message is displayed
when communicating to
the host.
The buzzer has sounded
and the RUN LED is OFF.
The touch panel does not
respond.
608
Cause
Remedy
Power is not being supplied.
Check the connections and make sure that power is
supplied correctly. (3-1-3 “Power Supply Connection”,
page 39)
Power supply fuse has blown.
Contact your OMRON service center.
Screen No. 0 has been read at the
host side.
This is not an error. Change the screen number. (8-3
“Screen Display and Notification”, page 469)
The system startup waiting time has
not elapsed yet.
This is not an error. The display will appear after the
waiting time has elapsed.
The Transmit mode has not been
established.
Display the System Menu and select the Transmit
mode. (6-6 “Transmitting the Screen Data”, page 169)
Not connected to the Support Tool.
Check the installation of the connector cable. (3-2
“Connecting to the Support Tool”, page 41)
The PT model setting and direct
connection setting at the Support
Tool do not match the
NT631/NT631C.
Using the “PT Configuration” settings of the Support
Tool, set the PT model and direct connection settings
that match the NT631/NT631C.
Memory switch settings do not
match.
Check the communication setting in the “Memory
Switch” menu of the Maintenance mode, and match
the communication protocol settings for the host and
NT631/NT631C. (6-7 “Setting the Conditions for
Communications with the Host by Using the Memory
Switches”, page 172)
NT631/NT631C and host are not
correctly connected.
Check that the type, length, and installation of the
connector cable match the specifications. (Section 4
“Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port”, and
Section 5 “Connecting to the Host from the
RS-422A/485 Port”)
In an RS-422A/485 connection, the
terminator setting is incorrect.
Make the NT631/NT631C and PC termination
resistance settings correctly. (Section 4 “Connecting
to the Host from the RS-232C Port”, and Section 5
“Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port”)
In an NT link (1:N) connection, there
is duplication in the unit numbers.
Make the settings again so that there is no duplication.
(6-7-4 “Setting the NT Link (1:N) Method”, page 177)
The power to the NT631/NT631C,
NT-AL001 or host is OFF.
Check the power supply.
Malfunction due to external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 “Grounding”, page 40.
The NT631/NT631 has developed
trouble.
Contact your OMRON service center.
Malfunction due to external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 “Grounding”, page 40.
The touch panel is broken.
Test the touch panel with “I/O Check” in the
MAINTENANCE MODE menu. If there is an error,
contact your OMRON service center.
Section 11-1
Troubleshooting
NT631/NT631C
Symptoms
Cause
Remedy
The PC mode has
changed to the monitor
mode.
The NT631/NT631C changes the
mode when host link communication
is used.
This is an NT631/NT631C specification. When using
a PC that can also be connected using the NT link
method, use an NT link connection (there is no mode
change with the NT link method).
The graph display does
not change.
One of the percentage display
settings — “−100%”, “0%”, or “100%”
— is incorrect.
Set the “−100%”, “0%”, and “100%” values in the
following relationship:
−100% value < 0% value < 100% value
The trend graph display
does not agree with the
actual time axis.
The cycle for graph display update
processing is longer than the set
sampling cycle.
Delete other elements on the same screen as the
trend graph that are allocated to the host and have a
high update frequency. Or lengthen the sampling
cycle.
The programming console The communication settings are
function cannot be used.
incorrect.
The memory table display
contents differ from the
initial value set at the
Support Tool.
Updating of numeric
values and text is
delayed.
Some of the elements
arranged on a normal
screen are not displayed.
Set the communication method/communication port
as follows when using the programming console
function.
- With C series PLC : NT Link : 1 : 1
- With CS1 series PLC : NT Link : 1 : N
A programming console is
connected.
It is not possible to use a programming console and
the programming console function at the same time.
Disconnect the programming console.
The PC does not support the
programming console function.
Not all PCs support the programming console
function. Check the model of PC you are using.
(6-12 “Programming Console Function”, page 237)
Since the memory table is allocated
to the host memory, the display is
updated in accordance with the
contents of the host memory.
When the contents of the memory table are set as a
fixed value, do not allocate the memory table to the
host.
The battery voltage has dropped and
the data in the memory table has
been destroyed.
Replace the battery and execute “memory table
initialization”. (11-3-1 “Replacing the Battery”, page
624, and 6-4-4 “Initializing the Memory Tables”, page
161)
Since ON is set for the “resume
function”, the initial values of the
screen data memory are not written
to the memory tables.
Execute “memory table initialization”. (6-4-4
“Initializing the Memory Tables”, page 161)
If the resume function does not need to be used, use
the NT631/NT631C with the resume function OFF.
(6-9-10 “Setting the Resume Function”, page 199)
Malfunction due to external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 “Grounding”, page 40.
There are too many numeral/text
displays on the displayed screen.
Reduce the number of numeral/text displays on the
screen for which updating is delayed.
The cycle time is extended due to
heavy processing at the host.
Shorten the host cycle time.
In an RS–422A/485 connection,
there is illegal branching or an
erroneous terminator setting.
Wire correctly by referring to Section 5 “Connecting to
the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port”.
The quantity of read data exceeds
the stipulated restriction.
Check the maximum number of elements by referring
to “Display Restrictions” (page 635), create the screen
data again, then transmit all of the screen data in a
batch to the NT631/NT631C.
The total of the element coefficients
for the displayed screen is greater
than 1024.
On an overlapping screen, Since the data is transmitted from the
some of the set elements host in screen units, the number of
are not displayed.
elements on the overlapping screen
has exceeded the maximum
permissible without being checked
by the Support Tool.
Check the maximum number of elements by referring
to “Display Restrictions” (page 635), create the screen
data again, then send all the screen data in a batch to
the NT631/NT631C.
609
Section 11-1
Troubleshooting
NT631/NT631C
Symptoms
Cause
Remedy
The System Menu cannot
be called up.
“Display System Menu” under
“Change System Settings” in the
System Installer mode is set to
“Disabled”.
In the System Installer mode, set “Display System
Menu” to “Enabled” (page 167).
The following System
Menu operations are not
possible.
- Establishing the
Transmit mode
- Displaying the memory
switch setting screens
- Screen data memory
check
- Displaying the
initialization menu
- Displaying the
calendar/time setting
screen
“Screen Memory Protect” under
“Change System Setting” in the
System Installer mode is set to
“Disabled”.
In the System Installer mode, set “Screen Memory
Protect” to “Enabled” (page 167).
“Screen Memory Protect” has been
set to “Disabled” because the PT
power supply was turned OFF during
deletion of screen data.
Do not turn the PT power OFF during deletion of
screen data.
In the System Installer mode, first change the setting
for “Screen Memory Protect” to “Enabled”, then
repeat the screen data delete operation (pages 167
and 168)
Cannot input numeric
values
The upper/lower (max./min.) limit
check for numeric value input is in
effect.
Check the screen data’s upper/lower (max./min.) limit
check setting for numeric value input, and correct it if
necessary (for numeric key type, refer to page 414; for
thumbwheel type, refer to page 421).
Cannot input numeric
values/character strings.
Bit 5 of the PT status control area
Set bit 5 to “0” (OFF) (page 268).
(numeral/character string input) is set
to “1” (ON).
Window screen does not
open
Bit 6 of the PT status control area
(PT window opening) is set to “1”
(ON).
Set bit 6 to “0” (OFF) (page 268).
Cannot switch screens
with touch switches
Bit 4 of the PT status control area
(PT screen switching) is set to “1”
(ON).
Set bit 4 to “0” (OFF) (page 268).
The display is dim.
Insufficient contrast or brightness
Increase the contrast/brightness (pages 208 and 209).
Backlight defective, or its life has
expired
Replace the backlight (page 619).
The contrast is too high.
Reduce the contrast (page 208).
The display is too faint.
610
Section 11-2
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
11-2
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
When the NT631/NT631C displays an error message, find the corresponding
symptoms in the appropriate table below and respond by following the “Remedy”
indicated in the table.
For details of the error messges displayed when using memory unit and corrective
action to take for them, refer to 3-5 “Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C with
V1)”
in page 46 or 3-6 “Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C without V1)” in
page 56.
11-2-1
Errors Occurring at Start of Operation and Their Remedies
The table below shows the errors that can occur when the power to the
NT631/NT631C is turned ON and when operation starts, and their remedies.
Cause
Remedy
[No Comm. Protocol]
Set the comm. Protocol by
MAINTENANCE MODE.
Message
No communication protocol has
been set.
Communication protocol and
screen data type are mismatched
Using the memory switches, set the
communication method to be used for
communication with the host. (6-7 “Setting
the Conditions for Communications with the
Host by Using the Memory Switches”, page
172)
[Screen Data Error]
Screen Data corrupted.
Initialize Screen Memory, and download
Screen Data again.
- The power was switched OFF
during screen data
initialization, checking, or
transmission.
- Transmission of screen data
was interrupted.
- Illegal data has been written to
the screen data memory.
Initialize the screen data memory by
operation at the System Menu, then
re-transmit the screen data. (6-4-1
“Clearing Screen Data”, page 156)
If the problem persists, contact your
OMRON service center.
[No Screen Data]
No Screen Data is saved in Screen
Memory.
Download Screen Data using by the
Support Tool.
Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT
MODE, and download Screen Data
again.
No screen data is registered.
Transmit screen data from the Support
Tool.
[No Direct Connection Info.]
No Direct Connection Information is set
in Screen Data.
Set Direct Connecting Information in
Screen Data using by the Support Tool.
Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT
MODE and download Screen Data
again.
Allocated words have not been
set for the PT status control area
and PT status notify area.
Allocate words for the PT status control
area and PT status notify area with the
Support Tool and then transmit the direct
connection information to the
NT631/NT631C.
[Incorrect Screen Data]
Screen Data in Screen Memory do not
match with the System Program.
Initialize Screen Memory, and download
Screen Data again.
The type of registered screen
data does not match that at the
NT631/NT631C.
Initialize the screen data memory, then
transmit the correct screen data. (6-4-1
“Clearing Screen Data”, page 156)
[No Starting Screen]
Specified Starting Screen is not saved.
Fix Screen Data using by the Support
Tool.
Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT
MODE and download Screen Data
again.
No data is registered for either
the screen number set in the PT
status control area or the “Initial
Screen” set with the Support
Tool.
Or the screen number which
does not exist are registered.
Either specify a screen number for which
data is registered at the PT status control
area, or set the screen as the “Initial
Screen” in the “System” settings under “PT
Configuration” at the Support Tool.
611
Section 11-2
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
Message
Cause
Remedy
[Touch Panel is disconnected]
The touch panel cable (film
cable) inside the NT631/NT631C
is disconnected.
If this message appears after the backlight
is replaced, reinstall the touch panel
properly referring to “Replacing the
Backlight” (page 619). If the message
keeps appearing, contact your OMRON
service center.
[Memory Switch Corrupted]
Because Memory Switch setting was
last. Initialized Memory Switch setting.
Press Confirm to return to the SYSTEM
MENU.
The memory switches have been
initialized due to discovery of an
error in the memory switch
settings.
Set the memory switches again using the
System Menu and the “System” settings
under “PT Configuration” at the Support
Tool. (Section 6 “System Menu Operation”)
If the problem recurs, contact your OMRON
service center.
[Calendar Data Error]
Calendar Data is incorrect.
Set to the MAINTENANCE MODE and
set Calendar Data.
There is an error in the date/time
values due, for example, to low
battery voltage.
[Backup Data Error]
Memory table and History data was
initialized by backup failure.
It can be caused by lowered voltage of
the battery.
Initialization has been executed
because of an error in the
backup data area.
Check the battery voltage by checking the
color of the RUN LED and with the battery
check in the System Menu; if the voltage is
low, replace the battery with a new one.
(“Checking the Battery Voltage”, page 229,
and 11-3-1 “Replacing the Battery”, page
624)
If the battery voltage is confirmed to be
normal, set the calendar clock correctly
from the System Menu. (6-11-2
“Displaying/Setting the Calendar and
Clock”, page 211)
Check the battery voltage by checking the
color of the RUN LED and with the battery
check in the System Menu; if the voltage is
low, replace the battery with a new one.
(“Checking the Battery Voltage”, page 229,
and 11-3-1 “Replacing the Battery”, page
624) The re-transmit the memory table
data from the Support Tool.
If the voltage is normal and the problem
recurs, contact your OMRON service
center.
[With memory switch setting screen]
Invalid Comm. Method
Protocal settings for serial port A
and serial port B are
mismatched.
612
Refer to “Posable Combinations of
Communication Method Settings” in page
174 and set the propocal of serial port A
and serial port B sothat their settings are
matched.
* Set serial port A to “None” when
connecting the Support Tool and the host
at the same time.
Section 11-2
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
11-2-2
Errors Occurring during Operation and Their Remedies
The table below shows the errors that can occur during operation of the
NT631/NT631C and their remedies.
Cause
Remedy
[Address Setting Error]
Addressing Error exists in the
Screen.
Correct address setting by the
Support Tool.
Message
The host side allocated words
and bits set with the Support Tool
are incorrect.
Set correct words and bits after checking the area
used at the host side by referring to APPENDIX L
“PC Memory Map” (page 675), and the manual for
the PC being used.
[Memory Table No. Error]
Memory table No. is out of limit.
Correct the table No. by the
Support Tool.
The memory table number set
with the Support Tool is outside
the range for the number of
memory tables set in the system
memory.
Either increase the number of memory tables in
the “System” settings under “PT Configuration” at
the Support Tool, or set the memory table number
again within the established range.
[Programming Console Error]
Setting of Programming Console
Function is inadequate.
Confirm the PC model and
comm. protocol.
The communication settings are
incorrect.
Set the communication method/communication
port as follows when using the programming
console function.
- With C series PLC : NT Link : 1 : 1
- With CS1 series PLC : NT Link : 1 : N
The PC used does not support
the programming console
function.
Not all PCs support the programming console
function. Check the model of the PC you are
using. (6-12 “Programming Console Function”,
page 237)
The connecting cable is
defective.
Check the cable connection and perform a
conductivity test. If there is a fault, replace the
cable.
Malfunction due to external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 “Grounding”, page
40.
A programming console is
connected.
It is not possible to use a programming console
and the programming console function at the
same time. Disconnect the programming console.
The communication conditions at
the PC have been changed in
accordance with the
NT631/NT631C programming
console function.
Set the communication conditions at the PC to
match the conditions set in the System Menu.
[Programming Consol Error]
PROGRAMMING CONSOLE
function does not RUN.
It can be caused by:
S faulty connecting cable.
S Protocol mismatch between
the PT and PC.
Set the PC to NT LINK 1:1.
613
Section 11-2
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
11-2-3
Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization and Transmission
The table below shows the errors that can occur when the NT631/NT631C data is
initialized, and during data setting and transmission, and their remedies.
Message
Cause
Remedy
[Flash Memory Error]
Flash Memory I/O Error.
If this happens frequently, Flash
Memory may be broken.
Press Reset Switch to restart.
There is a hardware fault, or the
flash memory (memory for storing
screen data) has reached the
end of its service life.
If the same message is displayed even after
clearing the screen data or transmitting screen
data several times, contact your OMRON service
center.
[Calendar Data Error]
Calendar Data is incorrect.
Set to the MAINTENANCE
MODE and set Calendar Data.
Hardware fault, or system
program error
Set the calendar clock again from the System
Menu. If the problem recurs, delete the program in
the System Installer mode, then re-install the
program. (6-5-2 “Clearing/Installing the System
Program”, page 165)
If this does not solve the problem, contact your
OMRON service center.
[Tool Transmit Error]
∗∗∗∗ Error detected while
downloading by the following
case:
S faulty connecting cable.
S corrupted data by noise.
The connecting cable is
defective.
Check the cable connection and perform a
conductivity test. If there is a fault, replace the
cable. (APPENDIX F “Making the Cable for
Connecting a PC”, page 655)
Malfunction due to external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 “Grounding”, page
40.
[Tool Transmit Error]
Check Sum Error occurs while
downloading by the following
case:
S corrupted data by noise.
Malfunction due to external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 “Grounding”, page
40.
[Tool Transmit Error]
Time-out Error occurs while
downloading by the following
case:
S faulty connecting cable.
The connecting cable is
defective.
Check the cable connection and perform a
conductivity test. If there is a fault, replace the
cable.
[Tool Transmit Error]
Reception was failed by Buffer
Over Flow Error.
The receive buffer has
overflowed.
Retransmit the data from the Support Tool.
614
Section 11-2
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
11-2-4
Errors in the System Installer Mode and Their Remedies
This section describes the errors that may occur in the System Installer mode of
the NT631/NT631C, and the
remedies for these errors.
Message
Cause
Remedy
System Program not exist or
incorrect.
- The system program has not
been installed.
- The system program has been
deleted due to a hardware
fault, or because the flash
memory (memory for storing
the system program) has
reached its life.
Select “Download System Program” and download
the system program (6-5-2 “Clearing/Installing the
System Program”, page 165).
If this does not solve the problem, contact your
OMRON service center.
Unable to erase System
Program.
Hardware fault, or flash memory
(memory for storing the system
program) has reached its life.
If the same message is displayed on repeating
selection of “Download System Program” and
attempting to delete the system program several
times, contact your OMRON service center (6-5-2
“Clearing/Installing the System Program”, page
165).
Unable to download System
Program.
- A communication error
occurred during downloading
of the system program.
- Illegal data has been written
into the screen data memory.
- Hardware fault, or flash
memory (memory for storing
the system program) has
reached its life.
Select “Download System Program” and download
the system program again (6-5-2
“Clearing/Installing the System Program”, page
165).
Also refer to 11-2-3 “Errors Occurring on Screen
Data Initialization and Transmission” (page 614),
and take the corrective action described for tool
transmission errors.
If this does not solve the problem, contact your
OMRON service center.
Unable to write System Settings.
Hardware fault, or flash memory
(memory for storing the system
program) has reached its life.
If the same message is displayed on repeating
writing of system settings several times, contact
your OMRON service center.
If writing is normally terminated after the error
message was once displayed, the “Memory
Switch” setting for system program may have been
altered. In such a case, check and re-set the
setting in the “Memory Switch” menu of the
Maintenance mode.
Unable to erase Screen Data.
Hardware fault, or flash memory
(memory for storing the system
program) has reached its life.
If the same message is displayed on repeating
screen data deletion several times, contact your
OMRON service center.
615
Section 11-2
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
11-2-5
Communication Errors and Their Remedies
This section describes the errors relating to communication that can occur during
operation, and their remedies.
Operation When a Communication Error Occurs
When a communication error occurs, the error message is displayed at the
NT631/NT631C, and the buzzer sounds, provided the setting made for “Buzzer
Sound” in the System Menu is other than “OFF”. An error message is displayed
provided the setting for the “Comm. Auto-Return” memory switch is not “ON” (note
that some error messages are displayed even if the setting is “ON”).
Operation When Communication Errors Occur
When an error message is displayed, press the “OK” touch switch displayed on the
screen. The NT631/NT631C will return to the screen that was displayed before
the error occurred, and operation will restart.
Display of Communication Errors
For communication errors, the name of the port at which the error occurred, the
error classification (send or receive error), the details of the error, the probable
cause, and the remedy, are displayed as shown below.
Example:
Parity error at serial port A
S Receive errors
The following errors can occur when receiving data.
- Parity error
- Framing error
- Overrun error
- FCS (sum value) error
- Time out error
- Data over flow error
- PC unit No. error (host link only)
- NAK received (in the case of the host link, the end code is also displayed)
- Undefined command error
S Send errors
The following errors can occur when receiving data.
- Time out error
- Data over flow error
616
Section 11-2
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
Probable Causes and Remedies
The remedies to take in accordance with the displayed cause are indicated in the
table below.
Error Details
Parity Error
Framing Error
Over-run Error
FCS (Check Sum) Error
Time-out Error
PC Unit No. Error
Displayed Probable Cause
Remedy
Communication parameters/
conditions set incorrectly.
Check if the settings at the host for parity bit, frame
length, communications speed, stop bit length and
flow control agree with those at the NT631/NT631C.
The connecting cables are not
connected correctly.
Check the communication cable connection and
perform a conductivity test. If there is a fault, replace
the cable. For details on communication cables, refer
to Section 4 “Connecting to the Host from the
RS-232C Port”, and Section 5 “Connecting to the Host
from the RS-422A/485 Port”.
Noise caused data corruption during
communication.
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 “Grounding”, page 40.
Noise caused data corruption during
communication.
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 “Grounding”, page 40.
The PC is transmitting incorrect data.
Check the operation at the host side.
The connecting cables are not
connected correctly. (Send/Receive)
Check the communication cable connection and
perform a conductivity test. If there is a fault, replace
the cable. For details on communication cables, refer
to Section 4 “Connecting to the Host from the
RS-232C Port”, and Section 5 “Connecting to the Host
from the RS-422A/485 Port”.
The communication service of the
host is stopped. (Send/Receive)
Check that the host is capable of communicating with
the NT631/NT631C (confirm that the communication
settings of the host and NT631/NT631C match).
Time-out Interval is too short. (Send)
Set a longer value for “Time-out Interval” at the host
side.
Time-out Interval is too short.
(Receive)
Set a longer value for “Time-out Interval” in the
System Menu. (6-9-12 “Setting the Time-out Interval”,
page 202) It may also be possible to solve the
problem by shortening the host cycle time.
The unit # does not match that set on Re-set the unit number at the host side to “0”.
the PC.
Noise caused data corruption during
communication.
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 “Grounding”, page 40.
NAK received
——
Check the settings for allocated words and bits.
If noise is a possible factor, distance the cable from
sources of noise and insert a noise filter in the power
supply line.
If using the equipment in a location subject to a lot of
noise, use a cable with a high degree of protection
against noise for the transmission route. Also make
the cable as short as possible.
Undefined Command
Error
The host is not supported.
Check the PC model used for the host.
Instruction level 3 is not effective.
Check that the instruction level setting for the host is
“level 1, 2, 3”.
Data Over Flow Error
Communication command from the
host is too long.
(With memory link)
Set flow control method in the host.
Increase transmission interval.
Command transmission to the host is Check the comnminication cable.
not possible.
Check the control method at the PT and the host.
Increase the communication on speed when it to slow.
617
Section 11-3
Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C
11-3
Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C
Carry out maintenance work in order to ensure that the NT631/NT631C is always
used in its optimum condition.
WARNING
Do not attempt to take the unit apart and do not touch any internal parts while the power is being supplied. Doing either of
these may result in electrical shock.
Spare PT
It is advisable to have a spare NT631/NT631C available to minimize system downtime in the event of an NT631/NT631C failure or if the screen display becomes
difficult to read due to deterioration of the display unit.
Backlight (for NT631C only)
When the backlight in the display is getting dim and the screen cannot be read easily, replace the backlight. The backlight can be replaced at the rear of the
NT631/NT631C while it is mounted in an operation panel.
S Replaceable backlight model
NT631C-CFL01 (for NT631C-ST151j-EV1)
NT631C-CFL02 (for NT631C-ST141j-EV1)
S Guide to backlight replacement
Use the following as a guide to backlight replacement.
NT631C-ST141j-EV1 : Approx. 25,000 hours
NT631C-ST151j-EV1 : Approx. 30,000 hours
The life of the backlight varies, particularly in accordance with the temperature in
the environment in which it is used. It should be replaced when it becomes dim
and the screen becomes hard to read.
Notes on Replacing the Backlight
Pay attention to the following points when replacing the backlight.
S Carry out the replacement work in a location where there is no danger that dust
or foreign bodies will enter the unit, and where no water will drip onto it.
Do not touch the printed circuit boards of the NT631/NT631C with your bare
hands.
Also, discharge the static electricity from your body before starting the work.
S Do not carry the backlight unit by holding only its cable, or pull on the cable. Do
not subject the backlight to excessive force or shock.
S Do not disassemble the product to repair or modify it.
618
Section 11-3
Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C
Replacing the Backlight
Use the following procedure to replace the backlight.
WARNING
Switch OFF the NT631C power before replacing the backlight.
Otherwise you could sustain an electric shock.
Replace the backlight by following the procedure given below:
NT631C–CFL01 (for NT631C–ST151j–E)
Procedure
1
Turn the power supply to the NT631C OFF.
Be sure to do so to avoid an electric shock.
2
Disconnect the terminal block wiring, the communication cable, and the printer
cable. If a memory unit or interface unit is mounted, remove that unit also.
3
Loosen four screws at corners on the rear face of the NT631C, and remove the
rear case.
Be careful not to lose these screws.
From this step on, exert added care not to touch any electronic parts or printed
circuit boards inside the unit. Otherwise the PT may sustain static damage.
4
Disengage two backlight connectors at the top and the bottom, and pull out the
touch panel cable.
[Removing and fitting the touch panel cable]
S Removing the touch panel cable:
Pull the arrow-marked sections up to the cable side to unlock the connector,
and remove the cable.
S Fitting the touch panel cable:
While unlocking the connector, insert the touch panel cable fully. Then, lock
the connector.
Locked
Unlocked
Not locked
completely
619
Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C
620
Section 11-3
5
Loosen two mounting screws, and remove the backlight.
When loosening or tightening screws for backlights, be sure to use a magnetized Phillips screwdriver. If any screw falls inside the unit, it must be extricated without fail.
6
Fit new backlights.
The backlight for the top is different from that for the bottom.
Each backlight has three projections. Slot these projections into slits on the
unit, and tighten the screws while lightly holding the backlight by fingers.
Make sure that the cable does not come out of the backlight. If it comes out,
put it in the backlight and then tighten the screws.
The tightening torque must be 0.2 N
7
Engage backlight connectors at the top and the bottom respectively in place.
The backlight cable has a polarity; refer to the figure below.
Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C
Section 11-3
8
Fit the touch panel cable. Be sure to lock the connector as in step 4 after fitting.
9
Close the rear case, and tighten four screws. Make sure that the internal cable
is not trapped.
10 Reconnect the wiring, cables, and units disconnected in 2, and tighten the
screws at a torque of 0.4 N
Turn the power on, and check that the RUN LED is not flashing and that no
buzzer is sounding.
- If the RUN LED flashes at 1-sec intervals and a buzzer sounds intermittently, the touch panel cable is disconnected. Follow the above steps from 1,
and check the lock status of the connector.
11 Before starting normal operation, confirm that the following tests can be executed correctly by using the I/O check in the Maintenance menu. Also perform
a communication test with the host.
- Touch switch
- Backlight
12 On confirming that all the tests in 11 can be executed normally, start operation.
NT631C–CFL02 (for NT631C–ST141j–EV1)
Procedure
1
Turn the power supply to the NT631C OFF.
Be sure to do so to avoid an electric shock.
2
Disconnect the terminal block wiring, the communication cable, and the printer
cable. If a memory unit or interface unit is mounted, remove that unit also.
3
Loosen four screws at corners on the rear face of the NT631C, and remove the
rear case.
Be careful not to lose these screws.
From this step on, exert added care not to touch any electronic parts or printed
circuit boards inside the unit. Otherwise the PT may sustain static damage.
4
Disengage two backlight connectors at the top and the bottom, and pull out two
touch panel cables at the top.
621
Section 11-3
Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C
[Removing and fitting the touch panel cable]
S Removing the touch panel cable:
Pull the arrow-marked sections up to the cable side to unlock the connector,
and remove the cable.
S Fitting the touch panel cable:
While unlocking the connector, insert the touch panel cable fully. Then, lock
the connector.
Locked
Unlocked
Not locked
completely
5
Loosen mounting screws, and remove backlights.
Shift the backlight to the right, and pull it out.
When loosening or tightening screws for backlights, be sure to use a magnetized Phillips screwdriver. If any screw falls inside the unit, it must be extricated without fail.
6
Fit new backlights.
The backlight for the top is different from that for the bottom.
Fit projections and dents of the backlight with those on the fixture, and shift the
backlight to the left. Check that the backlight is in contact with the left end of
the fixture and the cable comes out from the notch without being trapped.
When the backlight is correctly fit, tighten the screws at a torque of 0.1 N
Top part
Fixture
Backlight fixture on the PT
Cable
Mounting screw
Backlight
Backlight
Bottom part
Backlight fixture on the PT
Cable
Mounting screw
Backlight
Fixture
Backlight
622
Section 11-3
Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C
7
Engage backlight connectors at the top and the bottom respectively in place.
The backlight cable has a polarity; refer to the figure below.
White
Red
Red
White
8
Fit two touch panel cables at the top. Be sure to lock the connectors as in step
4 after fitting.
9
Close the rear case, and tighten four screws. Make sure that the internal cable
is not trapped.
10 Reconnect the wiring, cables, and units disconnected in 2, and tighten the
screws at a torque of 0.4 N
Turn the power on, and check that the RUN LED is not flashing and that no
buzzer is sounding.
- If the RUN LED flashes at 1-sec intervals and a buzzer sounds intermittently, the touch panel cable is disconnected. Follow the above steps from 1,
and check the lock status of the connector.
11 Before starting normal operation, confirm that the following tests can be executed correctly by using the I/O check in the Maintenance menu. Also perform
a communication test with the host.
- Touch switch
- Backlight
12 On confirming that all the tests in 11 can be executed normally, start operation.
623
Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C
11-3-1
Section 11-3
Replacing the Battery
The NT631/NT631C uses a lithium battery to back up the memory contents.
The battery life is about 5 years if the NT631/NT631C is used in a location where
the ambient temperature is 25_C. If the temperature at the location of use is higher
than this, the battery life will be shorter. Change the battery at suitable intervals in
accordance with the operating environment of the NT631/NT631C.
It is advisable to keep a spare battery so that the battery can be replaced immediately when replacement becomes necessary.
S Battery type
3G2A9-BAT08 (for both NT631 and NT631C)
S Guide to replacement
Replace the battery in the following cases. The battery must be replaced within
5 days.
- When 5 years have passed since the installation of a new battery.
- When the RUN LED is lit in orange (during operation) or in red (when stopped).
- When the message “The voltage is lowered.” is displayed on switching on the
power or resetting the NT631/NT631C.
- When “The voltage is lowered” is displayed in the “Battery” check in the battery
check menu of the Maintenance mode.
S Battery replacement method
Replace the battery by following the procedure given below.
To protect the contents of the memory, the battery must be replaced within 5 minutes.
Procedure 1
Reference
Unless the power is kept ON for at least 5 minutes, the memory contents cannot be
retained for more than 5 minutes without a battery.
2
624
Keep the power ON for at least 5 minutes and then turn it OFF.
Insert a flat blade screwdriver at the top of the battery cover located at the left of
the rear face of the NT631/NT631C and pull it toward you.
Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C
Section 11-3
3
Remove the battery that is secured under the battery cover, grip the cable, and
pull the connector straight out.
4
Insert the connector of the new battery into the connector on the NT631/NT631C
and fit the battery under the battery cover.
When inserting the battery connector, make sure that the projection on it faces to
the left, and press it fully home while keeping it straight.
The connector of the new battery must be connected within 5 minutes after disconnecting the old battery’s connector. However, the battery can be replaced
while the NT631/NT631C power is on, and in this case there is no time restriction.
5
Close the battery cover, making sure that the cable is not trapped.
625
Section 11-4
Inspection and Cleaning
11-4
Inspection and Cleaning
Clean and inspect the NT631/NT631C regularly to ensure that it is always used in
its optimum condition.
Cleaning Method
If the display is dirty the screen is difficult to see. Clean the screen from time to
time as follows.
- In daily cleaning, wipe the display with a soft dry cloth. If the soiling is particularly heavy, attempting to remove it by wiping with a dry cloth may damage the
front sheet of the unit. In this case, wipe with a damp cloth.
- If the soiling cannot be removed with a dry cloth, wet the cloth with diluted neutral detergent (2%), wring it out well and wipe the display with it.
- If rubber or vinyl products, tape, etc., are left stuck to the display for long periods they will cause staining. If such items are stuck to the display, remove
them during cleaning.
Notice
Never use volatile solvents such as benzene or thinners, or chemical dusters.
Inspection Method
In normal environments, inspect the NT631/NT631C at intervals of between 6
months and a year. In environments that are extremely hot and humid, or very
dusty environments, shorten the inspection interval.
S Items required for the inspection
Prepare the following items before starting the inspection.
- Screwdrivers (Philips, flat head)
- Tester (or digital voltmeter)
- Industrial alcohol
- 100% cotton cloth
- Hygrometer (required in some cases)
- Thermometer (required in some cases)
- Synchroscope (required in some cases)
- Pen-writing oscilloscope (required in some cases)
626
Section 11-4
Inspection and Cleaning
S Points inspected
Inspect the following points to determine if there is any divergence from the
stated criteria. If there is, either improve the surrounding environment so that
the values fall within the stated range, or adjust the NT631/NT631C, for example
by re-tightening screws.
Point Inspected
Inspection Details
Criterion
Power supply
voltage
Fluctuation in power supply terminal
voltage
Ambient
environmental
conditions
Ambient temperature (temperature in the 0 to 50_C
operation panel)
Thermometer
Ambient humidity (humidity in the
operation panel)
35% to 85% RH
Hygrometer
Presence/absence of dust
Dust must not be settled
Visual inspection
Looseness of mounting brackets, etc.
To be no looseness
Philips screwdriver
Connector connections of connecting
cable
To be fully inserted and locked, with no
looseness
Philips screwdriver
Looseness of screws in external wiring
To be no looseness
Philips screwdriver
Mounting
conditions
Components
with limited
lives
Permissible voltage fluctuation range
(24 VDC −15% to +10%)
Inspection
Instrument
Tester
Conditions of external connecting cables Faults such as incipient disconnection
Visual inspection
Brightness of the backlight
(NT631C only)
Visual inspection
Notice
Must be sufficiently bright.
Backlight life:
(Under the normal range of ambient
temperature and humidity)
NT631C-ST141j-EV1 : Approx.
25,000 hours or longer
NT631C-ST151j-EV1 : Approx.
30,000 hours or longer
(Brightness setting is not available
for the NT631C-ST151j-V1.)
- Do not disassemble for repairs or modification.
- The disposal of the unit (including batteries to be disposed and backlight) may be
regulated by national or local authorities. Dispose of them in accordance with
the laws and regulations of the relevant country and local authority.
Reference
Desire on replacing the NT631/NT631C
When replacing the NT631/NT631C after discovering a fault during inspections,
note the following points:
- Be sure to switch the power OFF before starting replacement.
- After replacement, check that the new NT631/NT631C is not subject to the
same error.
- If a faulty unit is returned for repairs, write as detailed a description of the fault as
possible and send this description together with the unit to the OMRON address
indicated on the back cover of this book.
627
APPENDICES
APPENDIX A
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX B
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methods for Mounting and Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX D
Transporting and Storing the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX E
Making the Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soldering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX F
Making the Cable for Connecting a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly of Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX G
Making the Cable for Connection to a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX H
Making the Cable for Connection to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX I
Compatibility with Screen Data of Other PT Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Differences between the NT620S/NT620C/NT625C and the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Differences between the NT631/NT631C without “V1”
and the NT631/NT631C with “V1” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relationship between system program and hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX J
Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host Link Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CompoBus/S Master Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPUs (For Connection via a Host Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPUs (For Connection via an NT Link (1:1)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPUs (For Connection via an NT Link (1:N)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-232C Adaptor, RS-422A Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Parts and Equipment for PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX K
Option List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX L
PC Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OMRON C-Series PC, SRM1 Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OMRON CVM1/CV-Series PC Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OMRON CS1-Series PC Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX M
Keycode Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISO 8859/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS–DOS CP437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
628
628
629
637
640
643
643
643
645
646
647
648
649
650
650
651
652
653
653
654
655
656
657
661
663
664
664
664
664
664
665
666
667
667
667
668
670
673
673
674
674
675
675
676
629
APPENDIX A
Specifications
APPENDIX A
Specifications
General Specifications
Specification
Item
NT631-ST211j-EV1
Rated power supply voltage
NT631C-ST151j-EV1
24 VDC
20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC −15% to +10%)
Allowable power supply voltage range
Allowable power interruption time
No regulation
Power consumption
30 W max.
Power starting time
200 ms max.
Operating ambient temperature
0 to +50_C
18 W max.
–
0 to +40_C
0 to +50_C
−20 to +60_C
Storage ambient temperature
Operating ambient humidity
35 to 85% RH (with no condensation)
Operating environment
No corrosive gases
Noise resistance
Common mode: 1000 Vp-p (between power supply terminals and panel)
Normal mode:
300 Vp-p
Pulse width of 100 ns to 1 µs, pulse rise time of 1 ns
Vibration resistance (operating)
- 10 to 57 Hz with
- 10 to 57 Hz with 0.075 mm amplitude
0.075 mm amplitude
- 57 to 150 Hz with 1G {9.8 m/s2} acceleration
for 30 minutes in each of for 30 minutes in each of X, Y, Z directions
X, Y, Z directions
Shock resistance (operating)
147 m/s2 {15G}
3 times in each of X, Y, and Z directions
Dimensions
315 (W)
250 (H)
54 (D) mm
(With expansion unit mounted: 315 (W)
Weight
2.5 kg max.
184 +0.5
Panel cutout dimensions
0
250 (H)
+0.5
0
Enclosure ratings
Front panel: Equivalent to IP65F (NEMA4)*
Grounding
Class 3 grounding
Applicable EC
directives or standards
74 (D) mm)
Circle of panel pressure 1.6 to 4.8 mm
EC directivesd
*
NT631C-ST141j-EV1
Standards
EMC directive 89/336/EEC, 92/31/EEC
Low voltage directive 73/23/EEC
EMI
EN50081-2: 1993
EMS
EN61131-2: 1995
Electrical safety
EN61131-2: 1995
The NT631/NT631C may not be used at a location where it is exposured to splashing oil for a long period.
630
APPENDIX A
Specifications
Performance Specifications
Display Specifications
Specification
Item
Display device
NT631-ST211j-EV1
NT631C-ST141j-EV1
NT631C-ST151j-EV1
EL
(monochrome)
Color STN LCD
(with backlight)
Color TFT LCD
(with backlight)
Number of dots (resolution)
Effective display area
640 dots horizontally
211 mm horizontally
158 mm vertically
(10.4 inches)
229 mm horizontally
172 mm vertically
(11.3 inches)
Up/down:
Left:
Right:
Up:
Down:
Left:
Right:
40_
55_
55_
55_
(No restriction)
Display color
Black, white
(2 colors)
8 colors (and intermediate colors can be
displayed with tiling patterns)
30,000 hours minimum
(until brightness
reduced by 30%)
50,000 hours minimum
(until brightness reduced by half)
Life expectancy
Contrast adjustment
(Not provided)
Adjustable in 100
levels by operation at
the touch panel
(Not provided)
Life expectancy
(at high brightness)
–
25,000 hours
minimum*1
30,000 hours
minimum*1
Replacement
–
Can be replaced from the rear
Adjustable in 3 levels
(Not provided)
by at the touch panel
Can be set to turn off in 1 to 255 minutes, or to remain on
Brightness adjustment
(Not provided)
Automatic turn-off function
POWER (green LED)
Indicators
"30_
55_
45_
211 mm horizontally
158 mm vertically
(10.4 inches)
View angle
Display panel
Backlight
(white cold
cathode tube)
480 dots vertically
Lit while power is being supplied
Lit in green : Running normally, Memory unit automatic transmission done
Flash in green : Memory unit automatic transmission being executed,
memory unit automatic transmission error
Lit in orange : Low battery voltage (during operation)
Flash in red : Low battery voltage (when NT631/NT631C is stopped)
RUN
*1 Time taken for brightness to reduce to half at normal temperature and humidity
*2 Sharp brightness adjustment is not available.
Panel Specifications
Item
Specification
Type: Resistive type
Number of switches:
768 (32 horizontally
Maximum number that can be registered on one screen:256
Cell size:
NT631-ST211j-EV1
NT631-ST141j-EV1
NT631-ST151j-EV1
Input:
Pressure-sensitive type
Touch panel
5.9
6.5
5.9
24 vertically)
5.9 mm
6.5 mm
5.9 mm
Operating force: 1 N minimum
Life expectancy: One million operations minimum
631
APPENDIX A
Specifications
External Interface Specifications
Item
Serial communication
*
Specification
Serial port A
Conforms to EIA RS-232C
D-SUB 9-pin connector (female)
+5 V (250 mA max.) output at pin No. 6
Serial port B
connector*
EIA RS-232C (Serial port B terminal block selectable by memory switch
setting)
D-SUB 9-pin connector (female)
Serial port B
terminal block*
EIA RS-422A/485 (Serial port B connector selectable by memory switch
setting)
Terminal block
Parallel interface
Conforms to Centronics standard, 20-pin half pitch connector
Expansion interface
Dedicated connector
Serial port B is used for either a connector or terminal block.
Notice
Check that the current capacity of the equipment to be supplied is within 250 mA
before using the +5 V output of pin No. 6.
The +5 V output of the unit delivers +5 V " 5% and 250 mA maximum.
Programming environment
Item
Specification
Programming System
Programming support software
Programming Tool
Programming support software
NT-series Support Tool for Windows 95/98 (Ver. 3.0), made by OMRON
Personal Computer
Use a personal computer which can run Microsoft Window 95 or 98
RAM : At least 32 M bytes
Fore Area in bord disk : At least 25 M bytes (To install sample colection, more 12 MB is required)
Input device : Keyboard, mouse
632
APPENDIX A
Specifications
Display Capacity
Item
Character displays (fixed
display)
Character string displays
Up to 256 per screen (1024 for an overlapping screen) (40 bytes per string)
Numeral displays
Up to 256 per screen (1024 for an overlapping screen), max. 10-digit display
Bar graph displays
Up to 50 per screen (400 for an overlapping screen*1), percentage display and sign
display are possible
Mark displays (fixed display)
Up to 65535 per screen (52480 for an overlapping screen*1)
Analogue meter
Up to 50 per screen (400 for an overlappling screen *1), percentage display and sign
display are possible.
Trend graphs
One frame per screen (max. of 8 frames on an overlapping screen)
Without the data logging function: 50 graphs per screen data file
With the data logging function:
8 graphs per screen data file
Broken line graphs
One frame per screen (max. of 8 frames on an overlapping screen), 256 graphs per
frame, 320 points per graph
Graphic displays (fixed
display)
Can be displayed wherever required
Maximum combined total with other fixed display elements of 65535 per screen
(maximum of 524280 for an overlapping screen)
Dis
Di Lamps
Touch switches
Up to 256 per screen (1024 for an overlapping screen)
Up to 256 per screen (same restriction applies to overlapping screens)
Image data
Combined total, with library data, of 256 per screen (1024 for an overlapping screen)
Library data
Combined total, with image data, of 256 per screen (same restriction applies to
overlapping screens)
Numeral inputs
Combined total, with thumbwheel switches, of 256 per screen
(Can only be registered on one child screen of an overlapping screen)
Character string inputs
Up to 256 per screen
(Can only be registered on one child screen of an overlapping screen)
Alarm histories
Up to 4 groups per screen (32 groups for an overlapping screen)
(For alarm histories, 1 group each in occurrence order and frequency order on
normal screens/child screens)*2
Clock display
Time display of the built-in clock using the numeral display function
Normal screen
The normal screen display
Overlapping screens
A maximum of 8 registered screens can be displayed overlapped with each other.
Window screens
Up to 3 screens (2 local windows and 1 global window) can be displayed at the same
time. All objects other thumwheel type numeric input can be registered.
Display history screens
Order of occurrence (max. 1024 screens), order of frequency (max. 255 times)
Alarm lists
Sc
Specification
Fixed character data (character strings registered for each screen)
Maximum combined total with other fixed display elements of 65535 per screen
(maximum of 524280 for an overlapping screen)
Screen attributes
Buzzer, display history, background color (NT631C only), backlight, keyboard screen
number (local window 1/local window 2)
633
APPENDIX A
Specifications
Item
Specification
Max. number of registered
screens
3999 screens
Screen No.
0:
1 to 3999:
9000:
9001:
9002:
9020:
9999:
Nu
No display
User registered screens
“Initializing system” screen
Display history (occurrence order) screen
Display history (frequency order) screen
Programming console function screen
Return to the previous screen
By transmitting screen data created using the Support Tool to the NT631/NT631C
Screen registration method
By transmitting screen data stored in a memory unit to the NT631/NT631C
(automatic/manual)
Screen saving method
(screen data memory)
Flash memory (screen data memory in the PT)
*1 Limits on numbers of elements on a window is same as on a standard screen.
Therefore, when 3 windows are displayed, the maximum number is increased by 3 screens.
*2 However, when displaying image/library, the llimitation of image/library should be also followed.
Display Element Specifications
Item
Specification
Display characters
- Half-height characters (8 8 dots): Alphanumerics and symbols
- Standard characters (8 16, 16 32 dots*1): Alphanumerics and symbols
- Marks (16 16 dots):
User-defined pictographs
Enlargement function
Wide, high, 2 2, 3 3, 4 4, 8 8
High-definition font
Characters of 2 2 or larger scale*1
(except half height characters and marks)
Character display attributes
Standard, flash, inverse flash, transparent
Image data
Variable-size pictographs
Size: Min. 8 8 dots, max. 640 480 dots
The size can be set as required in 8-dot units.
Enlarged display, smoothing processing, and display attributes such as inverse and flash
cannot be set.
Library data
Combinations of any graphics
Size: Min. 1 1 dots, max. 640 480 dots
Any size can be set within this range.
Enlarged display, smoothing processing, and display attributes such as inverse and flash
are implemented according to the setting registered.
The maximum number of elements that can be registered for one library data is 64.
Graphics
Polyline, circle, arc, sector, rectangle, polygon
Line type
4 types only for polylines (solid line, broken line, alternate long and short dash, long and two
short dashes)
Tiling
10 types
Graphic display attributes
Standard, inverse, flash, inverse flash
Display colors
NT631: 2 colors (black, white)
NT631C:
8 colors (black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow, white)
Color specification
Foreground color, background color, boundary color (line color)
*1 Usable only when “ISO8859-1” font type is selected at the Support Tool.
634
APPENDIX A
Specifications
Display Restrictions
Apart from the restrictions on the maximum number that can be displayed, the following restrictions apply to individual elements.
S Restrictions on data reading
With NT631/NT631C, the maximum quantity of data that can be read simultaneously is fixed, and elements that
exceed this data quantity limit are not displayed on the screen. Note that even if the same data is read from different elements, each instance is counted separately.
The table below shows the maximum data quantities for each type of read data.
Item
Maximum data quantity
Host bit
1024
Numeral memory tables
1024
Character string memory tables
1024
Bit memory tables
1024
Memory table indirect references
100
Background memory tables
128
The data quantity restrictions for each type of element read are indicated in the table below. Ensure that the totals
for a displayed screen are within the range restrictions indicated above.
Element
Restriction on Read Data
Fixed displays (text, graphics) None
Image data
None
Library data
None
Marks
None
Touch switches
Zero to two host bit (number of host bits set with touch switch property)
Lamps
One host bit
Numeral inputs
One numeral memory table
Character string inputs
One character string memory tables
Thumbwheel switches
One numeral memory table
Numeral displays
Direct specification
One numeral memory table
Indirect specification
One numeral memory table
One memory table indirect reference
Direct specification
One character string memory table
Indirect specification
One character string memory table
One memory table indirect reference
Character string displays
Bar graphs
One numeral memory table
When numeral memory tables are designated for each of the “−100%”, “0%”, and
“100%” settings for each graph line, one numeral memory table is read for each of these
settings.
Analogue meter
One numeral memory table
When numeral memory tables are designated for each of the “−100%”,“0%”, and
“100%” settings for each graph line, one numeral memory table is read for each of these
settings.
Broken line graphs
Number of numeral memory tables determined by “number of graph lines”
“number of
vertices”
When numeral memory tables are designated for each of the “−100%”, “0%”, and
“100%” settings for each graph line, one numeral memory table is read for each of these
settings.
635
APPENDIX A
Specifications
Element
Trend graphs
Restriction on Read Data
Data logging
function not used
Number of numeral memory tables determined by the number of
graph lines
When numeral memory tables are designated for each of the
“−100%”, “0%”, and “100%” settings for each graph line, one
numeral memory table is read for each of these settings.
Data logging
function used
Number of background memory tables determined by the
number of graph lines
When numeral memory tables are designated for each of the
“−100%”, “0%”, and “100%” settings for each graph line, one
numeral memory table is read for each of these settings.
Alarm lists
Number of bit memory tables referenced.
Alarm history
None
S Restrictions due to element coefficients
The NT631/NT631C uses “element coefficients” to manage display elements. The maximum number of display
coefficients that can be used at the same time is 1024.
If the total of the element coefficients on a screen exceeds 1024, the elements after this total has been reached
are not displayed.
The element coefficients for each element are indicated in the table below. Ensure that the total for the screen to
be displayed is not greater than 1024.
Element
Element Coefficient
Fixed displays (text, graphics) 1, regardless of how many there are on the screen
Image data
Library data
Marks
Touch switches
1
Lamps
1
Numeral inputs
1 (or 2 if there is a cursor moving key touch switch) + number of dedicated touch
switches
Character string inputs
1 (or 2 if there is a cursor moving key touch switch) + number of dedicated touch
switches
Thumbwheel switches
1 + number of displayed digits
Numeral displays
1
Character string displays
1
Bar graphs
1
Analogue meter
1
Broken line graphs
1
Trend graphs
1 + number of dedicated touch switches
Alarm lists
1 + number of display lines + number of dedicated touch switches
If image/library data is displayed, the total is increased by another 64.
Alarm histories
1 + number of display lines + number of dedicated touch switches
If image/library data is displayed, the total is increased by another 64.
636
2
APPENDIX A
Specifications
Special Features
Item
Specifications
Buzzer
Three kinds of buzzer sound (continuous, short intermittent, and long intermittent)
ON:
On reception of a command from the host, display of a screen with a
buzzer setting, or display of an error screen such as for a receive error.
OFF:
On reception of a command from the host, or display of a screen with no
buzzer setting.
Setting:
Set “ON” for “Buzzer Sound” in the memory switch menu, or set “ERROR
ON” for the buzzer to sound only when an error occurs.
The buzzer sounds three times in response to prohibited input.
Touch switch input sound
Touch switches
Input sound: Sounding for 0.2 seconds
Setting:
Set “ON” for “Key Press Sound” in the memory switch menu.
Maintenance function
- Memory switch setting
- Self-test functions, such as for the memory and external interface
- Setting condition confirmation function
- Communication check function
- Initialization of internal memory data
- Display of display/alarm history data
- Registered data test display function
Battery backup
- Backup of numeral/character string memory table data in the NT631/NT631C
- Backup of display/alarm history data
- Backup of calendar and clock setting
Battery life:
5 years (at 25_C)
When voltage becomes low: RUN LED lights in orange or red
The communication flag to the PC (BAT LOW) comes
ON (1).
Resume function
Retains the contents of the numeral/character string memory tables (i.e., they are not
initialized) when the power is turned ON, when the NT631/NT631C is reset, and when
the operation mode is changed.
Setting:
Set “ON” for “Resume Function” in the memory switch menu.
Screen print function
Functions: - Prints a hard copy of the screen display
- Prints display/alarm histories
Setting:
Set the printing protocol (“Print Controller”) and printing type (“Print
Method”) in the memory switch menu.
“ESC/P”, “Color”:
Color printing conforming to ESC/P 24-J83C
“PC-PR201H”, “Color”: Color printing conforming to PC-PR201PL
“ESC/P”, “Tone”:
Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels,
conforming to ESC/P 24-J82
“PC-PR201H”, “Tone”: Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels,
conforming to PC-PR201PL
“PCL 5”, “Tone”:
Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels,
conforming to PCL 5
However, the NT631 supports monochrome printing only.
Calendar and clock function
- Displays the current time in accordance with the built-in clock
- Displayed and set with “Calendar Check” in the “MAINTENANCE MODE” menu
Programming console function
Executes functions equivalent to those of a programming console (model
C200H-PRO27-E) with C series CPM1, CPM1A, CQM1 (-EV1 only),
C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE), and SRM1 (C02-V1 only).
Executes functions as a programming console for CS1 series PLC.
637
APPENDIX A
Specifications
Item
Transmission
functions
638
Specifications
System program
transmission
Downloads the system program from the system installer
Downloads/Upload the system program with a memory unit.
Screen data
transmission
- Function for downloading screen data to and uploading screen data fromn the
Support Tool
- Function for transmitting screen data to and from the memory unit.
History data
uploading
Function for uploading display/alarm history data from PT.
APPENDIX A
Specifications
Communications Specifications
S For a Host Link (RS-232C Type)
Item
*
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Communications settings
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed:
Data length:
Stop bit:
Parity:
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A, B)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m*
Communications protocol
C-series SYSWAY (1:N)
9600, 19200 bps
7 bits
2 bits
Even
When using an NT-AL001, the specifications are as follows.
- RS-232C cable: Max. 2 m
- RS-422A cable: Total length 500 m max.
S For a Host Link (RS-422A Type)
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-422A
Communications settings
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed:
Data length:
Stop bit:
Parity:
Connector
Terminal Block (serial port B)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 500 m
Communications protocol
C-series SYSWAY (1:N)
9600, 19200 bps
7 bits
2 bits
Even
S For an NT Link (1:1, RS-232C Type)
Item
*
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A, B)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m*
When using an NT-AL001, the specifications are as follows.
- RS-232C cable: Max. 2 m
- RS-422A cable: Total length 500 m max.
639
APPENDIX A
Specifications
S For an NT Link (1:1, RS-422A Type)
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-422A
Connector
Terminal block (serial port B)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 500 m
S For an NT Link (1:N, RS-232C Type)
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A, B)
Number of units connected
1:1 to 8
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m*
*
To connect two or more PTs, NT-AL001 units are required. When using an NT-AL001, the specifications are as
follows.
- RS-232C cable:
Max. 2 m
- RS-422A/485 cable: Total length 500 m max.
S For an NT Link (1:N, RS-422A/485 Type)
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-422A/485
Connector
Terminal block
Number of units connected
1:1 to 8
Transmission distance
Max. 500 m
S For a Memory Link (RS-232C Type)
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Communications settings
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed:
Data length:
Stop bit:
Parity:
Flow control:
Response:
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A, B)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m*
Communications protocol
Memory link
*
640
When using NT-AL001, specification is as follows:
- RS-232C:
Max. 2 m
- RS-422A:
Max. total length 500 m
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400bps
7, 8 bits
1, 2 bits
None, even, odd
None, RS/CS, XON/XOFF
Presence/absence
APPENDIX A
Specifications
S For a Memory Link (RS-422A Type)
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-422A
Communications settings
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed:
Data length:
Stop bit:
Parity:
Flow control:
Response:
Connector
Terminal block
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 500 m*
Communications protocol
Memory link
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400bps
7, 8 bits
1, 2 bits
None, even, odd
None, XON/XOFF
Presence/absence
S For a Bar Code Reader
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Communications settings
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed:
Data length:
Stop bit:
Parity:
Flow control:
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m
Communications protocol
Non-protocol mode
Data format
[STX]
4,800, 9600, 19200 bps
7, 8 bits
1, 2 bits
None, even, odd
RS/CS
Data (0 to 40 bytes)
[ETX]
641
APPENDIX B
Dimensions
APPENDIX B
Dimensions
Body
302.5 (11.91)
POWER
RUN
237.5 (9.35)
250 (9.84)
7.5 (0.30)
315 (12.40)
Units: mm (inch)
54 (2.13)
With memory unit installed
(NT-MF261)
237.5 (9.35)
7.5 (0.30)
74 (2.91)
642
APPENDIX B
Dimensions
Mounting Dimensions
Mounting panel
Mounting fixture
POWER
RUN
140 (5.51)
259 (10.20)
15.5 (0.61)
7.5 (0.30)
240 (9.45)
34 (1.34) (min.)
38 (1.5) (max.)
Units: mm (inch)
324 (12.76)
643
APPENDIX B
Dimensions
Cable Connection Dimensions (with NT-MF261)
35 (1.38)
96 (3.78)
RESET
RDA
TRM
RDB
SDA
91 (3.58)
SDB
CSA
CSB
20.4
24V
+DC
(0.94)
PRINTER
PORT B
PORT A
31 (1.22)
75 (2.95)
118 (4.65)
644
Units: mm (inch)
APPENDIX C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
APPENDIX C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
This section outlines the external dimensions, procedure for mounting and removal, and specifications of an
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001). Refer to this information when designing the control panel. For
details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the NT-AL001.
Dimensions
53.5
(2.11)
110 (4.33)
om Ron
4 (0.16)
74.5 (2.93)
100.2 (3.94)
105 (4.13) max.
NT–AL001
(30)
(1.18)
45 (1.77)
30 (1.18)
Units: mm (inch)
30 (W)
114 (H)
100.2 (D) mm:
with the RS-422A terminal block cover closed
30 (W)
114 (H)
119.5 (D) mm:
with the RS-422A terminal block cover open
Methods for Mounting and Removal
The RS-232/RS-422 convertor unit (NT-AL001) can be mounted on a DIN rail or in an operation panel.
The RS-422A terminal block of the convertor unit can be easily removed.
645
APPENDIX C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
Mounting to a DIN Rail
Latch the top part of the rear face of the convertor unit (“a” in the figure) onto the top edge of the DIN rail, and push
the unit in the direction indicated by “b” in the figure.
Now fit end plates at the right and left of the convertor unit to secure it and ensure that it cannot shift laterally.
(a)
(b)
Removal from a DIN Rail
Remove the end plates at right and left of the convertor unit and, as shown in the figure below, insert a flat blade
screwdriver into the rail stopper at the bottom face of the convertor unit and prize it free.
Mounting to an Operation Panel
Drill two mounting screw holes in an operation panel with a thickness of at least 2 mm (0.08 inch) and secure the
convertor unit with screws.
30
(1.18)
100
(3.94)
110
(4.33)
21
(0.83)
Notice
646
2-M4
Units: mm (inch)
In order to ensure a secure and strong mount, mount the convertor unit in an operation panel with a thickness of at least 2 mm (0.08 inch).
APPENDIX C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
Specifications
The general specifications and communications specifications of the convertor unit are shown below.
General Specifications
Item
Specification
Dimensions
30 (W)
30 (W)
114 (H)
114 (H)
100.2 (D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover closed
119.5 (D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover open
Weight
200 g max.
Operating ambient temperature
0 to 55_C
Operating ambient humidity
10 to 90% RH (with no condensation)
Rated power supply voltage
+5 V " 10% (using pin No. 6 of the RS-232C connector)
Rated power supply current
150 mA max.
Rush current
0.8 A max.
Insulation resistance
20 MΩ or higher, measured between all RS-422A terminal signal lines collectively and
functional ground terminal with a 500 VDC megger
Dielectric strength
1500 VAC for 1 minute between all RS-422A terminal signal lines collectively and
functional ground terminal
Leakage current: 10 mA max.
Operating environment
No corrosive gases
Storage ambient temperature
−20 to +75_C
Vibration resistance
Conforms to JIS C0911 60 minutes in each of X, Y, and Z directions
Shock resistance
Conforms to JIS C0912 47m/s2, 3 times in each of X, Y, and Z directions
Communications Specifications
S RS-232C Interface
Item
Specification
Communications speed
Max. 64k bps
Transmission distance
Max. 2 m
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female)
S RS-422A/485 Interface
Item
Specification
Communications speed
Max. 64k bps (depends on the RS-232C communications speed)
Transmission distance
Max. 500 m
Connector
8-terminal detachable terminal block, M3.0
647
APPENDIX C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
DIP Switch Settings
The convertor unit has 6 digits DIP switch for setting the RS-422A/485 communication conditions.
Before connecting the cable to the convertor unit, make the DIP switch settings.
(Factory settings)
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
omR on
NT–AL001
[SW1-1] Not used (always ON)
[SW1-2] Setting for built-in terminal resistance
- OFF Terminator not set
- ON Terminator set
[SW1-3, 4] Selection of 2-wire type/4-wire type
SW1-3
SW1-4
OFF
2-wire type (RS-485)
ON
SW1-3
SW1-4
OFF
4-wire type (RS-422A)
ON
[SW1-5, 6] Selection of the RS-422A send mode
SW1-5
SW1-6
OFF
Continual sending
ON
SW1-5
OFF
ON
SW1-6
SW1-5
OFF
ON
SW1-6
Complies with CS control of RS-232C
(Data sent at CS “H”)
Complies with CS control of RS-232C
(Data sent at CS “L”)
When using the host link or NT link (1:1), set the RS-422A send mode to “continual sending” (set both SW1-5 and 6
“OFF”).
When using the NT link (1:N), set the RS-422A send mode to “complies with CS control of RS-232C” (i.e., one of
SW1-5 and SW1-6 must be ON).
648
APPENDIX C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
S Do not set both SW1-5 and SW1-6 ON at the same time. This may damage internal circuits.
Notice
S The power supply to the device supplying +5 V must be turned OFF before starting wiring work.
S Before connecting the RS-232C cable and turning on the power to an RS-232C
device such as a PT (i.e., turning on the power to the convertor unit), check that
the cable is wired correctly and that the DIP switch settings are correct. If the
power is turned on while there is a wiring fault, the internal circuits of the convertor unit or the RS-232C device may be damaged.
S When the convertor unit is connected to a C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE) model of OMRON PC as an RS-422A device, set DIP switches SW1-5 and SW1-6 as indicated below.
SW1-5
OFF
SW1-6
ON
5 6
Pin Arrangement
The convertor unit has a terminal block for an RS-422A/485 interface connection and a connector for an RS-232C
interface connection.
The pin arrangements for the RS-422A/485 terminal block and the RS-232C connector are as follows.
RS-422A/485 Terminal Block
Terminal
block pin No.
7
5
3
1
Signal name
Abbreviation
Signal direction
(convertor unit ⇔ RS-422 device)
CSA
→
8
8
Request to send (−)
6
7
Request to send (+)
CSB
→
4
6
Receive data (−)
RDA
←
2
5
Receive data (+)
RDB
←
4
Send data (−)
SDA
→
3
Send data (+)
SDB
→
2
Signal ground
SG (GND)
–
1
Functional ground
*
–
The CSB and CSA signals are for specialized applications.
649
APPENDIX C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
RS-232C Connector
Connector
pin No.
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
*
Signal name
Signal direction
(convertor unit ⇔ RS-232C device)
Abbreviation
1
Not used
–
–
2
Send data
SD
←
3
Receive data
RD
→
4
Request to send
(shorted to CS internally)
RS
←
5
Clear to send
(shorted to RS internally)
CS
→
6
+5 V (150 mA) input for convertor unit
+5 V
→
7
Data set ready
(shorted to ER internally)
DR
→
8
Data terminal ready
(shorted to DR internally)
ER
←
9
Signal ground
SG
–
The hood is connected to the functional ground terminal of the RS-422A terminal block.
Block Diagram
A diagram showing the internal blocks of the convertor unit is shown below. Refer to this diagram when making
cables yourself, or when connecting devices with special interfaces.
RS-232C side
D-SUB 9P CASE
+5 V
SG
6 Fuse
R
POWER
LED
DC-DC Convertor
L
9
Photocoupler
RS-232C
Dr/Rec
RD
SD
RS
4
CS
5
DR
7
ER
650
3
2
8
RS-422A/485 side
8P terminal block
RS-422A/485 Dr/Rec
R
R
L
REG
IS_5 V
1
IS_0 V
2
SG
3
4
SDB
SDA
R
2-wire type/
4-wire type
SW1-6
SW1-3
R
FG
SW1-4
SW1-5
Terminator
R
5
RDB
6
RDA
7
8
CSB
CSA
SW1-2
RS–422A Dr
Transporting and Storing the NT631/NT631C
APPENDIX D
APPENDIX D
Transporting and Storing the NT631/NT631C
S When transporting the NT631/NT631C, use the packaging intended for it.
S When storing the NT631/NT631C, observe the following conditions.
Storage ambient temperature: −20 to +60_C
Storage ambient humidity:
35 to 85% RH
651
APPENDIX E
Making the Cable
APPENDIX E
Making the Cable
The procedure for making up the cable is described below.
Also refer to this procedure for making a connecting cable for use with RS-422A/485 type connections.
Cable Preparation
The preparation of the cable differs according to whether or not the shielding wire is to be connected to the FG.
S Cable with shielding wire connected to FG
(1) Cut the cable to the required length.
(2) Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade. Take care not to damage the shielding
underneath.
(3) Cut back the shielding wire with scissors.
(4) Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire.
(5) Fold back the shielding wire.
(6) Wrap aluminum foil tape around the folded-back shielding wire.
(1)
(2)
40 (1.57) (RS–232C)
25 (0.98) (RS–422A)
(3)
10
(0.39)
(4)
5
(0.19)
(5)
(6)
Units: mm (inch)
652
Aluminum foil tape
APPENDIX E
Making the Cable
S Cable with shielding wire not connected to FG
(1) Cut the cable to the required length.
(2) Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade. Take care not to damage the shielding
underneath.
(3) Cut back the shielding wire with scissors.
(4) Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire.
(5) Wrap vinyl tape over the cut off end of the shielding wire.
(1)
(2)
40 (1.57) (RS–232C)
25 (0.98) (RS–422A)
(3)
(4)
5
(0.19)
(5)
Units: mm (inch)
Vinyl tape
Soldering
(1) Slide heat-shrink tube over each wire.
(2) Pre-solder each wire and connector terminal.
(3) Solder each wire to each connector terminal.
1 mm
Soldering iron
Heat-shrink tube
(F, 1.5 mm dia., ȏ = 10 mm)
(4) Push the heat shrink tube over the soldered joint and heat the tube to shrink it in place.
Heat-shrink tube
653
APPENDIX E
Making the Cable
Hood Assembly
Assemble the connector hood as shown below.
Aluminum foil tape
End connected to FG
654
End not connected to FG
APPENDIX F
Making the Cable for Connecting a PC
APPENDIX F
Making the Cable for Connecting a PC
Refer to the following when making a cable for connecting the Support Tool.
Assembly of Connecting Cables
Wiring should be carried out in one of the following ways, depending on the type of RS-232C connector.
S 25-pin connector
Personal computer
SD
2
2
SD
RD
3
3
RD
RS
4
4
RS
CS
5
5
CS
SG
7
9
SG
FG
1
6
+5 V
Shielding wire
Connector hood
Connector for peripheral devices on PT
Connector hood
Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable.
Name
Model
Connector
Connector hood
Cable
Remarks
XM2D-2501
25-pin, made by OMRON, for personal computer sid
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement